Panasonic PT-MZ14KLWU Projector User Manual

Add to my manuals
279 Pages

advertisement

Panasonic PT-MZ14KLWU Projector User Manual | Manualzz
Operating Instructions
Functional Manual
LCD Projector   Commercial Use
Model No.
PT-MZ20K
PT-MZ17K
PT-MZ14K
PT-MZ11K
The projection lens is sold separately.
Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.
■■ This manual is common to all the models regardless of suffixes of the Model No.
zzfor USA, Canada, Korea
LB: Black model
LW: White model
zzfor India
LBD: Black model
zzfor Taiwan
LB: Black model
zzfor other countries or regions with power cord for 100 V - 120 V
LBX: Black model
zzfor other countries or regions with power cord for 200 V - 240 V
LBEJ/LBE: Black model
LWEJ/LWE: White model
■■ Before operating this product, please read the instructions carefully and save this manual
for future use.
■■ Before using this product, be sure to read “Read this first!” (x pages 5 to 16).
ENGLISH
DPQP1432ZA/X1
Contents
Contents
Read this first! 5
Chapter 3
Basic Operations
Switching on/off the projector 54
Connecting the power cord 54
Power indicator 55
Precautions for use 20
Switching on the projector 56
Intended use of the product 20
When the initial setting screen is displayed 57
Installation and handling of the laser product
When
the
administrator
account
setting
screen
(for USA and Canada) 20
is displayed 63
Cautions when transporting 20
Making adjustments and selections 65
Cautions when installing 20
Switching off the projector 66
Cautions when setting up the projector 22
Projecting 67
Security 23
Selecting
the
input
signal
67
Notes regarding the wireless LAN 23
Adjusting the focus, zoom, and lens shift 68
DIGITAL LINK 24
Adjusting the focus balance 69
Art-Net 24
Executing
the
lens
calibration
70
Application software supported by the projector
Moving the projection lens to the home position
24
71
Storing 25
Lens
shift
range
72
Disposal 25
Using the USB memory 73
Cautions on use 25
Notes on use 73
Accessories 27
USB
memory
that
can
be
used
with
the
Optional accessories 28
projector 73
About your projector 29
Attaching the USB memory 73
Remote control 29
Removing the USB memory 73
Projector body 31
Operating with the remote control 74
Preparing the remote control 34
Using the shutter function 74
Inserting and removing the batteries 34
Using the on-screen display function 74
When using the multiple projectors 34
Using the function button 75
Connecting the remote control to the projector
Displaying
test
patterns
75
with a cable 34
Using the status function 76
Using
the
HDMI-CEC
function
76
Chapter 2
Getting Started
Setting ID number of the remote control 76
Setting up 36
Usable outlet 36
Chapter 4
Settings
Installation mode 36
Menu navigation 79
Parts for installation (optional) 38
Navigating through the menu 79
Projected image and throw distance 38
Main
menu
80
Adjusting adjustable feet 44
Sub-menu 81
Attaching/removing the projection lens 45
Attaching the projection lens 45
Removing the projection lens 47
Connecting 48
Before connecting 48
Connecting example: AV equipment 48
Connecting example: Computers 49
Connecting example using DIGITAL LINK 50
Connecting example when using the
contrast synchronization function/shutter
synchronization function 51
Chapter 1
Preparation
2 - ENGLISH
Contents
[PICTURE] menu [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu 84
125
[PICTURE MODE] [PROJECTOR ID] 84
125
[CONTRAST] [PROJECTION METHOD] 85
125
[BRIGHTNESS] [LENS] 85
126
[COLOR] [OPERATION SETTING] 86
130
[TINT] [LIGHT OUTPUT] 86
133
[COLOR TEMPERATURE] [STANDBY MODE] 86
133
[GAMMA] [QUICK STARTUP] 87
134
[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] [POWER MANAGEMENT] 88
134
[SHARPNESS] [NO SIGNAL SETTING] 88
135
[NOISE REDUCTION] [INITIAL STARTUP] 88
138
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] [STARTUP INPUT SELECT] 88
138
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST] [DATE AND TIME] 90
138
[SYSTEM SELECTOR] [SCHEDULE] 92
139
[DEFAULT PICTURE MODE] [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] 92
141
[RS-232C] 143
[POSITION] menu 94
[REMOTE1 MODE] 145
[SHIFT] 94
[FUNCTION BUTTON] 145
[ASPECT] 94
[FILTER COUNTER] 146
[ZOOM] 95
[STATUS]
146
[GEOMETRY] 96
[INFO MONITOR SETTING] 148
[ADVANCED MENU] menu 102
[DATA CLONING] 150
[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY] 102
[SAVE ALL USER DATA] 150
[BLANKING] 102
[LOAD ALL USER DATA] 150
[EDGE BLENDING] 103
[HDMI
CEC]
151
[FRAME RESPONSE] 107
[INITIALIZE] 153
[RASTER POSITION] 107
[FIRMWARE UPDATE] 154
[DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu 108
[SAVE
LOG]
154
Changing the display language 108
[SERVICE PASSWORD] 154
[DISPLAY OPTION] menu 109
[TEST
PATTERN]
menu
155
[COLOR ADJUSTMENT] 109
[TEST PATTERN] 155
[COLOR CORRECTION] 110
[SIGNAL LIST] menu 158
[SCREEN SETTING] 110
Registering
new
signals
158
[BACKUP INPUT SETTING] 111
Renaming the registered signal 158
[HDMI IN] 112
Deleting
the
registered
signal
158
[SDI IN] 114
Protecting the registered signal 159
[DIGITAL LINK IN] 115
Expanding signal lock-in range 159
[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] 116
Sub memory 160
[MENU MODE] 118
[SECURITY] menu 161
[IMAGE ROTATION] 119
[SECURITY PASSWORD] 161
[BACK COLOR] 119
[SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE] 161
[STARTUP LOGO] 119
[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] 161
[UNIFORMITY] 120
[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE]
[SHUTTER SETTING] 121
163
[FREEZE] 123
[WAVEFORM MONITOR] 123
[CUT OFF] 124
ENGLISH - 3
Contents
[NETWORK] menu 164
Chapter 6
Maintenance
[ETHERNET TYPE] 164
Light source/temperature/filter indicators 239
[DIGITAL LINK] 164
When
an
indicator
lights
up
239
[WIRED LAN] 166
Maintenance/replacement 241
[WIRELESS LAN] 167
Before performing maintenance/replacement 241
[PROJECTOR NAME] 168
Maintenance
241
[NETWORK STATUS] 168
Replacing the unit 244
[NFC SETTING] 169
Troubleshooting
245
[ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] 169
[SELF TEST] indications 247
[NETWORK SECURITY] 172
[NETWORK CONTROL] 172
Chapter 7
Appendix
[PJLink] 173
[Art-Net] 174
Technical information 250
Using PJLink function 250
Using Art-Net function 251
Control commands via LAN 256
Network connection 178
<SERIAL/MULTI SYNC IN>/<SERIAL/MULTI
Connecting via wired LAN 178
SYNC OUT> terminals 259
Connecting with wireless LAN 180
<REMOTE 1 IN> terminal 263
Web control function 183
Specifications 264
Computer that can be used for setting 183
Dimensions
267
Accessing from the web browser 183
List of compatible signals 268
[Status] 186
Precautions for attaching the Ceiling Mount
[Projector control] 191
Bracket 273
[Detailed set up] 195
Index 275
[Set up password] 210
License download page 212
Using the information monitor function 213
Screen mode 213
Top menu 213
Sub-menu 213
Basic operation procedure in the menu
operation mode 214
[USER VIEW] menu 214
[SETUP] menu 215
[STATUS] menu 221
Error notification mode 224
Using the data cloning function 225
Copying the data to another projector via LAN
225
Copying the data to another projector using
USB 227
Using HDMI-CEC function 229
Connecting a CEC-compatible device 229
Setting the projector and CEC-compatible
device 229
Operating the CEC-compatible device with the
projector remote control 229
About the link control 230
Updating the firmware 231
Updating the firmware via LAN 231
Updating the firmware using the USB memory
236
Chapter 5
Operations
4 - ENGLISH
Read this first!
Read this first!
WARNING:THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED.
WARNING:
o prevent damage which may result in fire or shock hazard, do not expose this appliance to rain
T
or moisture.
This device is not intended for use in the direct field of view at visual display workplaces. To avoid
incommoding reflexions at visual display workplaces this device must not be placed in the direct
field of view.
The equipment is not intended for used at a video workstation in compliance BildscharbV.
The sound pressure level at the operator position is equal or less than 70 dB (A) according to ISO 7779.
WARNING:
1. Remove the plug from the mains socket when this unit is not in use for a prolonged period of time.
2. To prevent electric shock, do not remove cover. No user serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified
service personnel.
3. Do not remove the earthing pin on the mains plug. This apparatus is equipped with a three prong earthingtype mains plug. This plug will only fit an earthing-type mains socket. This is a safety feature. If you are
unable to insert the plug into the mains socket, contact an electrician. Do not defeat the purpose of the
earthing plug.
WARNING:
This equipment is compliant with Class A of CISPR32.
In a residential environment this equipment may cause radio interference.
(for Taiwan)
WARNING:
This equipment complies with the Class A standard of CNS15936.
This is Class A information technology equipment that may cause radio frequency interference when used in a
residential environment, in which the user will be required to take certain appropriate countermeasures.
CAUTION:
To assure continued compliance, follow the attached installation instructions. This includes using
the provided power cord and shielded interface cables when connecting to computer or peripheral
devices. Also, any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment could void the user’s
authority to operate this device.
This is a device to project images onto a screen, etc., and is not intended for use as indoor lighting in a
domestic environment.
Directive 2009/125/EC
WARNING:
O REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT
T
TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
ENGLISH - 5
Read this first!
WARNING:
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DON’T OPEN
Indicated on the projector
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the
user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may
be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of
important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the
product.
WARNING: Do not look at the light emitted from the lens while the projector is being used.
As with any bright source, do not stare into the direct beam, RG2 IEC 62471-5:2015.
Indicated on the projector
(for USA and Canada)
WARNING:
OUNT ABOVE THE HEADS OF CHILDREN.
M
The use of a ceiling mount is recommended with this projector to place it above the eyes of
children.
Laser Notice No.57
Notice on laser
(except for Taiwan, India)
This projector is the Class 1 laser product that complies with IEC/EN 60825-1:2014.
(Under the top slide cover)
6 - ENGLISH
Read this first!
(for Taiwan)
This projector is the Class 1 laser product that complies with IEC/EN 60825-1:2014.
(Under the top slide cover)
第 1 類雷射產品
(for India)
This projector is the Class 1 laser product that complies with IEC/EN 60825-1:2014.
(Under the top slide cover)
CAUTION:
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein
may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
CAUTION (North/Middle/South America)
Power Supply:
CAUTION:
This Projector is designed to operate on 100 V - 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz AC, house current only.
The AC power cord which is supplied with the projector as an accessory can only be used for
power supplies up to 125 V. If you need to use higher voltages than this, you will need to obtain a
separate 250 V power cord. If you use the accessory cord in such situations, fire may result.
CAUTION (North/Middle/South America/Taiwan)
This equipment is equipped with a three-pin grounding-type power plug. Do not
remove the grounding pin on the power plug. This plug will only fit a grounding-type
power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the
outlet, contact an electrician. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding plug.
Do not remove
WARNING (USA and Canada)
ff Not for use in a computer room as defined in the Standard for the Protection of Electronic Computer/Data
Processing Equipment, ANSI/NFPA 75.
ff For permanently connected equipment, a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated in the
building installation wiring.
ff For pluggable equipment, the socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.
ENGLISH - 7
Read this first!
NOTIFICATION (Canada)
This class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
For USA-California Only
This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material – special handling
may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
FCC NOTICE (USA)
Supplier’s Declaration of Conformity
Model Number:
PT-MZ20KLB / PT-MZ20KLW / PT-MZ17KLB / PT-MZ17KLW /
PT-MZ14KLB / PT-MZ14KLW / PT-MZ11KLB / PT-MZ11KLW
Trade Name:
Panasonic
Responsible Party: Panasonic Corporation of North America
Address:
Two Riverfront Plaza, Newark, NJ 07102-5490
General Contact:
http://www.panasonic.com/support
Projector Contact: https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Caution:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
FCC Warning:
To assure continued compliance, follow the attached installation instructions. This includes using the provided
power cord and shielded interface cables when connecting to computer or peripheral devices. Also, any
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment could void the user’s authority to operate this device.
For Australia Only
WARNING:
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A COIN BATTERY
Keep coin battery out of the reach of infants and small children whether the battery is new or used.
Severe or fatal injuries can occur within 2 hours of ingestion. Seek medical attention immediately.
EU Declaration of Conformity (DoC) for RE Directive
This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive
2014/53/EU.
Customers can download a copy of the original DoC for this product from our DoC server:
https://www.ptc.panasonic.eu/
Contact in the EU:Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH, Panasonic Testing Centre, Winsbergring 15, 22525
Hamburg, Germany
8 - ENGLISH
Read this first!
IMPORTANT: THE MOLDED PLUG
FOR YOUR SAFETY, PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY.
This appliance is supplied with a molded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 13 amp fuse
is fitted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating
of 13 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark
or the BSI mark
on the body of the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you
lose the fuse cover, the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover
can be purchased from an Authorized Service Center.
If the fitted molded plug is unsuitable for the mains socket in your home, then the fuse should be
removed and the plug cut off and disposed of safely. There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the
cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket.
If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below.
If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician.
WARNING:
THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED.
IMPORTANT:
The wires in this mains lead are colored in accordance with the following code:
Green - and - Yellow: Earth
Blue: Neutral
Brown: Live
As the colors of the wire in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the colored markings
identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows.
The wire which is colored GREEN - AND - YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug
which is marked with the letter E or by the Earth symbol
or colored GREEN or GREEN - AND YELLOW.
The wire which is colored BLUE must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked
with the letter N or colored BLACK.
The wire which is colored BROWN must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked
with the letter L or colored RED.
How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.
ENGLISH - 9
Read this first!
rrHazard distance (IEC/EN 62471-5:2015)
The distance from the projection lens surface, at which the emission reaches the Accessible Emission Limit (AEL)
of risk group 2, is known as the hazard distance (HD) or safety distance. The area where the emission exceeds
the Accessible Emission Limit of risk group 2 is called the hazard zone (HZ).
Within the hazard zone, never look into the light projected from the projector. The eyes may be damaged by direct
irradiation even if you look at the light just for a moment. If you are outside the hazard zone, it is considered to be
safe in all circumstances except deliberately staring into the light projected from the projector.
HD
D1
D2
HD
D3
HZ
HZ
D4
rrRisk group
The combination of the projector and the projection lens is categorized as risk group 2 when the hazard distance
is 1 m (39-3/8") or less. It is categorized as risk group 3 when the hazard distance exceeds 1 m (39-3/8"), and it
will be for professional use instead of consumer use.
In case of risk group 3, there is a possibility of damaging the eyes by direct irradiation when looking into the
projection light from inside the hazard zone even for a moment.
In the case of risk group 2, safe use without damaging the eyes is possible in all circumstances except deliberately
staring into the light projected from the projector.
The combination of the projector and the projection lens which the hazard distance exceeds 1 m (39-3/8") and is
categorized as risk group 3 is as follows.
Projection lens Model No.
Risk group
*1
Model No.
PT-MZ20K
ET-EMT750, ET-EMT850
Risk group 3
PT-MZ17K*2
ET-EMT750, ET-EMT700
ET-EMT850, ET-EMT800
Risk group 3
PT-MZ14K*3
PT-MZ11K*3
ET-EMT850, ET-EMT800
Risk group 3
*1 When PT-MZ20K is used with the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-EMT750, ET-EMT850) attatched, the hazard distance exceeds 1 m
(39-3/8"), and regardless of the use condition, the throw ratio is larger than 2.0:1. In this case, it is catagorized as the risk group 3.
*2 When PT-MZ17K is used with the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-EMT750, ET-EMT850, ET-EMT700, ET-EMT800) attatched, the
hazard distance exceeds 1 m (39-3/8"), and regardless of the use condition, the throw ratio is larger than 2.0:1. In this case, it is
catagorized as the risk group 3.
*3 When PT-MZ14K / PT-MZ11K are used with the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-EMT850, ET-EMT800) attatched, the hazard distance
exceeds 1 m (39-3/8"), and regardless of the use condition, the throw ratio is larger than 4.0:1. In this case, it is catagorized as the
risk group 3.
10 - ENGLISH
Read this first!
PT-MZ20K, PT-MZ17K
PT-MZ14K, PT-MZ11K
Indicated on the projector
Each dimension inside the hazard zone for combination with projection lens which the hazard distance exceeds
1 m (39-3/8") is as follows.
(Unit: m)
Model No.
Projection lens
Model No.
HD*1
D1*2
D2*2
D3*2
D4*2
ET-EMT750
1.7
0.21
0.21
0.25
0.25
ET-EMT850
2.7
0.18
0.18
0.22
0.22
ET-EMT750,
ET-EMT700
1.0
0.12
0.12
0.14
0.14
ET-EMT850,
ET-EMT800
2.4
0.16
0.16
0.19
0.19
PT-MZ14K
ET-EMT850,
ET-EMT800
2.1
0.14
0.14
0.17
0.17
PT-MZ11K
ET-EMT850,
ET-EMT800
1.6
0.11
0.11
0.13
0.13
PT-MZ20K
PT-MZ17K
*1 HD: Hazard Distance
*2 The values of D1 to D4 will change in accordance with the lens shift amount. Each value in the table is the maximum value.
Note
ff The value in the table is based on IEC/EN 62471-5:2015.
ff Projection lens compatible with the projector may be added or changed without prior notice.
For the latest information, visit the following website.
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/
Attention
ff If the light projected from the projector directly enters the eyes while you are inside the hazard zone, the retinas may be damaged. Do not
enter within the hazard zone during use. Alternatively, install the projector in a location where the projected light will not directly enter the
eyes.
ENGLISH - 11
Read this first!
WARNING:
rr POWER
The wall outlet or the circuit breaker shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible
when problems occur. If the following problems occur, cut off the power supply immediately.
Continued use of the projector in these conditions will result in fire or electric shock, or will cause visual
impairment.
ff If foreign objects or water get inside the projector, cut off the power supply.
ff If the projector is dropped or the cabinet is broken, cut off the power supply.
ff If you notice smoke, strange smells or noise coming from the projector, cut off the power supply.
Please contact an Authorized Service Center for repairs, and do not attempt to repair the projector yourself.
During a thunderstorm, do not touch the projector or the cable.
Electric shocks can result.
Do not do anything that might damage the power cord or the power plug.
If the power cord is used while damaged, electric shocks, short-circuits or fire will result.
ff Do not damage the power cord, make any modifications to it, place it near any hot objects, bend it
excessively, twist it, pull it, place heavy objects on top of it or wrap it into a bundle.
Ask an Authorized Service Center to carry out any repairs to the power cord that might be necessary.
Do not use anything other than the provided power cord.
Failure to observe this will result in electric shocks or fire. Please note that if you do not use the provided power
cord to ground the device on the side of the outlet, this may result in electric shocks.
Completely insert the power plug into the wall outlet and the power connector into the projector terminal.
If the plug is not inserted correctly, electric shocks or overheating will result.
ff Do not use plugs which are damaged or wall outlets which are coming loose from the wall.
Do not handle the power plug and power connector with wet hands.
Failure to observe this will result in electric shocks.
Use an outlet supporting 15 A independently.
Using an outlet together with another device may result in fires due to heat generation.
Do not overload the wall outlet.
If the power supply is overloaded (ex., by using too many adapters), overheating may occur and fire will result.
Clean the power plug regularly to prevent it from becoming covered in dust.
Failure to observe this will cause a fire.
ff If dust builds up on the power plug, the resulting humidity can damage the insulation.
ff If not using the projector for an extended period of time, pull the power plug out from the wall outlet.
Pull the power plug out from the wall outlet and wipe it with a dry cloth regularly.
rr ON USE/INSTALLATION
Do not place the projector on soft materials such as carpets or sponge mats.
Doing so will cause the projector to overheat, which can cause burns, fire or damage to the projector.
Do not set up the projector in humid or dusty places or in places where the projector may come into
contact with oily smoke or steam.
Using the projector under such conditions will result in fire, electric shocks or deterioration of components. Oil
may also distort the plastic and the projector could fall such as when mounted on the ceiling.
Do not install this projector in a place which is not strong enough to take the full weight of the projector
or on top of a surface which is sloped or unstable.
Failure to observe this will cause projector to fall down or tip over the projector, and severe injury or damage
could result.
Do not install the projector in a location where people pass through.
People may bump into the projector or trip on the power cord, which may result in fire, electric shock, or injury.
Install the projector in a location sufficiently away from surrounding walls and objects so that air
ventilation is not obstructed.
Failure to observe this will cause the projector to overheat, which can cause fire or damage to the projector.
ff Do not place the projector in narrow, badly ventilated places.
For details, refer to “Cautions when setting up the projector” (x page 22).
ff Do not place the projector on cloth or papers, as these materials could be drawn into the intake vent.
12 - ENGLISH
Read this first!
WARNING:
Do not look at or place your skin into the light emitted from the lens while the projector is being used.
Do not enter the projection luminous flux using an optical device (such as magnifier or mirror).
Doing so can cause burns or loss of sight.
ff Strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens. Do not look at or place your hands directly into this light.
ff Be especially careful not to let young children look into the lens. In addition, turn off the power and switch
off the main power when you are away from the projector.
Do not project an image with the lens cover of the projection lens (optional) attached.
Doing so can cause fire.
Never attempt to remodel or disassemble the projector.
High voltages can cause fire or electric shocks.
ff For any inspection, adjustment and repair work, please contact an Authorized Service Center.
Do not allow metal objects, flammable objects, or liquids to enter inside of the projector. Do not allow
the projector to get wet.
Doing so may cause short circuits or overheating, and result in fire, electric shock, or malfunction of the
projector.
ff Do not place containers of liquid or metal objects near the projector.
ff If liquid enters inside of the projector, consult your dealer.
ff Particular attention must be paid to children.
Use the ceiling mount bracket specified by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
Using the ceiling mount bracket other than the specified one will result in falling accidents.
ff Attach the supplied safety cable to the ceiling mount bracket to prevent the projector from falling down.
Installation work such as mounting the projector on the ceiling should only be carried out by a qualified
technician.
If installation is not carried out and secured correctly, it can cause injury or accidents, such as electric shocks.
rr ACCESSORIES
Do not use or handle the batteries improperly, and refer to the following.
Failure to observe this will cause burns, batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire.
ff Do not use unspecified batteries.
ff Do not charge dry cell batteries.
ff Do not disassemble dry cell batteries.
ff Do not heat the batteries or place them into water or fire.
ff Do not allow the + and – terminals of the batteries to come into contact with metallic objects such as
necklaces or hairpins.
ff Do not store or carry batteries together with metallic objects.
ff Store the batteries in a plastic bag and keep them away from metallic objects.
ff Make sure the polarities (+ and –) are correct when inserting the batteries.
ff Do not use a new battery together with an old battery or mix different types of batteries.
ff Do not use batteries with the outer cover peeling away or removed.
If the battery fluid leaks, do not touch it with bare hands, and take the following measures if necessary.
ff Battery fluid on your skin or clothing could result in skin inflammation or injury.
Rinse with clean water and seek medical advice immediately.
f
f Battery fluid coming in contact with your eyes could result in loss of sight.
In this case, do not rub your eyes. Rinse with clean water and seek medical advice immediately.
Do not allow children to reach the batteries and the lens fixing screw.
Accidentally swallowing them can cause physical harm.
ff If swallowed, seek medical advice immediately.
Remove the depleted batteries from the remote control promptly.
ff Leaving them in the unit may result in fluid leakage, overheating, or explosion of the batteries.
ENGLISH - 13
Read this first!
CAUTION:
rr POWER
When disconnecting the power cord, be sure to hold the power plug and power connector.
If the power cord itself is pulled, the lead will become damaged, and fire, short-circuits or serious electric shocks
will result.
When not using the projector for an extended period of time, disconnect the power plug from the wall
outlet.
Failure to do so may result in fire or electric shock.
Before replacing the projection lens, be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug from
the wall outlet.
ff Unexpected projection of light may cause injury to eyes.
ff Replacing the projection lens without removing the power plug may result in electric shock.
Disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet before carrying out any cleaning and replacing the unit.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock.
rr ON USE/INSTALLATION
Do not place heavy objects on top of the projector.
Failure to observe this will cause the projector to become unbalanced and fall, which could result in damage or
injury. The projector will be damaged or deformed.
Do not put your weight on this projector.
You could fall or the projector could break, and injury will result.
ff Be especially careful not to let young children stand or sit on the projector.
Do not place the projector in extremely hot locations.
Doing so will cause the outer casing or internal components to deteriorate, or result in fire.
ff Take particular care in locations exposed to direct sunlight or near heaters.
Do not place your hands in the openings beside the optical lens, while shifting the lens.
Failure to observe this could cause injury.
Do not install the projector in a location where salt pollution or corrosive gas may occur.
Doing so may result in falling due to corrosion. Also, it may result in malfunctions.
Do not stand in front of the lens while the projector is being used.
Doing so can cause damage and burns to clothing.
ff Strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens.
Do not place objects in front of the lens while the projector is being used.
Do not block the projection by placing an object in front of the projection lens.
Doing so can cause fire, damage to an object, or malfunction of the projector.
ff Strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens.
The projector must be carried or installed by two or more people.
Failure to do so may cause falling accidents.
Always disconnect all cables before moving the projector.
Moving the projector with cables still attached can damage the cables, which will cause fire or electric shocks to
occur.
When mounting the projector on the ceiling, keep mounting screws and power cord from contact with
metal parts inside the ceiling.
Contact with metal parts inside the ceiling can cause electric shocks.
14 - ENGLISH
Read this first!
CAUTION:
rr ACCESSORIES
When not using the projector for an extended period of time, remove the batteries from the remote
control.
Failure to observe this will cause the batteries to leak, overheat, catch fire or explode, which may result in fire or
contamination of surrounding area.
rr MAINTENANCE
Do not attach the air filter unit while it is wet.
Doing so may result in electric shock or malfunctions.
ff After you clean the air filter units, dry them thoroughly before reattaching them.
Ask your dealer about cleaning inside the projector every 20 000 hours of usage as an estimated
duration.
Continuous use while dust is accumulated inside the projector may result in fire.
ff For cleaning fee, ask your dealer.
To remove the battery
Remote Control Battery
1. Press the guide and lift the cover.
(i)
2. Remove the batteries.
(ii)
ENGLISH - 15
Read this first!
Brazil Only
Brasil Apenas
rr Manuseio de baterias usadas
BRASIL
Após o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias deverão
ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial
ou rede de assistência técnica autorizada.
Cobrir os terminais positivo (+) e negativo (-) com uma fita isolante adesiva, antes de depositar numa caixa
destinada para o recolhimento. O contato entre partes metálicas pode causar vazamentos, gerar calor, romper
a blindagem e produzir fogo. (Fig. 1)
Fig. 1
Como isolar os terminais
Fita Isolante
Fita Isolante
Não desmonte, não remova o invólucro, nem amasse a bateria. O gás liberado pela bateria pode irritar a
garganta, danificar o lacre do invólucro ou o vazamento provocar calor, ruptura da blindagem e produzir fogo
devido ao curto circuito dos terminais. Não incinere nem aqueça as baterias, elas não podem ficar expostas a
temperaturas superiores a 100 °C (212 °F). O gás liberado pela bateria pode irritar a garganta, danificar o lacre
do invólucro ou o vazamento provocar calor, ruptura da blindagem e produzir fogo devido ao curto circuito dos
terminais provocado internamente.
Evite o contato com o liquido que vazar das baterias. Caso isto ocorra, lave bem a parte afetada com bastante
água. Caso haja irritação, consulte um médico.
rr Remoção das baterias
1. Pressione a guia e levante a tampa.
(i)
16 - ENGLISH
(ii)
2. Remova as baterias.

rTrademarks
r
ffSOLID SHINE is a trademark of Panasonic Holdings Corporation.
ffWindows and Microsoft Edge are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and other countries.
ffMac, macOS, Safari, and iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries and
regions.
ffTrademark PJLink is a trademark applied for trademark rights in Japan, the United States of America and other
countries and areas.
ffThe terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the United States and other countries.
ffCrestron Connected, the Crestron Connected logo, Crestron Fusion, and XiO Cloud are either trademarks or
registered trademarks of Crestron Electronics, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
ffHDBaseTTM is a trademark of HDBaseT Alliance.
ffArt-NetTM Designed by and Copyright Artistic Licence Holdings Ltd
ffIOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.
ffAndroid and Google Chrome are trademarks of Google LLC.
ffQR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan and in other countries.
ffAdobe, Acrobat, and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe in the United States and/
or other countries.
ffSome of the fonts used in the on-screen menu are Ricoh bitmap fonts, which are manufactured and sold by
Ricoh Company, Ltd.
ffAll other names, company names, and product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective owners.
Please note that the ® and TM symbols are not specified in this manual.
Software information regarding this product
This product incorporates the following software:
(1) the software developed independently by or for Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.,
(2) the software owned by third party and licensed to Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.,
(3) the software licensed under the GNU General Public License, Version 2.0 (GPL V2.0),
(4) the software licensed under the GNU LESSER General Public License, Version 2.1 (LGPL V2.1), and/or
(5) open source software other than the software licensed under the GPL V2.0 and/or LGPL V2.1.
The software categorized as (3) - (5) are distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY, without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
For details, refer to the license terms and conditions of each open source software.
The open source software license is stored in the firmware of this product, and can be downloaded by accessing
this projector using the web browser. For details, please refer to “Web control function” (x page 183).
At least three (3) years from delivery of this product, Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. will give to any third party who
contacts us at the contact information provided below, for a charge no more than our cost of physically performing
source code distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code covered under
GPL V2.0, LGPL V2.1 or the other licenses with the obligation to do so, as well as the respective copyright notice
thereof.
Contact Information: [email protected]
rIllustrations
r
in this manual
ffIllustrations of the projector, menu screen (OSD), and other parts may vary from the actual product.
ffIllustrations displayed on the computer screen may differ depending on the types of the computer, operating
system, and the web browser.
ffIllustrations of the projector with the power cord attached are only examples. The shape of the supplied power
cords varies depending on the country where you purchased the product.
rReference
r
pages
ffReference pages in this manual are indicated as (x page 00).
rTerm
r
ffIn this manual, the “Wireless/wired remote control unit” accessory is referred to as “Remote control”.
ENGLISH - 17

Features of the Projector
Quick Steps
For details, refer to the corresponding pages.
High luminance and high contrast
and low noise
▶▶With a high efficiency optical system and
unique drive system that draws maximum
solid-state light source output, high
luminance of 20 000 lm*1, high contrast of
3 000 000:1*2, and low noise of 42 dB*3 are
achieved with its high color reproduction
even with its compact size.
*1 A value for PT‑MZ20K.
A value for PT‑MZ17K is 16 500 lm.
A value for PT‑MZ14K is 14 000 lm.
A value for PT‑MZ11K is 11 000 lm.
*2 When [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] is set to [3]
*3 A value for PT‑MZ20K.
A value for PT‑MZ17K is 38 dB.
A value for PT‑MZ14K and PT‑MZ11K is 35 dB.
When [OPERATING MODE] in [OPERATION SETTING] is
set to [NORMAL]
Easy and highly flexible setup
▶▶In addition to DIGITAL LINK support,
Art-Net support, and abundant lineup of
optional lenses, the projector has realized
flexible installation with wide latitude that
supports all 360° direction projection
utilizing the feature of solid-state light
source. More advanced rendition in wide
range of usages is now possible. With
the superior compatibility with the devices
other than projectors, more advanced
rendition in wide range of usage is
possible.
Long life and high reliability
▶▶The maintenance cost for long-term
operation is reduced by the unique light
source cooling control technology and
improvement of the dust resistance. Also,
it will contribute to the stable operation by
implementation of the backup function that
will continue the projection by switching to
the backup input signal immediately even
when the input signal is discontinued, in
addition to adopting solid-state light source
which has long life.
18 - ENGLISH
1. Set up the projector.
(x page 36)
2. Attach the projection lens
(optional).
(x page 45)
3. Connect with external devices.
(x page 48)
4. Connect the power cord.
(x page 54)
5. Switch on the projector.
(x page 56)
6. Make initial settings.
(x page 57)
Execute the lens calibration.
(x page 70)
ffTake this step when you switch on the
power for the first time after purchasing the
projector.
7. Select the input signal.
(x page 67)
8. Adjust the image.
(x page 68)
Chapter 1
Preparation
This chapter describes things you need to know or check before using the projector.
ENGLISH - 19
Chapter 1
Preparation — Precautions for use
Precautions for use
Intended use of the product
The purpose of the projector is to project an image signal from imaging equipment or a computer on a screen or
other surface as a still image or moving image.
Installation and handling of the laser product (for USA and Canada)
rFor
r
permanent Installation
ffInstallation of the projector shall be performed by a technician trained by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
ffThe variance application to the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA variance application) will be performed
by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. The person responsible of the device or usage shall store the original or a copy
of the FDA variance approval letter received from Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
rFor
r
temporary installation
ffInstallation of the projector shall be performed by a technician trained by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
ffOwner of the projector or the person responsible of usage such as the promotor of the show shall apply for FDA
variance and acquire the approval letter.
ffThe variance holder who has acquired the FDA variance approval letter must submit the “installation checklist”
required by FDA to Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
ffVariance holder shall create and store a document recording the information such as the location of the use,
dates of the use, users of the projector.
rFor
r
use
ffThis projector is categorized as the risk group 3 of IEC/EN 62471-5:2015.
ffDo not enter within the hazard distance (within RG3 range), refer to “Hazard distance (IEC/EN 62471-5:2015)”.
ffAssign a person responsible of the device when using the projector. The person responsible shall be trained by
Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. before starting to use the projector.
Note
ff Information such as training, FDA variance application, installation checklist, usage recording document can be confirmed by
accessing following URL.
https://eww.pavc.panasonic.co.jp/projector/extranet/index.html
Cautions when transporting
ffTransport the projector with two or more people. Failure to do so may drop the projector, which may result in
damage or deformation of the projector, or injury.
ffHold the bottom of the projector and do not hold the projection lens or the opening around the projection
lens when transporting. Failure to do so may cause damage. Also, handle the projector in a way not to apply
excessive vibration or shock. Failure to do so may cause a failure due to the damaged internal components.
ffDo not transport the projector with the adjustable feet extended. Doing so may damage the adjustable feet.
Cautions when installing
rDo
r not set up the projector outdoors.
The projector is designed for indoor use only.
rDo
r not set up the projector in the following locations.
ffPlaces where vibration and impacts occur such as in a car or vehicle: Doing so may cause damage to internal
components or malfunction.
ffLocation close to sea or where corrosive gas may occur: The projector may fall due to corrosion. Also, failure to
do so may shorten the life of the components and result in malfunction.
ffNear the exhaust of an air conditioner: Depending on the conditions of use, the screen may fluctuate in rare
cases due to the heated air from the exhaust vent or the hot or cooled air from the air conditioner. Make sure
that the exhaust from the projector or other equipment, or the air from the air conditioner does not blow toward
the front of the projector.
20 - ENGLISH
Chapter 1
Preparation — Precautions for use
ffPlaces with sharp temperature fluctuations such as near lights (studio lamps): Doing so may shorten the life of
the light source, or result in deformation of the projector due to heat, which may cause malfunctions.
Follow the operating environment temperature of the projector.
ffNear high-voltage power lines or near motors: Doing so may interfere with the operation of the projector.
rAsk
r
a qualified technician or your dealer for the installation work such as installing to
a ceiling.
To ensure projector performance and security, ask a qualified technician or your dealer when installing the
projector in a method other than the floor installation or when installing the projector in a high place.
rAsk
r
a qualified technician or your dealer to install the cable wiring for DIGITAL LINK
connection.
Image and sound may be disrupted if cable transmission characteristics cannot be obtained due to inadequate
installation.
rThe
r
projector may not work properly due to strong radio wave from the broadcast
station or the radio.
If there is any facility or equipment which outputs strong radio waves near the installation location, install the
projector at a location sufficiently far from the source of the radio waves. Or, wrap the LAN cable connected to the
<DIGITAL LINK> terminal using a piece of metal foil or a metal pipe which is grounded at both ends.
rImage
r
adjustment after installation
Projected image of the projector is affected by the ambient temperature around the projector or the increased
internal temperature caused by the light from its light source, and it will be unstable especially right after the
projection has started.
This projector is equipped with the active focus optimizer function and automatically corrects the focus based
on the detected temperature change of the lens or the detected change in brightness of the image, enabling the
focus to be stable even just after switching on the power or when there is a large change in brightness of the
image.
For details of the active focus optimizer function, refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [ACTIVE
FOCUS OPTIMIZER] (x page 129). Operational specifications and factory default setting differ depending on
the projection lens.
When using the projector with the active focus optimizer function disabled, it is recommended to perform the focus
adjustment after 30 minutes or more have elapsed with the focus test pattern displayed.
For details of the test pattern, refer to “[TEST PATTERN] menu” (x page 155).
rDo
r not install the projector at an altitude of 2 700 m (8 858') or higher above sea level.
rDo
r not use the projector in a location where the ambient temperature exceeds 45 °C
(113 °F).
Using the projector in a location where the altitude is too high or the ambient temperature is too high may reduce
the life of the components or result in malfunctions.
Do not use the projector in a location where the ambient temperature exceeds 40 °C (104 °F) regardless of the
altitude when the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: AJ‑WM50 Series) is attached to the projector.
rProjection
r
in all 360° direction is possible.
360°
360° vertically
360°
360° horizontally
360°
360° tilted
(combination of vertical and horizontal)
ENGLISH - 21
Chapter 1
Preparation — Precautions for use
Cautions when setting up the projector
ffUse the adjustable feet only for the floor standing installation and for adjusting the angle. Using them for other
purposes may damage the projector.
ffWhen using the projector in any method other than the floor installation using the adjustable feet or ceiling
mounting installation using the Ceiling Mount Bracket, use the four screw holes for ceiling mount (as shown in
the figure) to fix the projector.
In such case, make sure that there is no clearance between the screw holes for ceiling mount on the projector
bottom and the setting surface by inserting spacers (metallic) between them.
ffUse a torque screwdriver or Allen torque wrench to tighten the fixing screws to their specified tightening torques.
Do not use electric screwdrivers or impact screwdrivers.
For the screws to fix the projector, use commercially available ISO 898-1 standard screws (made of carbon steel
or alloy steel).
(Screw diameter: M6, tapping depth inside the projector: 12 mm (15/32"), torque: 4 ± 0.5 N·m)
Screw holes for ceiling mount (M6)
Adjustable feet
Adjustable feet
Positions of screw holes for ceiling mount and adjustable feet
ffDo not stack projectors on top of each other.
ffDo not block the intake/exhaust vents of the projector.
ffPrevent hot and cool air from the air conditioning system or exhaust of other projectors from blowing directly to
the intake/exhaust vents of the projector.
300 mm (11-13/16")
or longer
300 mm (11-13/16")
or longer
100 mm (3-15/16") or shorter
600 mm (23-5/8")
or longer
100 mm (3-15/16") or shorter
ffDo not install the projector in a confined space.
When installing the projector in a confined space, provide air conditioning or ventilation separately. Exhaust heat
may accumulate when the ventilation is not enough, triggering the protection circuit of the projector.
600 mm (23-5/8")
or longer
300 mm (11-13/16") or longer
300 mm (11-13/16") or longer
22 - ENGLISH
100 mm (3-15/16") or longer
Chapter 1
Preparation — Precautions for use
ffWhen installing and fixing the projector on a ceiling or wall using a mount, make sure that the fixing screw or
power cord does not come in contact with the metal section inside the ceiling or wall. Failure to observe this
may result in electric shocks.
ffPanasonic Connect Co., Ltd.​takes no responsibility for any damage to the product caused by an inappropriate
choice of location for installing the projector, even if the warranty period of the product has not expired.
ffImmediately remove the product that is not in use anymore by asking a qualified technician.
Security
When using this product, take safety measures against the following incidents.
ffPersonal information being leaked via this product
ffUnauthorized operation of this product by a malicious third party
ffInterfering or stopping of this product by a malicious third party
Take sufficient security measures.
ffMake your password difficult to guess as much as possible.
ffChange your password periodically.
ffPanasonic Connect Co., Ltd. or its affiliate companies will never ask for your password directly. Do not divulge
your password in case you receive such inquiries.
ffThe connecting network must be secured by a firewall, etc.
rSecurity
r
when using the wireless LAN product
The advantage of a wireless LAN is that information can be exchanged between a computer or other such
equipment and a wireless access point using radio waves, instead of using a LAN cable, as long as you are within
range for radio transmissions.
On the other hand, because the radio wave can travel through an obstacle (such as a wall) and is accessible from
anywhere within a given range, following problems may occur if security setting is insufficient.
ffTransmitted data may be intercepted
A malicious third party may intentionally intercept radio waves and monitor the following transmitted data.
ggPersonal information such as your ID, password, credit card number
ggContent of an Email
ffIllegally accessed
A malicious third party may access your personal or corporate network without authorization and engage in the
following types of behavior.
ggRetrieve personal and/or secret information (information leak)
ggSpread false information by impersonating a particular person (spoofing)
ggOverwrite intercepted communications and issue false data (tampering)
ggSpread harmful software such as a computer virus and crash your data and/or system (system crash)
Since most wireless LAN adapters or access points are equipped with security features to take care of these
problems, you can reduce the possibility of these problems occurring when using this product by making the
appropriate security settings for the wireless LAN device.
Some wireless LAN devices may not be set for security immediately after purchase. To decrease the possibility
of occurrence of security problems, be sure to make all security related settings according to the operation
instructions supplied with each wireless LAN device before using a wireless LAN device.
Depending on the specifications of the wireless LAN, a malicious third party may be able to break security settings
by special means.
Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. asks customers to thoroughly understand the risk of using this product without
making security settings, and recommends that the customers make security settings at their own discretion and
responsibility.
Notes regarding the wireless LAN
Radio wave in the 2.4 GHz band is used when the wireless LAN connection function of the projector is used. The
license of wireless station is not required, but understand the following when using.
To use the wireless LAN function with the projector, it is necessary to attach the optional Wireless Module (Model
No.: AJ‑WM50 Series).
rDo
r not use close to other wireless devices.
Following devices may be using radio wave in the same bandwidth as the projector. Using the projector close to
these devices may cause the communication to be disabled or the communication speed to slow down due to
interference of radio wave.
ENGLISH - 23
Chapter 1
Preparation — Precautions for use
ffMicrowave oven, etc.
ffIndustrial, scientific, or medical devices, etc.
ffIn-plant wireless station for identifying moving vehicles used in the manufacturing lines at a plant
ffSpecified low power wireless station
rDo
r not use cell phone, television, or radio as much as possible close to the projector.
Cell phone, television, or radio is using radio wave with different bandwidth from the projector, so there is no effect
on the wireless LAN communication or the send/receive on these devices. However, noise may occur in the audio
or video due to the radio wave from the projector.
rRadio
r
wave for wireless LAN communication does not go through the reinforcing
bars, metal, or concrete.
The projector can communicate through wall or floor made of wood or glass (excluding the glass with metal mesh
embedded), but it cannot communicate through wall or floor made of reinforcing bars, metal, or concrete.
rDo
r not use the projector as much as possible in a location where static electricity is
generated.
The communication via wireless LAN or wired LAN may be prone to disruption when the projector is used in a
location where static electricity or noise is generated.
There is a rare case that the LAN connection may not be established due to static electricity or noise, so in such
case, turn off the projector, remove the source of problematic static electricity or noise, and turn the projector back
on.
DIGITAL LINK
“DIGITAL LINK” is a technology to transmit the video, audio, Ethernet, and serial control signals using a twisted
pair cable by adding unique functions by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. to the HDBaseTTM communication standard
formulated by HDBaseT Alliance.
This projector supports the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G,
ET‑YFB200G) and peripheral devices by other manufacturers (twisted-pair-cable transmitters such as the
“XTP transmitter” of Extron Electronics) that use the same HDBaseTTM standard. For the devices of other
manufacturers that the operation has been verified with this projector, visit the following website.
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/
Note that the verification for devices of other manufacturers has been made for the items set by Panasonic
Connect Co., Ltd., and not all the operations have been verified. For operation or performance problems caused
by the devices of other manufacturers, contact the respective manufacturers. The projector is not equipped with
an audio function so it is not possible to output audio.
Art-Net
“Art-Net” is an Ethernet communication protocol based on the TCP/IP protocol.
By using the DMX controller and the application software, illumination and stage system can be controlled. Art-Net
is made based on DMX512 communication protocol.
Application software supported by the projector
The projector supports following application software.
For details or downloading application software except for “Geometric & Setup Management Software” and
“Projector Network Setup Software”, visit the following website.
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/
“Geometric & Setup Management Software” and “Projector Network Setup Software” can be downloaded from the
following website (“Panasonic Professional Display and Projector Technical Support Website”).
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/pass/
It is necessary to register and login to PASS*1 to download from “Panasonic Professional Display and Projector
Technical Support Website”.
*1 PASS: Panasonic Professional Display and Projector Technical Support Website
ffLogo Transfer Software
This application software transfers the original image, such as company logo, which is projected at the start, to
the projector.
ffSmart Projector Control
This application software sets and adjusts the projector connected via LAN using a smartphone or a tablet.
24 - ENGLISH
Chapter 1
Preparation — Precautions for use
ffMulti Monitoring & Control Software
This application software monitors and controls the multiple display devices (projector and flat panel display)
connected to an intranet.
ffEarly Warning Software
This plug-in software monitors the status of the display devices and their peripherals within an intranet, and
notifies of abnormality of such equipment and detects the signs of possible abnormality. “Early Warning
Software” is preinstalled in the “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”. To use the early warning function of
this plug-in software, install “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” in the PC to be used. By enabling the early
warning function, it will notify of the approximate time to replace the consumables for the display devices,
to clean each part of the display devices, and to replace the components of the display devices, allowing to
execute maintenance in advance.
The early warning function can be used by registering maximum of 2048 display devices free of charge for
90 days after installing the “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” into a PC. To continuously use after the 90
days, it is necessary to purchase the license of “Early Warning Software” (ET‑SWA100 Series) and perform
the activation. Also, depending on the type of license, the number of display devices that can be registered for
monitoring varies. For details, refer to the Operating Instructions of “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”.
ffGeometric & Setup Management Software (Geometry Manager Pro)
This application software performs detailed corrections and adjustments such as the geometric adjustment
which cannot be covered by the projector settings in real-time. Also, this allows simple automatic adjustment of
geometry correction, edge blending, color, and brightness according to the shape of the screen through use of a
camera.
ffProjector Network Setup Software
This application software allows to set the network information, such as the IP addresses, and the projector
names, for multiple projectors connected to the network collectively. Also, the administrator account, network
information, and projector name can be set for the projector that does not have the administrator account set
using this software.
Storing
To store the projector, store in a dry room.
Disposal
To dispose of the product, ask your local authorities or dealer for correct methods of disposal. Also, dispose of the
product without disassembling.
Cautions on use
rTo
r get a good picture quality
In order to view a beautiful image in higher contrast, prepare an appropriate environment. Draw curtains or blinds
over windows and turn off any lights near the screen to prevent outside light or light from indoor lamps from
shining onto the screen.
rDo
r not touch the surface of the projection lens with your bare hands.
If the surface of the projection lens becomes dirty from fingerprints or anything else, this will be magnified and
projected onto the screen.
Keep the lens cover supplied with the optional projection lens attached to the lens when you do not use the
projector.
rLCD
r
panel
The LCD panel is manufactured by a technology with extremely high precision, but there may be missing pixels or
pixels that is constantly illuminated in a rare case. Note that these phenomenon are not malfunction.
Also, a residual image may remain in the image of the LCD panel when a still image is projected for long time, and
in such case, project the test pattern [ALL WHITE] for 1 hour or longer. Note that the residual image may not be
completely erased.
For details of the test pattern, refer to “[TEST PATTERN] menu” (x page 155).
rDo
r not move the projector or subject it to vibration or impact while it is operating.
Doing so may shorten the life of internal components or result in malfunctions.
ENGLISH - 25
Chapter 1
Preparation — Precautions for use
rOptical
r
parts
The replacement cycle for the optical parts such as the LCD panel or polarization plate may become shorter even
if it is used for less than one year when the ambient temperature is high or in an environment with large amount of
dust or cigarette smoke. For details, consult your dealer.
rLight
r
source
The light source of the projector uses laser diode, and has the following characteristics.
ffDepending on the operating environment temperature, the luminance of the light source will decrease.
The higher the temperature becomes, the more the luminance of the light source decreases.
ffThe luminance of the light source will decrease by duration of usage.
If brightness is noticeably reduced and the light source does not turn on, ask your dealer to clean inside the
projector or replace the light source unit.
rComputer
r
and external device connections
When connecting a computer or an external device, read this manual carefully regarding the use of power cords
and shielded cables as well.
26 - ENGLISH
Chapter 1
Preparation — Precautions for use
Accessories
Make sure that the following accessories are provided with your projector. Numbers enclosed in < > show the
number of accessories.
Wireless/wired remote control unit <1>
(N2QAYA000243)
For Korea
(K2CZ3YY00032) <1>
200 V - 240 V
For India
(K2CZ3YY00100) <1>
200 V - 240 V
Power cord
(K2CM3YY00057)
200 V - 240 V
For Taiwan
(K2CH3YY00009) <1>
200 V - 240 V
(K2CT3YY00101)
200 V - 240 V
AAA/R03 or AAA/LR03 battery <2>
(K2CG3YY00218)
100 V - 120 V
(For remote control unit)
Lens fixing screw <4>
(DPHD1008ZA/X1)
Attention
ff After unpacking the projector, discard the power cord cap and packaging material properly.
ff Do not use the supplied power cord for devices other than this projector.
ff For lost accessories, consult your dealer.
ff Store small parts in an appropriate manner, and keep them away from young children.
Note
ff The type and number of the supplied power cords vary depending on the country or region where you purchased the
product.
ff Use the supplied lens fixing screws when attaching the projection lens to the projector. When attaching the projection lens
other than the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-EMU100), use only one lens fixing screw, and the remaining three screws are
spares. Store them appropriately so that they do not get lost.
ff The part numbers of accessories are subject to change without prior notice.
ENGLISH - 27
Chapter 1
Preparation — Precautions for use
Optional accessories
Optional accessories (product name)
Projection lens
Ceiling Mount Bracket
Wireless Module*2
Early Warning Software
(Basic license/3-year license)
NFC Upgrade Kit*2
Digital Interface Box
DIGITAL LINK Switcher
Replacement Filter Unit
Zoom Lens
Model No.
ET‑EMU100, ET‑EMW200, ET‑EMW300, ET‑EMW400,
ET‑EMW500, ET‑EMS650, ET‑EMT750, ET‑EMT850
ET‑PKD120H (for High Ceilings)
ET‑PKD120S (for Low Ceilings)
ET‑PKD130H (for High Ceilings, 6-axis Adjustment)
ET‑PKE301B (Projector Mount Bracket)*1
AJ-WM50 Series*3
ET‑SWA100 Series*4
ET‑NUK10
ET‑YFB100G
ET‑YFB200G
ET‑RFM100
*1 When the projector is mounted to the existing Ceiling Mount Bracket (in combination with the Model No.: ET‑PKD120H (for High
Ceilings) or ET‑PKD120S (for Low Ceilings), and the Model No.: ET‑PKE300B (Projector Mount Bracket)), it is necessary to
replace the drop-prevention wire rope with the one corresponding to this projector. Consult your dealer.
Drop-prevention set (service model no.: DPPW1004ZA/X1)
*2 The availability of this product varies depending on the country. For details, contact your dealer.
*3 The suffix of the Model No. differs depending on the country.
Example of the Model No. with suffix for AJ-WM50 Series
AJ-WM50E, AJ-WM50G1, AJ-WM50G2, AJ-WM50GAN, AJ-WM50GPX, AJ-WM50P
*4 The suffix of the Model No. differs according to the license type.
Note
ff For PT-MZ17K, PT-MZ14K and PT-MZ11K, the following Zoom Lens can also be used.
ET-EMS600, ET-EMT700, ET-EMT800
ff Use the Wireless Module (Model No.: AJ‑WM50 Series) in an environment of 0 °C (32 °F) to 40 °C (104 °F), including when
it is attached to the projector.
ff The model numbers of optional accessories are subject to change without prior notice.
ff The optional NFC Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET‑NUK10) can be used to enable the NFC function of the projector. Note that
there are some models that have the NFC function enabled from the time of factory shipment, and there are some countries
or regions where the NFC Upgrade Kit cannot be applied.
For the availability of the NFC function in the country or region where you purchased the product, visit the following website
or consult your dealer.
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/
ff The optional accessories compatible with the projector may be added or changed without prior notice.
For the latest information, visit the following website.
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/
28 - ENGLISH
Chapter 1
Preparation — About your projector
About your projector
Remote control
rrFront
rrTop
1
18
2
3
4
5
11
6
12
7
13
8
14
15
16
rrBottom
9
10
19
17
1
<STANDBY> button
Sets the projector to the state where the projector is turned
off (standby mode) when the <MAIN POWER> switch on the
projector is set to <ON> and in projection mode.
2
<POWER ON> button
Sets the projector to projection mode when the <MAIN
POWER> switch on the projector is set to <ON> and the power
is turned off (standby mode).
3
Remote control indicator
Blinks if any button in the remote control is pressed.
4
Lens buttons (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>)
Adjusts the focus, zoom, and lens shift. (x page 68)
5
<MENU> button/<ENTER> button/asqw buttons
Used to navigate through the menu screen. (x page 79)
asqw buttons are also used to enter the password in
[SECURITY] or enter characters.
6
<ON SCREEN> button
Switches the on-screen display function on (display) or off
(hide). (x page 74)
7
Input selection buttons (<HDMI 1>, <HDMI 2>, <DIGITAL
LINK>, <SDI>)
Switches the input signal to project. (x page 67)
8
<FUNCTION> button
Assigns a frequently used operation as a shortcut button.
(x page 75)
When the <FUNCTION> button is held down, the [FUNCTION
BUTTON] screen is displayed. (x page 145)
9
Number (<0> - <9>) buttons
Used for entering an ID number or a password in a multiple
projector environment.
10 <ID ALL> button
Used to simultaneously control all the projectors with a single
remote control in a multi-projector environment. (x page 34)
11 <SHUTTER> button
Used to temporarily turn off the image. (x page 74)
12 <TEST PATTERN> button
Displays the test pattern. (x page 75)
13 <CEC> button
Displays the HDMI-CEC operation screen.(x page 229)
14 <INPUT MENU> button
Displays the input selection screen.(x page 68)
15 <STATUS> button
Displays the projector information.
16 <DEFAULT> button
Resets the setting of the displayed sub-menu to the factory
default. (x page 80)
17 <ID SET> button
Sets the ID number of the remote control in a multiple projector
environment. (x page 34)
18 Remote control signal transmitter
19 Remote control wired terminal
This is a terminal used to connect to the projector via a cable
when the remote control is used as a wired remote control.
(x page 34)
ENGLISH - 29
Chapter 1
Preparation — About your projector
Attention
ff Do not drop the remote control.
ff Avoid contact with liquids or moisture.
ff Do not attempt to modify or disassemble the remote control.
ff Observe the following instructions that are indicated on the caution label at the back of the remote control:
gg Do not use old battery with new one.
gg Do not use batteries other than the type specified.
gg Be sure the batteries are inserted properly.
For other instructions, read the instructions related to batteries that are described in “Read this first!”.
Note
Caution label at the back of the remote control
ff When operating the remote control by directly pointing at the remote control signal receiver of the projector, operate the remote control
within a distance approximately 30 m (98'5") from the remote control signal receiver. The remote control can control at angles of up to ±30°
vertically and horizontally, but the effective control range may be reduced.
ff If there are any obstacles between the remote control and the remote control signal receiver, the remote control may not operate properly.
ff The signal will be reflected off the screen. However, the operating range may be limited from light reflection loss due to the screen material.
ff If the remote control signal receiver directly receives strong light, such as fluorescent light, the remote control may not operate properly. Use
it in a place distant from the light source.
ff The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will blink if the projector receives a remote control signal.
30 - ENGLISH
Chapter 1
Preparation — About your projector
Projector body
rrFront
1
2
rrSide
3
6
4
5
7
7
6
7
rrRear
8
9
6
10
rrTop
12 14 15
11 13
16
8
6
rr Bottom
17
19
18
Projection direction
10 <MAIN POWER> switch
Turns on/off the main power.
1
Remote control signal receiver (front)
2
Power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)>
Indicates the status of the power.
3
Light source indicator <LIGHT>
Indicates the status of the light source.
12 <AC IN> terminal
Connect the supplied power cord.
4
Temperature indicator <TEMP>
Indicates the internal temperature status.
13 Remote control signal receiver (rear)
5
Filter indicator <FILTER>
Indicates the status of the air filter unit.
6
Adjustable feet
Adjusts the projection angle.
7
Intake vent
8
Exhaust vent
9
Connecting terminals (x page 33)
11 Power cord holder
14 Security slot
This security slot is compatible with the Kensington security
cables.
15 Control panel (x page 32)
16 Air filter cover
There is the air filter unit inside.
17 Top slide cover
There is the lens lock lever for mounting the projection lens
inside. (x page 45)
ENGLISH - 31
Chapter 1
Preparation — About your projector
18 NFC touch point
This is the touch point when using the near field communication
(NFC, Near Field Communication) function. A device such as a
smartphone equipped with the NFC function can be connected
to the projector by holding it near the touch point.
19 Burglar hook port
Attaches a burglar prevention cable, etc.
Attention
Do not block the intake/exhaust vents of the projector.
The components may deteriorate faster if cooling inside the projector is inhibited.
Note
ff The optional NFC Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET‑NUK10) can be used to enable the NFC function of the projector. Note that there are some
models that have the NFC function enabled from the time of factory shipment, and there are some countries or regions where the NFC
Upgrade Kit cannot be applied.
For the availability of the NFC function in the country or region where you purchased the product, visit the following website or consult your
dealer.
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/
ff For the connection using the NFC function, use the application software “Smart Projector Control” which performs the setting and
adjustment of the projector.
For details of the “Smart Projector Control”, visit the following website.
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/
rrControl panel
5
1
2
3
6
7
8
9
4
1
2
10
<POWER ON> button
Sets the projector to projection mode when the <MAIN
POWER> switch on the projector is set to <ON> and the power
is turned off (standby mode).
5
Information monitor
Displays various statuses and error information. (x page 213)
6
<STANDBY> button
Sets the projector to the state where the projector is turned
off (standby mode) when the <MAIN POWER> switch on the
projector is set to <ON> and in projection mode.
<INFO> button
Used to operate the information monitor. (x page 213)
7
<INPUT SELECT> button
Switches the input signal to project. (x page 67)
8
<ENTER> button
Determines and executes an item in the menu screen.
9
asqw selection buttons
Used to select an item in the menu screen, change the setting,
and adjust the level.
Also used to enter a password in [SECURITY] or enter
characters.
3
<MENU> button
Displays or hides the main menu. (x page 79)
Returns to the previous menu when a sub-menu is displayed.
If you press the <MENU> button on the control panel for at least
three seconds while the on-screen display is off (hidden), the
on-screen display is turned on.
4
<SHUTTER> button
Used to temporarily turn off the image. (x page 74)
32 - ENGLISH
10 <LENS> button
Adjusts the focus, zoom, and lens shift.
Chapter 1
Preparation — About your projector
rrConnecting terminals
1
6
2
7
3
4
8
9
5
10
1
<USB> terminal
This is a terminal to connect the USB memory when using the
data cloning function or firmware update function.
(x pages 225, 231)
This is also the terminal to connect the optional Wireless
Module (Model No.: AJ‑WM50 Series) when the projector is
connected via wireless LAN. (x page 180)
7
<SERIAL/MULTI SYNC IN> terminal
This is the RS‑232C compatible terminal to externally control
the projector by connecting a computer.
This terminal is also used to connect multiple projectors when
balancing the contrast as a combined screen or synchronizing
the effects using the shutter function including the fade in/fade
out with a system using multiple projectors.
2
<SDI IN> terminal
This is a terminal to input the SDI signal.
8
3
<HDMI IN 1> terminal / <HDMI IN 2> terminal
These are the terminals to input HDMI signal.
4
<DIGITAL LINK> terminal
This is a terminal to connect a device that transmits image
signal via the LAN terminal. Also, this is the LAN terminal to
connect to the network.
<SERIAL/MULTI SYNC OUT> terminal
This is a terminal to output RS‑232C compliant signal input to
the <SERIAL/MULTI SYNC IN> terminal.
This terminal is also used to connect multiple projectors when
balancing the contrast as a combined screen or synchronizing
the effects using the shutter function including the fade in/fade
out with a system using multiple projectors.
9
<REMOTE 1 IN> terminal
This is a terminal to remotely control the projector using the
external control circuit.
5
<LAN> terminal
This is the LAN terminal to connect to the network.
6
<DC OUT> terminal
This is the USB terminal dedicated for power supply. (DC 5 V,
maximum 2.0 A)
Use this terminal when a power supply is required to wireless
display adapters and wireless LAN/Ethernet converters, etc.
10 <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal/<REMOTE 2 OUT> terminal
These are terminals to connect the remote control for serial
control in a multiple projector environment.
Attention
ff When a LAN cable is directly connected to the projector, the network connection must be made indoors.
ff When connecting a USB memory to the <USB> terminal, also refer to “Using the USB memory” (x page 73).
ff To transmit the Ethernet and serial control signals using the <DIGITAL LINK> terminal, set the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET TYPE] to
[DIGITAL LINK] or [LAN & DIGITAL LINK].
ff To transmit the Ethernet signal using the <LAN> terminal, set the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET TYPE] to [LAN] or [LAN & DIGITAL
LINK].
ff The <DIGITAL LINK> terminal and the <LAN> terminal are connected inside of the projector when the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET
TYPE] is set to [LAN & DIGITAL LINK]. Do not directly connect the <DIGITAL LINK> terminal and the <LAN> terminal using a LAN cable.
Construct the system so that it is not connected to the same network via the peripherals such as the switching hub or the twisted-pair-cable
transmitter.
ff When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STANDBY MODE] is set to [NORMAL], power can be supplied by using the <DC OUT> terminal
even while the projector is in standby mode. If [ECO] is set, power cannot be supplied in standby mode.
ENGLISH - 33
Chapter 1
Preparation — Preparing the remote control
Preparing the remote control
Inserting and removing the batteries
(i)
(ii)
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
1)
Open the cover. (Fig. 1)
2)
Insert the batteries and close the cover (insert the m side first). (Fig. 2)
ffWhen removing the batteries, perform the steps in reverse order.
When using the multiple projectors
When you use the multiple projectors together, you can operate all the projectors simultaneously or each projector
individually using a single remote control, if a unique ID number is assigned to each projector.
When using the projectors by setting the ID numbers, set the ID number of the projector body after initial settings
have been completed. Then, set the ID number of the remote control. For initial settings, refer to “When the initial
setting screen is displayed” (x page 57).
The factory default ID number of the projector (projector body and remote control) is set to [ALL], so you can use
it as it is. Set the ID numbers of the projector body and remote control as necessary.
For details on setting the ID number of the remote control, refer to “Setting ID number of the remote control”
(x page 76).
Note
ff Set the ID number of the projector body from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTOR ID].
Connecting the remote control to the projector with a cable
To simultaneously control multiple projectors next to each other with one remote control, connect the remote
control with a commercially available M3 stereo mini jack cable using the <REMOTE 2 IN>/<REMOTE 2 OUT>
terminals.
The remote control is effective even in places where an obstacle stands in the light path or where devices are
susceptible to outside light.
Connecting terminals
Remote control
Connecting to a second projector
Connecting to the remote control wired
terminal
M3 stereo mini jack cable (commercially available)
Attention
ff Use a cable that is 15 m (49'3") or shorter, with 2 core shielded. The remote control may not operate when the length of the cable exceeds
15 m (49'3") or when the shielding of the cable is inadequate.
34 - ENGLISH
Chapter 2
Getting Started
This chapter describes things you need to do before using the projector such as the setup and connections.
ENGLISH - 35
Chapter 2
Getting Started — Setting up
Setting up
Usable outlet
This projector supports AC 100 V to AC 240 V as the power supply. A grounded outlet supporting 15 A is required
with either voltage.
The shape of the usable outlet differs depending on the power supply. Following illustrations are examples.
2P/3W 15 A 250 V
2P/3W 20 A 250 V
2P/3W 15 A 250 V
2P/3W 15 A 125 V
2P/3W 15 A 250 V
Attention
ff Use the supplied power cord and ground at the outlet.
ff Use the power cord matching the used power supply voltage and outlet shape.
Note
ff The supplied power cords vary depending on the country or region where you purchased the product.
Installation mode
The installation modes of the projector are as follows. Set [FRONT/REAR]/[FLOOR/CEILING] in the
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTION METHOD] (x page 125) depending on the installation mode.
Setting on a desk/floor and projecting forward
Setting on a desk/floor and projecting from rear
(Using the translucent screen)
Menu item
Setting value
Menu item
[FRONT/REAR]
[FRONT]
[FRONT/REAR]
[REAR]
[FLOOR/CEILING]
[AUTO] or [FLOOR]
[FLOOR/CEILING]
[AUTO] or [FLOOR]
36 - ENGLISH
Setting value
Chapter 2
Getting Started — Setting up
Mounting on the ceiling and projecting forward
Mounting on the ceiling and projecting from rear
(Using the translucent screen)
Menu item
Setting value
Menu item
[FRONT/REAR]
[FRONT]
[FRONT/REAR]
[REAR]
[FLOOR/CEILING]
[AUTO] or [CEILING]
[FLOOR/CEILING]
[AUTO] or [CEILING]
Portrait setting and projecting forward
Setting value
Portrait setting and projecting from rear
(Using the translucent screen)
Menu item
Setting value
Menu item
[FRONT/REAR]
[FRONT]
[FRONT/REAR]
Setting value
[REAR]
[FLOOR/CEILING]
Set in accordance with the image
to project.
[FLOOR/CEILING]
Set in accordance with the image
to project.
Note
ff In the portrait setting, the on-screen menu is displayed sideways.
To display the on-screen menu vertically, go to the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] (x page 116) and change the
[OSD ROTATION] setting.
ff The projector has a built-in angle sensor. The attitude of the projector is automatically detected by setting [FLOOR/CEILING] to [AUTO] in
the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTION METHOD].
rrAngle sensor
The range of the installation attitude that is detected by the angle sensor built-in the projector is as follows.
Floor standing installation
30°
30°
Ceiling mount installation
Floor standing installation
Projection direction
ENGLISH - 37
Chapter 2
Getting Started — Setting up
Parts for installation (optional)
The optional Ceiling Mount Bracket is required. The Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model No.: ET‑PKD120H (for High
Ceilings), ET‑PKD120S (for Low Ceilings), ET‑PKD130H (for High Ceilings, 6-axis Adjustment)) is used together
with the Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model No.: ET‑PKE301B (Projector Mount Bracket)).
Model No.: ET‑PKD120H (for High Ceilings), ET‑PKD120S (for Low Ceilings), ET‑PKD130H (for High
Ceilings, 6-axis Adjustment), ET‑PKE301B (Projector Mount Bracket)
When the projector is mounted to the existing Ceiling Mount Bracket (in combination with the Model No.:
ET‑PKD120H (for High Ceilings) or ET‑PKD120S (for Low Ceilings), and the Model No.: ET‑PKE300B (Projector
Mount Bracket)), it is necessary to replace the drop-prevention wire rope with the one corresponding to this
projector. Consult your dealer.
Drop-prevention set (service model no.: DPPW1004ZA/X1)
ffBe sure to use the Ceiling Mount Bracket specified for this projector.
ffRefer to the Installation Instructions of the Ceiling Mount Bracket when installing and setting up the projector.
Attention
ff To ensure projector performance and security, installation of the Ceiling Mount Bracket must be carried out by your dealer or a qualified
technician.
Projected image and throw distance
Install the projector referring to the projected image size and projection distance.
Attention
ff Before setting up, read “Precautions for use” (x page 20).
Figure of projected image and throw distance
Screen
SH
SD
L1
L (LW/LT)
H
SH
Projected image
SW
SW
L1
L (LW/LT)
Screen
Note
ff This illustration is prepared on the assumption that the projected image size and position have been aligned to fit full in the screen.
ff This illustration is not in accurate scale.
SH
Projected image height
SW
Projected image width
SD
Projected image size
H
L*1
(LW/LT)*2
L1
Distance from the lens center to the bottom edge of the projected image
Projection distance (distance from the front end of the projection lens to the screen)
Lens protrusion dimension (distance from the front surface of the projector to the front end of the projection
lens)
*1 For details about calculating the projection distance, refer to “Formula for calculating the projection distance per projection lens” (x page 44).
*2 LW: Minimum projection distance when the Zoom Lens is used
LT: Maximum projection distance when the Zoom Lens is used
38 - ENGLISH
Chapter 2
Getting Started — Setting up
(Unit: m)
Projection lens Model No.
Lens protrusion dimension (L1) (approximate value)
ET‑EMU100
0.346
ET‑EMW200
0.152
ET‑EMW300
0.121
ET‑EMW400
0.121
ET‑EMW500
0.122
ET‑EMS650/
ET‑EMS600
0.117
ET‑EMT750
0.166
ET‑EMT700
0.167
ET‑EMT850
0.173
ET‑EMT800
0.172
Note
ff For the adjustment range of the projected image position with the lens shift, refer to “Lens shift range” (x page 72).
[GEOMETRY] projection range
[VERTICAL KEYSTONE] (viewed from the side)
[HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE] (viewed from above)
Screen
Screen
Vertical arc correction (viewed from the side)
Horizontal arc correction (viewed from above)
Projection distance
Arc radius
Screen
Projection distance
Arc radius
Screen
Arc center
Arc center
Screen
Screen
Projection distance
Arc radius
Projection distance
Arc radius
ENGLISH - 39
Chapter 2
Projection
lens Model
No.
Only [KEYSTONE] used*1
Getting Started — Setting up
[KEYSTONE] and [CURVED CORRECTION] used together
Vertical
keystone
correction
angle α (°)
Horizontal
keystone
correction
angle β (°)
Vertical
keystone
correction
angle α (°)
Horizontal
keystone
correction
angle β (°)
Only [CURVED
CORRECTION] used
Min. value of Min. value of Min. value of Min. value of
R2/L2
R3/L3
R2/L2
R3/L3
ET‑EMU100
±5
±0
―
―
―
―
―
―
ET‑EMS650/
ET‑EMS600
±45
±40
±20
±15
0.9
2
0.5
1.1
ET‑EMW200
±14
±8
―
―
―
―
―
―
ET‑EMW300
±14
±8
―
―
―
―
―
―
ET‑EMW400
±22
±15
±8
±8
1.5
3.7
0.9
2.2
ET‑EMW500
±22
±15
±8
±8
1.2
3
0.7
1.7
ET‑EMT750/
ET‑EMT700
±45
±40
±20
±15
0.6
1.1
0.3
0.6
ET‑EMT850/
ET‑EMT800
±45
±40
±20
±15
0.3
0.6
0.2
0.3
*1 When [VERTICAL KEYSTONE] and [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE] are used simultaneously, correction cannot be made exceeding total of 55°.
Note
ff When [GEOMETRY] is used, the focus of the entire screen may be lost as correction increases.
ff The curved screen should be in the shape of a circular arc part of a perfect circle.
ff Adjustment range of the [GEOMETRY] items may not match the listed projection range depending on the projection lens. Use this projector
within the projection range, otherwise the correction may not work.
40 - ENGLISH
Chapter 2
Getting Started — Setting up
Projection distance of each projection lens
A ±5 % error in listed projection distances may occur.
When [GEOMETRY] is used, distance is corrected to become smaller than the specified image size.
rrWhen the screen aspect ratio is 16:10
(Unit: m)
Lens type
Projection lens Model No.
ET‑EMU100
Throw ratio*1
Projected image size
Height Width
Diagonal (SD)
(SH)
(SW)
2.03 (80")
1.077
1.723
2.29 (90")
1.212
1.939
2.54 (100")
1.346
2.154
3.05 (120")
1.615
2.585
3.81 (150")
2.019
3.231
5.08 (200")
2.692
4.308
6.35 (250")
3.365
5.385
7.62 (300")
4.039
6.462
8.89 (350")
4.712
7.539
10.16 (400")
5.385
8.616
12.70 (500")
6.731
10.770
15.24 (600")
8.077
12.923
0.330‑0.353:1
Min.
(LW)
―
―
0.70
0.84
1.06
1.43
1.79
2.16
2.52
2.89
―
―
Max.
(LT)
―
―
0.75
0.91
1.14
1.54
1.93
2.32
2.71
3.11
―
―
ET‑EMS650/
ET‑EMS600
1.35‑2.10:1
Min.
(LW)
2.30
2.59
2.89
3.47
4.35
5.82
7.29
8.76
10.23
11.69
14.63
17.57
Max.
(LT)
3.64
4.10
4.56
5.49
6.87
9.17
11.47
13.78
16.08
18.38
22.99
27.59
Zoom Lens
ET‑EMW300
ET‑EMW400
ET‑EMW500
0.480‑0.550:1
0.550‑0.690:1
Projection distance (L)
Min.
Max.
Min.
Max.
(LW)
(LT)
(LW)
(LT)
0.81
0.95
0.93
1.19
0.91
1.07
1.05
1.34
1.03
1.19
1.18
1.49
1.23
1.44
1.41
1.80
1.55
1.81
1.78
2.26
2.08
2.44
2.38
3.02
2.62
3.06
2.99
3.79
3.15
3.68
3.60
4.56
3.68
4.30
4.20
5.32
4.21
4.92
4.81
6.09
5.28
6.16
6.02
7.62
6.34
7.40
7.23
9.15
ET‑EMW200
0.690‑0.950:1
0.950‑1.36:1
Min.
(LW)
1.17
1.32
1.48
1.78
2.24
3.00
3.76
4.52
5.28
6.05
7.57
9.10
Max.
(LT)
1.64
1.85
2.06
2.48
3.12
4.17
5.23
6.28
7.34
8.39
10.50
12.61
*1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection with the projected image size of 2.54 m (100").
Lens type
Projection lens Model No.
Throw ratio*1
Projected image size
Zoom Lens
ET-EMT750/
ET-EMT850/
ET‑EMT700
ET‑EMT800*2
2.10‑4.14:1
4.14‑7.40:1
Projection distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
2.03 (80")
2.29 (90")
2.54 (100")
3.05 (120")
3.81 (150")
5.08 (200")
6.35 (250")
7.62 (300")
8.89 (350")
10.16 (400")
12.70 (500")
15.24 (600")
1.077
1.212
1.346
1.615
2.019
2.692
3.365
4.039
4.712
5.385
6.731
8.077
1.723
1.939
2.154
2.585
3.231
4.308
5.385
6.462
7.539
8.616
10.770
12.923
3.55
4.01
4.50
5.38
6.75
9.04
11.33
13.61
15.90
18.19
22.76
27.33
7.15
8.05
8.90
10.77
13.49
18.03
22.56
27.09
31.63
36.16
45.22
54.29
7.12
7.97
8.90
10.51
13.06
17.31
21.56
25.80
30.05
34.30
42.79
51.28
12.88
14.45
16.00
19.17
23.89
31.75
39.61
47.47
55.33
63.20
78.92
94.64
ET‑EMS650/
ET‑EMS600/
ET‑EMW400/
ET‑EMW500/
ET-EMT750/
ET‑EMT700/
ET-EMT850/
ET‑EMT800*2
-0.11 - 1.18
-0.12 - 1.33
-0.13 - 1.48
-0.16 - 1.78
-0.20 - 2.22
-0.27 - 2.96
-0.34 - 3.70
-0.40 - 4.44
-0.47 - 5.18
-0.54 - 5.92
-0.67 - 7.40
-0.81 - 8.88
Min.
(LW)
1.61
1.82
2.03
2.44
3.07
4.11
5.15
6.19
7.23
8.27
10.34
12.42
Max.
(LT)
2.34
2.64
2.93
3.53
4.43
5.92
7.42
8.91
10.40
11.90
14.89
17.87
(Unit: m)
Height position (H)
ET‑EMU100
ET‑EMW200
ET‑EMW300
―
―
0.00 - 0.94
0.00 - 1.13
0.00 - 1.41
0.00 - 1.88
0.00 - 2.36
0.00 - 2.83
0.00 - 3.30
0.00 - 3.77
―
―
0.11 - 0.97
0.12 - 1.09
0.13 - 1.21
0.16 - 1.45
0.20 - 1.82
0.27 - 2.42
0.34 - 3.03
0.40 - 3.63
0.47 - 4.24
0.54 - 4.85
0.67 - 6.06
0.81 - 7.27
0.00 - 1.08
0.00 - 1.21
0.00 - 1.35
0.00 - 1.62
0.00 - 2.02
0.00 - 2.69
0.00 - 3.37
0.00 - 4.04
0.00 - 4.71
0.00 - 5.38
0.00 - 6.73
0.00 - 8.08
*1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection with the projected image size of 2.54 m (100").
*2 ET-EMT800 cannot be used with the projected image size of 15.24 (600").
ENGLISH - 41
Chapter 2
Getting Started — Setting up
rrWhen the screen aspect ratio is 16:9
(Unit: m)
Lens type
Projection lens Model No.
ET‑EMU100
Throw ratio*1
Projected image size
Height Width
Diagonal (SD)
(SH)
(SW)
2.03 (80")
0.996
1.771
2.29 (90")
1.121
1.992
2.54 (100")
1.245
2.214
3.05 (120")
1.494
2.657
3.81 (150")
1.868
3.321
5.08 (200")
2.491
4.428
6.35 (250")
3.113
5.535
7.62 (300")
3.736
6.641
8.89 (350")
4.358
7.748
10.16 (400")
4.981
8.855
12.70 (500")
6.226
11.069
15.24 (600")
7.472
13.283
0.330‑0.353:1
Min.
(LW)
―
―
0.72
0.87
1.09
1.47
1.84
2.22
2.59
2.97
―
―
Max.
(LT)
―
―
0.77
0.93
1.18
1.58
1.98
2.39
2.79
3.20
―
―
ET‑EMS650/
ET‑EMS600
1.35‑2.10:1
Min.
(LW)
2.37
2.67
2.97
3.57
4.48
5.99
7.49
9.00
10.51
12.02
15.04
18.06
Max.
(LT)
3.75
4.22
4.69
5.64
7.06
9.43
11.79
14.16
16.53
18.89
23.63
28.36
Zoom Lens
ET‑EMW200
ET‑EMW300
ET‑EMW400
ET‑EMW500
0.480‑0.550:1
0.550‑0.690:1
Projection distance (L)
Min.
Max.
Min.
Max.
(LW)
(LT)
(LW)
(LT)
0.83
0.97
0.96
1.22
0.94
1.10
1.08
1.38
1.06
1.22
1.21
1.53
1.27
1.48
1.46
1.85
1.60
1.87
1.83
2.32
2.14
2.50
2.45
3.11
2.69
3.14
3.07
3.90
3.24
3.78
3.70
4.68
3.78
4.42
4.32
5.47
4.33
5.06
4.94
6.26
5.42
6.33
6.19
7.83
6.52
7.61
7.43
9.41
0.690‑0.950:1
0.950‑1.36:1
Min.
(LW)
1.20
1.36
1.52
1.83
2.30
3.08
3.87
4.65
5.43
6.22
7.78
9.40
Max.
(LT)
1.69
1.90
2.12
2.56
3.21
4.29
5.37
6.46
7.54
8.62
10.79
12.96
*1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection with the projected image size of 2.54 m (100").
Lens type
Projection lens Model No.
Throw ratio*1
Projected image size
Zoom Lens
ET-EMT750/
ET-EMT850/
ET‑EMT700
ET‑EMT800*2
2.10‑4.15:1
4.12‑7.40:1
Projection distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
2.03 (80")
2.29 (90")
2.54 (100")
3.05 (120")
3.81 (150")
5.08 (200")
6.35 (250")
7.62 (300")
8.89 (350")
10.16 (400")
12.70 (500")
15.24 (600")
0.996
1.121
1.245
1.494
1.868
2.491
3.113
3.736
4.358
4.981
6.226
7.472
1.771
1.992
2.214
2.657
3.321
4.428
5.535
6.641
7.748
8.855
11.069
13.283
3.65
4.12
4.60
5.53
6.94
9.29
11.64
13.99
16.35
18.70
23.40
28.10
7.35
8.28
9.20
11.08
13.87
18.53
23.19
27.85
32.51
37.17
46.49
55.80
7.31
8.18
9.10
10.80
13.42
17.78
22.15
26.51
30.88
35.24
43.97
52.70
13.23
14.84
16.40
19.69
24.54
32.62
40.70
48.78
56.86
64.94
81.11
97.27
ET‑EMS650/
ET‑EMS600/
ET‑EMW400/
ET‑EMW500/
ET-EMT750/
ET‑EMT700/
ET-EMT850/
ET‑EMT800*2
-0.17 - 1.16
-0.19 - 1.31
-0.21 - 1.45
-0.25 - 1.74
-0.31 - 2.18
-0.42 - 2.91
-0.52 - 3.63
-0.62 - 4.36
-0.73 - 5.08
-0.83 - 5.81
-1.04 - 7.26
-1.25 - 8.72
Max.
(LT)
2.41
2.71
3.02
3.63
4.56
6.09
7.63
9.16
10.70
12.23
15.30
18.37
(Unit: m)
Height position (H)
ET‑EMU100
ET‑EMW200
ET‑EMW300
―
―
-0.07 - 0.90
-0.08 - 1.08
-0.10 - 1.35
-0.14 - 1.80
-0.17 - 2.25
-0.21 - 2.70
-0.24 - 3.15
-0.28 - 3.60
―
―
0.06 - 0.94
0.06 - 1.06
0.07 - 1.18
0.08 - 1.41
0.10 - 1.76
0.14 - 2.35
0.17 - 2.94
0.21 - 3.53
0.24 - 4.12
0.28 - 4.70
0.35 - 5.88
0.42 - 7.06
-0.06 - 1.05
-0.06 - 1.18
-0.07 - 1.31
-0.08 - 1.58
-0.10 - 1.97
-0.14 - 2.63
-0.17 - 3.29
-0.21 - 3.94
-0.24 - 4.60
-0.28 - 5.26
-0.35 - 6.57
-0.42 - 7.89
*1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection with the projected image size of 2.54 m (100").
*2 ET-EMT800 cannot be used with the projected image size of 15.24 (600").
42 - ENGLISH
Min.
(LW)
1.66
1.87
2.09
2.51
3.15
4.22
5.29
6.36
7.43
8.50
10.63
12.77
Chapter 2
Getting Started — Setting up
rrWhen the screen aspect ratio is 4:3
(Unit: m)
Lens type
Projection lens Model No.
ET‑EMU100
Throw ratio*1
Projected image size
Height Width
Diagonal (SD)
(SH)
(SW)
2.03 (80")
1.219
1.626
2.29 (90")
1.372
1.829
2.54 (100")
1.524
2.032
3.05 (120")
1.829
2.438
3.81 (150")
2.286
3.048
5.08 (200")
3.048
4.064
6.35 (250")
3.810
5.080
7.62 (300")
4.572
6.096
8.89 (350")
5.334
7.112
10.16 (400")
6.096
8.128
12.70 (500")
7.620
10.160
15.24 (600")
9.144
12.192
0.396‑0.425:1
Min.
(LW)
―
―
0.79
0.96
1.21
1.62
2.03
2.45
2.86
3.28
―
―
Max.
(LT)
―
―
0.85
1.03
1.30
1.74
2.19
2.63
3.08
3.52
―
―
ET‑EMS650/
ET‑EMS600
1.62‑2.50:1
Min.
(LW)
2.61
2.94
3.28
3.94
4.94
6.60
8.26
9.92
11.58
13.25
16.57
19.89
Max.
(LT)
4.13
4.65
5.17
6.22
7.78
10.39
12.99
15.60
18.21
20.81
26.03
31.24
Zoom Lens
ET‑EMW200
ET‑EMW300
0.580‑0.660:1
0.660‑0.830:1
Projection distance (L)
Min.
Max.
Min.
Max.
(LW)
(LT)
(LW)
(LT)
0.92
1.08
1.06
1.35
1.04
1.22
1.20
1.52
1.17
1.35
1.34
1.69
1.40
1.64
1.61
2.04
1.76
2.06
2.02
2.56
2.37
2.76
2.70
3.43
2.97
3.47
3.39
4.30
3.57
4.17
4.08
5.16
4.17
4.87
4.76
6.03
4.77
5.57
5.45
6.90
5.98
6.98
6.82
8.63
7.18
8.39
8.19
10.37
ET‑EMW400
ET‑EMW500
0.830‑1.15:1
1.14‑1.63:1
Min.
(LW)
1.33
1.50
1.68
2.02
2.54
3.40
4.26
5.13
5.99
6.85
8.58
10.30
Max.
(LT)
1.86
2.10
2.34
2.82
3.54
4.73
5.92
7.12
8.31
9.50
11.89
14.28
*1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection with the projected image size of 2.54 m (100").
Lens type
Projection lens Model No.
Throw ratio*1
Projected image size
Zoom Lens
ET-EMT750/
ET-EMT850/
ET‑EMT700
ET‑EMT800*2
2.50‑4.97:1
4.93‑8.90:1
Projection distance (L)
Diagonal (SD)
Height
(SH)
Width
(SW)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
Min.
(LW)
Max.
(LT)
2.03 (80")
2.29 (90")
2.54 (100")
3.05 (120")
3.81 (150")
5.08 (200")
6.35 (250")
7.62 (300")
8.89 (350")
10.16 (400")
12.70 (500")
15.24 (600")
1.219
1.372
1.524
1.829
2.286
3.048
3.810
4.572
5.334
6.096
7.620
9.144
1.626
1.829
2.032
2.438
3.048
4.064
5.080
6.096
7.112
8.128
10.160
12.192
4.03
4.55
5.07
6.11
7.66
10.25
12.84
15.43
18.01
20.60
25.78
30.96
8.11
9.13
10.10
12.21
15.29
20.42
25.55
30.69
35.82
40.95
51.21
61.48
8.01
8.98
10.00
11.86
14.74
19.55
24.36
29.17
33.98
38.78
48.40
58.02
14.54
16.32
18.10
21.66
27.00
35.90
44.80
53.70
62.60
71.50
89.30
107.10
ET‑EMS650/
ET‑EMS600/
ET‑EMW400/
ET‑EMW500/
ET-EMT750/
ET‑EMT700/
ET-EMT850/
ET‑EMT800*2
-0.12 - 1.34
-0.14 - 1.51
-0.15 - 1.68
-0.18 - 2.01
-0.23 - 2.51
-0.30 - 3.35
-0.38 - 4.19
-0.46 - 5.03
-0.53 - 5.87
-0.61 - 6.71
-0.76 - 8.38
-0.91 - 10.06
Min.
(LW)
1.83
2.07
2.31
2.77
3.48
4.66
5.83
7.01
8.19
9.36
11.72
14.07
Max.
(LT)
2.66
2.99
3.33
4.01
5.02
6.71
8.40
10.09
11.79
13.48
16.86
20.24
(Unit: m)
Height position (H)
ET‑EMU100
ET‑EMW200
ET‑EMW300
―
―
0.00 - 1.07
0.00 - 1.28
0.00 - 1.60
0.00 - 2.13
0.00 - 2.67
0.00 - 3.20
0.00 - 3.73
0.00 - 4.27
―
―
0.12 - 1.10
0.14 - 1.23
0.15 - 1.37
0.18 - 1.65
0.23 - 2.06
0.30 - 2.74
0.38 - 3.43
0.46 - 4.11
0.53 - 4.80
0.61 - 5.49
0.76 - 6.86
0.91 - 8.23
0.00 - 1.22
0.00 - 1.37
0.00 - 1.52
0.00 - 1.83
0.00 - 2.29
0.00 - 3.05
0.00 - 3.81
0.00 - 4.57
0.00 - 5.33
0.00 - 6.10
0.00 - 7.62
0.00 - 9.14
*1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection with the projected image size of 2.54 m (100").
*2 ET-EMT800 cannot be used with the projected image size of 15.24 (600").
ENGLISH - 43
Chapter 2
Getting Started — Setting up
Formula for calculating the projection distance per projection lens
To use a projected image size not listed in this manual, check the projected image size SD (m) and use the
respective formula to calculate projection distance.
The unit of all the formulae is m. (Values obtained by the following calculation formulae contain a slight error.)
When calculating a projection distance using image size designation (value in inches), multiply the value in inches
by 0.0254 and substitute it into SD in the formula for calculating the projection distance.
rrZoom lens
Projection lens Model No.
Throw ratio
Aspect ratio
0.330 ‑ 0.353:1
Projection distance (L) formula
Min. (LW)
Max. (LT)
16:10
= 0.2879 x SD - 0.0355
= 0.3095 x SD - 0.0363
0.330 ‑ 0.353:1
16:9
= 0.2959 x SD - 0.0355
= 0.3181 x SD - 0.0363
0.396 ‑ 0.425:1
4:3
= 0.3259 x SD - 0.0355
= 0.3503 x SD - 0.0363
1.35 - 2.10:1
16:10
= 1.1559 x SD - 0.0491
= 1.8130 x SD - 0.0399
1.35 - 2.10:1
16:9
= 1.1880 x SD - 0.0491
= 1.8634 x SD - 0.0399
1.62 - 2.50:1
4:3
= 1.3086 x SD - 0.0491
= 2.0524 x SD - 0.0399
0.480 - 0.550:1
16:10
= 0.4189 x SD - 0.0435
= 0.4888 x SD - 0.0473
0.480 - 0.550:1
16:9
= 0.4306 x SD - 0.0435
= 0.5023 x SD - 0.0473
0.580 - 0.660:1
4:3
= 0.4742 x SD - 0.0435
= 0.5533 x SD - 0.0473
0.550 - 0.690:1
16:10
= 0.4772 x SD - 0.0397
= 0.6031 x SD - 0.0397
0.550 - 0.690:1
16:9
= 0.4904 x SD - 0.0397
= 0.6199 x SD - 0.0397
0.660 - 0.830:1
4:3
= 0.5402 x SD - 0.0397
= 0.6828 x SD - 0.0397
0.690 - 0.950:1
16:10
= 0.6003 x SD - 0.0518
= 0.8303 x SD - 0.0460
0.690 - 0.950:1
16:9
= 0.6170 x SD - 0.0518
= 0.8534 x SD - 0.0460
0.830 - 1.15:1
4:3
= 0.6795 x SD - 0.0518
= 0.9400 x SD - 0.0460
0.950 - 1.36:1
16:10
= 0.8185 x SD - 0.0509
= 1.1760 x SD - 0.0500
0.950 - 1.36:1
16:9
= 0.8413 x SD - 0.0509
= 1.2087 x SD - 0.0500
1.14 - 1.63:1
4:3
= 0.9266 x SD - 0.0509
= 1.3313 x SD - 0.0500
ET‑EMT750/
ET‑EMT700
2.10 - 4.14:1
16:10
= 1.8007 x SD - 0.1082
= 3.5693 x SD - 0.1046
2.10 - 4.15:1
16:9
= 1.8508 x SD - 0.1082
= 3.6685 x SD - 0.1046
2.50 - 4.97:1
4:3
= 2.0385 x SD - 0.1082
= 4.0407 x SD - 0.1046
ET‑EMT850/
ET‑EMT800
4.14 - 7.40:1
16:10
= 3.3441 x SD + 0.3209
= 6.1906 x SD + 0.2998
4.12 - 7.40:1
16:9
= 3.4371 x SD + 0.3209
= 6.3627 x SD + 0.2998
4.93 ‑ 8.90:1
4:3
= 3.7858 x SD + 0.3209
= 7.0082 x SD + 0.2998
ET-EMU100
ET‑EMS650/
ET‑EMS600
ET‑EMW200
ET‑EMW300
ET‑EMW400
ET‑EMW500
Adjusting adjustable feet
Install the projector on a flat surface so that the front of the projector is parallel to the screen surface and the
projection screen is rectangular.
If the screen is tilted downward, extend the front adjustable feet so that the projected image becomes rectangular.
The adjustable feet can also be used to adjust the projector to be level when it is tilted in the horizontal direction.
Adjustable feet can be extended by turning them as shown in the figure. Turning them in the opposite direction will
return them to the original position.
Maximum adjustable range
Adjustable feet : 23 mm (29/32") each
Attention
ff Be careful not to block the intake/exhaust vents with your hands or any objects when adjusting the adjustable feet while the light source is
on. (x page 31)
44 - ENGLISH
Chapter 2
Getting Started — Attaching/removing the projection lens
Attaching/removing the projection lens
Move the lens position to the home position before replacing or removing the projection lens. (x page 71)
Attention
ff Do not attach or remove the projection lens while the projector is installed to a ceiling or in a high location.
ff Replace the projection lens after turning off the projector.
ff Do not touch the electric contacts of the projection lens. Dust or dirt may cause poor contact.
ff Do not touch the surface of the projection lens with your bare hands.
ff Do not turn the gear of the projection lens by hand. Doing so may damage the motor.
ff Before attaching the projection lens, remove the lens cover attached to the projection lens.
ff Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.​takes no responsibility for any damage or malfunction of the product resulting from the use of projection lenses
which are not manufactured by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.​Be sure to use the specified projection lenses.
Note
ff For the adjustment procedure of the focus, zoom, and lens shift after attaching the projector lens, refer to “Adjusting the focus, zoom, and
lens shift” (x page 68).
ff For the adjustment procedure of the focus balance in the center and periphery of the projected image when the Zoom Lens (Model No.:
ET‑EMW200, ET‑EMW300, ET‑EMW400, ET‑EMW500, ET‑EMU100) is used, refer to “Adjusting the focus balance” (x page 69).
Attaching the projection lens
Attach the projection lens using the following procedure.
Start from Step 2) when the dustproof sponge is already removed.
ffTool used: Ball point hex driver (diagonal 2.5 mm (3/32"))
Dustproof sponge
Top slide cover attachment line
Top slide cover
Lens lock lever
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Lens fixing screw
Mark on the projection lens (red)
Screw hole
Protruding mark on the projector
Lens lock lever
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Lens fixing screws
Fig. 7
Lens fixing screws
ENGLISH - 45
Chapter 2
Getting Started — Attaching/removing the projection lens
1)
Remove the dustproof sponge. (Fig. 1)
2)
Remove the top slide cover. (Fig. 2)
ffSlide the top slide cover until the top slide cover attachment line is visible.
Once the top slide cover attachment line is visible, remove by lifting.
3)
Confirm that the lens lock lever is positioned at the Unlock side. (Fig. 3)
ffIf the lens lock lever is at the Lock side (Fig. 5), pinch the lens lock lever and turn to the Unlock side. (Fig. 3)
4)
Align the mark on the projection lens (red) with the protruding mark of the projector, and insert the
projection lens all the way in. (Fig. 4)
5)
While holding the projection lens, turn the lock lever fully to the Lock side. (Fig. 5)
ffMake sure to fully turn the lens lock lever.
ffThe light source does not light up when the projection lens is not locked.
6)
Secure the projection lens with the supplied lens fixing screw.
ffWhen attaching a projection lens other than the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-EMU100) to the projector,
secure the projection lens to the screw hole on the right of the projection lens using a ball point hex driver.
(Fig. 6)
ffWhen attaching the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-EMU100) to the projector, use the ball point hex driver
supplied with the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-EMU100) to fix the lens to the screw holes (4 locations)
around the projection lens. (Fig. 7)
The four lens fixing screws supplied with the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-EMU100) are the same as the lens
fixing screws supplied with the projector.
7)
Attach the top slide cover. (Fig. 2)
ffAlign the top slide cover with the top slide cover attachment line, and attach it by sliding.
Attention
ff Store the removed dustproof sponge and the remaining lens fixing screws in a safe place.
ff If the projection lens was replaced, execute the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [LENS CALIBRATION]. (x page 70)
ff When installing the projector to a ceiling or in a high location, install the projector after attaching the projection lens to the projector.
46 - ENGLISH
Chapter 2
Getting Started — Attaching/removing the projection lens
Removing the projection lens
Remove the projection lens using the following procedure.
Lens fixing screw
Lens fixing screws
Fig. 1
Top slide cover
Fig. 2
Lens fixing screws
Top slide cover attachment line
Lens lock lever
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
1)
Remove the lens fixing screw.
ffFor a projection lens other than the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-EMU100), remove the screw on the right of
the projection lens using a ball point hex driver. (Fig. 1)
ffFor the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-EMU100), remove the lens fixing screws (4 locations) around the
projection lens using the ball point hex driver supplied with the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-EMU100).
(Fig. 2)
2)
Remove the top slide cover. (Fig. 3)
ffSlide the top slide cover until the top slide cover attachment line is visible.
Once the top slide cover attachment line is visible, remove it by lifting.
3)
While holding the projection lens, pinch the lens lock lever and turn to the Unlock side. (Fig. 4)
4)
Remove the projection lens. (Fig. 5)
5)
Attach the top slide cover. (Fig. 3)
ffAlign the top slide cover with the top slide cover attachment line, and attach it by sliding.
Attention
ff Store the removed projection lens where it will be free from vibration and impact.
ff Store the removed lens fixing screw in a safe place.
ENGLISH - 47
Chapter 2
Getting Started — Connecting
Connecting
Before connecting
ffBefore connecting, carefully read the operating instructions for the external device to be connected.
ffTurn off the power of all devices before connecting cables.
ffConnect cables taking care of the following descriptions. Failure to do so may result in malfunctions.
ggWhen connecting a cable to a device connected to the projector or the projector itself, touch any nearby
metallic objects to eliminate static electricity from your body before performing work.
ggDo not use unnecessarily long cables to connect a device to the projector or to the projector body. The longer
the cable, the more susceptible to noise it becomes. Since using a cable while it is wound makes it act like an
antenna, it is more susceptible to noise.
ggWhen connecting cables, connect GND first, then insert the connecting terminal of the connecting device in a
straight manner.
ffAcquire any connection cable necessary to connect the external device to the system that is neither supplied
with the device nor available as an option.
ffIf synchronization signals output from computers or video equipment are disrupted due to changes in the video
output setting or other reasons, colors of projected images may be temporarily disrupted.
ffFor the connection when linking multiple projectors and using the contrast synchronization function and the
shutter synchronization function, refer to “Connecting example when using the contrast synchronization function/
shutter synchronization function” (x page 51).
ffSome computer models or graphic cards are not compatible with the projector.
ffConnect using an extension device, etc., when installing the projector away from the video equipment. The
projector may not display the image properly when it is connected directly using a long cable.
ffFor details of the types of image signals that can be used with the projector, refer to “List of compatible signals”
(x page 268).
Connecting example: AV equipment
For <HDMI IN 1>/<HDMI IN 2> terminals
Blu-ray disc player
Note
ff Switching of the setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [HDMI IN] → [HDMI1] / [HDMI2] → [EDID SELECT] may be required depending
on the connected external device when HDMI signal is input.
ff For the HDMI cable, use an HDMI High Speed cable that conforms to the HDMI standards. However, when the following 4K image signal
exceeding the supported transmission speed of the HDMI High Speed cable is to be input, use the HDMI cable supporting the high speed
transmission of 18 Gbps such as the one with Premium HDMI cable authentication.
gg An image signal with high specification color depth and gradation such as 3840 x 2160/60p 4:2:2/36-bit or 3840 x 2160/60p 4:4:4/24-bit
Images may be disrupted or may not be projected when an image signal exceeding the supported transmission speed of the HDMI cable is
input.
ff The <HDMI IN 1> / <HDMI IN 2> terminals of the projector can be connected to an external device equipped with a DVI‑D terminal using an
HDMI/DVI conversion cable. However, this may not function properly for some external devices, and images may not be projected.
48 - ENGLISH
Chapter 2
Getting Started — Connecting
For <SDI IN> terminal
Digital VCR for commercial use
HD-SDI signal or 3G-SDI signal
Note
ff Setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SDI IN] may be necessary depending on the connected external device.
ff Use a connection cable 5C‑FB or higher (such as 5C‑FB or 7C‑FB), or Belden 1694A or higher to properly transmit the image. Use a
connection cable with length of 100 m (328'1") or shorter.
ff An error in signal detection may occur when an unsteady signal is connected. In such case, set the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SDI IN] to
the content corresponding to the input signal.
Connecting example: Computers
Control computer
Computer
Control computer
Attention
ff When connecting the projector to a computer or an external device, use the power cord supplied with each device and commercially
available shielded cables.
Note
ff Switching of the setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [HDMI IN] → [HDMI1] / [HDMI2] → [EDID SELECT] may be required depending
on the connected external device when HDMI signal is input.
ff For the HDMI cable, use an HDMI High Speed cable that conforms to the HDMI standards. However, when the following 4K image signal
exceeding the supported transmission speed of the HDMI High Speed cable is to be input, use the HDMI cable supporting the high speed
transmission of 18 Gbps such as the one with Premium HDMI cable authentication.
gg An image signal with high specification color depth and gradation such as 3840 x 2160/60p 4:2:2/36-bit or 3840 x 2160/60p 4:4:4/24-bit
Images may be disrupted or may not be projected when an image signal exceeding the supported transmission speed of the HDMI cable is
input.
ff The <HDMI IN 1> / <HDMI IN 2> terminals of the projector can be connected to an external device equipped with a DVI‑D terminal using an
HDMI/DVI conversion cable. However, this may not function properly for some external devices, and image may not be projected.
ff If you operate the projector using the computer with the resume feature (last memory), you may have to reset the resume feature to operate
the projector.
ENGLISH - 49
Chapter 2
Getting Started — Connecting
Connecting example using DIGITAL LINK
Twisted-pair-cable transmitters based on the communication standard HDBaseTTM such as the optional DIGITAL
LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G) use the twisted pair cable to transmit
input images, Ethernet, and serial control signal, and the projector can input such digital signal to the <DIGITAL
LINK> terminal.
Computer
Example of twisted-pair-cable transmitter
Computer cable
(commercially available)
Projector connecting terminals
HDMI cable
(commercially available)
Switching
hub
Control computer*1
VCR
(with built-in TBC)
Blu-ray disc player
*1 Control target is the projector or the twisted-pair-cable transmitter. The control itself may not be possible depending on the twisted-pair-cable
transmitter. Check the operating instructions of the device to be connected.
Attention
ff Always use one of the following when connecting a VCR.
gg Use a VCR with built-in time base corrector (TBC).
gg Use a time base corrector (TBC) between the projector and the VCR.
ff The image may be disrupted when nonstandard burst signal is connected. In such a case, connect the time base corrector (TBC) between
the projector and the external devices.
ff Ask a qualified technician or your dealer to install the cable wiring between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector. Image may
be disrupted if cable transmission characteristics cannot be obtained due to inadequate installation.
ff For the LAN cable between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector, use a cable that meets the following criteria:
gg Conforming to CAT5e or higher standards
gg Shielded type (including connectors)
gg Straight-through
gg Single wire
gg Diameter of the cable core is same or larger than AWG24 (AWG24, AWG23, etc.)
ff When laying cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector, confirm that cable characteristics are compatible with
CAT5e or higher using tools such as a cable tester or cable analyzer.
When a relay connector is used, include it in the measurement.
ff Do not use a switching hub between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector.
ff When connecting to the projector using a twisted-pair-cable transmitter (receiver) of other manufacturers, do not place another twisted-paircable transmitter between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter of other manufacturers and the projector. This may cause image to be disrupted.
ff To transmit the Ethernet and serial control signals using the <DIGITAL LINK> terminal, set the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET TYPE] to
[DIGITAL LINK] or [LAN & DIGITAL LINK].
ff To transmit the Ethernet signal using the <LAN> terminal, set the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET TYPE] to [LAN] or [LAN & DIGITAL LINK].
ff The <DIGITAL LINK> terminal and the <LAN> terminal are connected inside of the projector when the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET
TYPE] is set to [LAN & DIGITAL LINK]. Do not directly connect the <DIGITAL LINK> terminal and the <LAN> terminal using a LAN cable.
Construct the system so that it is not connected to the same network via the peripherals such as the switching hub or the twisted-pair-cable
transmitter.
ff Do not pull cables forcefully. Also, do not bend or fold cables unnecessarily.
ff To reduce the effects of noise as much as possible, stretch out the cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector
without any loops.
ff Lay the cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector away from other cables, particularly power cables.
ff When laying multiple cables, run them side by side along the shortest distance possible without bundling them together.
ff After laying the cables, go to the [NETWORK] menu → [DIGITAL LINK] → [DIGITAL LINK STATUS] and confirm that the value of [SIGNAL
QUALITY] is displayed in green which indicates normal quality. (x page 165)
50 - ENGLISH
Chapter 2
Getting Started — Connecting
Note
ff Switching of the setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [DIGITAL LINK IN] → [EDID SELECT] may be required depending on the
connected external device when DIGITAL LINK signal is input.
ff For the HDMI cable, use an HDMI High Speed cable that conforms to the HDMI standards. If a cable that does not conform to the HDMI
standards is used, images may be interrupted or may not be projected.
ff The optional Digital Interface Box (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G) and the optional DIGITAL LINK Switcher (Model No.: ET‑YFB200G) do not
support the input and output of the 4K image signal.
ff The maximum transmission distance between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector is 100 m (328'1") for the signal with
resolution of 1 920 x 1 200 dots or less. For the signal with the resolution exceeding 1 920 x 1 200 dots, the maximum transmission distance
is 50 m (164'1"). It is possible to transmit up to 150 m (492'2") if the twisted-pair-cable transmitter supports the long-reach communication
method. However, the signal that the projector can receive is only up to 1080/60p (1 920 x 1 080 dots, dot clock frequency 148.5 MHz)
for the long-reach communication method. If these distances are exceeded, image may be disrupted or a malfunction may occur in LAN
communication. Please note that Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.​does not support the use of the projector outside the maximum transmission
distance. When connecting with the long reach, image signal or distance that can be transmitted may be restricted, depending on the
specification of the twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
ff For twisted-pair-cable transmitters of other manufacturers of which the operation has been verified with the projector, visit the following
website.
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/
Note that the verification for devices of other manufacturers has been made for the items set by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd., and not all the
operations have been verified. For operation or performance problems caused by the devices of other manufacturers, contact the respective
manufacturers.
Connecting example when using the contrast synchronization function/shutter
synchronization function
In a case to construct a multi-display by linking projected images from multiple projectors, following functions can
be used by synchronizing multiple projectors using the <SERIAL/MULTI SYNC IN> terminal and the <SERIAL/
MULTI SYNC OUT> terminal.
ffContrast synchronization function
A linked screen with balanced contrast can be displayed by sharing the brightness level of the image signal
being input to each projector.
To use this function, set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] for each linked
projector as follows.
ggSet [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] → [MODE] to anything other than [OFF].
Set [MODE] to [MAIN] only on one projector that is synchronized. Set [MODE] to [SUB] for all other projectors.
ggSet [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] → [CONTRAST SYNC] to [ON].
Make the menu setting identical for each linked projector either by setting [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC
CONTRAST NX] to anything other than [OFF] or by setting [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] to
anything other than [OFF].
Set [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] to [OFF] and [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] to anything other than [OFF] when there
are projectors without [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] menu grouped into the linked projectors.
ffShutter synchronization function
This is a function to synchronize the shutter operation of the specified projector to other projectors, and the
effect using the shutter function including the fade out/fade in operation can be synchronized.
To use this function, set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] for each linked
projector as follows.
ggSet [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] → [MODE] to anything other than [OFF].
Set [MODE] to [MAIN] only on one projector that becomes the synchronization source within the linked
projectors. Set [MODE] to [SUB] for all other projectors.
ggSet [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] → [SHUTTER SYNC] to [ON].
Make the menu setting identical for each linked projector either by setting [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC
CONTRAST NX] to anything other than [OFF] or by setting [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] to
anything other than [OFF].
Set [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] to [OFF] and [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] to anything other than [OFF] when there
are projectors without [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] menu grouped into the linked projectors.
ENGLISH - 51
Chapter 2
Getting Started — Connecting
Connecting example
Connect all the projectors to be linked in a loop by daisy chain connection when using the contrast
synchronization function/shutter synchronization function. The number of linked projectors is limited to the
maximum of 64 projectors.
Connecting terminals of the synchronization source
Connecting terminals of the projector to synchronize
Communication cable (straight all connected)
Connecting terminals of the projector to synchronize
Connecting terminals of the projector to synchronize
Communication cable (straight all connected)
Note
ff The contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function can be used simultaneously.
ff For details on the settings of the contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function, refer to the [PROJECTOR
SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] (x page 141).
ff The menu items in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] are the same as the following setting items.
gg The [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] → [USER] → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]
gg The [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] → [USER] → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]
gg The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER SETTING] → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]
ff If there are any projectors which you do not want to synchronize within the linked projectors, set [CONTRAST SYNC] and [SHUTTER
SYNC] to [OFF] individually.
52 - ENGLISH
Chapter 3
Basic Operations
This chapter describes basic operations to start with.
ENGLISH - 53
Chapter 3
Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
Switching on/off the projector
Connecting the power cord
Make sure that the supplied power cord is securely fixed to the <AC IN> terminal of the projector to
prevent it from being removed easily.
Confirm that the <MAIN POWER> switch is on the <OFF> side before connecting the supplied power cord to the
projector.
Use the power cord matching with the power supply voltage and the shape of the outlet.
For details of power cord handling, refer to “Read this first!” (x page 5). For the shape of the outlet, refer to
“Usable outlet” (x page 36).
Note
ff The supplied power cords vary depending on the country or region where you purchased the product.
How to attach the power cord
Power cord holder
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
1)
Confirm that the power cord holder is raised so that the power cord can be inserted. (Fig. 1)
2)
Check the shapes of the <AC IN> terminal on the side of the projector and the power cord connector,
then insert the connector completely in the correct direction. (Fig. 2)
3)
Lower the power cord holder. (Fig. 3)
4)
Press down the power cord holder until the end of the power cord holder snaps onto the power cord
to secure the power cord. (Fig. 4)
ffWhen pressing down and snapping the power cord holder onto the power cord, hold the power cord from
the opposite side to avoid excessive force to be applied on the <AC IN> terminal.
54 - ENGLISH
Chapter 3
Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
How to remove the power cord
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
1)
Confirm that the <MAIN POWER> switch on the side of the projector is on the <OFF> side, and
remove the power plug from the outlet.
2)
Raise the power cord holder fixing the power cord upward. (Fig. 1)
ffFix the power cord holder by snapping into the projector.
3)
While holding the power cord connector, pull out the power cord from the <AC IN> terminal of the
projector. (Fig. 2)
Power indicator
Indicate the status of the power. Check the status of the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> before operating
the projector.
Power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)>
Indicator status
Projector status
Off
The main power is switched off.
Lit
Red
Blinking
The power is switched off. (standby mode)
Projection will start when the <POWER ON> button is pressed.
ff The setting of the projector is as follows.
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [OFF].
ff The projector may not operate when the light source indicator <LIGHT> or the
temperature indicator <TEMP> is blinking. (x page 239)
The power is switched off. (standby mode)
Projection will start when the <POWER ON> button is pressed.
ff The projector is in one of the following states.
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON].
gg When previewing the image corresponding to the input image to the projector
with the web control function. For details, refer to “[Remote preview lite] page”
(x page 186).
ff The indicator will change to a red light when the specified time has elapsed after the
projector enters the standby mode if the projector is set as following.
The specified time is the time set in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK
STARTUP] → [VALID PERIOD].
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON].
ff The projector may not operate when the light source indicator <LIGHT> or the
temperature indicator <TEMP> is blinking. (x page 239)
Green
Lit
Projecting.
Orange
Lit
The projector is preparing to switch off the projector.
The power is switched off after a while. (Changes to the standby mode.)
ENGLISH - 55
Chapter 3
Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
Note
ff While the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights orange, the fan is running to cool the projector.
ff For approximately five seconds after the projector is turned off, the indicator does not light up even if the power is turned on. Turn on the
power again after the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights/blinks red.
ff The projector consumes power even in standby mode (power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights/blinks red). Refer to “Standby mode
power consumption” (x page 266) for the power consumption.
ff When the projector receives the signal from the remote control, the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will blink in the following color
according to the status of the projector.
gg When the projector is in projection mode: Green
gg When the projector is in standby mode: Orange
However, if the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO], the indicator will stay lit red and will not blink if the
projector is in standby mode.
ff The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will blink green slowly while the shutter function is in use (shutter: closed), or while the no
signal lights-out function (x page 134, 137) is working and the light source is turned off.
Switching on the projector
Attach the projection lens before switching on the projector.
Remove the lens cover first.
4)
3)
2)
4)
1)
1)
Connect the power cord to the projector.
2)
Connect the power plug to an outlet.
3)
Press the <ON> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch to turn on the power.
ffThe power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights/blinks red, and the projector enters the standby mode.
4)
Press the <POWER ON> button.
ffThe power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights green and the image is soon projected on the screen.
Attention
ff Always remove the lens cover before starting the projection. Projecting continuously while the lens cover is attached may cause the lens
cover to heat up and result in a fire.
Note
ff It will take longer to start the projection when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO] compared to the time
when it is set to [NORMAL].
ff Projection will start in approximately one second when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON] and if the
power is turned on within a specified time after going into the standby mode.
The specified time is the time set in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK STARTUP] → [VALID PERIOD].
ff When the power is turned on or an input signal is switched, you may hear a high-frequency driving sound. This is not a malfunction.
ff If the power was turned off during projection at the previous use by setting the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF> or by using the breaker
directly while projecting, the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights green and an image is projected after a while when the power
is turned on by setting the <MAIN POWER> switch to <ON> or by turning the breaker on with the power plug connected to the outlet. This
applies only when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIAL STARTUP] is set to [LAST MEMORY].
56 - ENGLISH
Chapter 3
Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
When the initial setting screen is displayed
When the projector is switched on for the first time after purchase, or when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →
[INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET] is executed, the focus adjustment screen is displayed after the projection
starts, followed by the [INITIAL SETTING] screen and the [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen. If the
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [NETWORK/E-MAIL ONLY] is executed, the [ADMINISTRATOR
ACCOUNT] screen is displayed after the projection starts. Set them according to the circumstances.
In other occasions, you can change the settings by menu operations.
If you press the <MENU> button while the [INITIAL SETTING] screen is displayed, you can go back to the
previous screen.
Focus adjustment
Adjust the focus to display the menu screen clearly.
You may also need to adjust the zoom and lens shift.
Refer to “Adjusting the focus, zoom, and lens shift” (x page 68) for details.
1)
Press asqw to adjust the focus.
LENS
FOCUS
ADJUST
2)
Press the <MENU> button to proceed to the initial setting.
Initial setting (display language)
Select the language to show on the screen.
After completed the initial setting, you can change the display language from the [DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu.
1)
Press as to select the display language.
INITIAL SETTING
1/7
Please select DISPLAY LANGUAGE.
SELECT
ENTER
2)
SET
Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.
ENGLISH - 57
Chapter 3
Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
Initial setting (operation setting)
Set the items regarding the operating method depending on the duration of use and the usage of the projector.
After completed the initial setting, you can change the settings of each item from the [PROJECTOR SETUP]
menu → [OPERATION SETTING]. If you change the settings while using the projector, the duration until the
brightness decreases to half may shorten or the brightness may decrease.
This initial setting (operation setting) is prepared to complete the settings simply at once during the installation
when the operation of the projector is predetermined. This cannot set all the items regarding the operation setting.
When the detailed setting is required or setting change is required, ask the person responsible for this projector
(such as a person in charge of equipment or operation).
2/7
INITIAL SETTING
NORMAL
OPERATING MODE
LIGHT OUTPUT
100.0%
Set the way to use the projector. For details, please
refer to the operating instructions "When the initial
setting screen is displayed".
MENU SELECT
ENTER
CHANGE
SET
Note
ff For the relationship between the brightness and the runtime, refer to “Relationship between brightness and runtime” (x page 59).
ff For details on each setting item, refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [OPERATION SETTING].
1)
Press as to select [OPERATING MODE].
2)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[NORMAL]
[QUIET]
Set this item when high luminance is required. The estimated runtime is approximately 20 000
hours*1.
The brightness will decrease compared to [NORMAL], but select this item when operation with low
noise is prioritized. The estimated runtime is approximately 20 000 hours*1.
[USER1]
[USER2]
Set [LIGHT OUTPUT] as desired.
[USER3]
*1 Estimated runtime is the time until the brightness decreases to approximately half of the time of delivery when the projector is used with the
[PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] set to [3] and under environment of 0.15 mg/m3 dust.
The value of runtime is just an estimate, and is not the warranty period.
3)
Press as to select [LIGHT OUTPUT].
4)
Press qw to adjust.
Operation
5)
Adjustment
Brightness
Runtime (estimate)
Press w.
The screen becomes brighter.
The runtime becomes shorter.
Press q.
The screen becomes darker.
The runtime becomes longer.
Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.
58 - ENGLISH
Range of adjustment
8.0 % - 100.0 %
Chapter 3
Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
Relationship between brightness and runtime
The projector can be operated with arbitrary brightness and runtime by setting [LIGHT OUTPUT] to desired
setting.
The relationship between the [LIGHT OUTPUT] setting, brightness, and the estimated runtime is as follows. Make
the initial setting (operation setting) depending on the desired brightness of the projected image and runtime.
The values of the brightness and the runtime are just an estimate, and the graph indicating the relationship is just
an example. Also, these do not indicate the warranty period.
rrPT‑MZ20K
[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%)
Brightness (lm)
Estimated runtime*1 (hours)
100.0
20 000
20 000
80.0
16 000
21 500
60.0
12 000
23 000
40.0
8 000
25 000
20 000
100.0
90.0
80.0
70.0
60.0
50.0
8 000
40.0
Brightness (lm)
[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%)
*1 Estimated runtime is the time until the brightness decreases to approximately half of the time of delivery when the projector is used with the
[PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] set to [3] and under environment of 0.15 mg/m3 dust.
30.0
20 000
21 000
22 000
23 000
24 000
25 000
Estimated runtime (hours)
rrPT‑MZ17K
[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%)
Brightness (lm)
Estimated runtime*1 (hours)
100.0
16 500
20 000
80.0
13 200
21 500
60.0
9 900
23 000
40.0
6 600
25 000
16 500
100.0
90.0
80.0
70.0
60.0
50.0
6 600
40.0
Brightness (lm)
[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%)
*1 Estimated runtime is the time until the brightness decreases to approximately half of the time of delivery when the projector is used with the
[PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] set to [3] and under environment of 0.15 mg/m3 dust.
30.0
20 000
21 000
22 000
23 000
24 000
25 000
Estimated runtime (hours)
ENGLISH - 59
Chapter 3
Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
rrPT‑MZ14K
[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%)
Brightness (lm)
Estimated runtime*1 (hours)
100.0
14 000
20 000
80.0
11 200
21 500
60.0
8 400
23 000
40.0
5 600
25 000
100.0
90.0
80.0
70.0
60.0
50.0
40.0
30.0
20 000
14 000
5 600
21 000
22 000
23 000
24 000
Brightness (lm)
[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%)
*1 Estimated runtime is the time until the brightness decreases to approximately half of the time of delivery when the projector is used with the
[PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] set to [3] and under environment of 0.15 mg/m3 dust.
25 000
Estimated runtime (hours)
rrPT‑MZ11K
[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%)
Brightness (lm)
Estimated runtime*1 (hours)
100.0
11 000
20 000
80.0
8 800
21 500
60.0
6 600
23 000
40.0
4 400
25 000
11 000
100.0
90.0
80.0
70.0
60.0
50.0
40.0
30.0
20 000
4 400
21 000
22 000
23 000
24 000
Brightness (lm)
[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%)
*1 Estimated runtime is the time until the brightness decreases to approximately half of the time of delivery when the projector is used with the
[PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] set to [3] and under environment of 0.15 mg/m3 dust.
25 000
Estimated runtime (hours)
Note
ff The runtime may be shorter than the estimation due to the influence of characteristics of each light source, conditions of use, installation
environment, etc.
ff If the runtime exceeds 20 000 hours, replacement of the components inside the projector may be required. Consult your dealer for details.
60 - ENGLISH
Chapter 3
Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
Initial setting (installation setting)
Set [FRONT/REAR] and [FLOOR/CEILING] in [PROJECTION METHOD] depending on the installation mode.
Refer to “Installation mode” (x page 36) for details.
After completed the initial setting, you can change the setting from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →
[PROJECTION METHOD].
1)
Press qw to switch the setting.
3/7
INITIAL SETTING
PROJECTION METHOD
FRONT/REAR
FLOOR/CEILING
FRONT
AUTO
Change the projection method (FRONT/REAR,
FLOOR/CEILING) if the screen display is upside down
or inverted.
MENU SELECT
ENTER
2)
CHANGE
SET
Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.
Initial setting (standby mode)
Set the operation mode during standby. The factory default setting is [NORMAL], which allows you to use the
network function during standby. To keep power consumption low during standby, set this item to [ECO].
After completed the initial setting, you can change the setting from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →
[STANDBY MODE].
1)
Press qw to switch the setting.
4/7
INITIAL SETTING
STANDBY MODE
NORMAL
When set to ECO, network functions and SERIAL OUT
terminal, and some RS-232C commands are not
available during standby.
CHANGE
ENTER
2)
SET
Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.
ENGLISH - 61
Chapter 3
Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
Initial setting (screen setting)
Set the screen format (aspect ratio) and display position of the image.
After completed the initial setting, you can change the settings of each item from the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu →
[SCREEN SETTING].
1)
Press qw to switch the setting.
ffThe setting will change each time you press the button.
5/7
INITIAL SETTING
16:10
SCREEN FORMAT
SCREEN POSITION
Set as necessary for the screen in use.
MENU SELECT
ENTER
CHANGE
SET
2)
Press as to select [SCREEN POSITION].
ff[SCREEN POSITION] cannot be selected or adjusted when [SCREEN FORMAT] is set to [16:10].
3)
Press qw to adjust.
5/7
INITIAL SETTING
SCREEN FORMAT
16:9
SCREEN POSITION
0
Set as necessary for the screen in use.
MENU SELECT
ENTER
4)
CHANGE
SET
Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.
62 - ENGLISH
Chapter 3
Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
Initial setting (time zone)
Set [TIME ZONE] in accordance with the country or region where you use the projector.
After completed the initial setting, you can change the setting from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATE
AND TIME]. The current settings are displayed in [LOCAL DATE] and [LOCAL TIME].
1)
Press qw to switch the setting.
6/7
INITIAL SETTING
TIME ZONE
+09:00
LOCAL DATE
20XX/01/01
LOCAL TIME
12 : 34 : 56
Please set up a time zone according to the area of your
country or region.
MENU SELECT
ENTER
2)
CHANGE
SET
Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.
Note
ff In the factory default setting, the time zone of the projector is set to +09:00 (Japan and Korea Standard Time). Change the setting of the
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATE AND TIME] → [TIME ZONE] to the time zone of the region where you use the projector.
Initial setting (date and time)
Set the local date and time.
After completed the initial setting, you can change the setting from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATE
AND TIME].
To set the date and time automatically, refer to “Setting the date and time automatically” (x page 139).
1)
Press as to select an item.
7/7
INITIAL SETTING
20XX
YEAR
1
MONTH
DAY
1
HOUR
12
MINUTE
34
SECOND
56
Please set the date and time of the built-in clock of the
projector.
MENU SELECT
ENTER
CHANGE
SET
2)
Press qw to switch the setting.
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffConfirm the setting value and complete the initial setting.
When the administrator account setting screen is displayed
When the projector is switched on for the first time after purchase, or when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →
[INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET] is executed, the focus adjustment screen is displayed after the projection
starts, followed by the [INITIAL SETTING] screen and the [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen. If the
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [NETWORK/E-MAIL ONLY] is executed, the [ADMINISTRATOR
ACCOUNT] screen is displayed after the projection starts.
To use the network function of this projector, set the user name and password of the administrator account. You
can also set it later from the [NETWORK] menu → [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT].
ENGLISH - 63
Chapter 3
Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
[PASSWORD POLICY]
Display a policy about the password of the administrator account.
1)
Press as to select [PASSWORD POLICY], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PASSWORD POLICY] screen is displayed.
ffPressing the <MENU> button to return to the [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen.
PASSWORD POLICY
Reusing passwords is not recommended.
Password cannot be blank.
A password consisting of at least eight
half-width characters and contaning
characters of at least three of the
following four types is recommended.
Uppercase letters
Lowercase letters
Digits
Symbols (~!@#$%^&*()_+\|}{][<>.,/?`)
MENU
RETURN
Setting the administrator account
Set the user name and password of the account with administrator rights.
1)
Press as to select [USER NAME], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [USER NAME] screen is displayed.
ffThe factory default setting of the user name for the administrator account is set to is “dispadmin”.
2)
Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
ffUp to 16 characters can be entered.
3)
After the user name is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [PASSWORD], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
5)
Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
ffUp to 16 characters can be entered.
ffThe password cannot be blank.
6)
After the password is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.
7)
Press as to select [PASSWORD CONFIRM], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
8)
Enter the password entered in Step 5).
9)
After the password is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.
10) Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
11) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff For limitation of the character string that can be set as a password, refer to “[PASSWORD POLICY]” (x page 64).
ff Pressing the <MENU> button while the [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed enables to advance to the next operation
without setting the password of the administrator account but network function of the projector will not be able to be used. When using the
web control function or the communication control via LAN (including operation by application software), set a password.
ff When pressing the <MENU> button while the [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed, the [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT]
screen will not be displayed from the next time the projector is switched on. To use the network function, set a password in the [NETWORK]
menu → [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT].
64 - ENGLISH
Chapter 3
Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
ff The user name and password of the administrator account can also be changed in “[Set up password] page (when accessed by
administrator account)” (x page 210) of the web control screen.
ff The user name and password of the standard user account without administrator rights can be set in “[Set up password] page (when
accessed by administrator account)” (x page 210) of the web control screen.
Making adjustments and selections
Perform the image adjustment when the projected image has stabilized.
When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [ACTIVE FOCUS OPTIMIZER] → [ACTIVE FOCUS] is
set to [OFF], it is recommended to perform the focus adjustment after 30 minutes or more have elapsed with the
focus test pattern displayed. For details of the test pattern, refer to “[TEST PATTERN] menu” (x page 155).
To use the active focus optimizer function, set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [ACTIVE FOCUS
OPTIMIZER] → [ACTIVE FOCUS] to [ON], and then adjust the focus.
For details of [ACTIVE FOCUS OPTIMIZER], refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [ACTIVE
FOCUS OPTIMIZER] (x page 129).
1) 8)
6)
7) 9)
2) 3)
2) 3)
5)
4)
4)
1) 6) 7) 8) 9)
1)
Press the <FOCUS> button to roughly adjust the focus of the projected image. (x page 68)
2)
Change the setting of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTION METHOD] depending on the
installation mode. (x page 36)
ffRefer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 79) for the operation of the menu screen.
3)
Execute the lens calibration.
ffExecute the lens calibration when using the projector for the first time after attaching the projection lens.
(x page 70)
4)
Select the input by pressing the input selection button on the remote control or the control panel.
ffThe buttons that can be used on the remote control or the control panel are as follows.
Remote control:
<HDMI 1> button, <HDMI 2> button, <DIGITAL LINK> button, <SDI> button, <INPUT MENU> button
Control panel:
<INPUT SELECT> button
ffFor details of operation for input selection, refer to “Selecting the input signal” (x page 67).
5)
Adjust the front, back and sideway tilt of the projector with the adjustable feet. (x page 44)
6)
Press the <SHIFT> button to adjust the position of the projected image.
7)
Press the <ZOOM> button to adjust the image size to match the screen.
8)
Press the <FOCUS> button again to adjust the focus.
9)
Press the <ZOOM> button again to adjust the zoom to match the projected image size to the screen.
Note
ff When the projector is switched on for the first time after purchase, or when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY
RESET] is executed, the focus adjustment screen is displayed after the projection starts, followed by the [INITIAL SETTING] screen and
the [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen. If the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [NETWORK/E-MAIL ONLY] is executed,
the [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed after the projection starts. For details, refer to “When the initial setting screen is
displayed” (x page 57) and “When the administrator account setting screen is displayed” (x page 63).
ENGLISH - 65
Chapter 3
Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector
Switching off the projector
3)
1)
4)
1)
2)
2)
1)
Press the <STANDBY> button.
ffThe [POWER OFF(STANDBY)] confirmation screen is displayed.
2)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
(Or press the <STANDBY> button again.)
ffProjection of the image will stop, and the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> on the projector body
lights orange. (The fan keeps running.)
3)
Wait for a few seconds until the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> of the projector body lights/
blinks red.
4)
Press the <OFF> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch to turn off the power.
Note
ff For approximately five seconds after the projector is turned off, the indicator does not light up even if the power is turned on.
ff Even when the <STANDBY> button is pressed and the projector is switched off, the projector consumes power if the main power
of the projector is on.
Usage of some functions is restricted but the power consumption during the standby mode is conserved when the [PROJECTOR SETUP]
menu → [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO].
ff While projecting, the power can be turned off by setting the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF>, or by directly using the breaker under
conditions where the <MAIN POWER> switch of the projector cannot be switched off/on easily such as while installing on the ceiling.
However, the settings or adjustments performed right before the power is turned off may not be reflected.
66 - ENGLISH
Chapter 3
Basic Operations — Projecting
Projecting
Check the projection lens attachment (x page 45), external device connection (x page 48) and the power
cord connection (x page 54), and turn on the power (x page 56) to start projection. Select the image to
project, and adjust appearance of the projected image.
Selecting the input signal
The input of the image to project can be switched. Method to switch the input is as follows.
ffPress the input selection button on the remote control and directly specify the input of the image to project.
ffDisplay the input selection screen and select the input of the image to project from the list.
Remote Control
Control Panel
Switching the input directly with the remote control
The input of the image to project can be switched by directly specifying it with the input selection button on the
remote control.
1)
Press the input selection button (<HDMI 1>, <HDMI 2>, <DIGITAL LINK>, <SDI>).
<HDMI 1>
Switches the input to HDMI.
The image of the signal input to the <HDMI IN 1> terminal is projected.
<HDMI 2>
Switches the input to HDMI.
The image of the signal input to the <HDMI IN 2> terminal is projected.
<DIGITAL LINK>
<SDI>
Switches the input to DIGITAL LINK.
The image of the signal input to the <DIGITAL LINK> terminal is projected.
Switches the input to SDI.
The image of the signal input to the <SDI IN> terminal is projected.
Attention
ff Images may not be projected properly depending on the external device, or the Blu-ray disc or DVD disc, to be played back.
Depending on the selected input, set the [PICTURE] menu → [SYSTEM SELECTOR]. When the SDI signal is input, set the [DISPLAY
OPTION] menu → [SDI IN].
ff Confirm the aspect ratio of the projection screen and the image, and switch to an optimum aspect ratio from the [POSITION] menu →
[ASPECT].
Note
ff When the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G) is connected to the <DIGITAL LINK>
terminal, the input on the DIGITAL LINK output supported device changes each time the <DIGITAL LINK> button is pressed. The input can
also be changed using the RS‑232C control command.
For twisted-pair-cable transmitters of other manufacturers, switch the input on the projector to DIGITAL LINK, and then switch the input on
the twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
ff When the projector is in standby mode, current input selection status cannot be changed even if the input selection button on the remote
control or the control panel is pressed.
ENGLISH - 67
Chapter 3
Basic Operations — Projecting
Switching the input by displaying the input selection screen
The input of the image for projection can be selected by displaying the input selection screen.
1)
Press the <INPUT MENU> button on the remote control or the <INPUT SELECT> button on the control
panel.
ffThe input selection screen is displayed.
INPUT SELECT
HDMI 1
HDMI 2
SDI
DIGITAL LINK
SELECT
ENTER
2)
SET
Press the <INPUT MENU> button on the remote control or the <INPUT SELECT> button on the control
panel again.
ffThe input will switch each time you press the button.
Note
ff Input can be switched by pressing as to select the input of the image for projection and pressing the <ENTER> button while the input
selection screen is displayed.
ff If the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G) is connected to the projector, the input
selection menu for the DIGITAL LINK output supported device is displayed when the <ENTER> button is pressed while the DIGITAL LINK
input is selected in the input selection screen.
ff If the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G) is connected to the projector, the DIGITAL
LINK logo and the input name selected in the DIGITAL LINK output supported device are displayed in the display section of the [DIGITAL
LINK] in the input selection screen.
Adjusting the focus, zoom, and lens shift
Adjust the focus, zoom, and lens shift if the image projected to the screen or its position is shifted even if the
projector and the screen are set up in the correct positions.
ffFocus and zoom cannot be adjusted by turning the projection lens by hand.
ffWhen the following projection lens is used, also refer to “Adjusting the focus balance” (x page 69).
ggZoom Lens (Model No.: ET‑EMW200, ET‑EMW300, ET‑EMW400, ET‑EMW500, ET‑EMU100)
Using the control panel
1)
Press the <LENS> button on the control panel.
ffPressing the button changes the adjustment screen in the order of [FOCUS], [ZOOM], and [SHIFT].
2)
Select each adjustment item and press asqw to adjust.
Using the remote control
1)
Press the lens buttons (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>) on the remote control.
ffPressing the <FOCUS> button: Adjusts the focus (adjustment of the lens focus position).
ffPressing the <ZOOM> button: Adjusts the zoom (adjustment of the lens zoom position).
ffPressing the <SHIFT> button: Adjusts the lens shift (vertical position and horizontal position of the lens).
2)
Select each adjustment item and press asqw to adjust.
CAUTION
During the lens shift operation, do not insert your hand in the opening around the lens.
Your hand may be caught in between, resulting to injury.
68 - ENGLISH
Chapter 3
Basic Operations — Projecting
Note
ff The focus adjustment and the zoom adjustment cannot be performed in following case.
gg When [---] is displayed in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [LENS TYPE]
ff When lens calibration has not been performed completely, a message urging to perform lens calibration will be displayed on the adjustment
screen of [FOCUS], [ZOOM] and [PERIPHERY FOCUS]. When the projector is used for the first time or when the projection lens is
replaced, execute the lens calibration.
For details of lens calibration, refer to “Executing the lens calibration” (x page 70).
ff The adjustment can be performed faster by holding down asqw while adjusting the focus or zoom.
ff The adjustment can be performed faster by holding down asqw for approximately three seconds or longer while adjusting the lens shift.
ff Perform the image adjustment when the projected image has stabilized.
When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [ACTIVE FOCUS OPTIMIZER] → [ACTIVE FOCUS] is set to [OFF], it is
recommended to perform the focus adjustment after 30 minutes or more have elapsed with the focus test pattern displayed. For details of
the test pattern, refer to “[TEST PATTERN] menu” (x page 155).
To use the active focus optimizer function, set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [ACTIVE FOCUS OPTIMIZER] → [ACTIVE
FOCUS] to [ON], and then adjust the focus.
For details of [ACTIVE FOCUS OPTIMIZER], refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [ACTIVE FOCUS OPTIMIZER]
(x page 129).
ff Only [FOCUS] is displayed in yellow so that the displayed menu item can be recognized by color, even when the displayed characters are
unreadable due to incorrect focus. (Factory default)
The displayed color of [FOCUS] differs depending on the setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] → [OSD
COLOR].
ff When the projector is switched off during the lens shift adjustment, lens calibration needs to be performed the next time the projector is
switched on. (x page 130)
ff When the main power is switched off during the lens shift adjustment, the lens calibration error screen is displayed during the next lens shift
adjustment. Execute the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [LENS CALIBRATION].
ff When the lens calibration error is displayed even though [LENS CALIBRATION] was executed, ask your dealer to repair the unit.
Adjusting the focus balance
By changing the projected image size, the focus balance in the center and periphery of the image may be lost.
ffFocus, zoom, and periphery focus cannot be adjusted by turning the projection lens by hand.
ffAdjust the focus balance in the center and periphery of the projected image with the periphery focus when
following projection lens is used.
ggZoom Lens (Model No.: ET‑EMW200, ET‑EMW300, ET‑EMW400, ET‑EMW500, ET‑EMU100)
ffThe steps are an example when attaching the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET‑EMW200).
1)
Adjust the focus at the center of projected image.
ffFor the steps to adjust the focus, refer to “Adjusting the focus, zoom, and lens shift” (x page 68).
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PERIPHERY FOCUS] adjustment screen is displayed.
3)
Press asqw to adjust.
4)
Press the <ENTER> button again.
ffThe [FOCUS] adjustment screen is displayed.
5)
Press asqw to adjust the focus at the center of the image.
ffCheck the focus at the center and periphery of the image and and make fine adjustments.
ffThe projected image size may change when the focus in the periphery of the image is adjusted.
Check the projected image size too when adjusting the focus balance in the center and periphery of the
image.
Note
ff When the projector is used for the first time or when the projection lens is replaced, confirm that the display of the [PROJECTOR SETUP]
menu → [LENS] → [LENS TYPE] is appropriate, and then execute the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [LENS CALIBRATION].
ENGLISH - 69
Chapter 3
Basic Operations — Projecting
Executing the lens calibration
When the projector is used for the first time or when the projection lens is replaced, execute the lens calibration.
Detect the lens adjustment limit value, and perform the calibration in the adjustment range.
When lens calibration has not been performed completely, [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [ACTIVE
FOCUS OPTIMIZER] will not work and [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [LENS MEMORY] cannot be
operated.
1)
Press the <MENU> button.
ffThe [MAIN MENU] screen is displayed.
2)
Press as to select [PROJECTOR SETUP].
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PROJECTOR SETUP] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [LENS].
5)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [LENS] screen is displayed.
6)
Press as to select [LENS CALIBRATION].
7)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
8)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe lens calibration is started.
ffAfter completing the calibration, the projection lens will move to the home position.
Note
ff [PROGRESS] is displayed in the menu during lens calibration. The operation cannot be canceled during calibration.
ff [INCOMPLETE] is displayed when the lens calibration is not performed correctly.
ff The origin position of the lens mounter and the home position of the projection lens are automatically updated when the lens calibration is
performed.
The home position is an origin position of the lens shift (vertical position and horizontal position of the lens) based on the calibration result. It
does not match with the optical image center position.
ff Turn off the projector and reattach the projection lens when [---] is displayed in the confirmation screen for executing the lens calibration.
After reattaching the projection lens, confirm that the type of the projection lens attached to the projector is displayed in the [PROJECTOR
SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [LENS TYPE].
ff Pressing the <FOCUS> button on the remote control for at least three seconds will also display the confirmation screen for lens calibration
execution.
70 - ENGLISH
Chapter 3
Basic Operations — Projecting
Moving the projection lens to the home position
Operate in following procedure to move the projection lens to the home position.
When operating from the main menu
1)
Press the <MENU> button.
ffThe [MAIN MENU] screen is displayed.
2)
Press as to select [PROJECTOR SETUP].
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PROJECTOR SETUP] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [LENS].
5)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [LENS] screen is displayed.
6)
Press as to select [LENS HOME POSITION].
7)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
8)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe projection lens is moved to the home position.
Note
ff [PROGRESS] is displayed in the menu while the projection lens is moved to the home position.
ff The projection lens is not moved to the correct home position when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [LENS CALIBRATION]
is not executed.
ff The home position does not match with the optical image center position.
When operating from the lens shift adjustment screen
1)
Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control while displaying the lens shift adjustment screen.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
2)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe projection lens is moved to the home position.
Note
ff [PROGRESS] is displayed in the menu while the projection lens is moved to the home position.
ff The projection lens is not moved to the correct home position when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [LENS CALIBRATION]
is not executed.
ff The home position does not match with the optical image center position.
ff You can also display the [HOME POSITION] screen by pressing the <LENS> button on the control panel or the <SHIFT> button on the
remote control for at least three seconds.
ENGLISH - 71
Chapter 3
Basic Operations — Projecting
Lens shift range
The projector can adjust the position of the projected image within the lens shift range for each projection lens
based on the optical center position of the image (standard projection position). Optical center position of the
image is an image position based on the optical axis center of the projector body.
Perform the lens shift adjustment within the range indicated in the following illustration. Note that moving the lens
outside the adjustment range may change the focus. This is because the shift of the lens is restricted to protect
the optical parts.
Following illustration indicates the lens shift range when the projector is installed on desk/floor.
ET‑EMW400, ET‑EMW500, ET-EMS650, ET-EMS600,
ET-EMT750, ET-EMT700, ET-EMT850, ET-EMT800
ET‑EMW200
Standard projection position
Projected image width H
0.19 H
Projected image width H
Optical axis center
Projection lens
Model No.
Optical axis center
ET‑EMW300
ET‑EMU100
0.13 V
0.2 H
Projected image width H
Optical axis center
72 - ENGLISH
Optical axis center
0.5V
0.13 V
0.5 V
0.5 V
Projected image height V
0.2 H
Projected image height V
Standard projection
position
Standard projection position
Lens shift range
0.4 V
0.28 V
0.2 H
0.19 H
Projected image height V
0.28 V
0.6 V
0.6 V
Projected image height V
Lens shift range
0.4 V
Standard projection position
0.2 H
0.2V
Projection lens
Model No.
0.12 H
0.12 H
0.2 H
0.2 H
Projected image width H
Chapter 3
Basic Operations — Using the USB memory
Using the USB memory
This projector supports the attachment of the USB memory. Attach the USB memory to the <USB> terminal when
registering a user test pattern or using the data cloning function or the firmware update function, etc.
Note
ff For registering the test pattern, refer to“Registering the test pattern” (x page 156).
ff For the data cloning function, refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATA CLONING]. (x page 150)
ff For the firmware update function, refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [FIRMWARE UPDATE]. (x page 154)
Notes on use
Observe following.
ffDo not disassemble or modify the USB memory.
ffDo not apply strong impact on the USB memory.
ffDo not pour liquid such as water or get it wet.
ffDo not place foreign object into the terminal section.
ffDo not touch the metal terminal with hand or metal.
ffDo not leave the USB memory in a place with high humidity or dust.
ffDo not leave the USB memory in a place where static electricity or electromagnetic radiation is generated.
ffStore the USB memory appropriately in a location that small children cannot reach.
ffImmediately remove the USB memory from the projector when smoke or odor is noticed, and contact the
manufacturer.
ffDo not remove the USB memory from the projector while reading or writing the data.
USB memory that can be used with the projector
This projector supports the commercially available USB 2.0 compatible USB memory formatted in FAT16 or
FAT32.
ffOnly the single partition structure is supported.
Attaching the USB memory
1)
Insert the USB memory all the way in to the <USB> terminal.
Attention
ff Take care of the orientation of the terminal when inserting the USB memory so that it will not get damaged.
ff Do not use a USB extension cable or a USB hub, and directly insert the USB memory into the <USB> terminal of the projector.
ff Do not insert the USB memory into the <DC OUT> terminal. The USB memory cannot be used on the <DC OUT> terminal.
Note
ff The USB memory can be attached even when the projector is turned on.
Removing the USB memory
1)
Remove the USB memory after confirming that the indicator on the USB memory is not blinking.
Attention
ff The blinking of the indicator of the USB memory attached to the projector is indicating that the projector is accessing (reading or writing) the
USB memory. Do not remove the USB memory from the projector when the indicator is blinking.
ff The access status to the USB memory cannot be confirmed when a USB memory without the monitoring function such as indicator is used.
In such case, remove the USB memory after waiting for one of the following.
gg Turn off the projector.
gg When the registration of the test pattern is performed, confirm that the [USER TEST PATTERN] screen is displayed after the user test
pattern save operation is performed.
gg When using the data cloning function, confirm that the saving or loading of the data to/from the USB memory is completed in the menu
screen.
gg When using the firmware update function, wait until the projector automatically goes into standby after the update has started.
ENGLISH - 73
Chapter 3
Basic Operations — Operating with the remote control
Operating with the remote control
Using the shutter function
If the projector is not used for a certain period of time during the meeting intermission, for example, it is possible
to turn off the image temporarily.
button
1)
Press the <SHUTTER> button.
ffThe image disappears.
ffThis operation can be also performed using the <SHUTTER> button on the control panel.
2)
Press the <SHUTTER> button again.
ffThe image is displayed.
Note
ff The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will blink slowly in green while the shutter function is in use (shutter: closed).
ff The fade-in/fade-out time of the image can be set by the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER SETTING].
Using the on-screen display function
Turn off the on-screen display function (no display) when you do not wish the viewers to see the on-screen
display, such as the menu or the input terminal name.
button
1)
Press the <ON SCREEN> button.
ffTurns off (hides) the on-screen display.
2)
Press the <ON SCREEN> button again.
ffCancels the hide condition of the on-screen display.
Note
ff The hide condition of the on-screen display can also be canceled by pressing the <MENU> button on the control panel for at least three
seconds while the on-screen display is off (hidden).
74 - ENGLISH
Chapter 3
Basic Operations — Operating with the remote control
Switching the display position of the menu screen
By directly calling up the [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen without operating from the main menu screen, the
display position of the menu screen (OSD) can be easily changed.
button
1)
Press and hold the <ON SCREEN> button for at least one second.
ffThe [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed while the cursor is in [OSD POSITION] state.
2)
Press qw to switch the [OSD POSITION] setting.
ffThe display position of the menu screen (OSD) will switch each time you press qw.
Note
ff Display position of the menu screen (OSD) can also be changed with the menu operation. For details, refer to “Setting [OSD POSITION]”
(x page 116).
Using the function button
By assigning the following functions to the <FUNCTION> button, it can be used as a simplified shortcut button.
[SUB MEMORY], [SYSTEM SELECTOR], [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW], [FREEZE], [WAVEFORM MONITOR],
[LENS MEMORY LOAD], [ASPECT], [PROJECTION METHOD], [GEOMETRY]
button
1)
Press the <FUNCTION> button.
Note
ff Assignment of the function is performed from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [FUNCTION BUTTON] (x page 145).
Displaying test patterns
To check the condition of the projector, ten internal test patterns and up to three user registered test patterns can
be displayed.
button
1)
Press the <TEST PATTERN> button.
ffThe test pattern and the main menu screen is displayed.
ffIf the [TEST PATTERN] screen (list format) is displayed, proceed to Step 3).
2)
Press the <TEST PATTERN> button again.
ffThe test pattern and the [TEST PATTERN] screen (list format) are displayed.
ffThe [TEST PATTERN] screen (list format) can also be displayed by pressing the <ENTER> button while
[TEST PATTERN] is selected in the main menu screen.
3)
Press as to select the test pattern to display, and press the <ENTER> button.
ffSelected test pattern and the [TEST PATTERN] screen (toggle selection format) are displayed.
ffTo change the test pattern, proceed to Step 4).
4)
Press qw to switch the test pattern.
ffThe test pattern will switch each time you press qw.
Note
ff The main menu screen and the [TEST PATTERN] screen (list format, toggle selection format) can be hidden by pressing the <ON
SCREEN> button on the remote control while the test pattern is displayed.
ff Test patterns can also be displayed using the menu operation. Refer to “[TEST PATTERN] menu” (x page 155) for details.
ff Settings of position, size, and other factors will not be reflected in test patterns. Make sure to perform various adjustments while displaying
the input image.
ENGLISH - 75
Chapter 3
Basic Operations — Operating with the remote control
Using the status function
Display the status of the projector.
button
1)
Press the <STATUS> button.
ffThe [STATUS] screen is displayed.
1/5
STATUS
PROJECTOR TYPE
PT-MZ20K
SERIAL NUMBER
123456789012
PROJECTOR RUNTIME
10000h
LIGHT RUNTIME
10000h / 10000h
CONTINUOUS LIGHTING TIME
1h 23m
FIRMWARE VERSION
1.00
INTAKE AIR TEMP.
31°C/87°F
EXHAUST AIR TEMP.
31°C/87°F
LIGHT1 TEMP.
31°C/87°F
LIGHT2 TEMP.
31°C/87°F
SELF TEST
ENTER
NO ERRORS
SEND E-MAIL
CHANGE
MENU
EXIT
Note
ff The projector status can also be displayed using the menu operation. Refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STATUS]
(x page 146) for details.
Using the HDMI-CEC function
Display the HDMI-CEC operation screen.
button
1)
Press the <CEC> button.
ffThe HDMI-CEC operation screen is displayed.
Note
ff Refer to [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [HDMI CEC] (x page 151) for details.
Setting ID number of the remote control
When you use the multiple projectors together, you can operate all the projectors simultaneously or each projector
individually using a single remote control, if a unique ID number is assigned to each projector.
After setting the ID number of the projector, set same ID number on the remote control.
The factory default ID number of the projector is set to [ALL]. When using a single projector, press the <ID
ALL> button on the remote control. Also, you can control a projector by pressing the <ID ALL> button on
the remote control even if you do not know the projector ID.
button
button
1)
Press the <ID SET> button on the remote control.
2)
Within five seconds, press and set the one-digit or two-digit ID number set on the projector using the
number (<0> - <9>) buttons.
ffIf you press the <ID ALL> button, you can control the projector regardless of the ID number setting of the
projector.
Attention
ff Since the ID number of the remote control can be set without the projector body, do not press the <ID SET> button on the remote control
carelessly. If the <ID SET> button is pressed and no number (<0> - <9>) buttons are pressed within five seconds, the ID number returns to
its original value before the <ID SET> button was pressed.
76 - ENGLISH
Chapter 3
Basic Operations — Operating with the remote control
ff The ID number set on the remote control will be stored unless it is set again. However, it will be erased if the remote control is left with dead
batteries. Set the same ID number again when the batteries are replaced.
Note
ff When the ID number of the remote control is set to [0], you can control the projector regardless of the ID number setting of the projector
body, as same as when [ALL] is set.
ff Set the ID number of the projector body from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTOR ID].
ENGLISH - 77
Chapter 4
Settings
This chapter describes the settings and adjustments you can make using the on-screen menu.
78 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — Menu navigation
Menu navigation
The on-screen menu (Menu) is used to perform various settings and adjustments of the projector.
Navigating through the menu
Operating procedure
button
1)
Press the <MENU> button on the remote control or control panel.
ffThe [MAIN MENU] screen is displayed.
MAIN MENU
PICTURE
POSITION
ADVANCED MENU
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DISPLAY OPTION
PROJECTOR SETUP
TEST PATTERN
SIGNAL LIST
SECURITY
NETWORK
MENU SELECT
ENTER
2)
SUB MENU
Press as to select an item from the main menu.
ffThe selected item is highlighted in yellow.
MAIN MENU
PICTURE
POSITION
ADVANCED MENU
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DISPLAY OPTION
PROJECTOR SETUP
TEST PATTERN
SIGNAL LIST
SECURITY
NETWORK
MENU SELECT
ENTER
3)
SUB MENU
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe sub-menu items of the selected main menu are displayed.
POSITION
SHIFT
ASPECT
DEFAULT
ZOOM
GEOMETRY
OFF
MENU SELECT
ENTER
SUB MENU
ENGLISH - 79
Chapter 4
4)
Settings — Menu navigation
Press as to select a sub-menu, and press qw or the <ENTER> button to change or adjust settings.
ffSome items will switch in order as follows each time you press qw.
A
B
C
ffFor some items, press qw to display an individual adjustment screen with a bar scale as shown below.
CONTRAST
0
ADJUST
Note
ff Pressing the <MENU> button while the menu screen is displayed returns to the previous menu.
ff Some items or functions may not be adjusted or used for certain signals to be input to the projector. When the items cannot be adjusted or
used, the items in the menu screen are shown in black characters, and they cannot be adjusted or set.
If the item in the menu screen is displayed in black characters and the item cannot be adjusted or set, the factor causing it is displayed by
pressing the <ENTER> button while the corresponding menu is selected.
ff Some items can be adjusted even if signals are not input.
ff Individual adjustment screen is cleared automatically if no operation is performed for approximately five seconds.
ff For menu items, refer to “Main menu” (x page 80) and “Sub-menu” (x page 81).
ff The cursor color depends on the setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] → [OSD COLOR]. The selected item
is displayed with the yellow cursor by the factory default.
ff In the portrait setting, the on-screen menu is displayed sideways.
To display the on-screen menu vertically, change the setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] → [OSD
ROTATION].
Resetting adjustment values to the factory default
If the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control is pressed, the values adjusted in the menu items are restored to
the factory default settings.
button
1)
Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control.
CONTRAST
0
ADJUST
Note
ff You cannot reset all the settings to the factory default at a time.
ff To reset all the settings adjusted in the sub-menu items to the factory default at a time, execute the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →
[INITIALIZE].
ff Some items cannot be reset to the factory default settings even when the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control is pressed. Adjust those
items individually.
ff The triangular mark under the bar scale in the individual adjustment screen indicates the factory default setting. The position of the triangular
mark varies according to the selected input signals.
Current adjustment value
Factory default setting
Main menu
The following items are in the main menu.
When a main menu item is selected, the screen changes to a sub-menu selection screen.
The menu item with l in the [SIMPLE] mode column indicates that this is displayed in the menu screen (OSD)
when the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [MENU MODE] is set to [SIMPLE].
Main menu item
[SIMPLE] mode
Page
[PICTURE]
l
84
[POSITION]
l
94
[ADVANCED MENU]
―
102
80 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — Menu navigation
Main menu item
[SIMPLE] mode
Page
[DISPLAY LANGUAGE]
l
108
[DISPLAY OPTION]
l
109
[PROJECTOR SETUP]
l
125
[TEST PATTERN]
l
155
[SIGNAL LIST]
l
158
[SECURITY]
―
161
[NETWORK]
l
164
Sub-menu
The sub-menu of the selected main menu item is displayed, and you can set and adjust items in the sub-menu.
The menu item with l in the [SIMPLE] mode column indicates that this is displayed in the menu screen (OSD)
when the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [MENU MODE] is set to [SIMPLE].
[PICTURE]
Sub-menu item
[PICTURE MODE]
[CONTRAST]
[BRIGHTNESS]
[COLOR]
[TINT]
[COLOR TEMPERATURE]
Factory default
[SIMPLE] mode
Page
[STANDARD]*1
l
84
[0]
l
85
85
[0]
l
[7]*2
l
86
[0]
―
86
[DEFAULT]*2
―
86
[0]
―
87
[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]
[OFF]*2
―
88
[SHARPNESS]
[+10]*2
―
88
[NOISE REDUCTION]
[1]*2
―
88
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX]
[2]*2
―
88
[OFF]
―
90
[GAMMA]
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST]
[SYSTEM SELECTOR]
[DEFAULT PICTURE MODE]
[AUTO]*1
―
92
[AUTO]
―
92
Factory default
[SIMPLE] mode
Page
―
―
94
[DEFAULT]*1
l
94
―
―
95
[OFF]
l
96
Factory default
[SIMPLE] mode
Page
[AUTO]*1
―
102
―
―
102
*1 Depends on the signal input.
*2 Depends on the [PICTURE MODE].
[POSITION]
Sub-menu item
[SHIFT]
[ASPECT]
[ZOOM]
[GEOMETRY]
*1 Depends on the signal input.
[ADVANCED MENU]
Sub-menu item
[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY]
[BLANKING]
ENGLISH - 81
Chapter 4
Sub-menu item
Settings — Menu navigation
Factory default
[SIMPLE] mode
Page
[OFF]
―
103
[FRAME RESPONSE]
[NORMAL]
―
107
[RASTER POSITION]
―
―
107
[EDGE BLENDING]
*1 Depends on the signal input.
[DISPLAY LANGUAGE]
Details (x page 108)
[DISPLAY OPTION]
Factory default
[SIMPLE] mode
Page
[COLOR ADJUSTMENT]
Sub-menu item
[OFF]
l
109
[COLOR CORRECTION]
[OFF]
―
110
110
[SCREEN SETTING]
―
l
[BACKUP INPUT SETTING]
―
―
111
[HDMI IN]
―
―
112
[SDI IN]
―
―
114
[DIGITAL LINK IN]
―
―
115
[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY]
―
l
116
[MENU MODE]
[IMAGE ROTATION]
[BACK COLOR]
[NORMAL]
l
118
[OFF]
―
119
119
[BLUE]
―
[DEFAULT LOGO]
l
119
[OFF]
―
120
[SHUTTER SETTING]
―
―
121
[FREEZE]
―
―
123
[OFF]
―
123
―
―
124
Factory default
[SIMPLE] mode
Page
[STARTUP LOGO]
[UNIFORMITY]
[WAVEFORM MONITOR]
[CUT OFF]
[PROJECTOR SETUP]
Sub-menu item
[ALL]
l
125
[PROJECTION METHOD]
[PROJECTOR ID]
―
l
125
[LENS]
―
l
126
[OPERATION SETTING]
―
l
130
[LIGHT OUTPUT]
[100.0%]
l
133
[STANDBY MODE]
[NORMAL]
―
133
[QUICK STARTUP]
[OFF]
―
134
[POWER MANAGEMENT]
―
―
134
[NO SIGNAL SETTING]
―
―
135
[INITIAL STARTUP]
[STARTUP INPUT SELECT]
[DATE AND TIME]
[LAST MEMORY]
―
138
[LAST USED]
―
138
―
l
138
[OFF]
―
139
[MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]
―
―
141
[RS-232C]
―
l
143
[SCHEDULE]
[REMOTE1 MODE]
[DEFAULT]
―
145
[FUNCTION BUTTON]
―
―
145
[FILTER COUNTER]
―
―
146
[STATUS]
―
l
146
[INFO MONITOR SETTING]
―
―
148
[DATA CLONING]
―
―
150
82 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Sub-menu item
Settings — Menu navigation
Factory default
[SIMPLE] mode
Page
[SAVE ALL USER DATA]
―
―
150
[LOAD ALL USER DATA]
―
―
150
[HDMI CEC]
[ON]
―
151
[INITIALIZE]
―
l
153
[FIRMWARE UPDATE]
―
―
154
[SAVE LOG]
―
―
154
[SERVICE PASSWORD]
―
l
154
Factory default
[SIMPLE] mode
Page
[OFF]
―
161
[SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE]
―
―
161
[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP]
―
―
161
[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE]
―
―
163
Factory default
[SIMPLE] mode
Page
[LAN]
l
164
―
l
164
[TEST PATTERN]
Details (x page 155)
[SIGNAL LIST]
Details (x page 158)
[SECURITY]
Sub-menu item
[SECURITY PASSWORD]
[NETWORK]
Sub-menu item
[ETHERNET TYPE]
[DIGITAL LINK]
[WIRED LAN]
―
l
166
[ENABLE]
l
167
[PROJECTOR NAME]
―
l
168
[NETWORK STATUS]
―
l
168
[WIRELESS LAN]*1
[READ/WRITE]
―
169
[ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT]
[NFC SETTING]
―
l
169
[NETWORK SECURITY]
―
―
172
[NETWORK CONTROL]
―
l
172
[PJLink]
―
l
173
[Art-Net]
―
―
174
*1 [WIRELESS LAN] cannot be set if the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: AJ‑WM50 Series) is not attached to the <USB> terminal.
Note
ff Some items may not be adjusted or used for certain signal formats to be input to the projector.
When the items cannot be adjusted or used, the items in the menu screen are shown in black characters, and they cannot be adjusted or
set.
ff Sub-menu items and factory default settings vary depending on the selected input terminal.
ff The [NETWORK] menu → [NFC SETTING] is displayed when the NFC function is enabled.
The optional NFC Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET‑NUK10) can be used to enable the NFC function of the projector. Note that there are some
models that have the NFC function enabled from the time of factory shipment, and there are some countries or regions where the NFC
Upgrade Kit cannot be applied.
For the availability of the NFC function in the country or region where you purchased the product, visit the following website or consult your
dealer.
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/
ENGLISH - 83
Chapter 4
Settings — [PICTURE] menu
[PICTURE] menu
On the menu screen, select [PICTURE] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 79) for the operation of the menu screen.
[PICTURE MODE]
You can switch to the desired picture mode suitable for the image source and the environment in which the
projector is used.
1)
Press as to select [PICTURE MODE].
2)
Press qw.
ffThe [PICTURE MODE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[STANDARD]
[CINEMA]
[NATURAL]
[REC709]
[DICOM SIM.]
The image becomes suitable for video signals in general.
The image becomes suitable for movie contents.
The image becomes suitable for using in a relatively dark environment.
The image becomes Rec.709 compliant when the setting other than [PICTURE MODE] is set to the
factory default.
The image becomes similar to that of DICOM Part 14 Grayscale Standard.
[DYNAMIC]
The light output is maximized for use in bright areas.
[GRAPHIC]
The image becomes suitable for computer signal input.
[USER]
Set any desired picture mode.
Note
ff Rec.709 is an abbreviation of “ITU-R Recommendation BT.709” and is a color standard of high-vision broadcasting.
ff DICOM is an abbreviation of “Digital Imaging and COmmunication in Medicine” and is a standard for medical imaging devices. Although the
DICOM name is used, the projector is not a medical device, and display images should not be used for medical purposes such as diagnosis.
ff If the <ENTER> button is pressed while [PICTURE MODE] is selected, the adjustment condition that is currently set can be saved as the
default setting of the selected picture mode. To save the adjustment condition in [USER] as the default setting, refer to “Saving the default
setting in [USER]” (x page 84). The data of all items except [SYSTEM SELECTOR] and [DEFAULT PICTURE MODE] in the [PICTURE]
menu are saved.
ff If the [PICTURE] menu → [DEFAULT PICTURE MODE] is set to [AUTO], [GRAPHIC] is automatically selected when a new computer
signal is input and [STANDARD] is automatically selected when a new video signal is input. If the [PICTURE] menu → [DEFAULT PICTURE
MODE] is set to anything other than [AUTO], the picture mode set in [DEFAULT PICTURE MODE] is selected when a new signal is input.
Saving the default setting in [USER]
1)
Press as to select [PICTURE MODE].
2)
Press qw to select [USER].
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PICTURE MODE] detailed screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [DEFAULT SETTING SAVE], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
5)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe adjustment condition is saved as the default setting of the picture mode [USER].
Changing the [USER] name
1)
Press as to select [PICTURE MODE].
2)
Press qw to select [USER].
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PICTURE MODE] detailed screen is displayed.
84 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — [PICTURE] menu
4)
Press as to select [PICTURE MODE NAME CHANGE], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PICTURE MODE NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.
5)
Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
6)
Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe picture mode name is changed.
Setting the initial mode for [USER]
You can select the initial picture mode for [USER].
Adjust each item to your preference based on the settings of the selected picture mode.
The factory default setting is [REC709].
1)
Press as to select [PICTURE MODE].
2)
Press qw to select [USER].
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PICTURE MODE] detailed screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [BASED PICTURE MODE], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [BASED PICTURE MODE] screen is displayed.
5)
Press as to select the picture mode, and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
6)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe settings in the [PICTURE] menu (except for [SYSTEM SELECTOR] and [DEFAULT PICTURE MODE])
are overwritten with the default settings of the selected picture mode.
[CONTRAST]
You can adjust the contrast of the colors.
1)
Press as to select [CONTRAST].
2)
Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [CONTRAST] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3)
Press qw to adjust the level.
Operation
Adjustment
Press w.
The screen becomes brighter.
Press q.
The screen becomes darker.
Range of adjustment
-31 - +31
Attention
ff Adjust the [PICTURE] menu → [BRIGHTNESS] first when you need to adjust the black level.
[BRIGHTNESS]
You can adjust the dark (black) part of the projected image.
1)
Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS].
2)
Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [BRIGHTNESS] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3)
Press qw to adjust the level.
Operation
Adjustment
Press w.
Increases the brightness of the dark (black) parts of the screen.
Press q.
Reduces the brightness of the dark (black) parts of the screen.
Range of adjustment
-31 - +31
ENGLISH - 85
Chapter 4
Settings — [PICTURE] menu
[COLOR]
You can adjust the color saturation of the projected image.
1)
Press as to select [COLOR].
2)
Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [COLOR] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3)
Press qw to adjust the level.
Operation
Adjustment
Press w.
Deepens colors.
Press q.
Weakens colors.
Range of adjustment
-31 - +31
[TINT]
You can adjust the skin tone in the projected image.
1)
Press as to select [TINT].
2)
Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [TINT] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3)
Press qw to adjust the level.
Operation
Adjustment
Press w.
Adjusts skin tone toward greenish color.
Press q.
Adjusts skin tone toward reddish purple.
Range of adjustment
-31 - +31
[COLOR TEMPERATURE]
You can switch the color temperature if the white areas of the projected image are bluish or reddish.
Adjusting with color temperature
1)
Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE].
2)
Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [COLOR TEMPERATURE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[DEFAULT]
[USER]
[LOW]
[HIGH]
Factory default setting.
Adjusts white balance as desired. Refer to “Adjusting desired white balance” (x page 86) for
details.
Select an item so that images become natural.
Note
ff [DEFAULT] cannot be selected when the [PICTURE] menu → [PICTURE MODE] is set to [DICOM SIM.].
ff This item is fixed to [USER] when the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [COLOR ADJUSTMENT] is set to anything other than [OFF].
Adjusting desired white balance
1)
Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE].
2)
Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [COLOR TEMPERATURE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3)
Press qw to select [USER].
86 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — [PICTURE] menu
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [COLOR TEMPERATURE] screen is displayed.
5)
Press as to select [WHITE BALANCE].
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [WHITE BALANCE] screen is displayed.
7)
Press as to select [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] or [WHITE BALANCE LOW].
8)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] screen or the [WHITE BALANCE LOW] screen is displayed.
9)
Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
10) Press qw to adjust the level.
Item
[RED]
[GREEN]
[BLUE]
Operation
Adjustment
Press w.
Deepens red.
Press q.
Weakens red.
Press w.
Deepens green.
Press q.
Weakens green.
Press w.
Deepens blue.
Press q.
Weakens blue.
Range of adjustment
[WHITE BALANCE HIGH]: 0 - +255 (factory default is
+255)
[WHITE BALANCE LOW]: -127 - +127 (factory default is
0)
Note
ff Adjust [COLOR TEMPERATURE] correctly. All colors will not be displayed properly unless adequate adjustment is made. If the adjustment
does not look suitable, you can press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control to return the setting for the selected item only to the
factory default setting.
Changing the [USER] name
1)
Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE].
2)
Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [COLOR TEMPERATURE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3)
Press qw to select [USER].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [COLOR TEMPERATURE] screen is displayed.
5)
Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE NAME CHANGE].
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [COLOR TEMPERATURE NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.
7)
Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
8)
Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe name set to color temperature is changed.
Note
ff The display of [USER] is also changed when the name is changed.
[GAMMA]
You can switch gamma mode.
1)
Press as to select [GAMMA].
2)
Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [GAMMA] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3)
Press qw to adjust the level.
ENGLISH - 87
Chapter 4
Settings — [PICTURE] menu
Operation
Adjustment
Press w.
The intermediate tone becomes brighter.
Press q.
The intermediate tone becomes darker.
Range of adjustment
-8 - +7
[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]
You can correct the image to the optimal vividness even if it is projected under a bright light.
1)
Press as to select [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW].
2)
Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
[1] - [6]
No correction.
Corrects the vividness of the image. The larger the value, the stronger the correction.
[SHARPNESS]
You can adjust the sharpness of the projected image.
1)
Press as to select [SHARPNESS].
2)
Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SHARPNESS] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3)
Press qw to adjust the level.
Operation
Adjustment
Press w.
Contours become sharper.
Press q.
Contours become softer.
Range of adjustment
0 - +15
Note
ff If you press w while the adjustment value is [+15], the value will become [0]. If you press q while the adjustment value is [0], the value will
become [+15].
[NOISE REDUCTION]
You can reduce noises when the input image is degraded and noise is occurring in the image signal.
1)
Press as to select [NOISE REDUCTION].
2)
Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [NOISE REDUCTION] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
No correction.
[1]
Slightly corrects the noise.
[2]
Moderately corrects the noise.
[3]
Strongly corrects the noise.
Attention
ff When this is set for an input signal with less noise, the image may look different from the original image. In such a case, set it to [OFF].
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX]
Light adjustment of the light source and signal compensation are performed automatically according to the image
to make the contrast optimum for the image.
Performs standard correction of the projector to enhance the expressiveness of dark areas while maintaining the
general brightness.
88 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — [PICTURE] menu
1)
Press as to select [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX].
2)
Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
Disables the DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX function.
[1]
Adjusts the light source and compensates signals to a small extent.
[2]
Adjusts the light source and compensates signals to a moderate extent.
[3]
Adjusts the light source and compensates signals to a large extent.
Set any desired correction.
Refer to “Performing desired correction” (x page 89) for details.
[USER]
Note
ff [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] cannot be set when [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] is set to anything other than [OFF].
ff To use the contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function, make the menu setting identical for each linked
projector either by setting [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] to anything other than [OFF] or by setting [PICTURE] menu →
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST] to anything other than [OFF].
Set [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] to [OFF] and [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] to anything other than [OFF] when there are projectors without
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] menu grouped into the linked projectors.
Performing desired correction
1)
Press as to select [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX].
2)
Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3)
Press qw to select [USER].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] screen is displayed.
5)
Press as to select the item to set.
ffThe items of the detailed settings will switch each time you press qw.
ffPress the <ENTER> button when [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] is selected.
Setting item
[AUTO CONTRAST]
(Automatic light source
adjustment)
[BRIGHT SIGNAL LEVEL]
(Setting of the brightness
level of the signal to start the
light adjustment)
Details
[OFF]
[1] - [255]
[6%] - [50%]
[DISABLE]
[LIGHTS OUT TIMER]
(Time setting until the light
turns off)
[LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL
LEVEL]
(Setting of the brightness
level of the signal to turn off
the light)
Does not adjust the light source.
The higher the value, the stronger the light adjustment of the light
source.
Can be set in increments of 1. (Factory setting: 215)
Adjusts the light source when the brightness level of the image
signal being input gets lower than the set value. The higher the
value, the larger the range to perform the light adjustment of the
light source.
Can be set in increments of 1 %. (Factory setting: 30 %)
Does not turn off the light source.
[0.0s] - [10.0s]
Turns off the light source when the brightness level of the image
signal being input goes under the value set in [LIGHTS OUT
SIGNAL LEVEL].
Select an item from [0.0s] - [4.0s], [5.0s], [7.0s], or [10.0s].
[0.0s] - [4.0s] can be selected in increments of 0.5.
[0%] - [5%]
Sets the level of the brightness of the image signal to turn off the
light source with [LIGHTS OUT TIMER].
Can be set in increments of 1 %. (Factory setting: 0 %)
ENGLISH - 89
Chapter 4
Settings — [PICTURE] menu
Setting item
[LIGHTS OUT FADE-IN]
(Setting of fade-in when
lighting up again)
Details
[OFF]
Does not set the fade-in of the image when the light source is
turned on again from the condition that the light source was turned
off with [LIGHTS OUT TIMER].
[0.5s] - [10.0s]
Sets the time to fade in the image when the light source is turned
on again from the condition that the light source was turned off with
[LIGHTS OUT TIMER].
Select an item from [0.5s] - [4.0s], [5.0s], [7.0s], or [10.0s]. [0.5s] [4.0s] can be selected in increments of 0.5.
[OFF]
[LIGHTS OUT FADE-OUT]
(Setting of fade-out when
lighting off)
[0.5s] - [10.0s]
[MANUAL INTENSITY]
(Manual light source
adjustment)
[0] - [255]
[DYNAMIC GAMMA]
(Adjustment of signal
compensation)
Does not set the fade-out of the image when the light source is
turned off with [LIGHTS OUT TIMER].
Sets the time to fade out the image when the light source is turned
off with [LIGHTS OUT TIMER].
Select an item from [0.5s] - [4.0s], [5.0s], [7.0s], or [10.0s]. [0.5s] [4.0s] can be selected in increments of 0.5.
The larger the value, the stronger the correction.
Can be set in increments of 1. (Factory setting: 255)
[OFF]
Does not compensate the signal.
[1]
Slightly compensates the signal.
[2]
Moderately compensates the signal.
[3]
Strongly compensates the signal.
[MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]
Sets the contrast synchronization function.
This setting item is common with the following menu item.
ff The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR
SYNC]
Refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR
SYNC] (x page 141) for details.
Note
ff [LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL LEVEL] cannot be set when [LIGHTS OUT TIMER] is set to [DISABLE].
ff When [LIGHTS OUT TIMER] is set to anything other than [DISABLE], the following are the conditions to turn the light source back on again
from the state that the light source has turned off by this function.
gg When the brightness level of the image signal being input has exceeded the value set in [LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL LEVEL]
gg When the input signal is gone
gg When on-screen display such as menu screen (OSD) or input guide, a test pattern, or a warning message is displayed
ff The signal compensation of the dynamic contrast NX function varies depending on the values set in [AUTO CONTRAST], [BRIGHT SIGNAL
LEVEL] and [DYNAMIC GAMMA].
ff The dynamic contrast NX function does not operate while measuring the brightness and the color.
ff The contrast synchronization function is a function to display a combined screen with a balanced contrast by sharing the brightness level of
the image signal input to each projector when a multi-display is constructed by combining the projected image of multiple projectors.
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST]
Light adjustment of the light source and signal compensation are performed automatically according to the image
to make the contrast optimum for the image.
Performs conventional correction to adjust the black level by decreasing the general brightness.
1)
Press as to select [DYNAMIC CONTRAST].
2)
Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
Disables the dynamic contrast function.
[1]
Adjusts the light source and compensates signals to a small extent.
[2]
Adjusts the light source and compensates signals to a moderate extent.
[3]
Adjusts the light source and compensates signals to a large extent.
[USER]
90 - ENGLISH
Set any desired correction.
Refer to “Performing desired correction” (x page 91) for details.
Chapter 4
Settings — [PICTURE] menu
Note
ff [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] cannot be set when [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] is set to anything other than [OFF].
ff To use the contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function, make the menu setting identical for each linked
projector either by setting [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] to anything other than [OFF] or by setting [PICTURE] menu →
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST] to anything other than [OFF].
Set [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] to [OFF] and [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] to anything other than [OFF] when there are projectors without
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] menu grouped into the linked projectors.
Performing desired correction
1)
Press as to select [DYNAMIC CONTRAST].
2)
Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3)
Press qw to select [USER].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] screen is displayed.
5)
Press as to select the item to set.
ffThe items of the detailed settings will switch each time you press qw.
ffPress the <ENTER> button when [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] is selected.
Setting item
[AUTO CONTRAST]
(Automatic light source
adjustment)
[BRIGHT SIGNAL LEVEL]
(Setting of the brightness
level of the signal to start the
light adjustment)
Details
[OFF]
[1] - [255]
[6%] - [50%]
[DISABLE]
[LIGHTS OUT TIMER]
(Time setting until the light
turns off)
[LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL
LEVEL]
(Setting of the brightness
level of the signal to turn off
the light)
[LIGHTS OUT FADE-IN]
(Setting of fade-in when
lighting up again)
[LIGHTS OUT FADE-OUT]
(Setting of fade-out when
lighting off)
[MANUAL INTENSITY]
(Manual light source
adjustment)
[DYNAMIC GAMMA]
(Adjustment of signal
compensation)
Does not adjust the light source.
The higher the value, the stronger the light adjustment of the light
source.
Can be set in increments of 1. (Factory setting: 122)
Adjusts the light source when the brightness level of the image
signal being input gets lower than the set value. The higher the
value, the larger the range to perform the light adjustment of the
light source.
Can be set in increments of 1 %. (Factory setting: 46 %)
Does not turn off the light source.
[0.0s] - [10.0s]
Turns off the light source when the brightness level of the image
signal being input goes under the value set in [LIGHTS OUT
SIGNAL LEVEL].
Select an item from [0.0s] - [4.0s], [5.0s], [7.0s], or [10.0s].
[0.0s] - [4.0s] can be selected in increments of 0.5.
[0%] - [5%]
Sets the level of the brightness of the image signal to turn off the
light source with [LIGHTS OUT TIMER].
Can be set in increments of 1 %. (Factory setting: 0 %)
[OFF]
Does not set the fade-in of the image when the light source is
turned on again from the condition that the light source was turned
off with [LIGHTS OUT TIMER].
[0.5s] - [10.0s]
Sets the time to fade in the image when the light source is turned
on again from the condition that the light source was turned off with
[LIGHTS OUT TIMER].
Select an item from [0.5s] - [4.0s], [5.0s], [7.0s], or [10.0s]. [0.5s] [4.0s] can be selected in increments of 0.5.
[OFF]
[0.5s] - [10.0s]
[0] - [255]
Does not set the fade-out of the image when the light source is
turned off with [LIGHTS OUT TIMER].
Sets the time to fade out the image when the light source is turned
off with [LIGHTS OUT TIMER].
Select an item from [0.5s] - [4.0s], [5.0s], [7.0s], or [10.0s]. [0.5s] [4.0s] can be selected in increments of 0.5.
The larger the value, the stronger the correction.
Can be set in increments of 1. (Factory setting: 255)
[OFF]
Does not compensate the signal.
[1]
Slightly compensates the signal.
[2]
Moderately compensates the signal.
[3]
Strongly compensates the signal.This setting will maximize the
contrast.
ENGLISH - 91
Chapter 4
Settings — [PICTURE] menu
Setting item
Details
[MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]
Sets the contrast synchronization function.
This setting item is common with the following menu item.
ff The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR
SYNC]
Refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR
SYNC] (x page 141) for details.
Note
ff [LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL LEVEL] cannot be set when [LIGHTS OUT TIMER] is set to [DISABLE].
ff When [LIGHTS OUT TIMER] is set to anything other than [DISABLE], the following are the conditions to turn the light source back on again
from the state that the light source has turned off by this function.
gg When the brightness level of the image signal being input has exceeded the value set in [LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL LEVEL]
gg When the input signal is gone
gg When on-screen display such as menu screen (OSD) or input guide, a test pattern, or a warning message is displayed
ff The signal compensation of the dynamic contrast function varies depending on the value set in [DYNAMIC GAMMA].
ff The dynamic contrast function does not operate while measuring the brightness and the color.
ff The contrast synchronization function is a function to display a combined screen with a balanced contrast by sharing the brightness level of
the image signal input to each projector when a multi-display is constructed by combining the projected image of multiple projectors.
[SYSTEM SELECTOR]
The projector will automatically detect the input signal, but you can set the system method manually when an
unstable signal is input. Set the system method matching the input signal.
1)
Press as to select [SYSTEM SELECTOR].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
3)
Press as to select a system format.
ffAvailable system formats vary depending on the input signal.
Terminal
System format
<HDMI IN 1> terminal,
<HDMI IN 2> terminal,
<DIGITAL LINK> terminal
4)
480/60p or 576/50p signal
Select [AUTO], [RGB], or [YCBCR].
Other video signals
Select [AUTO], [RGB], or [YPBPR].
Press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff For details of the types of image signals that can be used with the projector, refer to “List of compatible signals” (x page 268).
ff This may not function properly for some connected external devices.
ff For the SDI input, the signal format can be set in detail in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SDI IN].
[DEFAULT PICTURE MODE]
Set the picture mode to be applied when a new signal is input. The setting in the [PICTURE] menu → [PICTURE
MODE] will switch according to the setting.
1)
Press as to select [DEFAULT PICTURE MODE].
2)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[AUTO]
[STANDARD]
[CINEMA]
[NATURAL]
[REC709]
[DICOM SIM.]
Set [PICTURE MODE] to [GRAPHIC] when a computer signal is input or [STANDARD] when a video
signal is input.
Set [PICTURE MODE] to [STANDARD].
Set [PICTURE MODE] to [CINEMA].
Set [PICTURE MODE] to [NATURAL].
Set [PICTURE MODE] to [REC709].
Set [PICTURE MODE] to [DICOM SIM.].
[DYNAMIC]
Set [PICTURE MODE] to [DYNAMIC].
[GRAPHIC]
Set [PICTURE MODE] to [GRAPHIC].
[USER]
92 - ENGLISH
Set [PICTURE MODE] to [USER].
Chapter 4
Settings — [PICTURE] menu
Note
ff The following are the conditions where the setting in the [PICTURE] menu → [PICTURE MODE] is switched to the picture mode set in
[DEFAULT PICTURE MODE].
gg When a new signal is input
gg When the deleted signal is input again after the registered signal has been deleted
gg When the <DEFAULT> button is pressed while the [PICTURE] menu → [PICTURE MODE] is selected
gg When there is no input signal
ENGLISH - 93
Chapter 4
Settings — [POSITION] menu
[POSITION] menu
On the menu screen, select [POSITION] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 79) for the operation of the menu screen.
Note
ff When the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G) is connected to the <DIGITAL LINK>
terminal, adjust the shift, aspect, and clock phase from the menu of DIGITAL LINK output supported device first.
[SHIFT]
Move the image position vertically or horizontally if the image projected on the screen is still out of position even
when the positions of the projector and screen are correct.
1)
Press as to select [SHIFT].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SHIFT] screen is displayed.
3)
Press asqw to adjust the position.
Orientation
Operation
Adjustment
Press a.
The image position moves up.
Press s.
The image position moves down.
Press w.
The image position moves to the right.
Press q.
The image position moves to the left.
Vertical (up and down)
adjustment
Horizontal (right and left)
adjustment
Note
ff For the portrait setting, image position is moved horizontally when “Vertical (up and down) adjustment” is made. Image position is moved
vertically when “Horizontal (right and left) adjustment” is made.
[ASPECT]
You can switch the aspect ratio of the image.
The aspect ratio is switched within the screen range selected in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SCREEN
SETTING] → [SCREEN FORMAT]. Set [SCREEN FORMAT] first. (x page 110)
1)
Press as to select [ASPECT].
2)
Press qw or the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [ASPECT] individual adjustment screen is displayed.
3)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[DEFAULT]
Displays images without changing the aspect ratio of the input signals.
[THROUGH]
Displays images without changing the resolution of the input signals.
94 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — [POSITION] menu
[16:9]
Displays images with the aspect ratio converted to 16:9 when standard signals are input*1. When
wide-screen signals are input*2, the images are displayed without changing the aspect ratio.
[4:3]
Displays images without changing the aspect ratio when standard signals are input*1. When widescreen signals are input*2, the images are reduced to be displayed without changing input aspect ratio
so that the images will fit in the 4:3 screen.
[H FIT]
Displays images using the entire width of the screen range selected in [SCREEN FORMAT]. When
signals have the aspect ratio vertically longer than the screen aspect ratio selected in [SCREEN
FORMAT], areas that exceed the height of the screen range will not be displayed.
[V FIT]
Displays images using the entire height of the screen range selected in [SCREEN FORMAT]. When
signals have the aspect ratio horizontally longer than the aspect ratio of the screen selected in
[SCREEN FORMAT], areas that exceed the width of the screen range will not be displayed.
[HV FIT]
Displays images in the entire screen range selected in [SCREEN FORMAT]. When the aspect ratio of
the input signals differs from that of the screen range, the images are displayed with the aspect ratio
converted to that of the screen selected in [SCREEN FORMAT].
*1 Standard signals are input signals with an aspect ratio of 4:3 or 5:4.
*2 Wide-screen signals are input signals with an aspect ratio of 16:10, 16:9, 15:9 or 15:10.
Note
ff If an aspect ratio which is different from the aspect ratio for the input signals is selected, the images will appear differently from the originals.
Be careful of this when selecting the aspect ratio.
ff If using the projector in places such as cafes or hotels to display programs for a commercial purpose or for public presentation, note that
adjusting the aspect ratio or using the zoom function to change the screen images may be an infringement of the rights of the original
copyright owner for that program under copyright protection laws. Take care when using a function of the projector such as the aspect ratio
adjustment and zoom function.
ff If conventional (normal) 4:3 images which are not wide-screen images are displayed on a wide screen, the edges of the images may not
be visible or they may become distorted. Such images should be viewed as with an aspect ratio of 4:3 in the original format intended by the
creator of the images.
[ZOOM]
You can adjust the image size.
The adjustments in [ZOOM] will differ depending on the setting of the [POSITION] menu → [ASPECT].
When [ASPECT] is set to other than [DEFAULT] and [THROUGH]
1)
Press as to select [ZOOM].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [ZOOM] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [INTERLOCKED].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
[OFF]
Sets the [VERTICAL] and [HORIZONTAL] zoom ratio.
[ON]
Uses [BOTH] to set zoom ratio. Image can be enlarged or reduced vertically and horizontally at the
same magnification.
5)
Press as to select [VERTICAL] or [HORIZONTAL].
ffIf [ON] is selected, select [BOTH].
6)
Press qw to adjust.
Note
ff When the [POSITION] menu → [ASPECT] is set to [THROUGH], [ZOOM] cannot be adjusted.
When [ASPECT] is set to [DEFAULT]
1)
Press as to select [ZOOM].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [ZOOM] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [MODE].
ENGLISH - 95
Chapter 4
4)
Settings — [POSITION] menu
Press qw to switch the item.
[INTERNAL]
[FULL]
Enlarges the size within the aspect range set with [SCREEN FORMAT].
Enlarges or reduces the size using the entire display area set with [SCREEN FORMAT].
5)
Press as to select [INTERLOCKED].
6)
Press qw to switch the item.
[OFF]
Sets the [VERTICAL] and [HORIZONTAL] zoom ratio.
[ON]
Uses [BOTH] to set zoom ratio. Image can be enlarged or reduced vertically and horizontally at the
same magnification.
7)
Press as to select [VERTICAL] or [HORIZONTAL].
ffIf [ON] is selected, select [BOTH].
8)
Press qw to adjust.
Note
ff When the [POSITION] menu → [ASPECT] is set to anything other than [DEFAULT], [MODE] is not displayed.
[GEOMETRY]
You can correct various types of distortion in a projected image.
Unique image processing technology enables projection of a square image on a special screen shape.
The projected image can be made to look more natural by making topical correction as necessary.
1)
Press as to select [GEOMETRY].
2)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
[KEYSTONE]
Does not perform geometric adjustment.
Adjusts any trapezoidal distortion in the projected image.
[CORNER CORRECTION]
Adjusts any distortion in the four corners of the projected image.
[CURVED CORRECTION]
Adjusts any curved distortion in the projected image.
[PC-1]
[PC-2]
[PC-3]
Select this item when performing correction using a computer and “Geometric & Setup Management
Software”*1. Up to three correction data can be saved.
*1 “Geometric & Setup Management Software” can be downloaded from the following website.
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/pass/
It is necessary to register and login to PASS to download.
Note
ff The menu, logo, or waveform monitor display may run off the screen when [GEOMETRY] is set.
ff The edge blending adjustment may not be performed correctly depending on the environment when using the [EDGE BLENDING]
(x page 103) and [GEOMETRY] simultaneously.
ff The image may disappear for a moment or may be disrupted while performing adjustment, but it is not a malfunction.
Setting [KEYSTONE] or [CURVED CORRECTION]
1)
Press as to select [GEOMETRY].
2)
Press qw to select [KEYSTONE] or [CURVED CORRECTION].
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [GEOMETRY:KEYSTONE] or [GEOMETRY:CURVED CORRECTION] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select the item to adjust.
5)
Press qw to adjust.
96 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — [POSITION] menu
[KEYSTONE]
[LENS THROW RATIO]
Set the throw ratio.
Select the value close to the actual projection distance divided by projected image width here.
To return to the default settings after selecting the value, press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control.
[VERTICAL KEYSTONE]
[HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE]
[VERTICAL BALANCE]
[HORIZONTAL BALANCE]
Adjust the setting according to the lens shift range in the vertical
direction.
Adjust the setting according to the lens shift range in the horizontal
direction.
[FREE GRID]
Finer adjustment is possible by selecting the points or lines to be corrected.
For details of operation, refer to “Adjusting distortion with [FREE GRID]” (x page 98).
[CURVED CORRECTION]
[LENS THROW RATIO]
Set the throw ratio.
Select the value close to the actual projection distance divided by projected image width here.
To return to the default settings after selecting the value, press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control.
[VERTICAL KEYSTONE]
[HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE]
[VERTICAL ARC]
[HORIZONTAL ARC]
[VERTICAL BALANCE]
[HORIZONTAL BALANCE]
[MAINTAIN ASPECT RATIO]
Select [ON] to correct while keeping the aspect ratio.
[FREE GRID]
Finer adjustment is possible by selecting the points or lines to be corrected.
For details of operation, refer to “Adjusting distortion with [FREE GRID]” (x page 98).
Setting [CORNER CORRECTION]
1)
Press as to select [GEOMETRY].
2)
Press qw to select [CORNER CORRECTION].
ENGLISH - 97
Chapter 4
Settings — [POSITION] menu
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [GEOMETRY:CORNER CORRECTION] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select the item to adjust, and press the <ENTER> button.
ffWhen [LINEARITY] is selected, press qw to select either adjustment method ([AUTO] or [MANUAL]).
Select [AUTO] normally.
For details of operation when [MANUAL] is selected, refer to “Adjusting to desired linearity” (x page 98).
5)
Press asqw to adjust.
[CORNER CORRECTION]
[UPPER LEFT]
[UPPER RIGHT]
[LOWER LEFT]
[LINEARITY]
Vertical direction
Horizontal direction
[FREE GRID]
Finer adjustment is possible by selecting the points or lines to be corrected.
For details of operation, refer to “Adjusting distortion with [FREE GRID]” (x page 98).
Adjusting to desired linearity
1)
Press as to select [GEOMETRY].
2)
Press qw to select [CORNER CORRECTION].
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [GEOMETRY:CORNER CORRECTION] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [LINEARITY].
5)
Press qw to select [MANUAL].
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [LINEARITY] screen is displayed.
7)
Press asqw to adjust.
Adjusting distortion with [FREE GRID]
1)
Press as to select [GEOMETRY].
2)
Press qw to select an item other than [OFF].
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe screen for the selected item is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [FREE GRID].
5)
Press qw to select an item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
Disables the adjustment to be performed with [FREE GRID].
[ON]
Enables the adjustment to be performed with [FREE GRID].
ffProceed to Step 6) when [ON] is selected.
98 - ENGLISH
[LOWER RIGHT]
Chapter 4
Settings — [POSITION] menu
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [FREE GRID] screen is displayed.
7)
Press as to select [GRID RESOLUTION].
8)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[2x2]
Performs the adjustment using the pattern of the outer border (there are two lines each vertically and
horizontally as a grid line).
[3x3]
Performs the adjustment using the grid pattern divided into two in the horizontal direction and also in
the vertical direction.
[5x5]
Performs the adjustment using the grid pattern divided into four in the horizontal direction and also in
the vertical direction.
(Factory default setting)
[9x9]
Performs the adjustment using the grid pattern divided into eight in the horizontal direction and also in
the vertical direction.
[17x17]
9)
Performs the adjustment using the grid pattern divided into 16 in the horizontal direction and also in
the vertical direction.
Press as to select [CONTROL POINTS].
10) Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[POINT]
[HORIZONTAL LINE]
[VERTICAL LINE]
Select this item when adjusting by selecting one intersection from the intersections on the grid lines.
Select this item when selecting all the intersections on one horizontal grid line, and adjusting them
simultaneously.
Select this item when selecting all the intersections on one vertical grid line, and adjusting them
simultaneously.
11) Press as to select [GRID WIDTH].
12) Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[1] - [10]
Select the width of the grid line. It can be set between 1 line to 10 lines.
(Factory default setting: [3])
13) Press as to select [GRID COLOR].
14) Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[WHITE]
[BLACK]
[RED]
[GREEN]
[BLUE]
Displays the pattern of the selected color.
(Factory default setting: [RED])
[CYAN]
[MAGENTA]
[YELLOW]
[OFF]
Does not display the pattern.
15) Press as to select [CONTROL POINTS COLOR].
16) Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
ENGLISH - 99
Chapter 4
Settings — [POSITION] menu
[WHITE]
[BLACK]
[RED]
[GREEN]
[BLUE]
[CYAN]
Select the color of the marker that indicates the control point.
The marker that indicates the control point is displayed in the control point selection mode and
adjustment mode.
(Factory default setting: [WHITE])
[MAGENTA]
[YELLOW]
17) Press as to select [EXECUTE].
18) Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe screen switches to the control point selection mode.
19) Press asqw to select the control point.
ffMove the marker over the intersection of the grid lines to adjust.
ffWhen [HORIZONTAL LINE] is selected in Step 10), press as to select the control point.
ffWhen [VERTICAL LINE] is selected in Step 10), press qw to select the control point.
20) Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe control point is confirmed, and the screen switches to the adjustment mode.
21) Press asqw to adjust the position of the control point.
ffBy adjusting the position of the control point, the range to the neighboring intersections will be corrected.
ffTo continuously adjust the position of the other intersection, press the <MENU> button or the <ENTER>
button to return to Step 19).
ffPressing the <MENU> button twice allows to reselect [GRID RESOLUTION], [CONTROL POINTS], [GRID
WIDTH], [GRID COLOR], and [CONTROL POINTS COLOR].
Note
ff The contents adjusted in [FREE GRID] are saved as individual correction data for [KEYSTONE], [CORNER CORRECTION], [CURVED
CORRECTION], [PC-1], [PC-2], and [PC-3].
ff Even if [GRID RESOLUTION] or [CONTROL POINTS] is reselected, the correction data adjusted before the reselection is maintained.
ff By selecting more narrow grid pattern with [GRID RESOLUTION], the range of effect of the control point position adjustment will be smaller.
To perform topical fine adjustment, it is recommended to adjust by setting [GRID RESOLUTION] to [17x17].
ff The image may not be displayed correctly if adjustment of the control point position increases.
ff The settings of [GRID RESOLUTION], [CONTROL POINTS], [GRID WIDTH], [GRID COLOR], and [CONTROL POINTS COLOR] are
synchronized with the setting items under each item of [KEYSTONE], [CORNER CORRECTION], [CURVED CORRECTION], [PC-1], [PC2], and [PC-3].
Initializing adjustments for [FREE GRID]
Initialize the correction data adjusted with [FREE GRID] and restore the factory default settings (the state where
no correction is performed). Simultaneously the settings of [GRID RESOLUTION], [CONTROL POINTS], [GRID
WIDTH], [GRID COLOR], and [CONTROL POINTS COLOR] are restored to the factory default settings.
1)
Press as to select [GEOMETRY].
2)
Press qw to select the item to initialize its correction data in [FREE GRID].
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe screen for the selected item is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [FREE GRID].
5)
Press qw to select [ON].
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [FREE GRID] screen is displayed.
7)
Press as to select [INITIALIZE].
8)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
9)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
100 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — [POSITION] menu
Note
ff Each correction data for [KEYSTONE], [CORNER CORRECTION], [CURVED CORRECTION], [PC-1], [PC-2], and [PC-3] cannot be
initialized at once.
To initialize all the correction data, select each item and execute [INITIALIZE] individually.
ff When the projector is initialized by one of the following methods, all data in [FREE GRID] are initialized.
gg When initialized by selecting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET]
gg When initialized by setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [USER SETTINGS] → [OTHER USER SETTING] to
[INITIALIZE]
ENGLISH - 101
Chapter 4
Settings — [ADVANCED MENU] menu
[ADVANCED MENU] menu
On the menu screen, select [ADVANCED MENU] from the main menu, and select an item from the submenu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 79) for the operation of the menu screen.
[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY]
The picture quality is enhanced by raising the vertical resolution higher performing the cinema processing when
interlaced video signal is input.
1)
Press as to select [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY].
2)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[AUTO]
Automatically detects the signal and performs the cinema processing. (Factory default setting)
[OFF]
Does not perform cinema processing.
[30p FIXED]
When 60 Hz vertical scanning
frequency signals are input
[25p FIXED]
When 50 Hz vertical scanning
frequency signals are input
Performs forced cinema processing (2:2 pulldown).
Note
ff In [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY], the picture quality will degrade when a signal other than the 2:2 pulldown is set as [25p FIXED] or [30p
FIXED]. (Vertical resolution will degrade.)
[BLANKING]
Adjust the blanking width if there are noises at the edge of the screen or the image is slightly running out from the
screen.
1)
Press as to select [BLANKING].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [BLANKING] adjustment screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [UPPER], [LOWER], [LEFT], or [RIGHT].
ffWhen [CUSTOM MASKING] is selected and set to anything other than [OFF] ([PC-1], [PC-2], [PC-3]),
the blanking width can be adjusted to arbitrary shape using a computer and the masking function of the
“Geometric & Setup Management Software”. Up to three adjustment data can be saved.
4)
Press qw to adjust the blanking width.
Blanking correction
Top of the screen
Bottom of the
screen
102 - ENGLISH
Item
Operation
Adjustment
Press q.
The blanking zone
moves upward.
Press w.
The blanking zone
moves downward.
Press w.
The blanking zone
moves upward.
Press q.
The blanking zone
moves downward.
[UPPER]
[LOWER]
Range of adjustment
Top and bottom 0 - 1 198
(Factory default setting: 0)
Chapter 4
Blanking correction
Left side of the
screen
Right side of the
screen
Item
Settings — [ADVANCED MENU] menu
Operation
Adjustment
Press w.
The blanking zone
moves to the right.
Press q.
The blanking zone
moves to the left.
Press q.
The blanking zone
moves to the right.
Press w.
The blanking zone
moves to the left.
[LEFT]
[RIGHT]
Range of adjustment
Left and right 0 - 1 918
(Factory default setting: 0)
Note
ff The upper limit of the adjustment range may be restricted so that the entire projected image is not covered by blanking width.
ff “Geometric & Setup Management Software” can be downloaded from the following website.
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/pass/
It is necessary to register and login to PASS to download.
[EDGE BLENDING]
The overlapping area is made seamless by creating inclination in the brightness in the overlapped area when
structuring a multi-display screen by combining the projected images from multiple projectors.
Perform the edge blending adjustment when the projected image has stabilized.
When [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [ACTIVE FOCUS OPTIMIZER] → [ACTIVE FOCUS] is set to
[OFF], it is recommended to perform the focus adjustment after 30 minutes or more have elapsed with the focus
test pattern displayed.
For details of the active focus optimizer function, refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] →
[ACTIVE FOCUS OPTIMIZER] (x page 129). For details of the test pattern, refer to “[TEST PATTERN] menu”
(x page 155).
It is recommended that edge blending is adjusted after an image is projected continuously for at least 30 minutes
and then the image is stable.
1)
Press as to select [EDGE BLENDING].
2)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
Sets the edge blending function to off.
[ON]
Use the setting value preset in the projector for the inclination of the edge blending area.
[USER]
Use the user-setting value for the inclination of the edge blending area. (Configuration/registration
requires separate software. Consult your dealer.)
ffProceed to Step 3) when anything other than [OFF] is selected.
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [EDGE BLENDING] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [MODE].
5)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[SOFTEDGE/BLACK LEVEL]
[BLACK LEVEL ONLY]
6)
Standard setting. Adjusts both the inclination of the brightness and the black level.
Select this item when adjusting only the black level. This is useful when adjusting the inclination of the
brightness with an externally connected media server, etc.
Press as to specify the location to be corrected.
ffWhen joining at top: Set [UPPER] to [ON]
ffWhen joining at bottom: Set [LOWER] to [ON]
ffWhen joining at left: Set [LEFT] to [ON]
ffWhen joining at right: Set [RIGHT] to [ON]
ENGLISH - 103
Chapter 4
Settings — [ADVANCED MENU] menu
7)
Press qw to switch to [ON].
8)
Press as to select [START] or [WIDTH].
9)
Press qw to adjust the starting position or correction width.
10) Press as to select [MARKER].
11) Press qw to switch to [ON].
ffA marker for image position adjustment is displayed. The position where the red and green lines overlap for
the projectors to be joined will be the optimal point. Make sure to set the correction width for the projectors
to be joined with the same value. Optimal joining is not possible with projectors that have different
correction widths.
The optimal point is the point at which these lines overlap.
Green line
Red line
12) Press as to select [BLACK LEVEL ADJUST].
13) Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [BLACK LEVEL ADJUST] screen is displayed.
ffBy setting [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON] on the [EDGE BLENDING] screen, the black test pattern is
displayed when you enter the [BLACK LEVEL ADJUST] screen.
14) Press as to select [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL].
15) Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe adjustment area in the projected image becomes temporarily bright and the [NON-OVERLAPPED
BLACK LEVEL] screen is displayed.
ff[RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE] can be adjusted individually if [INTERLOCKED] is set to [OFF].
16) Press as to select an item, and press qw to adjust the setting.
ffOnce the adjustment is completed, press the <MENU> button to return to the [BLACK LEVEL ADJUST]
screen.
17) Press as to select [UPPER WIDTH], [LOWER WIDTH], [LEFT WIDTH], or [RIGHT WIDTH] in [BLACK
BORDER AREA].
18) Press qw to set the standard width of [BLACK BORDER AREA].
19) Press as to select [UPPER FREE SHAPE], [LOWER FREE SHAPE], [LEFT FREE SHAPE], or [RIGHT
FREE SHAPE].
20) Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
Select this item when the shape of the border between [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] and
[BLACK BORDER LEVEL] is not to be adjusted.
The region of the rectangle with the standard width set in Step 18) will be the [BLACK BORDER
AREA].
[ON]
Select this item when the shape of the border between [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] and
[BLACK BORDER LEVEL] is to be adjusted.
ffProceed to Step 28) when [OFF] is selected.
104 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — [ADVANCED MENU] menu
21) Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [UPPER FREE SHAPE] screen, the [LOWER FREE SHAPE] screen, the [LEFT FREE SHAPE]
screen, or the [RIGHT FREE SHAPE] screen is displayed.
22) Press as to select [ADJUSTMENT POINTS].
23) Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[2]
Adjusts the shape of the border at points on both ends.
[3]
Adjusts the shape of the border at three points*1.
[5]
Adjusts the shape of the border at five points*1.
[9]
Adjusts the shape of the border at nine points*1.
[17]
Adjusts the shape of the border at 17 points*1.
*1 The points are not placed at equally spaced intervals.
24) Press as to select [EXECUTE].
25) Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe projector will go into the adjustment mode.
26) Press asqw to select the adjustment point.
ffMove the marker over to the point to adjust.
ffPress qw to select the adjustment point when [UPPER FREE SHAPE] or [LOWER FREE SHAPE] is
selected in Step 19).
ffPress as to select the adjustment point when [LEFT FREE SHAPE] or [RIGHT FREE SHAPE] is selected
in Step 19).
27) Press asqw to adjust the position of the adjustment point.
ffPress as to adjust [VERTICAL] when [UPPER FREE SHAPE] or [LOWER FREE SHAPE] is selected in
Step 19).
ffPress qw to adjust [HORIZONTAL] when [LEFT FREE SHAPE] or [RIGHT FREE SHAPE] is selected in
Step 19).
ffBy adjusting the position of the adjustment point, the border between the adjacent adjustment point will be
interpolated by a straight line.
ffTo continuously adjust the positions of other adjustment points, return to Step 26).
ffPressing the <MENU> button twice allows to reselect the items for [BLACK BORDER AREA].
28) Press as to select [BLACK BORDER LEVEL].
29) Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe adjustment area in the projected image becomes temporarily bright and the [BLACK BORDER
LEVEL] screen is displayed.
ff[RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE] can be adjusted individually if [INTERLOCKED] is set to [OFF].
30) Press as to select an item, and press qw to adjust the setting.
ffOnce the adjustment is completed, press the <MENU> button to return to the [BLACK LEVEL ADJUST]
screen.
31) Press as to select [UPPER], [LOWER], [LEFT], or [RIGHT] for [OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL].
32) Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe adjustment area in the projected image becomes temporarily bright and the [OVERLAPPED BLACK
LEVEL] screen is displayed.
ff[RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE] can be adjusted individually if [INTERLOCKED] is set to [OFF].
ENGLISH - 105
Chapter 4
Settings — [ADVANCED MENU] menu
33) Press as to select an item, and press qw to adjust the setting.
[BLACK BORDER AREA] (Right)
Projection range
Edge blending [WIDTH] (Right)
[MARKER] (Red)
Edge blending [START] (Right)
([MARKER] (Green))
[NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL]
[OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] (Right)
[BLACK BORDER LEVEL]
Note
ff [BLACK LEVEL ADJUST] is a function that makes the increased brightness in black level of the overlapping image area difficult to
notice when [EDGE BLENDING] is used to structure a multi-display screen. The optimal point of correction is set by adjusting [NONOVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] so the black level of the overlapping image area will be the same level as the non-overlapping area. If the
border area of the part where the image is overlapping and the non-overlapping part gets brighter after adjusting [NON-OVERLAPPED
BLACK LEVEL], adjust the width or the shape of the top, bottom, left, or right. Adjust [BLACK BORDER LEVEL] when the adjustment makes
only the border area darker.
ff The joining part may look discontinuous depending on the position you are looking from when a screen with high gain or rear screen is used.
ff When structuring a multi-display screen using both horizontal and vertical edge blending, adjust [OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] first before
making adjustments in Step 14). Adjustment method is same as the procedure of [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL].
ff If only horizontal or vertical edge blending is used, set all items in [OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] to 0.
ff The [AUTO TESTPATTERN] setting will change in conjunction with the setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [COLOR ADJUSTMENT]
→ [AUTO TESTPATTERN].
ff Adjustment of the shape of the border between [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] and [BLACK BORDER LEVEL] is a function to
perform edge blending together with the adjustment of [GEOMETRY] (x page 96). If [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] is deformed
by correcting the distortion of the projected image with [GEOMETRY], perform the adjustment following Step 19) to Step 27), and adjust the
edge blending according to the shape of [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL].
ff An error is accumulated by repeatedly adjusting the position of the adjustment points, which may distort the shape of the border awkwardly.
In such a case, initialize the shape of the border. Initializing the shape of the border will reset the shape to the factory default (unadjusted
state). For details, refer to “Initializing the shape of the border” (x page 106).
Initializing the shape of the border
Initialize the data adjusted with [UPPER FREE SHAPE], [LOWER FREE SHAPE], [LEFT FREE SHAPE], and
[RIGHT FREE SHAPE] and restore to the factory default settings (unadjusted state).
1)
Press as to select [EDGE BLENDING].
2)
Press qw to select [ON] or [USER].
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [EDGE BLENDING] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [BLACK LEVEL ADJUST].
5)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [BLACK LEVEL ADJUST] screen is displayed.
6)
Press as to select [UPPER FREE SHAPE], [LOWER FREE SHAPE], [LEFT FREE SHAPE], or [RIGHT
FREE SHAPE] to initialize.
7)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [UPPER FREE SHAPE] screen, the [LOWER FREE SHAPE] screen, the [LEFT FREE SHAPE]
screen, or the [RIGHT FREE SHAPE] screen is displayed.
8)
Press as to select [INITIALIZE].
9)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
10) Press qw to select [EXECUTE], and press the <ENTER> button.
106 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — [ADVANCED MENU] menu
Note
ff The adjustment data for [UPPER FREE SHAPE], [LOWER FREE SHAPE], [LEFT FREE SHAPE], and [RIGHT FREE SHAPE] cannot be
initialized at once.
ff To initialize all the adjustment data, select each item and execute [INITIALIZE] individually.
ff When the projector is initialized by one of the following methods, all data in [UPPER FREE SHAPE], [LOWER FREE SHAPE], [LEFT FREE
SHAPE], and [RIGHT FREE SHAPE] are initialized.
gg When initialized by selecting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET]
gg When initialized by setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [USER SETTINGS] → [OTHER USER SETTING] to
[INITIALIZE]
[FRAME RESPONSE]
Set image frame delay.
1)
Press as to select [FRAME RESPONSE].
2)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[NORMAL]
[FIXED]*1
Standard setting.
Sets image frame delay to be constant regardless of the image position or magnification.
*1 Only when video signal or computer signal with the vertical scanning frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz is input
[RASTER POSITION]
This will allow the position of the image to move within the display area arbitrarily when the input image is not
using the whole display area.
1)
Press as to select [RASTER POSITION].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [RASTER POSITION] screen is displayed.
3)
Press asqw to adjust the position.
ENGLISH - 107
Chapter 4
Settings — [DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu
[DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu
On the menu screen, select [DISPLAY LANGUAGE] from the main menu, and display the sub-menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 79) for the operation of the menu screen.
Changing the display language
You can select the language of the on-screen display.
1)
Press as to select the display language and press the <ENTER> button.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
SELECT
ENTER
SET
ffVarious menus, settings, adjustment screens, control button names, etc., are displayed in the selected
language.
ffThe language can be changed to English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Portuguese, Japanese, Chinese,
Russian, or Korean.
Note
ff The on-screen display language is set to English in the factory default setting or when the projector is initialized by one of the following
methods.
gg When initialized by selecting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET]
gg When initialized by setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [USER SETTINGS] → [OTHER USER SETTING] to
[INITIALIZE]
108 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
[DISPLAY OPTION] menu
On the menu screen, select [DISPLAY OPTION] from the main menu, and select an item from the submenu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 79) for the operation of the menu screen.
[COLOR ADJUSTMENT]
Correct the color difference between projectors when using multiple projectors simultaneously.
Adjusting the color adjustment as desired
1)
Press as to select [COLOR ADJUSTMENT].
2)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
Does not perform the color adjustment.
[3COLORS]
Adjusts the three colors [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE] and [GAIN] for white.
[7COLORS]
Adjusts the seven colors [RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], [CYAN], [MAGENTA], [YELLOW], or [WHITE].
3)
Select [3COLORS] or [7COLORS].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [3COLORS] or [7COLORS] screen is displayed.
5)
Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], or [WHITE] ([RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], [CYAN],
[MAGENTA], [YELLOW], or [WHITE] when [7COLORS] is selected).
ffThe adjustment condition can be reset by selecting [RESET]. For details regarding [RESET], refer to
“Resetting the adjustment condition of the color adjustment” (x page 109).
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [3COLORS:RED], [3COLORS:GREEN], [3COLORS:BLUE], or [3COLORS:WHITE] screen is
displayed.
When [7COLORS] is selected, the [7COLORS:RED], [7COLORS:GREEN], [7COLORS:BLUE],
[7COLORS:CYAN], [7COLORS:MAGENTA], [7COLORS:YELLOW], or [7COLORS:WHITE] screen is
displayed.
ffBy setting [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON], the test pattern for the selected color is displayed.
7)
Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
ffOnly [GAIN] can be adjusted when [WHITE] is selected for [3COLORS].
8)
Press qw to adjust.
ffThe adjustment value will change between 0*1 and 2 048.
*1 The lower limit varies depending on the color to be adjusted.
Note
ff Operation when correcting the adjustment color
When the correction color same as the adjustment color is changed: The luminance of the adjustment color changes.
When correction color red is changed: Red is added to or subtracted from the adjustment color.
When correction color green is changed: Green is added to or subtracted from the adjustment color.
When correction color blue is changed: Blue is added to or subtracted from the adjustment color.
ff Since advanced skills are necessary for the adjustment, this adjustment should be carried out by a person who is familiar with the projector
or by a service person.
ff When [RESET] is set to [PICTURE MODE] and the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control is pressed, the selected adjustment item will
return to the value of factory default for the current picture mode.
ff When [RESET] is set to [NATIVE], pressing the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control will return the value to uncorrected value.
ff When [COLOR ADJUSTMENT] is set to other than [OFF], the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [COLOR CORRECTION] is fixed to [OFF], and
the [PICTURE] menu → [COLOR TEMPERATURE] is fixed to [USER].
Resetting the adjustment condition of the color adjustment
Reset all the adjustment items of the color adjustment adjusted in [3COLORS] and [7COLORS].
1)
Press as to select [COLOR ADJUSTMENT].
ENGLISH - 109
Chapter 4
Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
2)
Press qw to select [3COLORS] or [7COLORS].
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [3COLORS] or [7COLORS] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [RESET].
5)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
6)
Press asqw to select [RESET].
7)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[PICTURE MODE]
[NATIVE]
8)
Sets all the adjustment items of color adjustment to the color value of the factory default for the
currently selected picture mode.
Set the picture mode in the [PICTURE] menu → [PICTURE MODE].
Sets all the adjustment items for color adjustment to uncorrected value.
Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe value for color matching is overwritten.
[COLOR CORRECTION]
Colors can be adjusted and registered for each input signal format.
1)
Press as to select [COLOR CORRECTION].
2)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
[USER]
Standard setting.
For each signal format of RGB signal and YCBCR/YPBPR signal, six colors of red, green, blue, cyan,
magenta, and yellow can be adjusted and registered. Press the <ENTER> button and set the details.
Adjustment is possible within the range of -31 to +31.
[SCREEN SETTING]
Set the screen size.
Correct to the optimum image position for the set screen when the aspect ratio of a projected image is changed.
Set as necessary for the screen in use.
1)
Press as to select [SCREEN SETTING].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SCREEN SETTING] screen is displayed.
3)
Press qw to switch the [SCREEN FORMAT] item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[SCREEN FORMAT]
[16:10]
Range when [SCREEN POSITION] is selected
Cannot be adjusted.
[4:3]
Adjusts the horizontal position between ‑160 and 160.
[16:9]
Adjusts the vertical position between ‑60 and 60.
4)
Press as to select [SCREEN POSITION].
ff[SCREEN POSITION] cannot be selected or adjusted when [SCREEN FORMAT] is set to [16:10].
5)
Press qw to adjust [SCREEN POSITION].
110 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
[BACKUP INPUT SETTING]
Set the backup function that switches the signal to the backup input signal as seamless as possible when input
signal is disrupted.
1)
Press as to select [BACKUP INPUT SETTING].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [BACKUP INPUT MODE].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [BACKUP INPUT MODE] screen is displayed.
5)
Press as to select the combination of the input and press the <ENTER> button.
Primary input
Secondary input
[OFF]
[HDMI1]
Details
Disables the backup function.
[HDMI2]
Enables the backup function.
6)
Press the <MENU> button.
ffThe [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] screen is displayed.
7)
Press as to select [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING].
ffWhen [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to [OFF], [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING] cannot be selected.
8)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[ENABLE]
Switches to the secondary input (primary input) automatically when the input signal for primary input
(secondary input) is disrupted.
[DISABLE]
Disables the automatic input switching function.
Note
ff The [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] setting item is common with the following menu item.
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [NO SIGNAL SETTING] → [BACKUP INPUT SETTING]
ff The backup function is enabled when [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to anything other than [OFF] and same signal is input to the primary
input and the secondary input.
ff To switch to the backup input signal using the backup function, make sure that the following three conditions are satisfied to be ready to use
the function.
gg Set [BACKUP INPUT MODE] to anything other than [OFF].
gg Input the same signal to the primary and secondary inputs.
gg Display the image of the primary input or secondary input.
ff If the input is switched to other than the primary or secondary input while the backup function is ready for use, the state of readiness to
use the backup function is canceled. To switch to the backup input signal using the backup function again, switch to the primary input or
secondary input.
ff When [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to anything other than [OFF], the combination of that input is displayed in [PRIMARY INPUT] and
[SECONDARY INPUT] of the [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] screen.
ff [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] is displayed in the input guide (x page 118) and the [STATUS] screen (x pages 76, 146) when [BACKUP
INPUT MODE] is set to anything other than [OFF].
When the signal can be switched to the backup input signal using the backup function, [ACTIVE] is displayed in [BACKUP INPUT STATUS].
When it is not possible, [INACTIVE] is displayed instead.
The secondary input will be the backup input when [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] is displaying [ACTIVE] while the image from the primary
input is displayed.
The primary input will be the backup input when [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] is displaying [ACTIVE] while the image from the secondary
input is displayed.
ff When [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to anything other than [OFF], the input is switched seamlessly if the input is switched between the
primary input and the secondary input while it is possible to switch to the backup input signal.
ff When [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING] is set to [ENABLE], and [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] shows [ACTIVE], the signal is switched to the
backup input if a disruption occurs in the input signal.
ff When [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING] is set to [ENABLE], the indication in [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] will change to [INACTIVE] if the input
signal is disrupted and automatically switches to the backup input. In this case, it is not possible to switch to the backup input signal until the
original input signal is restored. If the input has switched to the backup input automatically, it is possible to switch to the backup input signal
when the original signal has been restored. In this case, the current input is maintained.
ff The primary input setting values are applied to image adjustment values such as the [PICTURE] menu → [PICTURE MODE], [GAMMA],
and [COLOR TEMPERATURE].
ENGLISH - 111
Chapter 4
Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
[HDMI IN]
Set this item in accordance with the image signal input to the <HDMI IN 1> terminal or the <HDMI IN 2> terminal.
Setting [SIGNAL LEVEL] in [HDMI IN]
1)
Press as to select [HDMI IN].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [HDMI IN] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [HDMI1] or [HDMI2], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [HDMI1] screen or the [HDMI2] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [SIGNAL LEVEL].
5)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[AUTO]
Automatically sets the signal level.
[64-940]
Select this item when the signal output from the HDMI terminal of an external device (such as a Bluray disc player) is input to the <HDMI IN 1> terminal or the <HDMI IN 2> terminal.
[0-1023]
Select this item when the signal output from the DVI‑D terminal of an external device (such as a
computer) is input to the <HDMI IN 1> terminal or the <HDMI IN 2> terminal via a conversion cable or
similar cable.
Select this item also when the signal output from the HDMI terminal of a computer or other device is
input to the <HDMI IN 1> terminal or the <HDMI IN 2> terminal.
Note
ff The optimal setting varies depending on the output setting of the connected external device. Refer to the operating instructions of the
external device regarding the output of the external device.
Setting [EQUALIZER] in [HDMI IN]
Set this function when adjustment of the signal strength is required.
1)
Press as to select [HDMI IN].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [HDMI IN] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [HDMI1] or [HDMI2], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [HDMI1] screen or the [HDMI2] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [EQUALIZER].
5)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
ffAdjust while viewing the image.
[0] - [7]
Change the setting when the projected image does not stabilize. The higher the value, correction by
the equalizer becomes stronger.
(Factory default setting: [2])
Setting [EDID SELECT] in [HDMI IN]
1)
Press as to select [HDMI IN].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [HDMI IN] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [HDMI1] or [HDMI2], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [HDMI1] screen or the [HDMI2] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [EDID SELECT].
112 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
5)
Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[4K/60p]
Switches to EDID corresponding to the 4K image signal (maximum 4 096 x 2 160 dots, maximum
vertical scanning frequency 60 Hz).
[4K/30p]
Switches to EDID corresponding to the 4K image signal (maximum 4 096 x 2 160 dots, maximum
vertical scanning frequency 30 Hz).
[2K]
Switches to EDID corresponding to the 2K image signal (maximum 1 920 x 1 200 dots) or lower.
Note
ff Switch the setting to [4K/30p] when proper image is not projected while [EDID SELECT] is set to [4K/60p] and the 4K image signal is input.
ff Switch the setting to [2K] when proper image is not projected while [EDID SELECT] is set to [4K/60p] or [4K/30p] and the 2K image signal or
lower is input.
ff For details of the signal described in EDID of [4K/60p], [4K/30p], or [2K], refer to “List of plug and play compatible signals” (x page 270).
Setting [EDID MODE] in [HDMI IN]
1)
Press as to select [HDMI IN].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [HDMI IN] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [HDMI1] or [HDMI2], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [HDMI1] screen or the [HDMI2] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [EDID MODE].
5)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [HDMI EDID MODE] screen is displayed.
6)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[DEFAULT]
[SCREEN FIT]
[USER]
Standard setting.
Changes the EDID data according to the [SCREEN FORMAT] setting.
Set the [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] items as EDID.
ffProceed to Step 11) when [DEFAULT] or [SCREEN FIT] is selected.
7)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [RESOLUTION] screen is displayed.
8)
Press asqw to select [RESOLUTION].
ffSelect [1024x768p], [1280x720p], [1280x800p], [1280x1024p], [1366x768p], [1400x1050p], [1440x900p],
[1600x900p], [1600x1200p], [1680x1050p], [1920x1080p], [1920x1080i], or [1920x1200p].
9)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] screen is displayed.
10) Press qw to select [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY].
ffSelect [60Hz], [50Hz], [30Hz], [25Hz], or [24Hz] when [1920x1080p] is selected for [RESOLUTION].
ffSelect [60Hz], [50Hz], or [48Hz] when [1920x1080i] is selected for [RESOLUTION].
ffSelect [60Hz] or [50Hz] when anything other than following is selected for [RESOLUTION].
gg[1920x1080p], [1920x1080i]
11) Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
12) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff The settings in [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] are displayed in [EDID STATUS].
ff Setting of the resolution and the vertical scanning frequency may be necessary on the computer or video device in use.
ff The computer, video device, or projector in use may require the power to be turned off and on again after setting.
ff The output with the set resolution or vertical scanning frequency may not be possible depending on the computer or video device in use.
ENGLISH - 113
Chapter 4
Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
[SDI IN]
Set this item in accordance with the signal input to the <SDI IN> terminal.
Setting [RESOLUTION]
1)
Press as to select [SDI IN].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SDI IN] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [RESOLUTION], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [RESOLUTION] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select the item, and press the <ENTER> button.
ffSelect [AUTO], [1280x720p], [1920x1080i], [1920x1080p], [1920x1080sF], or [2048x1080p].
Setting [3G-SDI MAPPING]
1)
Press as to select [SDI IN].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SDI IN] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [3G-SDI MAPPING].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[AUTO]
Automatically selects [LEVEL A] or [LEVEL B].
[LEVEL A]
Fixes the mapping method to 3G-SDI Level-A.
[LEVEL B]
Fixes the mapping method to 3G-SDI Level-B.
Note
ff This function does not operate when the HD‑SDI signal is input.
Setting [SYSTEM SELECTOR]
1)
Press as to select [SDI IN].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SDI IN] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [SYSTEM SELECTOR].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[AUTO]
Automatically selects [RGB], [YPBPR 4:4:4], or [YPBPR 4:2:2].
[RGB], [YPBPR 4:4:4], or [YPBPR 4:2:2] is automatically selected by reading the payload ID attached to
the input signal. [RGB] is selected when the payload ID is not attached to the input signal.
[RGB]
Fixes to [RGB].
[YPBPR 4:4:4]
Fixes to [YPBPR 4:4:4].
[YPBPR 4:2:2]
Fixes to [YPBPR 4:2:2].
Setting [BIT DEPTH]
1)
Press as to select [SDI IN].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SDI IN] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [BIT DEPTH].
114 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
4)
Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[AUTO]
Automatically selects [12-bit] or [10-bit].
[12-bit]
Fixes to [12-bit].
[10-bit]
Fixes to [10-bit].
Setting [SIGNAL LEVEL]
1)
Press as to select [SDI IN].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SDI IN] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [SIGNAL LEVEL].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[64-940]
Normally use this setting.
[4-1019]
Select this item when gray is displayed as black.
[DIGITAL LINK IN]
Set this item in accordance with the image signal input to the <DIGITAL LINK> terminal.
Setting [SIGNAL LEVEL] in [DIGITAL LINK IN]
1)
Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK IN].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [DIGITAL LINK IN] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [SIGNAL LEVEL].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[AUTO]
Automatically sets the signal level.
[64-940]
Select this item when the signal output from the HDMI terminal of an external device (such as a Bluray disc player) is input to the <DIGITAL LINK> terminal via a twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
[0-1023]
Select this item when the signal output from the DVI‑D terminal or HDMI terminal of an external
device (such as a computer) is input to the <DIGITAL LINK> terminal via a twisted-pair-cable
transmitter.
Note
ff The optimal setting varies depending on the output setting of the connected external device. Refer to the operating instructions of the
external device regarding the output of the external device.
Setting [EDID SELECT] in [DIGITAL LINK IN]
1)
Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK IN].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [DIGITAL LINK IN] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [EDID SELECT].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[4K/60p]
Switches to EDID corresponding to the 4K image signal (maximum 4 096 x 2 160 dots, maximum
vertical scanning frequency 60 Hz).
ENGLISH - 115
Chapter 4
Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
[4K/30p]
Switches to EDID corresponding to the 4K image signal (maximum 4 096 x 2 160 dots, maximum
vertical scanning frequency 30 Hz).
[2K]
Switches to EDID corresponding to the 2K image signal (maximum 1 920 x 1 200 dots) or lower.
Note
ff Switch the setting to [4K/30p] when proper image is not projected while [EDID SELECT] is set to [4K/60p] and the 4K image signal is input.
ff Switch the setting to [2K] when proper image is not projected while [EDID SELECT] is set to [4K/60p] or [4K/30p] and the 2K image signal or
lower is input.
ff For details of the signal described in EDID of [4K/60p], [4K/30p], or [2K], refer to “List of plug and play compatible signals” (x page 270).
Setting [EDID MODE] in [DIGITAL LINK IN]
1)
Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK IN].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [DIGITAL LINK IN] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [EDID MODE].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [DIGITAL LINK EDID MODE] screen is displayed.
5)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[DEFAULT]
[SCREEN FIT]
[USER]
Standard setting.
Changes the EDID data according to the [SCREEN FORMAT] setting.
Sets the [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] items as EDID.
ffProceed to Step 10) when [DEFAULT] or [SCREEN FIT] is selected.
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [RESOLUTION] screen is displayed.
7)
Press asqw to select [RESOLUTION].
ffSelect [1024x768p], [1280x720p], [1280x800p], [1280x1024p], [1366x768p], [1400x1050p], [1440x900p],
[1600x900p], [1600x1200p], [1680x1050p], [1920x1080p], [1920x1080i], or [1920x1200p].
8)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] screen is displayed.
9)
Press qw to switch [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY].
ffSelect [60Hz], [50Hz], [30Hz], [25Hz], or [24Hz] when [1920x1080p] is selected for [RESOLUTION].
ffSelect [60Hz], [50Hz], or [48Hz] when [1920x1080i] is selected for [RESOLUTION].
ffSelect [60Hz] or [50Hz] when anything other than following is selected for [RESOLUTION].
gg[1920x1080p], [1920x1080i]
10) Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
11) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff The setting details are displayed in [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] of [EDID STATUS].
ff Setting of the resolution and the vertical scanning frequency may be necessary on the computer or video device in use.
ff The computer, video device, or projector in use may require the power to be turned off and on again after setting.
ff The output with the set resolution or vertical scanning frequency may not be possible depending on the computer or video device in use.
[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY]
Set the on-screen display.
Setting [OSD POSITION]
Set the position of the menu screen (OSD).
116 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
1)
Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [OSD POSITION].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[2]
Sets to the center left of the screen.
[3]
Sets to the bottom left of the screen.
[4]
Sets to the top center of the screen.
[5]
Sets to the center of the screen.
[6]
Sets to the bottom center of the screen.
[7]
Sets to the upper right of the screen.
[8]
Sets to the center right of the screen.
[9]
Sets to the bottom right of the screen.
[1]
Sets to the upper left of the screen.
Setting [OSD ROTATION]
Set the orientation of the menu screen (OSD).
1)
Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [OSD ROTATION].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
[CLOCKWISE]
[COUNTERCLOCKWISE]
Does not rotate the screen.
Rotates the screen by 90° clockwise.
Rotates the screen by 90° counterclockwise.
Setting [OSD COLOR]
Set the color of the menu screen (OSD).
1)
Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [OSD COLOR].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[1]
Sets to yellow.
[2]
Sets to blue.
[3]
Sets to white.
[4]
Sets to green.
[5]
Sets to peach.
[6]
Sets to brown.
Setting [OSD MEMORY]
Set hold for the position of the menu screen (OSD) cursor.
1)
Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].
ENGLISH - 117
Chapter 4
Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [OSD MEMORY].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[ON]
Holds the cursor position.
[OFF]
Does not hold the cursor position.
Note
ff Even if [ON] is set, the cursor position is not maintained when the power is turned off.
Setting [INPUT GUIDE]
Set whether to display the input guide in the position set in [OSD POSITION].
Input guide is a screen to display information such as the currently selected input terminal name, signal name,
memory number, and [BACKUP INPUT STATUS].
1)
Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [INPUT GUIDE].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[ON]
Displays the input guide.
[OFF]
Hides the input guide.
Setting [WARNING MESSAGE]
Set the display/hide of the warning message.
1)
Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [WARNING MESSAGE].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[ON]
Displays the warning message.
[OFF]
Hides the warning message.
Note
ff If [OFF] is set, the warning message will not be displayed on the projected image even when warning condition such as [TEMPERATURE
WARNING] is detected while using the projector. Also, the following message is not displayed: the countdown message until the power
is turned off after the no signal shut-off function is executed; the countdown message until the light source is turned off after the no signal
lights-out function is executed; the message prompting to clean/replace the filter
[MENU MODE]
Set the display mode of the menu screen (OSD).
1)
Press as to select [MENU MODE].
2)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[NORMAL]
[SIMPLE]
118 - ENGLISH
Displays all menu items.
Displays some of the menu items that are used for basic setting or adjustment.
Chapter 4
Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
Note
ff For the menu items that are displayed when [SIMPLE] is set, refer to “Main menu” (x page 80) and “Sub-menu” (x page 81).
[IMAGE ROTATION]
Set whether to rotate the input image when projecting.
1)
Press as to select [IMAGE ROTATION].
2)
Press qw to select an item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
[CLOCKWISE]
[COUNTERCLOCKWISE]
Projects the input image without rotating.
Rotates the input image by 90° clockwise and project it.
Rotates the input image by 90° counterclockwise and project it.
Note
ff The on-screen display direction does not change even when this item is set to anything other than [OFF]. Set the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
→ [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] → [OSD ROTATION] as required.
[BACK COLOR]
Set the display of the screen when a signal is not input.
1)
Press as to select [BACK COLOR].
2)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[BLUE]
Displays blue in the entire screen.
[BLACK]
Displays black in the entire screen.
[DEFAULT LOGO]
[USER LOGO]
Displays the Panasonic logo in the screen.
Displays the image registered by the user in the screen.
Note
ff The [BACK COLOR] setting item is common with the following menu item.
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [NO SIGNAL SETTING] → [BACK COLOR]
ff To create and register the [USER LOGO] image, use “Logo Transfer Software”. The software can be downloaded from the following website.
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/
When transferring logos via the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G), setting for “NO
SIGNAL SLEEP” of the DIGITAL LINK output supported device should be set to “OFF” to avoid interruption of communication.
[STARTUP LOGO]
Set the logo display when the power is turned on.
1)
Press as to select [STARTUP LOGO].
2)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[DEFAULT LOGO]
[USER LOGO]
[NONE]
Displays the Panasonic logo.
Displays the image registered by the user.
Disables the startup logo display.
Note
ff When [USER LOGO] is selected, the display of the startup logo will be kept for approximately 15 seconds.
ff To create and register the [USER LOGO] image, use “Logo Transfer Software”. The software can be downloaded from the following website.
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/
When transferring logos via the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G), setting for “NO
SIGNAL SLEEP” of the DIGITAL LINK output supported device should be set to “OFF” to avoid interruption of communication.
ff When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON], the startup logo is not displayed when the projection is started
before the specified time has elapsed after going into the standby mode.
The specified time is the time set in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [QUICK STARTUP] → [VALID PERIOD].
ENGLISH - 119
Chapter 4
Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
[UNIFORMITY]
Correct the brightness unevenness and color unevenness of the entire screen.
1)
Press as to select [UNIFORMITY].
2)
Press qw to select an item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
[USER CORRECTION]
[PC CORRECTION]
Does not correct the brightness unevenness and color unevenness of the entire screen.
Corrects the brightness unevenness and color unevenness of the entire screen as desired.
For details, refer to “Setting [USER CORRECTION]” (x page 120).
Corrects the brightness and color unevenness of the entire screen using a computer and “Geometric
& Setup Management Software”.
Note
ff “Geometric & Setup Management Software” can be downloaded from the following website.
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/pass/
It is necessary to register and login to PASS to download.
Setting [USER CORRECTION]
Correct the brightness unevenness and color unevenness of the entire screen as desired.
1)
Press as to select [UNIFORMITY].
2)
Press qw to select [USER CORRECTION], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [UNIFORMITY:USER CORRECTION] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [ADJUSTMENT LEVEL].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[1] - [5]
Select the signal level (target brightness to adjust).
The entire screen becomes darker when the value gets larger.
ffIf you press w while the adjustment value is [5], the value will become [1]. If you press q while the
adjustment value is [1], the value will become [5].
5)
Press as to select [TEST PATTERN].
6)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[ON]
Displays the test pattern.
[OFF]
Does not display the test pattern.
7)
Press asqw to select [UPPER LEFT], [UPPER RIGHT], [LOWER LEFT], [LOWER RIGHT], [UPPER],
[LOWER], [LEFT], [RIGHT] or [ALL].
8)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe adjustment screen of [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE] for the item selected in Step 7) is displayed.
9)
Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
10) Press qw to adjust the level.
Item
[RED]
[GREEN]
[BLUE]
120 - ENGLISH
Operation
Press w.
Adjustment
[ADJUSTMENT LEVEL]:
Range of adjustment
Red becomes darker.
Press q.
Red becomes lighter.
Press w.
Green becomes darker.
Press q.
Green becomes lighter.
Press w.
Blue becomes darker.
Press q.
Blue becomes lighter.
[1] - [4]: -127 - +127
[5]: 0 - +127
(Factory default setting: 0)
Chapter 4
Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
ffTo adjust the color unevenness per signal level, repeat Steps 3) to 10).
ffTo adjust the color unevenness for each image position, repeat Steps 7) to 10).
Initializing adjustments for [USER CORRECTION]
Return the setting values of the brightness for the selected [ADJUSTMENT LEVEL] and the color unevenness of
each image position to the factory setting values.
1)
Press as to select [UNIFORMITY].
2)
Press qw to select [USER CORRECTION], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [UNIFORMITY:USER CORRECTION] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [ADJUSTMENT LEVEL].
4)
Press qw to select the item to initialize in [ADJUSTMENT LEVEL].
5)
Press asqw to select [INITIALIZE].
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
7)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff All correction data in [ADJUSTMENT LEVEL] cannot be initialized at once.
For each setting in [ADJUSTMENT LEVEL], select the item and execute [INITIALIZE] individually.
ff To initialize correction data in [UNIFORMITY] at once, select the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [UNIFORMITY ONLY] and
execute the initialization.
ff [TEST PATTERN] is not initialized. Select the item and execute the initialization individually.
[SHUTTER SETTING]
Set the operation of the shutter function.
Setting [FADE-IN] or [FADE-OUT]
Set the image fade-in and fade-out when the shutter function operates.
1)
Press as to select [SHUTTER SETTING].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SHUTTER SETTING] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [FADE-IN] or [FADE-OUT].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
Item
[FADE-IN]
[FADE-OUT]
Adjustment
[OFF]
[0.5s] - [10.0s]
Does not set fade-in or fade-out.
Sets the fade-in or fade-out time.
Select an item from [0.5s] - [4.0s], [5.0s], [7.0s], or [10.0s]. [0.5s] [4.0s] can be selected in increments of 0.5.
Note
ff Press the <SHUTTER> button on the remote control or the control panel during fade-in or fade-out to cancel the fade operation.
Setting [STARTUP]
Automatically enable/disable the shutter function (shutter: closed/opened) when the power is turned on.
1)
Press as to select [SHUTTER SETTING].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SHUTTER SETTING] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [STARTUP].
ENGLISH - 121
Chapter 4
4)
Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
Press qw to switch the item.
[OPEN]
[CLOSE]
The projector goes into projection mode with the shutter function disabled (shutter: opened) when the
power is turned on.
The projector goes into projection mode with the shutter function enabled (shutter: closed) when the
power is turned on.
Setting the shutter synchronization function
The shutter synchronization function is a function to synchronize the shutter operation of the specified projector
to other projectors, and the effect using the shutter function including the fade out/fade in operation can be
synchronized.
To use the shutter synchronization function, it is necessary to connect the projectors targeted for synchronization
in a loop with daisy chain connection using the <SERIAL/MULTI SYNC IN> terminal and the <SERIAL/MULTI
SYNC OUT> terminal. For details of how to connect the projectors, refer to “Connecting example when using the
contrast synchronization function/shutter synchronization function” (x page 51).
1)
Press as to select [SHUTTER SETTING].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SHUTTER SETTING] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] screen is displayed.
5)
Press as to select [MODE].
6)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
Select this item when the contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function
are not used.
[MAIN]
Select this item when the contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function is
used.
Set this item only on one projector that becomes the synchronization source of the shutter operation
within the linked projectors.
[SUB]
Select this item when the contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function is
used.
Set this item in all the linked projectors excluding the projector set as the [MAIN].
ffWhen anything other than [OFF] is selected, the diagnostic result is displayed in [LINK STATUS], indicating
if all the projectors including the projectors targeted for synchronization are correctly connected, and if
[MODE] is correctly set.
[LINKED]
All the projectors are correctly connected, and correctly set. They are in the condition that the contrast
synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function can be used.
[NO LINK]
The projectors are not correctly connected, or not correctly set. Check the cable connection status
and the projector setting for each projector that is linked.
7)
Press as to select [SHUTTER SYNC].
8)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
Select this item when the shutter synchronization function is not used.
[ON]
Select this item when the shutter synchronization function is used.
Note
ff The [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] setting item is common with the following menu item.
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]
For details on contrast synchronization function, refer to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] (x page 141).
ff The shutter synchronization function will operate when all of the following conditions are fulfilled.
gg All the projectors to be linked are connected in a loop with the daisy chain connection. (Maximum 64 projectors)
gg [MODE] on only one projector that is linked is set to [MAIN], and [MODE] on all other projectors are set to [SUB].
122 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
gg [SHUTTER SYNC] on the projectors to perform the shutter synchronization is set to [ON].
gg When only projectors with the [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] setting menu are linked, set [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX]
to anything other than [OFF] or set [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] to anything other than [OFF]. Either setting of the menu
should be unified.
gg When projectors without [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] menu are linked, set [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] to [OFF] and [DYNAMIC
CONTRAST] to anything other than [OFF] regardless of the setting of [SHUTTER SETTING].
ff It is possible to set [SHUTTER SYNC] to [OFF] for the projectors that are linked but not to synchronize.
ff The shutter operation by the shutter synchronization function will follow the setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER
SETTING] of the projector that [MODE] is set to [MAIN].
ff When the input signal to each linked projector is not synchronized, the timing of the shutter operation between the projectors may shift up to
1 frame while using the shutter synchronization function.
ff The shutter function of the projector with [MODE] set to [SUB] can be operated individually. At that time, the shutter operation will follow the
setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER SETTING] set in that projector.
[FREEZE]
Use the freeze function to pause the projected image temporarily regardless of the playback of the external
device.
1)
Press as to select [FREEZE].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffProjected image is paused.
ffPress the <MENU> button to release.
Note
ff [FREEZE] is displayed on the screen when video is paused.
[WAVEFORM MONITOR]
Use the input signals from a connected external device to display in a waveform. Check whether video output
(luminance) signal level is within the recommended range for the projector and adjust.
1)
Press as to select [WAVEFORM MONITOR].
2)
Press qw to switch the item.
[OFF]
Does not display the waveform monitor.
[ON]
Displays the waveform monitor.
3)
Press the <MENU> button two times to clear.
4)
Press as to select any horizontal line.
5)
Press the <ENTER> button to switch the Select line to either luminance, red, green, or blue.
ffLine selection items switch each time the <ENTER> button is pressed only when the waveform monitor is
displayed.
“Select line (luminance)”
“Select line (red)”
“Select line (green)”
“Select line (blue)”
Displayed in white waveform.
Displayed in red waveform.
Displayed in green waveform.
Displayed in blue waveform.
Note
ff Setting is also available from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [FUNCTION BUTTON].
ff The waveform monitor is not displayed when on-screen display is hidden (off).
ENGLISH - 123
Chapter 4
Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu
Adjusting the waveform
Signal level
Project the luminance adjustment signal of a commercial test disk (0 % (0 IRE or 7.5 IRE) – 100 % (100 IRE)) and
adjust.
Image displayable area
Image position
1)
Select “Select line (luminance)” on the waveform monitor.
2)
Adjust black level.
ffAdjust the black level 0 % of the image signal to the 0 % position of the waveform monitor using the
[PICTURE] menu → [BRIGHTNESS].
3)
Adjust white level.
ffAdjust the white level 100 % of the image signal to the 100 % position of the waveform monitor using the
[PICTURE] menu → [CONTRAST].
Adjusting red, green, and blue
1)
Set [COLOR TEMPERATURE] to [USER]. (x page 86)
2)
Select “Select line (red)” on the waveform monitor.
3)
Adjust dark red areas.
ffUse [RED] in [WHITE BALANCE LOW] to adjust the black level 0 % of the image signal to the 0 % position
of the waveform monitor.
4)
Adjust bright red areas.
ffUse [RED] in [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] to adjust the white level 100 % of the image signal to the 100 %
position of the waveform monitor.
5)
Use the procedure for [RED] to adjust [GREEN] and [BLUE].
Note
ff Confirm that the [SIGNAL LEVEL] setting of the input signal is correct before adjusting the black level.
Check the [SIGNAL LEVEL] setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [HDMI IN] / [SDI IN] / [DIGITAL LINK IN] → [SIGNAL LEVEL].
ff When [SCREEN SETTING] → [SCREEN FORMAT] is set to [4:3], the signal outside the display area is displayed as a waveform in the
waveform monitor with the signal level 0 %.
[CUT OFF]
Each red, green, and blue color component can be removed.
1)
Press as to select [CUT OFF].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [CUT OFF] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
[OFF]
Disables cutoff.
[ON]
Enables cutoff.
Note
ff When input is switched or a signal is switched, the cutoff setting returns to its original setting (off).
124 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
On the menu screen, select [PROJECTOR SETUP] from the main menu, and select an item from the submenu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 79) for the operation of the menu screen.
[PROJECTOR ID]
The projector has an ID number setting function that can be used when multiple projectors are used side by side
to enable simultaneous control or individual control via a single remote control.
1)
Press as to select [PROJECTOR ID].
2)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[ALL]
Select this item when controlling projectors without specifying an ID number.
[1] - [64]
Select this item when specifying an ID number to control individual projector.
Note
ff To specify an ID number for individual control, the ID number of a remote control must match the ID number of the projector.
ff When the ID number is set to [ALL], the projector will operate regardless of the ID number specified during remote control or computer
control.
If multiple projectors are set up side by side with IDs set to [ALL], they cannot be controlled separately from the projectors with other ID
numbers.
ff Refer to “Setting ID number of the remote control” (x page 76) for how to set the ID number on the remote control.
[PROJECTION METHOD]
Set the projection method in accordance with the installation status of the projector.
Change the [FRONT/REAR] setting when the screen display is inverted.
Change the [FLOOR/CEILING] setting when the screen display is upside down.
Setting [FRONT/REAR]
1)
Press as to select [PROJECTION METHOD].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PROJECTION METHOD] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [FRONT/REAR].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[FRONT]
[REAR]
Select this item when installing the projector in front of the screen.
Select this item when installing behind the screen (using translucent screen).
Setting [FLOOR/CEILING]
1)
Press as to select [PROJECTION METHOD].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PROJECTION METHOD] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [FLOOR/CEILING].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[AUTO]
Automatically detects the attitude of the projector by the built-in angle sensor.
Set [AUTO] normally.
[FLOOR]
Select this item when installing the projector on a desk, etc.
[CEILING]
Select this item when installing the projector using the Ceiling Mount Bracket (optional).
Projected image is inverted upside down.
ENGLISH - 125
Chapter 4
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
Note
ff Refer to “Angle sensor” (x page 37) for details on the range of the installation attitude that can be detected by the built-in angle sensor.
[LENS]
Perform the setting and operation regarding the projection lens.
[LENS TYPE]
When the projector is used for the first time or when the projection lens is replaced, confirm the [LENS TYPE]
setting.
1)
Press as to select [LENS].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [LENS] screen is displayed.
3)
Confirm the type of the projection lens in [LENS TYPE].
Note
ff The information of the projection lens is automatically acquired when the projector is turned on. The acquired information is displayed in
[LENS TYPE].
ff [---] is displayed in [LENS TYPE] if the automatic acquisition of the projection lens information fails.
ff Lens type is displayed in red in [LENS TYPE] if the lens is not compatible with the projector.
ff Turn off the projector and reattach the projection lens when [---] is displayed in [LENS TYPE].
ff Turn off the projector and attach the compatible lens when lens type is displayed in red in [LENS TYPE].
[LENS MEMORY]
The adjusted lens position (vertical position, horizontal position, focus position, zoom position, and periphery focus
position) can be saved and loaded.
When the projector is used for the first time or when the projection lens is replaced, execute the lens calibration.
When lens calibration has not been performed completely, [LENS MEMORY] cannot be operated.
Saving lens position
1)
Press as to select [LENS].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [LENS] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [LENS MEMORY].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [LENS MEMORY] screen is displayed.
5)
Press as to select [LENS MEMORY SAVE].
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [LENS MEMORY SAVE] screen is displayed.
ffIf the lens memory has already been saved, the name of the saved lens memory and its lens position
information ([VERTICAL POSITION]/[HORIZONTAL POSITION]/[FOCUS POSITION]/[ZOOM POSITION]/
[PERIPHERY FOCUS POSITION]) are displayed in the [LENS MEMORY SAVE] screen.
7)
Press as to select the item to save, and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
ffCurrent lens position information ([VERTICAL POSITION]/[HORIZONTAL POSITION]/[FOCUS POSITION]/
[ZOOM POSITION]/[PERIPHERY FOCUS POSITION]) is displayed in the confirmation screen.
8)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [LENS MEMORY NAME INPUT] screen is displayed.
9)
Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
126 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
10) After the name is input, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffSaving of the lens memory is completed, and returns to the [LENS MEMORY SAVE] screen.
ffIf you press asqw to select [CANCEL] and then press the <ENTER> button, the lens memory will not be
saved.
ffIf you press asqw to select [DEFAULT] and press the <ENTER> button, the entered name will not be
registered and the default name will be used.
ffIf you select [OK] without entering any characters and press the <ENTER> button, the default name will be
used.
Note
ff The numeric value information of the periphery focus position is displayed only when one of the following lenses is attached.
gg ET‑EMW200, ET‑EMW300, ET‑EMW400, ET‑EMW500, ET‑EMU100
Loading the lens position
1)
Press as to select [LENS].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [LENS] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [LENS MEMORY].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [LENS MEMORY] screen is displayed.
5)
Press as to select [LENS MEMORY LOAD].
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [LENS MEMORY LOAD] screen is displayed.
ffThe name of the saved lens memory and its lens position information ([VERTICAL POSITION]/
[HORIZONTAL POSITION]/[FOCUS POSITION]/[ZOOM POSITION]/[PERIPHERY FOCUS POSITION])
are displayed in the [LENS MEMORY LOAD] screen.
7)
Press as to select the item to load, and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
8)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe lens will automatically move to the lens position (vertical position, horizontal position, focus position,
zoom position, and periphery focus position) of the loaded lens memory.
Note
ff Lens memory is not guaranteed to be 100 % reproduced. Readjust the focus, periphery focus, zoom, and lens shift after loading the lens
memory if required.
ff If the projection lens is replaced, execute the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [LENS CALIBRATION], readjust the focus,
periphery focus, zoom, and lens shift, and save the lens memory again.
ff Lens memory with numeric value information of the periphery focus position displayed is the lens memory saved when one of the following
lenses is attached.
gg ET‑EMW200, ET‑EMW300, ET‑EMW400, ET‑EMW500, ET‑EMU100
ff The saved lens memory is loaded in order every time the <FUNCTION> button is pressed when [LENS MEMORY LOAD] is assigned to the
<FUNCTION> button.
Deleting a lens memory
1)
Press as to select [LENS].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [LENS] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [LENS MEMORY].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [LENS MEMORY] screen is displayed.
5)
Press as to select [LENS MEMORY EDIT].
ENGLISH - 127
Chapter 4
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [LENS MEMORY EDIT] screen is displayed.
7)
Press as to select [LENS MEMORY DELETE].
8)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [LENS MEMORY DELETE] screen is displayed.
ffThe name of the saved lens memory and its lens position information ([VERTICAL POSITION]/
[HORIZONTAL POSITION]/[FOCUS POSITION]/[ZOOM POSITION]/[PERIPHERY FOCUS POSITION])
are displayed in the [LENS MEMORY DELETE] screen.
9)
Press as to select the item to delete, and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
10) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff Lens memory with numeric value information of the periphery focus position displayed is the lens memory saved when one of the following
lenses is attached.
gg ET‑EMW200, ET‑EMW300, ET‑EMW400, ET‑EMW500, ET‑EMU100
Changing the lens memory name
1)
Press as to select [LENS].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [LENS] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [LENS MEMORY].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [LENS MEMORY] screen is displayed.
5)
Press as to select [LENS MEMORY EDIT].
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [LENS MEMORY EDIT] screen is displayed.
7)
Press as to select [LENS MEMORY NAME CHANGE].
8)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [LENS MEMORY NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.
ffThe name of the saved lens memory and its lens position information ([VERTICAL POSITION]/
[HORIZONTAL POSITION]/[FOCUS POSITION]/[ZOOM POSITION]/[PERIPHERY FOCUS POSITION])
are displayed in the [LENS MEMORY NAME CHANGE] screen.
9)
Press as to select the item to change the name, and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [LENS MEMORY NAME INPUT] screen is displayed.
10) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
11) After the name is changed, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffSaving of the lens memory is completed, and returns to the [LENS MEMORY NAME CHANGE] screen.
ffIf you press asqw to select [CANCEL] and then press the <ENTER> button, the changed name will not
be registered.
ffIf you press asqw to select [DEFAULT] and press the <ENTER> button, the changed name will not be
registered and the default name will be used.
ffIf you select [OK] without entering any characters and press the <ENTER> button, the default name will be
used.
Note
ff Lens memory with numeric value information of the periphery focus position displayed is the lens memory saved when one of the following
lenses is attached.
gg ET‑EMW200, ET‑EMW300, ET‑EMW400, ET‑EMW500, ET‑EMU100
128 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
[LENS HOME POSITION]
Operate in following procedure to move the projection lens to the home position.
1)
Press as to select [LENS].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [LENS] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [LENS HOME POSITION].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
5)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe projection lens is moved to the home position.
Note
ff [PROGRESS] is displayed in the menu while the projection lens is moved to the home position.
ff [---] is displayed in the confirmation screen for execution of the lens home position in following cases.
gg When the automatic acquiring of the projection lens information has failed
ff The projection lens is not moved to the correct home position when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [LENS CALIBRATION]
is not executed.
ff If the projection lens was replaced, execute the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [LENS CALIBRATION].
ff The home position does not match with the optical image center position.
ff [LENS HOME POSITION] can also be executed by pressing the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control while the lens shift adjustment
screen is displayed.
[ACTIVE FOCUS OPTIMIZER]
Enable/disable the active focus optimizer function.
By enabling this function, the shift in focus caused by the temperature change of the projection lens or the change
in brightness of the image, which occurs after the projector is turned on and the projection is started, can be
reduced. It will also reduce the shift in focus right before enabling the shutter function (shutter: closed) and right
after disabling the shutter function (shutter: opened).
1)
Press as to select [LENS].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [LENS] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [ACTIVE FOCUS OPTIMIZER].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [ACTIVE FOCUS OPTIMIZER] screen is displayed.
5)
Press qw to switch the [ACTIVE FOCUS] item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[ON]
Enables the active focus optimizer function.
[OFF]
Disables the active focus optimizer function.
Note
ff When the projector is used for the first time or when the projection lens is replaced, execute the lens calibration.
When lens calibration has not been performed completely, [ACTIVE FOCUS OPTIMIZER] will not work.
ff When [ACTIVE FOCUS] is set to [ON], the focus adjustment (adjustment of the projection lens focus position) is automatically performed
by one of or both of the following correction methods. Correction method that will be performed and the factory default setting of [ACTIVE
FOCUS] differ based on the type of the projection lens displayed in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [LENS TYPE].
Information about [LENS TYPE] is automatically acquired after the projection lens is attached.
Temperature detection correction: Automatically adjusts the focus based on the temperature change of the projection lens.
Brightness detection correction: Automatically adjusts the focus based on the change in brightness of the image.
ff Some projection lenses that have the periphery focus adjustment function also automatically adjust the focus balance in the center and
periphery of the projected image.
ff Note following especially when constructing multi-display using multiple projectors such as using the edge blending function by setting the
[ADVANCED MENU] menu → [EDGE BLENDING].
gg Position of the projected image may slightly shift due to the amount of focus adjustment.
gg The projected image may slightly undulate during the focus adjustment.
ff When [ACTIVE FOCUS] is set to [ON], driving sound of the focus adjustment motor may be audible at the time of automatic adjustment.
ENGLISH - 129
Chapter 4
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ff The active focus optimizer function operates within the range of focus adjustment. It may not operate properly when used close to the limit
value for the focus adjustment.
[LENS CALIBRATION]
Detect the lens adjustment limit value, and perform the calibration in the adjustment range.
Execute the lens calibration after attaching the projection lens.
1)
Press as to select [LENS].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [LENS] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [LENS CALIBRATION].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
5)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe lens calibration is started.
ffAfter completing the calibration, the projection lens will move to the home position.
ffTo cancel, select [CANCEL].
Note
ff When the projector is used for the first time or when the projection lens is replaced, execute the lens calibration.
When lens calibration has not been performed completely, [ACTIVE FOCUS OPTIMIZER] will not work and [LENS MEMORY] cannot be
operated.
ff [PROGRESS] is displayed in the menu during lens calibration. The operation cannot be canceled during calibration.
ff [INCOMPLETE] is displayed when the lens calibration is not performed correctly.
ff [---] is displayed in the confirmation screen for execution of the lens calibration in following cases.
gg When the automatic acquiring of the projection lens information has failed
ff The origin position of the lens mounter and the home position of the projection lens are automatically updated when the lens calibration is
performed.
The home position is an origin position of the lens shift (vertical position and horizontal position of the lens) based on the calibration result. It
does not match with the optical image center position.
ff Pressing the <FOCUS> button on the remote control for at least three seconds will also display the confirmation screen for lens calibration
execution.
[OPERATION SETTING]
Set the operation method of the projector.
The settings are reflected when “Initial setting (operation setting)” (x page 58) in the [INITIAL SETTING]
screen is already set.
If you change the settings while using the projector, the duration until the brightness decreases to half may
shorten or the brightness may decrease.
Setting [OPERATING MODE]
1)
Press as to select [OPERATION SETTING].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [OPERATION SETTING] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [OPERATING MODE].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[NORMAL]
Set this item when the high luminance is required. The estimated runtime is approximately 20 000
hours*1.
[QUIET]
The brightness will decrease compared to [NORMAL], but select this item when operation with low
noise is prioritized. The estimated runtime is approximately 20 000 hours*1.
130 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
[USER1]
[USER2]
Set [LIGHT OUTPUT] as desired.
[USER3]
*1 Estimated runtime is the time until the brightness decreases to approximately half of the time of delivery when the projector is used with the
[PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] set to [3] and under environment of 0.15 mg/m3 dust. The value of runtime is just an estimate,
and is not the warranty period.
5)
Press as to select [APPLY].
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
7)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff The estimated runtime is a time for the luminance to decrease to half.
ff If the runtime exceeds 20 000 hours, replacement of the components inside the projector may be required. Consult your dealer for details.
Setting [LIGHT OUTPUT]
Adjust the brightness of light source.
The [LIGHT OUTPUT] setting is synchronized with the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LIGHT OUTPUT]. The
most recent setting is reflected in both items.
1)
Press as to select [OPERATION SETTING].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [OPERATION SETTING] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [LIGHT OUTPUT].
4)
Press qw to adjust.
Adjustment
Operation
Brightness
Runtime (estimate)
Press w.
The screen becomes brighter.
The runtime becomes shorter.
Press q.
The screen becomes darker.
The runtime becomes longer.
5)
Press as to select [APPLY].
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
7)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Range of adjustment
8.0 % - 100.0 %
Note
ff [LIGHT OUTPUT] can be adjusted individually for each setting item of [OPERATING MODE].
ff The uniformity of the brightness between multiple screens can be maintained by adjusting [LIGHT OUTPUT] for each projector when
structuring a multi-display screen by combining the projected images from multiple projectors.
Relationship between brightness and runtime
When [OPERATING MODE] is set to [NORMAL], [USER1], [USER2], or [USER3], the projector can be operated
with arbitrary brightness and runtime by setting [LIGHT OUTPUT] to desired setting.
The relationship between the [LIGHT OUTPUT] setting, brightness, and the estimated runtime is as follows. Make
the setting depending on the desired brightness of the projected image and runtime.
The values of the brightness and the runtime are just an estimate, and the graph indicating the relationship is just
an example. Also, these do not indicate the warranty period.
ENGLISH - 131
Chapter 4
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
rrPT‑MZ20K
[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%)
Brightness (lm)
Estimated runtime*1 (hours)
100.0
20 000
20 000
80.0
16 000
21 500
60.0
12 000
23 000
40.0
8 000
25 000
20 000
100.0
90.0
80.0
70.0
60.0
50.0
8 000
40.0
Brightness (lm)
[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%)
*1 Estimated runtime is the time until the brightness decreases to approximately half of the time of delivery when the projector is used with the
[PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] set to [3] and under environment of 0.15 mg/m3 dust.
30.0
20 000
21 000
22 000
23 000
24 000
25 000
Estimated runtime (hours)
rrPT‑MZ17K
[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%)
Brightness (lm)
Estimated runtime*1 (hours)
100.0
16 500
20 000
80.0
13 200
21 500
60.0
9 900
23 000
40.0
6 600
25 000
16 500
100.0
90.0
80.0
70.0
60.0
50.0
6 600
40.0
Brightness (lm)
[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%)
*1 Estimated runtime is the time until the brightness decreases to approximately half of the time of delivery when the projector is used with the
[PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] set to [3] and under environment of 0.15 mg/m3 dust.
30.0
20 000
21 000
22 000
23 000
24 000
25 000
Estimated runtime (hours)
rrPT‑MZ14K
[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%)
Brightness (lm)
Estimated runtime*1 (hours)
100.0
14 000
20 000
80.0
11 200
21 500
60.0
8 400
23 000
40.0
5 600
25 000
100.0
90.0
80.0
70.0
60.0
50.0
40.0
30.0
20 000
14 000
5 600
21 000
22 000
23 000
Estimated runtime (hours)
132 - ENGLISH
24 000
25 000
Brightness (lm)
[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%)
*1 Estimated runtime is the time until the brightness decreases to approximately half of the time of delivery when the projector is used with the
[PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] set to [3] and under environment of 0.15 mg/m3 dust.
Chapter 4
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
rrPT‑MZ11K
[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%)
Brightness (lm)
Estimated runtime*1 (hours)
100.0
11 000
20 000
80.0
8 800
21 500
60.0
6 600
23 000
40.0
4 400
25 000
11 000
100.0
90.0
80.0
70.0
60.0
50.0
40.0
30.0
20 000
4 400
21 000
22 000
23 000
24 000
Brightness (lm)
[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%)
*1 Estimated runtime is the time until the brightness decreases to approximately half of the time of delivery when the projector is used with the
[PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] set to [3] and under environment of 0.15 mg/m3 dust.
25 000
Estimated runtime (hours)
Note
ff The runtime may be shorter than the estimation due to the influence of characteristics of each light source, conditions of use, installation
environment, etc.
ff If the runtime exceeds 20 000 hours, replacement of the components inside the projector may be required. Consult your dealer for details.
[LIGHT OUTPUT]
Adjust the brightness of light source.
The setting is reflected when it is already set with “Initial setting (operation setting)” (x page 58) in the [INITIAL
SETTING] screen or with the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [OPERATION SETTING]. The [LIGHT OUTPUT]
setting is synchronized with the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [OPERATION SETTING] → [LIGHT OUTPUT].
The most recent setting is reflected in both items.
1)
Press as to select [LIGHT OUTPUT].
2)
Press qw to adjust.
Operation
Adjustment
Brightness
Runtime (estimate)
Press w.
The screen becomes brighter.
The runtime becomes shorter.
Press q.
The screen becomes darker.
The runtime becomes longer.
Range of adjustment
8.0 % - 100.0 %
Note
ff [LIGHT OUTPUT] can be adjusted individually for each setting item of [OPERATING MODE].
ff The uniformity of the brightness between multiple screens can be maintained by adjusting [LIGHT OUTPUT] for each projector when
structuring a multi-display screen by combining the projected images from multiple projectors.
[STANDBY MODE]
Set the power consumption during standby.
1)
Press as to select [STANDBY MODE].
2)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[NORMAL]
[ECO]
Select this item when using the network function during standby.
Select this item to reduce power consumption during standby.
Note
ff When [ECO] is set, the network function, the <SERIAL/MULTI SYNC OUT> terminal, and some RS‑232C commands become inoperable
during standby. When [NORMAL] is set, the network function and the <SERIAL/MULTI SYNC OUT> terminal can be used during standby.
ff When [ECO] is set, it may take approximately 10 seconds longer before the projector starts projecting after the power is turned on,
compared with when [NORMAL] is set.
ff When [NORMAL] is set, power can be supplied using the <DC OUT> terminal even while the projector is in the standby mode. If [ECO] is
set, power cannot be supplied in the standby mode.
ENGLISH - 133
Chapter 4
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
[QUICK STARTUP]
Enable/disable the [QUICK STARTUP] function.
1)
Press as to select [QUICK STARTUP].
2)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
Disables the [QUICK STARTUP] function.
[ON]
Enables the [QUICK STARTUP] function until the specified time set in [VALID PERIOD] elapses after
the projector enters the standby mode. The time until the projection starts after the power is turned on
will be reduced during the period when the [QUICK STARTUP] function is valid.
ffProceed to Step 3) when [ON] is selected.
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [QUICK STARTUP] screen is displayed.
4)
Press qw to switch [VALID PERIOD].
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[30MIN.]
[60MIN.]
[90MIN.]
Sets the time until the [QUICK STARTUP] function is disabled after the projector enters the standby
mode.
Select a desired valid period.
Note
ff [QUICK STARTUP] cannot be set when [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO].
ff When [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON], the power consumption during standby becomes high during the period when the [QUICK
STARTUP] function is valid.
ff When [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON], the [QUICK STARTUP] function is disabled when the time set in [VALID PERIOD] elapses after the
projector enters the standby mode. The startup time and power consumption will be the same as when [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [OFF].
ff When [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON], the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> blinks red while in the standby mode during the period
when the [QUICK STARTUP] function is valid. The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights red when the specified time set in [VALID
PERIOD] elapses after the projector enters the standby mode.
ff When [QUICK STARTUP] is set to [ON], the period when the [QUICK STARTUP] function is valid is counted as the projector runtime.
[POWER MANAGEMENT]
Set the function to save power consumption when there is no input signal.
[NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT]
This is a function to automatically turn off the light source of the projector when there is no input signal for specific
period. The time until the light source is turned off can be set.
1)
Press as to select [POWER MANAGEMENT].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [POWER MANAGEMENT] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[DISABLE]
[10SEC.] - [5MIN.]
Disables the no signal lights-out function.
Turns off the light source when there is no input signal for the preset period.
Select [10SEC.], [20SEC.], [30SEC.], [1MIN.], [2MIN.], [3MIN.], or [5MIN.].
Note
ff The [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT] setting item is common with the following menu item.
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [NO SIGNAL SETTING] → [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT]
ff The fan will rotate to cool the projector while the no signal lights-out function is operating and the light source is turned off. Also, the power
indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> blinks green slowly.
134 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
ff When [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT] is set to anything other than [DISABLE], the following are the conditions to turn the light source back on
again from the condition that the light source has turned off by this function.
gg When the signal has been input
gg When on-screen display such as menu screen (OSD) or input guide, a test pattern, or a warning message is displayed
gg When the <POWER ON> button is pressed
gg When the operation to disable the shutter function (shutter: opened) is performed, such as pressing the <SHUTTER> button
ff The no signal lights-out function is disabled in following case.
gg When [BACK COLOR] is set to [DEFAULT LOGO] or [USER LOGO], and the Panasonic logo or the image registered by the user is
displayed in the projected image
[NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF]
This is a function to automatically set the power of the projector to standby mode when there is no input signal for
specific period. The time before switching to standby can be set.
1)
Press as to select [POWER MANAGEMENT].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [POWER MANAGEMENT] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[DISABLE]
[10MIN.] - [90MIN.]
Disables the no signal shut-off function.
Sets the time in increments of 10 minutes.
Note
ff The [NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF] setting item is common with the following menu item.
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [NO SIGNAL SETTING] → [NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF]
[NO SIGNAL SETTING]
Set the operation of the function when there is no input signal.
[BACKUP INPUT SETTING]
Set the backup function that switches the signal to the backup input signal as seamless as possible when input
signal is disrupted.
1)
Press as to select [NO SIGNAL SETTING].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [NO SIGNAL SETTING] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [BACKUP INPUT SETTING].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] screen is displayed.
5)
Press as to select [BACKUP INPUT MODE].
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [BACKUP INPUT MODE] screen is displayed.
7)
Press as to select the combination of the input and press the <ENTER> button.
Primary input
Secondary input
[OFF]
[HDMI1]
Details
Disables the backup function.
[HDMI2]
Enables the backup function.
8)
Press the <MENU> button.
ffThe [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] screen is displayed.
9)
Press as to select [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING].
ffWhen [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to [OFF], [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING] cannot be selected .
ENGLISH - 135
Chapter 4
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
10) Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[ENABLE]
Switches to the secondary input (primary input) automatically when the input signal for primary input
(secondary input) is disrupted.
[DISABLE]
Disables the automatic input switching function.
Note
ff The [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] setting item is common with the following menu item.
gg The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [BACKUP INPUT SETTING]
ff The backup function is enabled when [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to anything other than [OFF] and same signal is input to the primary
input and the secondary input.
ff To switch to the backup input signal using the backup function, make sure that the following three conditions are satisfied to be ready to use
the function.
gg Set [BACKUP INPUT MODE] to anything other than [OFF].
gg Input the same signal to the primary and secondary inputs.
gg Display the image of the primary input or secondary input.
ff If the input is switched to other than the primary or secondary input while the backup function is ready for use, the state of readiness to
use the backup function is canceled. To switch to the backup input signal using the backup function again, switch to the primary input or
secondary input.
ff When [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to anything other than [OFF], the combination of that input is displayed in [PRIMARY INPUT] and
[SECONDARY INPUT] of the [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] screen.
ff [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] is displayed in the input guide (x page 118) and the [STATUS] screen (x pages 76, 146) when [BACKUP
INPUT MODE] is set to anything other than [OFF].
When the signal can be switched to the backup input signal using the backup function, [ACTIVE] is displayed in [BACKUP INPUT STATUS].
When it is not possible, [INACTIVE] is displayed instead.
The secondary input will be the backup input when [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] is displaying [ACTIVE] while the image from the primary
input is displayed.
The primary input will be the backup input when [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] is displaying [ACTIVE] while the image from the secondary
input is displayed.
ff When [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is set to anything other than [OFF], the input is switched seamlessly if the input is switched between the
primary input and the secondary input while it is possible to switch to the backup input signal.
ff When [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING] is set to [ENABLE], and [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] shows [ACTIVE], the signal is switched to the
backup input if a disruption occurs in the input signal.
ff When [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING] is set to [ENABLE], the indication in [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] will change to [INACTIVE] if the input
signal is disrupted and automatically switches to the backup input. In this case, it is not possible to switch to the backup input signal until the
original input signal is restored. If the input has switched to the backup input automatically, it is possible to switch to the backup input signal
when the original signal has been restored. In this case, the current input is maintained.
ff The primary input setting values are applied to image adjustment values such as the [PICTURE] menu → [PICTURE MODE], [GAMMA],
and [COLOR TEMPERATURE].
[SECONDARY INPUT]
Set the secondary input switching function that will automatically switch to the specified input when the input
signal of projecting image is discontinued.
1)
Press as to select [NO SIGNAL SETTING].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [NO SIGNAL SETTING] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [SECONDARY INPUT].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SECONDARY INPUT] screen is displayed.
5)
Press as to select the input to be specified as the switching destination, and press the <ENTER>
button.
[OFF]
Disables the secondary input switching function.
[HDMI1]
Sets the secondary input to HDMI1.
[HDMI2]
Sets the secondary input to HDMI2.
[SDI]
[DIGITAL LINK]
136 - ENGLISH
Sets the secondary input to SDI.
Sets the secondary input to DIGITAL LINK.
Chapter 4
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
[BACK COLOR]
Set the display of the screen when a signal is not input.
1)
Press as to select [NO SIGNAL SETTING].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [NO SIGNAL SETTING] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [BACK COLOR].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[BLUE]
Displays blue in the entire screen.
[BLACK]
Displays black in the entire screen.
[DEFAULT LOGO]
[USER LOGO]
Displays the Panasonic logo in the screen.
Displays the image registered by the user in the screen.
Note
ff The [BACK COLOR] setting item is common with the following menu item.
gg The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [BACK COLOR]
ff To create and register the [USER LOGO] image, use “Logo Transfer Software”. The software can be downloaded from the following website.
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/
When transferring logos via the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G), setting for “NO
SIGNAL SLEEP” of the DIGITAL LINK output supported device should be set to “OFF” to avoid interruption of communication.
[NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT]
This is a function to automatically turn off the light source of the projector when there is no input signal for specific
period. The time until the light source is turned off can be set.
1)
Press as to select [NO SIGNAL SETTING].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [NO SIGNAL SETTING] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[DISABLE]
[10SEC.] - [5MIN.]
Disables the no signal lights-out function.
Turns off the light source when there is no input signal for the preset period.
Select [10SEC.], [20SEC.], [30SEC.], [1MIN.], [2MIN.], [3MIN.], or [5MIN.].
Note
ff The [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT] setting item is common with the following menu item.
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [POWER MANAGEMENT] → [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT]
ff The fan will rotate to cool the projector while the no signal lights-out function is operating and the light source is turned off. Also, the power
indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> blinks green slowly.
ff When [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT] is set to anything other than [DISABLE], the following are the conditions to turn the light source back on
again from the condition that the light source has turned off by this function.
gg When the signal has been input
gg When on-screen display such as menu screen (OSD) or input guide, a test pattern, or a warning message is displayed
gg When the <POWER ON> button is pressed
gg When the operation to disable the shutter function (shutter: opened) is performed, such as pressing the <SHUTTER> button
ff The no signal lights-out function is disabled in following case.
gg When [BACK COLOR] is set to [DEFAULT LOGO] or [USER LOGO], and the Panasonic logo or the image registered by the user is
displayed in the projected image
ENGLISH - 137
Chapter 4
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
[NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF]
This is a function to automatically set the power of the projector to standby mode when there is no input signal for
specific period. The time before switching to standby can be set.
1)
Press as to select [NO SIGNAL SETTING].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [NO SIGNAL SETTING] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[DISABLE]
[10MIN.] - [90MIN.]
Disables the no signal shut-off function.
Sets the time in increments of 10 minutes.
Note
ff The [NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF] setting item is common with the following menu item.
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [POWER MANAGEMENT] → [NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF]
[INITIAL STARTUP]
Set the startup method when the <MAIN POWER> switch is set to <ON>.
1)
Press as to select [INITIAL STARTUP].
2)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[LAST MEMORY]
[STANDBY]
[ON]
Starts up the projector in the condition before the <MAIN POWER> switch is set to <OFF>.
Starts up the projector in standby.
Starts projecting immediately.
[STARTUP INPUT SELECT]
Set the input when the projector is switched on to start projection.
1)
Press as to select [STARTUP INPUT SELECT].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [STARTUP INPUT SELECT] screen is displayed.
3)
Press asqw to select the input, and press the <ENTER> button.
[LAST USED]
Keeps the input selected last.
[HDMI1]
Sets the input to HDMI1.
[HDMI2]
Sets the input to HDMI2.
[SDI]
[DIGITAL LINK]
[INPUT1] - [INPUT10]*1
Sets the input to SDI.
Sets the input to DIGITAL LINK.
Sets the input to DIGITAL LINK, and switches the input of the DIGITAL LINK output supported device
to the specified input.
*1 When the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G) is connected to the projector, its input
name is automatically reflected from [INPUT1] to [INPUT10]. When an item that does not reflect the input name is selected, it will be disabled.
[DATE AND TIME]
Set the time zone, date, and time of the built-in clock of the projector.
Setting the time zone
1)
Press as to select [DATE AND TIME].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [DATE AND TIME] screen is displayed.
138 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
3)
Press as to select [TIME ZONE].
4)
Press qw to switch [TIME ZONE].
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
Note
ff The [TIME ZONE] setting is reset to the factory default setting when the projector is initialized by one of the following methods. However, the
date and time based on the local date and time setting (Coordinated Universal Time, UTC, Universal Time, Coordinated) will be maintained
without being initialized.
gg When initialized by selecting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET]
gg When initialized by setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [USER SETTINGS] → [OTHER USER SETTING] to
[INITIALIZE]
Setting the date and time manually
1)
Press as to select [DATE AND TIME].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [DATE AND TIME] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [ADJUST CLOCK].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [ADJUST CLOCK] screen is displayed.
5)
Press as to select an item, and press qw to set the local date and time.
6)
Press as to select [APPLY], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe setting of the date and time will be completed.
Note
ff The replacement of the battery inside the projector is required when the time goes out of alignment right after correcting the time. Consult
your dealer.
Setting the date and time automatically
To set the date and time automatically, the projector must be connected to the network.
1)
Press as to select [DATE AND TIME].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [DATE AND TIME] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [ADJUST CLOCK].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [ADJUST CLOCK] screen is displayed.
5)
Press as to select [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION], and press qw to change the setting to [ON].
6)
Press as to select [APPLY], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe setting of the date and time will be completed.
Note
ff If synchronization with the NTP server fails just after [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] is set to [ON], [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] will return to
[OFF]. If [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] is set to [ON] while the NTP server is not set, [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] will return to [OFF].
ff Access the projector via a web browser to set the NTP server. Refer to “[Adjust clock] page” (x page 197) for details.
[SCHEDULE]
Set the command execution schedule for each day of the week.
Enabling/disabling the schedule function
1)
Press as to select [SCHEDULE].
2)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
ENGLISH - 139
Chapter 4
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
[OFF]
Disables the schedule function.
[ON]
Enables the schedule function. Refer to “How to assign a program” (x page 140) or “How to set a
program” (x page 140) for how to set the schedule.
Note
ff When [SCHEDULE] is set to [ON] while the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO], the [STANDBY MODE]
setting is forcibly switched to [NORMAL], and the setting cannot be changed to [ECO]. The [STANDBY MODE] setting will not return to
original even if [SCHEDULE] is set to [OFF] in this condition.
How to assign a program
1)
Press as to select [SCHEDULE].
2)
Press qw to select [ON], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SCHEDULE] screen is displayed.
3)
Select and assign a program to each day of week.
ffPress as to select the day of week, and press qw to select a program number.
ffYou can set the program from No.1 to No.7. “‑ ‑ ‑” indicates that the program number has not been set.
How to set a program
Set up to 16 commands to each program.
1)
Press as to select [SCHEDULE].
2)
Press qw to select [ON], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SCHEDULE] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [PROGRAM EDIT].
4)
Press qw to select a program number, and press the <ENTER> button.
5)
Press as to select a command number, and press the <ENTER> button.
ffYou can change the page using qw.
6)
Press as to select [TIME], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe projector is in the adjustment mode (the time is blinking).
7)
Press qw to select “hour” or “minute”, and press as or the number (<0> - <9>) buttons to set a
time, and then press the <ENTER> button.
8)
Press as to select [COMMAND].
9)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [COMMAND] detailed screen is displayed.
10) Press as to select a [COMMAND].
ffFor [COMMAND] which requires detailed settings, the items of the detailed settings will switch each time
you press qw.
ffWhen [INPUT] is selected, press the <ENTER> button, and then press asqw to select the input to be
set.
[COMMAND]
Detailed settings of
[COMMAND]
Description
[POWER ON]
―
Switches on the projector.
[STANDBY]
―
Enters standby.
[QUICK STARTUP]
[SHUTTER]
140 - ENGLISH
[ON]
Enables the function of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →
[QUICK STARTUP].
[OFF]
Disables the function of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →
[QUICK STARTUP].
[OPEN]
[CLOSE]
Disables the shutter function (shutter: opened).
Enables the shutter function (shutter: closed).
Chapter 4
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
Detailed settings of
[COMMAND]
[COMMAND]
[HDMI1]
Switches the input to HDMI1.
[HDMI2]
Switches the input to HDMI2.
[SDI]
[INPUT]
[DIGITAL LINK]
[INPUT1] - [INPUT10]*1
[NORMAL]
[OPERATING MODE]*2
Description
Switches the input to SDI.
Switches the input to DIGITAL LINK.
Switches the input to DIGITAL LINK, and switches the input of the
DIGITAL LINK output supported device to the specified input.
Prioritizes brightness.
[QUIET]
Operates the projector with low noise although the brightness
decreases compared to [NORMAL].
[USER1]
Controls the power with the setting set in [USER1].
[USER2]
Controls the power with the setting set in [USER2].
[USER3]
Controls the power with the setting set in [USER3].
*1 When the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G) is connected to the projector, its input
name is automatically reflected from [INPUT1] to [INPUT10]. When an item that does not reflect the input name is selected, it will be disabled.
*2 If you change the settings while using the projector, the duration until the luminance decreases by half may shorten or the luminance may
decrease.
11) Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe command is fixed and n is displayed at the left of the selected command.
ffAfter the command is fixed, press the <MENU> button to close the detailed setting screen.
12) Press asqw to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff To delete a command that has been already set, press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control while the screen in Step 5) is
displayed, or select [DELETE] at the screen in Step 6) and press the <ENTER> button.
ff If multiple commands have been set for the same time, they are executed in chronological order starting from the smallest command
number.
ff The operating time will be the local time. (x page 138)
ff If an operation is executed with the remote control or control panel of the projector or with a control command before the command set in
[SCHEDULE] is executed, the command set with the schedule function may not be executed.
[MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]
Set the contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function.
The contrast synchronization function is a function to display a combined screen with a balanced contrast by
sharing the brightness level of the image signal input to each projector when a multi-display is constructed
by combining the projected image of multiple projectors. The shutter synchronization function is a function to
synchronize the shutter operation of the specified projector to other projectors, and the effect using the shutter
function including the fade out/fade in operation can be synchronized.
To use the contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function, it is necessary to connect
the projectors targeted for synchronization in a loop with daisy chain connection using the <SERIAL/MULTI
SYNC IN> terminal and the <SERIAL/MULTI SYNC OUT> terminal. For details of how to connect the projectors,
refer to “Connecting example when using the contrast synchronization function/shutter synchronization function”
(x page 51).
Note
ff The contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function can be used simultaneously.
ff The menu items in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] is the same as the following setting items.
gg The [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] → [USER] → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]
gg The [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] → [USER] → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]
gg The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER SETTING] → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]
Setting the contrast synchronization function
1)
Press as to select [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [MODE].
ENGLISH - 141
Chapter 4
4)
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
Select this item when the contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function
are not used.
[MAIN]
Select this item when the contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function is
used.
Set this item only on one projector out of the projectors that are linked.
The projector set as the [MAIN] will calculate the brightness level of the image signal to become
optimum on the whole combined screen for each frame. All the projectors targeted for contrast
synchronization will control the dynamic contrast function based on the calculation result.
[SUB]
Select this item when the contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function is
used.
Set this item in all the linked projectors excluding the projector set as the [MAIN].
ffWhen anything other than [OFF] is selected, the diagnostic result is displayed in [LINK STATUS], indicating
if all the projectors including the projectors targeted for synchronization are correctly connected, and if
[MODE] is correctly set.
[LINKED]
All the projectors are correctly connected, and correctly set. They are in the condition that the contrast
synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function can be used.
[NO LINK]
The projectors are not correctly connected, or not correctly set. Check the cable connection status
and the projector setting for each projector that is linked.
ffThe settings of [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] and [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] are
displayed in [CONTRAST STATUS].
[OFF]
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] and [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] are set to [OFF].
The contrast synchronization function will not operate.
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX]
The [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] is set to anything other than [OFF].
When [LINKED] is displayed in [LINK STATUS], the contrast synchronization function operates under
the DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX control specifications.
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST]
The [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] is set to anything other than [OFF].
When [LINKED] is displayed in [LINK STATUS], the contrast synchronization function operates under
the DYNAMIC CONTRAST control specifications.
5)
Press as to select [CONTRAST SYNC].
6)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
Select this item when the contrast synchronization function is not used.
[ON]
Select this item when the contrast synchronization function is used.
Note
ff The contrast synchronization function will operate when all of the following conditions are fulfilled.
gg All the projectors to be linked are connected in a loop with the daisy chain connection. (Maximum 64 projectors)
gg [MODE] on only one projector that is linked is set to [MAIN], and [MODE] on all other projectors are set to [SUB].
gg [CONTRAST SYNC] on the projectors to perform the contrast synchronization is set to [ON].
gg When all linked projectors are equipped with [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] menu, make the menu setting identical for all linked projectors
either by setting [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] to anything other than [OFF] or by setting [PICTURE] menu →
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST] to anything other than [OFF]
gg When projectors without [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] menu are grouped into the linked projectors, set [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] to
[OFF] and [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] to anything other than [OFF] regardless of the setting of [CONTRAST SYNC].
ff It is possible to set [CONTRAST SYNC] to [OFF] for the projectors that are linked but not to synchronize.
Setting the shutter synchronization function
1)
Press as to select [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [MODE].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
142 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
[OFF]
Select this item when the contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function
are not used.
[MAIN]
Select this item when the contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function is
used.
Set this item only on one projector that becomes the synchronization source of the shutter operation.
[SUB]
Select this item when the contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function is
used.
Set this item in all the linked projectors excluding the projector set as the [MAIN].
ffWhen anything other than [OFF] is selected, the diagnostic result is displayed in [LINK STATUS], indicating
if all the projectors including the projectors targeted for synchronization are correctly connected, and if
[MODE] is correctly set.
[LINKED]
All the projectors are correctly connected, and correctly set. They are in the condition that the contrast
synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function can be used.
[NO LINK]
The projectors are not correctly connected, or not correctly set. Check the cable connection status
and the projector setting for each projector that is linked.
ffThe settings of [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] and [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] are
displayed in [CONTRAST STATUS].
[OFF]
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] and [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] are set to [OFF].
The contrast synchronization function will not operate.
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX]
The [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] is set to anything other than [OFF].
When [LINKED] is displayed in [LINK STATUS], the contrast synchronization function operates under
the DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX control specifications.
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST]
The [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] is set to anything other than [OFF].
When [LINKED] is displayed in [LINK STATUS], the contrast synchronization function operates under
the DYNAMIC CONTRAST control specifications.
5)
Press as to select [SHUTTER SYNC].
6)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
Select this item when the shutter synchronization function is not used.
[ON]
Select this item when the shutter synchronization function is used.
Note
ff The shutter synchronization function will operate when all of the following conditions are fulfilled.
gg All the projectors to be linked are connected in a loop with the daisy chain connection. (Maximum 64 projectors)
gg [MODE] on only one projector that is linked is set to [MAIN], and [MODE] on all other projectors are set to [SUB].
gg [SHUTTER SYNC] on the projectors to perform the shutter synchronization is set to [ON].
gg When all linked projectors are equipped with [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] menu, make the menu setting identical for all linked projectors
either by setting [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] to anything other than [OFF] or by setting [PICTURE] menu →
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST] to anything other than [OFF]
gg When projectors without [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] menu are grouped into the linked projectors, set [DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] to
[OFF] and [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] to anything other than [OFF] regardless of the setting of [SHUTTER SYNC].
ff It is possible to set [SHUTTER SYNC] to [OFF] for the projectors that are linked but not to synchronize.
ff The shutter operation by the shutter synchronization function will follow the setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER
SETTING] on the projector that [MODE] is set to [MAIN].
ff When the input signal to each linked projector is not synchronized, the timing of the shutter operation between the projectors may shift up to
1 frame while using the shutter synchronization function.
ff The shutter function of the projector with [MODE] set to [SUB] can be operated individually. At that time, the shutter operation will follow the
setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER SETTING] set in that projector.
[RS-232C]
Set the communication conditions of the <SERIAL/MULTI SYNC IN>/<SERIAL/MULTI SYNC OUT> terminals. For
details on the connection method for RS‑232C communication, refer to “<SERIAL/MULTI SYNC IN>/<SERIAL/
MULTI SYNC OUT> terminals” (x page 259).
Setting the communication condition of the <SERIAL/MULTI SYNC IN> terminal
1)
Press as to select [RS-232C].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [RS-232C] screen is displayed.
ENGLISH - 143
Chapter 4
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
3)
Press as to select [INPUT SELECT].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
[PROJECTOR]
Performs the RS‑232C communication with the <SERIAL/MULTI SYNC IN> terminal of the projector.
[DIGITAL LINK]
Performs the RS‑232C communication via the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model
No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G) and the <DIGITAL LINK> terminal.
5)
Press as to select [(IN) BAUDRATE].
6)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[9600]
[19200]
Select the proper speed.
[38400]
7)
Press as to select [(IN) PARITY].
8)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[NONE]
[EVEN]
Select the parity condition.
[ODD]
Setting the communication condition of the <SERIAL/MULTI SYNC OUT> terminal
1)
Press as to select [RS-232C].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [RS-232C] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [(OUT) BAUDRATE].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
[9600]
[19200]
Select the proper speed.
[38400]
5)
Press as to select [(OUT) PARITY].
6)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[NONE]
[EVEN]
Select the parity condition.
[ODD]
Setting the response
1)
Press as to select [RS-232C].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [RS-232C] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [RESPONSE(ID ALL)].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
[ON]
Returns the response when an ID is designated as ALL.
[OFF]
Does not return the response when an ID is designated as ALL.
144 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
5)
Press as to select [GROUP].
6)
Press qw to switch the item.
[A] - [Z]
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
Controls multiple projectors simultaneously by sending the ID of RS‑232C. You can set groups from
[A] to [Z]. The projector responds when the ID of RS‑232C matches the setting.
7)
Press as to select [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)].
8)
Press qw to switch the item.
[ON]
Returns the response when an ID is designated as GROUP.
[OFF]
Does not return the response when an ID is designated as GROUP.
Note
ff When [INPUT SELECT] is set to [DIGITAL LINK], communication using that serial terminal is available only when the corresponding device
(such as the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G)) is connected to the <DIGITAL LINK>
terminal.
ff When transferring logos via the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G), setting for “NO
SIGNAL SLEEP” of the DIGITAL LINK output supported device should be set to “OFF” to avoid interruption of communication.
ff When [INPUT SELECT] is set to [DIGITAL LINK], communication speed for input is fixed to 9 600 bps and the parity is fixed to “NONE”.
[REMOTE1 MODE]
Set the <REMOTE 1 IN> terminal.
1)
Press as to select [REMOTE1 MODE].
2)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[DEFAULT]
[USER]
Uses pin assignment of the <REMOTE 1 IN> terminal in standard setting. (x page 263)
Changes the setting of the <REMOTE 1 IN> terminal.
ffProceed to Step 3) when [USER] is selected.
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
4)
Press as to select one from [PIN2] to [PIN8], and press qw to switch the setting.
[FUNCTION BUTTON]
Set the function of the <FUNCTION> button on the remote control.
1)
Press as to select [FUNCTION BUTTON].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [FUNCTION BUTTON] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select a function.
[DISABLE]
[SUB MEMORY]
[SYSTEM SELECTOR]
[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]
[FREEZE]
Displays the sub memory list. (x page 160)
Switches the [SYSTEM SELECTOR] setting according to the input signal of the image being
projected.
ff When the input signal is anything other than the SDI input
The [PICTURE] menu → [SYSTEM SELECTOR] (x page 92)
ff When the input signal is the SDI input
The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SDI IN] → [SYSTEM SELECTOR] (x page 114)
Switches the [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] setting. (x page 88)
Freezes the image temporarily. (x page 123)
[WAVEFORM MONITOR]
Displays the waveform of the input signal. (x page 123)
[LENS MEMORY LOAD]
Loads the registered lens memory. (x page 126)
[ASPECT]
[PROJECTION METHOD]
[GEOMETRY]
4)
Disables the <FUNCTION> button.
Switches the aspect ratio of the image. (x page 94)
Switches the [PROJECTION METHOD] setting. (x page 125)
Switches the [GEOMETRY] setting. (x page 96)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ENGLISH - 145
Chapter 4
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
[FILTER COUNTER]
Check the runtime of the filter and set the cleaning/replacement cycle of the filter. Also, the runtime of the filter can
be reset.
1)
Press as to select [FILTER COUNTER].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [FILTER COUNTER] screen is displayed.
[FILTER COUNTER]
[TIMER]
[FILTER COUNTER RESET]
Displays the runtime of the filter.
Sets the cleaning/replacement cycle of the filter.
Reset the runtime of the filter.
Setting [TIMER]
If the filter is to be cleaned/replaced periodically, set the cycle in hours. Once the runtime of the filter reaches
the set time, a message prompting to clean/replace the filter [FILTER COUNTER has reached the set time.] is
displayed on the projected image.
1)
Press as to select [FILTER COUNTER].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [FILTER COUNTER] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [TIMER].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
[1000 H] - [20000 H]
Select this item when a message is not to be displayed.
Select this item when a message is to be displayed. The cleaning/replacement cycle of the filter can
be set in 1 000 hour intervals.
Resetting [FILTER COUNTER]
Reset the runtime of the filter.
1)
Press as to select [FILTER COUNTER].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [FILTER COUNTER] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [FILTER COUNTER RESET].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
5)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffDisplay of [FILTER COUNTER] will change to [0 H].
[STATUS]
Display the status of the projector.
1)
Press as to select [STATUS].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [STATUS] screen is displayed.
3)
Press qw to switch the pages.
ffThe page will change each time you press the button.
[PROJECTOR TYPE]
[SERIAL NUMBER]
[PROJECTOR RUNTIME]
146 - ENGLISH
Displays the type of the projector.
Displays the serial number of the projector.
Displays the runtime of the projector.
Chapter 4
[LIGHT RUNTIME]
[CONTINUOUS LIGHTING
TIME]
[FIRMWARE VERSION]
[INTAKE AIR TEMP.]*1
[EXHAUST AIR TEMP.]*1
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
Displays the runtime of the light source 1 and the light source 2.
Displays the elapsed time from when the light source is illuminated.
The elapsed time after the illumination of the light source can be confirmed when adjusting the focus.
The elapsed time is reset when the light source is temporarily turned off such as using the shutter
function.
Displays the firmware version of the of the projector.
Displays the intake air temperature status.
Displays the exhaust air temperature status.
[LIGHT1 TEMP.]*1
Displays the status of the light source 1 temperature of the projector.
[LIGHT2 TEMP.]*1
Displays the status of the light source 2 temperature of the projector.
[SELF TEST]
[INPUT]
Displays the self-diagnosis information.
Displays the input terminal currently selected.
[SIGNAL NAME]
Displays the input signal name.
[MEMORY NO.]
Displays the memory number of the input signal.
[BACKUP INPUT STATUS]
[NUMBER OF REGISTERED
SIGNAL]
[COOLING CONDITION]
Displays whether switching to the backup input signal is possible or not when [BACKUP INPUT
MODE] is set to [OFF]. (x page 111)
Displays the number of registered signals.
Displays the set cooling conditions.
[ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE] Displays the atmospheric pressure.
[REMOTE1 STATUS]
[AC VOLTAGE]
[ON COUNT]
[OPERATING MODE]
[NORMAL]
Displays the control status of the REMOTE1.
Displays the input supply voltage.
[POWER ON TIMES]
Displays the number of times the power is turned on.
Displays the setting value of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [OPERATION SETTING] →
[OPERATING MODE].
Displays the runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [NORMAL].
[QUIET]
Displays the runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [QUIET].
[USER1]
Displays the runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [USER1].
[USER2]
Displays the runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [USER2].
[USER3]
Displays the runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [USER3].
[INPUT]
[SIGNAL FORMAT]
Displays the format of the input signal.
[SIGNAL FREQUENCY]
Displays the frequency of the input signal.
[SCAN TYPE]
Displays the scan type of the input signal.
[TOTAL DOTS]
Displays the total dot count of the input signal.
[DISPLAY DOTS]
[TOTAL LINES]
[SIGNAL INFORMATION]
Displays the input terminal used for the projected image.
[DISPLAY LINES]
[SAMPLING]
[SIGNAL LEVEL]
[BIT DEPTH]
[HDCP STATUS]
Displays the number of input signal display dots.
Displays the total line count of the input signal.
Displays the number of input signal display lines.
Displays the sampling information and the color format of the input
signal.
Displays the signal level of the input signal.
Displays the gradation of the input signal.
Displays the HDCP status of the input signal. The content of display
is as follows.
[HDCP2.X]: When protected with HDCP 2.2 or HDCP 2.3
[HDCP1.X]: When protected with HDCP 1.X
[NONE]: When not protected with HDCP
[---]: When there is no signal
*1 The temperature status is indicated with text color (green/yellow/red) and bar scale. Use the projector within the range that the indication is
green.
Note
ff E-mail containing the status can be sent to the E-mail address (up to two addresses) set in “[E-mail set up] page” (x page 207) by
pressing the <ENTER> button while the [STATUS] screen is displayed.
ff Some items in [SIGNAL INFORMATION] may be displayed and others not displayed, depending on the signal being input.
ff If any abnormality has occurred on the projector, press the <DEFAULT> button while the [STATUS] screen is displayed to display the detail
screen of the error information.
ff For details on the contents displayed in [SELF TEST], refer to “[SELF TEST] indications” (x page 247).
ENGLISH - 147
Chapter 4
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
Sending status content via E-mail
The status content can be sent to the E-mail address (up to two addresses) set in “[E-mail set up] page”
(x page 207).
1)
Press the <ENTER> button while the 1/5 to 4/5 page of the [STATUS] screen is displayed.
ffThe selection screen is displayed.
2)
Press as to select [SEND E-MAIL].
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SELECT E-MAIL ADDRESS] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select the destination.
5)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
6)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe status content is sent.
Saving status content in USB memory
The status content can be saved in a USB memory attached to the <USB> terminal.
1)
Press the <ENTER> button while the 1/5 to 4/5 page of the [STATUS] screen is displayed.
ffThe selection screen is displayed.
2)
Press as to select [SAVE TO USB MEMORY].
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
4)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe status content is saved.
Note
ff For the USB memory that can be used with the projector and handling of the memory, refer to “Using the USB memory” (x page 73).
[INFO MONITOR SETTING]
Set the information monitor of the control panel.
For operation of the information monitor, refer to “Using the information monitor function” (x page 213).
Setting the display during normal status
Display/hide the information monitor during no operation.
1)
Press as to select [INFO MONITOR SETTING].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [INFO MONITOR SETTING] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [DEFAULT].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
[USER VIEW]
Does not display the information.
Displays the items set in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INFO MONITOR SETTING] → [USER
VIEW].
Note
ff Even if [DEFAULT] is set to [OFF], the content of an error or a warning is automatically displayed when it occurs.
ff This can also be set with operation in the information monitor. For details, refer to “Using the information monitor function” (x page 213).
148 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
Setting the information to display
Set the items to display on the information monitor during no operation.
1)
Press as to select [INFO MONITOR SETTING].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [INFO MONITOR SETTING] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [USER VIEW].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [USER VIEW] screen is displayed.
5)
Press as to select each item.
[INPUT]
Input signal name
[AC VOLTAGE]
Input supply voltage
[INTAKE AIR TEMP.]
[EXHAUST AIR TEMP.]
[SHUTTER]
[FREEZE]
[OSD]
[IP ADDRESS(WIRED)]
6)
Currently selected input terminal
[SIGNAL NAME]
Intake air temperature of the projector
Exhaust air temperature of the projector
Status of the shutter ([CLOSE]: Shutter function enabled; [OPEN]: Shutter function disabled)
Operation status of the freeze function ([ON]: Paused; [OFF]: Cleared)
Status of the on-screen display function ([ON]: Display; [OFF]: Hide)
IP address of the wired LAN
Press qw to switch the setting.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[ON]
Displays the items in the information monitor.
[OFF]
Does not display the items in the information monitor.
ffRepeat Steps 5) to 6) until the desired display items are set.
Note
ff This can also be set with operation in the information monitor. For details, refer to “Using the information monitor function” (x page 213).
Setting the direction to display
Set the direction of the text to display in the information monitor.
1)
Press as to select [INFO MONITOR SETTING].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [INFO MONITOR SETTING] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [DIRECTION].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[AUTO]
Detects the orientation of the projector by the built-in angle sensor, and automatically sets the
direction of the text displayed in the information monitor. Set [AUTO] normally.
[NORMAL]
Select this item when installing the projector on a desk, etc.
[FLIPPED]
Select this item when installing the projector with the top surface of the projector facing down such as
ceiling attachment.
Displays the text inverted upside down from when [NORMAL] is set.
Note
ff This can also be set with operation in the information monitor. For details, refer to “Using the information monitor function” (x page 213).
Setting the brightness of the information monitor
Set the brightness of the information monitor.
1)
Press as to select [INFO MONITOR SETTING].
ENGLISH - 149
Chapter 4
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [INFO MONITOR SETTING] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS].
4)
Press qw to adjust the level.
Operation
Adjustment
Press w.
The information monitor becomes bright.
Press q.
The information monitor becomes dark.
Range of adjustment
30 % - 100 %
(Factory default setting: 100 %)
Note
ff [BRIGHTNESS] is adjusted in increments of 10.
ff This can also be set with operation in the information monitor. For details, refer to “Using the information monitor function” (x page 213).
[DATA CLONING]
Perform the operations of the data cloning function. Data such as the settings and adjustment values of the
projector can be copied to multiple projectors via LAN or using the USB memory.
For details of operation, refer to “Using the data cloning function” (x page 225).
[SAVE ALL USER DATA]
Save the various setting values as a backup in the built-in memory of the projector.
1)
Press as to select [SAVE ALL USER DATA].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
3)
Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
4)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ff[PROGRESS] is displayed while saving data.
Note
ff The data saved by executing [SAVE ALL USER DATA] does not include the data set with “Geometric & Setup Management Software”.
ff The data saved by executing [SAVE ALL USER DATA] is not deleted even if initialized by any of the following methods.
gg When initialized by selecting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET]
gg When initialized by setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [USER SETTINGS] → [OTHER USER SETTING] to
[INITIALIZE]
[LOAD ALL USER DATA]
Load the various setting values saved as a backup in the built-in memory of the projector.
1)
Press as to select [LOAD ALL USER DATA].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
3)
Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
4)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff The projector enters the standby mode to reflect the setting values when [LOAD ALL USER DATA] is executed.
ff The data loaded from [LOAD ALL USER DATA] does not include the data set with “Geometric & Setup Management Software”.
150 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
[HDMI CEC]
Sets the CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) function of HDMI.
CEC is a function that is realized by exchanging device control signals with external devices connected with
an HDMI cable. Using the remote control of the projector, it is possible to operate the CEC-compatible external
device (hereinafter referred to as "CEC-compatible device") and to control the power on/off link status between
the projector and the CEC-compatible device.
For details on how to use the CEC function, refer to “Using HDMI-CEC function” (x page 229).
1)
Press as to select [HDMI CEC].
2)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[ON]
Enables the CEC function.
[OFF]
Disables the CEC function.
Operating a CEC-compatible device
Operate the CEC-compatible device connected to the <HDMI IN 1> terminal or <HDMI IN 2> terminal.
[HDMI-CEC OPERATION] can be operated when HDMI1 input or HDMI2 input is selected. Switch to the input that
is corresponding to the CEC-compatible device you want to operate in advance.
1)
Press as to select [HDMI CEC].
2)
Press qw to select [ON].
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [HDMI CEC] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [HDMI 1] or [HDMI 2].
ffSelect the input corresponding to the CEC-compatible device you want to operate.
ffProceed to Step 6) when the device to operate is displayed.
5)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe devices will switch when multiple CEC-compatible devices are connected to one input.
ffSelect the device to operate.
6)
Press as to select [HDMI-CEC OPERATION].
7)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe HDMI-CEC operation screen is displayed.
8)
Select the item displayed on the HDMI-CEC operation screen to operate the device.
ffRefer to the “Using HDMI-CEC function” (x page 229) for the operation details.
Note
ff If no CEC-compatible device is connected to <HDMI IN 1> or <HDMI IN 2> terminal, there is no device displayed at [HDMI 1] or [HDMI 2]
and [----] is displayed.
ff To exit the HDMI-CEC operation screen, press the <MENU> button.
Changing the menu code
The menu code that calls up the operation menu of the CEC-compatible device varies depending on the device
manufacturer. If you cannot call up the operation menu of a CEC-compatible device from the HDMI-CEC
operation screen, change the menu code setting.
1)
Press as to select [HDMI CEC].
2)
Press qw to select [ON].
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [HDMI CEC] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [MENU CODE].
ENGLISH - 151
Chapter 4
5)
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
ffSelect the menu code from [1] to [6].
Setting the link control
Make settings for the link control between the projector and CEC-compatible devices.
[PROJECTOR -> DEVICE]
Set the link control from the projector to the CEC-compatible device.
1)
Press as to select [HDMI CEC].
2)
Press qw to select [ON].
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [HDMI CEC] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [PROJECTOR -> DEVICE].
5)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[DISABLE]
[POWER OFF]
[POWER ON/OFF]
Disables the power link control from the projector to the CEC-compatible device.
Select this when you do not want the power status of the CEC-compatible device to link with the power status
of the projector.
Enables power-off link control.
When you turn off the power of the projector and put it in standby mode, all CEC-compatible devices
connected to the <HDMI IN 1> terminal and <HDMI IN 2> terminal will enter standby mode.
Power-on link control is disabled.
Enables power-on link control and power-off link control.
If you turn on the projector and start projection, the CEC-compatible device connected to the <HDMI IN 1>
terminal or <HDMI IN 2> terminal will turn on.
When you turn off the projector and put it in standby mode, all CEC-compatible devices connected to the
<HDMI IN 1> terminal and <HDMI IN 2> terminal will enter standby mode.
[DEVICE -> PROJECTOR]
Set the link control from the CEC-compatible device to the projector.
1)
Press as to select [HDMI CEC].
2)
Press qw to select [ON].
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [HDMI CEC] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [DEVICE -> PROJECTOR].
5)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[DISABLE]
Disables the power link control from the CEC-compatible device to the projector.
Select this when you do not want the power status of the projector to link with the power status of the CECcompatible device.
[POWER ON]
Enables power-on link control.
While the projector is in standby, if the CEC-compatible device connected to the <HDMI IN 1> terminal or
<HDMI IN 2> terminal is turned on or starts playing, the projector turns on, starts projection, and switches
to the input that the linked CEC-compatible device is connected. While the projector is turned on, if the
CEC-compatible device starts playing, the projector switches to the input that the CEC-compatible device is
connected.
Power-off link control is disabled.
152 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
[POWER ON/OFF]
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
Enables power-on link control and power-off link control.
Power-on link control and power-off link control work only if it is supported by the connected CEC-compatible
device.
While the projector is in standby, if the CEC-compatible device connected to the <HDMI IN 1> terminal or
<HDMI IN 2> terminal is turned on or starts playing, the projector turns on, starts projection, and switches
to the input that the linked CEC-compatible device is connected. While the projector is turned on, if the
CEC-compatible device starts playing, the projector switches to the input that the CEC-compatible device is
connected.
When the CEC-compatible device connected to the <HDMI IN 1> terminal or <HDMI IN 2> terminal is turned
off, the projector enters standby mode.
Note
ff If the CEC-compatible device does not support CEC 1.4, it may not support the link control described in the manual.
ff Depending on the connected CEC-compatible device, the link control may not operate normally.
[INITIALIZE]
Return the various user data settings to the factory default settings.
1)
Press as to select [INITIALIZE].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
3)
Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [INITIALIZE] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select an item to initialize.
[USER SETTINGS]
[REGISTERED SIGNAL ONLY]
[NETWORK/E-MAIL ONLY]
The user data to return to factory default settings can be selected arbitrarily.
The projector goes into the standby status after executing [INITIALIZE].
For details of operation, refer to “Initializing the settings by selecting the items” (x page 153).
Deletes all the signals registered in [SIGNAL LIST]. All the setting values saved for each registered
signal are also deleted.
Returns all the setting items under the [NETWORK] menu and all the setting items in the [Detailed set
up] page of the web control screen to the factory default settings.
ff The items of [Time Zone], [Date], and [Time] in the [Adjust clock] page of the web control screen do
not return to the factory default settings.
ff The information such as the self-signed certificate already created in the [Certificate] page of the
web control screen or the server certificate already installed is not deleted.
[LOGO IMAGE ONLY]
Deletes the image registered in [USER LOGO].
[UNIFORMITY ONLY]
Sets the setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [UNIFORMITY] to the factory default setting.
[FACTORY RESET]
Returns all the user data settings to the factory default settings. The projector goes into the standby
status after executing [FACTORY RESET].
ffProceed to Step 5) when anything other than [USER SETTINGS] is selected.
5)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
6)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff The security password is the password set in the [SECURITY] menu → [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE].
Initial password of the factory default setting: awsqawsq
ff To delete only a part of a registered signal, delete it following “Deleting the registered signal” (x page 158).
ff To return the setting of [Time Zone] in the [Adjust clock] page of the web control screen and the setting of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
→ [DATE AND TIME] → [TIME ZONE] to the factory default settings, initialize them with one of the following methods.
gg Initializing by selecting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET]
gg Initializing by setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [USER SETTINGS] → [OTHER USER SETTING] to
[INITIALIZE]
ff The self-signed certificate already created in the [Certificate] page of the web control screen or the information of the server certificate
already installed can be deleted in the web control screen.
ff If initialized by selecting [FACTORY RESET], the [INITIAL SETTING] screen is displayed when the projection is started the next time.
Initializing the settings by selecting the items
1)
Press as to select [INITIALIZE].
ENGLISH - 153
Chapter 4
Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
3)
Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [INITIALIZE] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [USER SETTINGS].
5)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [USER SETTINGS] screen is displayed.
6)
Press as to select an item.
[OPERATION SETTING]
[STANDBY MODE]
[REGISTERED SIGNAL]
[NETWORK/E-MAIL]
The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STANDBY MODE] → [NORMAL]/[ECO] is initialized.
All the signals registered in [SIGNAL LIST] are initialized.
All the setting items under the [NETWORK] menu and all the setting items under the operation page
in the [Detailed set up] page and the Crestron Connected of the web control screen are initialized.
ff The items of [Time Zone], [Date], and [Time] in the web control screen are not initialized.
ff The information such as the self-signed certificate already created in the [Certificate] page of the
web control screen or the server certificate already installed is not initialized.
[LOGO IMAGE]
Image registered in [USER LOGO] is initialized.
[UNIFORMITY]
The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [UNIFORMITY] is initialized.
[OTHER USER SETTING]
7)
The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [OPERATION SETTING] → [OPERATING MODE] is initialized.
[LIGHT OUTPUT] is not initialized. The [LIGHT OUTPUT] setting is maintained.
The user data other than mentioned above are initialized.
Press qw to switch the setting.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[KEEP]
[INITIALIZE]
Does not return to the factory default settings and maintains the current settings when initialization is
executed by [USER SETTINGS].
Returns to the factory default settings when initialization is executed by [USER SETTINGS].
ffRepeat Steps 6) to 7) until the desired initialization items are set.
8)
Press as to select [INITIALIZE].
9)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
10) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff To return the setting in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LIGHT OUTPUT] to the factory default setting, initialize it by selecting [OTHER
USER SETTING].
ff To return the setting of [Time Zone] in the [Adjust clock] page of the web control screen and the setting of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu
→ [DATE AND TIME] → [TIME ZONE] to the factory default settings, initialize them with one of the following methods.
gg Initializing by selecting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET]
gg Initializing by setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [USER SETTINGS] → [OTHER USER SETTING] to
[INITIALIZE]
[FIRMWARE UPDATE]
Rewriting of the firmware is possible by using a USB memory.
For details of operation, refer to “Updating the firmware using the USB memory” (x page 236).
[SAVE LOG]
This function is used by a service person.
[SERVICE PASSWORD]
This function is used by a service person.
154 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — [TEST PATTERN] menu
[TEST PATTERN] menu
On the menu screen, select [TEST PATTERN] from the main menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 79) for the operation of the menu screen.
[TEST PATTERN]
Display the test pattern.
Settings such as position and size will not be reflected in test patterns. Make sure to perform various adjustments
while displaying the input image.
1)
Select the [TEST PATTERN] menu, and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [TEST PATTERN] screen (list format) is displayed.
2)
Press as to select the test pattern to display, and press the <ENTER> button.
[OFF]
01
[ALL WHITE]
02
[ALL BLACK]
03
[WINDOW]
04
[WINDOW(INVERSION)]
05
[COLOR BAR(VERTICAL)]
06
[COLOR BAR(HORIZONTAL)]
07
[16:9/4:3 ASPECT FRAME]
08
[CIRCLE]
09
[CROSS HATCH]
10
[FOCUS]
11
[USER TEST PATTERN 1]
12
[USER TEST PATTERN 2]
13
[USER TEST PATTERN 3]
Test pattern is not displayed.
Displays the test pattern built-in to the projector.
To change the color of the cross hatch test pattern, refer
to “Changing the color of the cross hatch test pattern”
(x page 155).
Displays the test pattern registered by the user.
For details, refer to “Registering the test pattern”
(x page 156).
ffSelected test pattern and the [TEST PATTERN] screen (toggle selection format) are displayed.
ffTo change the test pattern, proceed to Step 3).
3)
Press qw to switch the test pattern.
ffThe test pattern will switch each time you press qw.
Note
ff The [TEST PATTERN] screen (list format, toggle selection format) can be hidden by pressing the <ON SCREEN> button on the remote
control while the test pattern is displayed.
ff Thumbnails of [USER TEST PATTERN 1], [USER TEST PATTERN 2], and [USER TEST PATTERN 3] are not displayed.
ff The [ALL BLACK] screen is displayed when [USER TEST PATTERN 1], [USER TEST PATTERN 2], or [USER TEST PATTERN 3], in which
a test pattern is not registered in Step 2), is selected and the <ENTER> button is pressed.
ff When switching the test pattern by pressing qw in Step 3), [USER TEST PATTERN 1], [USER TEST PATTERN 2], and [USER TEST
PATTERN 3] in which a test pattern is not registered are not displayed.
ff Pressing qw while the [TEST PATTERN] menu is selected can also switch the test pattern.
ff When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [ACTIVE FOCUS OPTIMIZER] → [ACTIVE FOCUS] is set to [OFF], it is
recommended to perform the focus adjustment after 30 minutes or more have elapsed with the focus test pattern displayed.
Changing the color of the cross hatch test pattern
1)
Select the [TEST PATTERN] menu, and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [TEST PATTERN] screen (list format) is displayed.
ENGLISH - 155
Chapter 4
Settings — [TEST PATTERN] menu
2)
Press as to select [CROSS HATCH], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe cross hatch test pattern and the [TEST PATTERN] screen (toggle selection format) are displayed.
3)
Press the <ENTER> button again.
ffThe [TEST PATTERN COLOR] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select a color, and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe color of the cross hatch test pattern is changed to the selected color.
Note
ff The [TEST PATTERN COLOR] setting returns to [WHITE] when the projector is turned off and goes into standby mode.
ff Colors of the test patterns other than cross hatch test patterns cannot be changed.
Registering the test pattern
1)
Save the file for the test pattern to register in the projector into a USB memory.
2)
Insert the USB memory into the <USB> terminal.
3)
Select the [TEST PATTERN] menu, and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [TEST PATTERN] screen (list format) is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [USER TEST PATTERN 1], [USER TEST PATTERN 2], or [USER TEST PATTERN 3],
and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe test pattern and the [TEST PATTERN] screen (toggle selection format) are displayed.
ffIf the test pattern is not registered, the all black screen is displayed.
ffIf the test pattern is already registered, that test pattern is displayed.
5)
Press the <ENTER> button again.
ffThe [USER TEST PATTERN] screen is displayed.
6)
Press as to select [SAVE USER TEST PATTERN], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SAVE USER TEST PATTERN] screen is displayed.
ffProceed to Step 8) if the file for test pattern to register is saved in the root directory of the USB memory.
7)
Press as to select the folder in which the file is saved, and press the <ENTER> button.
ffRepeat the folder selection operation until the file for the test pattern to register is displayed.
8)
Press as to select the file, and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
9)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff For the procedure to register the user test pattern from the web control screen, refer to “Registering the user test pattern” (x page 192).
ff For the USB memory that can be used with the projector and handling of the memory, refer to “Using the USB memory” (x page 73).
ff When the projector is initialized by one of the following methods, the data registered in [USER TEST PATTERN 1], [USER TEST PATTERN
2], and [USER TEST PATTERN 3] are initialized.
gg When initialized by selecting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET]
gg When initialized by setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [USER SETTINGS] → [OTHER USER SETTING] to
[INITIALIZE]
ff The test pattern that can be registered in the projector is a still image data fulfilling following conditions.
gg PNG format or BMP format file with resolution of 1 920 x 1 200 dots or less.
gg For PNG format: 1/8/16/24/32/48/64 bits (however, α blending becomes invalid and the background image will not be transparent.)
gg For BMP format: 1/8/24 bits
Deleting the registered test pattern
1)
Select the [TEST PATTERN] menu, and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [TEST PATTERN] screen (list format) is displayed.
2)
Press as to select [USER TEST PATTERN 1], [USER TEST PATTERN 2], or [USER TEST PATTERN 3],
and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe test pattern and the [TEST PATTERN] screen (toggle selection format) are displayed.
156 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — [TEST PATTERN] menu
3)
Press the <ENTER> button again.
ffThe [USER TEST PATTERN] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [DELETE USER TEST PATTERN], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
5)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe selected test pattern is deleted.
Note
ff For the procedure to delete the user test pattern from the web control screen, refer to “Deleting the registered user test pattern”
(x page 192).
Changing the name of the test pattern
1)
Select the [TEST PATTERN] menu, and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [TEST PATTERN] screen (list format) is displayed.
2)
Press as to select [USER TEST PATTERN 1], [USER TEST PATTERN 2], or [USER TEST PATTERN 3],
and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe test pattern and the [TEST PATTERN] screen (toggle selection format) are displayed.
3)
Press the <ENTER> button again.
ffThe [USER TEST PATTERN] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [RENAME USER TEST PATTERN], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [RENAME USER TEST PATTERN] screen is displayed.
5)
Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
ffUp to 16 single-byte alphanumeric characters can be entered.
6)
After the name is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe registration is completed and the [USER TEST PATTERN] screen returns.
Note
ff For the procedure to change the name of the user test pattern from the web control screen, refer to “Changing the name of the user test
pattern” (x page 193).
ENGLISH - 157
Chapter 4
Settings — [SIGNAL LIST] menu
[SIGNAL LIST] menu
On the menu screen, select [SIGNAL LIST] from the main menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 79) for the operation of the menu screen.
rrRegistered signal details
Memory number: A1 (1-2)
Sub memory number
When the address number (A1, A2, ... L7, L8) signal is registered
ffA name can be set for each sub memory (x page 160).
Registering new signals
After a new signal is input and the <MENU> button on the remote control or the control panel is pressed, the
registration is completed and the [MAIN MENU] screen is displayed.
Note
ff Up to 96 signals, including sub memories, can be registered to the projector.
ff There are 12 pages (eight memories of A through L, with eight memories possible on each page) for memory numbers, and the signal is
registered to the lowest number that is available. If there is no available memory number it will be overwritten from the oldest signal.
ff The name to be registered is automatically determined by the input signal.
ff If a menu is being displayed, the new signals will be registered at the instant they are input.
Renaming the registered signal
Registered signals can be renamed.
1)
Press asqw to select the signal of which name is to be changed.
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [REGISTERED SIGNAL STATUS] screen is displayed.
ffThe memory number, input terminal, input signal name, frequency, synch polarity, etc., are displayed.
ffPress the <MENU> button to return to the [REGISTERED SIGNAL LIST] screen.
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [SIGNAL NAME CHANGE].
5)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SIGNAL NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.
6)
Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
7)
After the name is changed, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe registration is completed and the [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen returns.
ffWhen pressing asqw to select [CANCEL] and pressing the <ENTER> button, the changed signal name
will not be registered and an automatically registered signal name will be used.
Deleting the registered signal
Registered signals can be deleted.
1)
Press asqw to select the signal to delete.
2)
Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control.
ffThe [REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE] screen is displayed.
ffTo cancel the deletion, press the <MENU> button to return to the [REGISTERED SIGNAL LIST] screen.
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe selected signal will be deleted.
158 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — [SIGNAL LIST] menu
Note
ff A registered signal can also be deleted from [REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE] on the [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen.
Protecting the registered signal
1)
Press asqw to select the signal to protect.
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [REGISTERED SIGNAL STATUS] screen is displayed.
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [LOCK].
5)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
The signal is not protected.
[ON]
The signal is protected.
ffA lock icon is displayed at the right of the [REGISTERED SIGNAL LIST] screen when [LOCK] is set to
[ON].
A1: 720/60p-A1
RGB2
A2: XXXXXX
XXXX
A3: XGA75-A3
RGB2
Note
ff When [LOCK] is set to [ON], signal deletion and image adjustment are not available. To perform these operations, set [LOCK] to [OFF].
ff A signal can be registered to the sub memory even if it is protected.
ff Even a protected signal will be deleted if [INITIALIZE] is executed.
Expanding signal lock-in range
1)
Press asqw to select the signal to set.
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [REGISTERED SIGNAL STATUS] screen is displayed.
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [LOCK-IN RANGE].
5)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[NARROW]
[WIDE]
Select this item usually.
Widens the lock-in range.
ffAn expansion icon is displayed at the right of the [REGISTERED SIGNAL LIST] screen when [LOCK-IN
RANGE] is set to [WIDE].
A1: 720/60p-A1
RGB2
A2: XXXXXX
XXXX
A3: XGA75-A3
RGB2
Note
ff Switch the range where the signal to be input is determined to be the same signal as the already registered signal.
ff To prioritize the determination that a signal is the same as the already registered signal, set this function to [WIDE].
Use in cases such as when the synchronizing frequency of a signal to be input has changed slightly, or multiple signal lists are registered.
ff This function cannot be set for the SDI signal.
ff When [WIDE] is set, the image may be distorted because a signal is recognized as the same even if its synchronizing frequency varies
slightly.
ff When a signal to be input corresponds to multiple signals set in [WIDE], a registered signal with a high memory number receives priority.
Example: a signal to be input that corresponds to memory numbers A2, A4 and B1 will be determined to be B1.
ff When a registration signal is deleted, the settings are also deleted.
ff In an environment where multiple types of signals are input to the same terminal, signals are sometimes not determined correctly when the
setting is set to [WIDE].
ENGLISH - 159
Chapter 4
Settings — [SIGNAL LIST] menu
Sub memory
The projector has a sub memory function that can register the multiple image adjustment data, even if it is
recognized as the same signal by the frequency or format of the synchronization signal source.
Use this function when you need to switch the aspect or adjust the picture quality such as the white balance
while using the same signal source. The sub memory includes all the data that can be adjusted for each signal,
such as the image aspect ratio and data adjusted in the [PICTURE] menu (items such as [CONTRAST] and
[BRIGHTNESS]).
Registering to the sub memory
1)
While in the normal screen (where no menu is displayed), press qw.
ffThe sub memory registration screen is displayed if the sub memory is not registered. Proceed to Step 3).
ffA list of sub memories registered to the signal currently input is displayed.
ffThe <FUNCTION> button on the remote control can be used instead of qw when [SUB MEMORY] is
selected from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [FUNCTION BUTTON].
2)
Press asqw to select the sub memory number to register in [SUB MEMORY LIST].
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SIGNAL NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.
4)
Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffTo rename the registered signal, follow the procedure in Steps 6) and 7) in “Renaming the registered signal”
(x page 158).
Switching to the sub memory
1)
While in the normal screen (where no menu is displayed), press qw.
ffA list of sub memories registered to the signal currently input is displayed.
2)
Press asqw to select the signal to switch in [SUB MEMORY LIST].
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThis switches to the signal selected in Step 2).
Deleting the sub memory
1)
While in the normal screen (where no menu is displayed), press qw.
ffThe [SUB MEMORY LIST] screen is displayed.
2)
Press asqw to select the sub memory to be deleted, and press the <DEFAULT> button on the
remote control.
ffThe [REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE] screen is displayed.
ffTo cancel the deletion, press the <MENU> button to return to the [SUB MEMORY LIST] screen.
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe selected sub memory will be deleted.
160 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — [SECURITY] menu
[SECURITY] menu
On the menu screen, select [SECURITY] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 79) for the operation of the menu screen.
ffWhen the projector is used for the first time
Initial password: Press awsqawsq in order, and press the <ENTER> button.
Attention
ff When you select the [SECURITY] menu and press the <ENTER> button, entering a password is prompted. Enter the preset password and
then continue operations of the [SECURITY] menu.
ff When the password has been changed previously, enter the changed password, and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff The entered password is displayed with * marks on the screen.
ff An error message is displayed on the screen when the entered password is incorrect. Re-enter the correct password.
[SECURITY PASSWORD]
Display the [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen when the power is turned on with the <MAIN POWER> switch set
to the <OFF> side. When the entered password is incorrect, the operation will be restricted to the <STANDBY>
button, the <SHUTTER> button, and the <LENS> buttons (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>).
1)
Press as to select [SECURITY PASSWORD].
2)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
Disables the security password entry.
[ON]
Enables the security password entry.
Note
ff The [SECURITY PASSWORD] setting is set to [OFF] by the factory default setting, or after initialized by one of the following methods.
gg When initialized by selecting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET]
gg When initialized by setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [USER SETTINGS] → [OTHER USER SETTING] to
[INITIALIZE]
ff Change the password periodically that is hard to guess.
ff The security password is enabled after setting the item to [ON] and setting the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF>.
[SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE]
Change the security password.
1)
Press as to select [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE] screen is displayed.
3)
Press asqw and the number (<0> - <9>) buttons to set the password.
ffUp to eight button operations can be set.
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
5)
Re-enter the password for the confirmation.
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff The entered password is displayed with * marks on the screen.
ff When numerical values are used for the security password, the security password is required to be initialized if the remote control is lost.
Consult your dealer for the method of initialization.
[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP]
Enable/disable the button operations on the control panel and the remote control.
1)
Press as to select [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP].
ENGLISH - 161
Chapter 4
Settings — [SECURITY] menu
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [CONTROL PANEL] or [REMOTE CONTROL].
[CONTROL PANEL]
[REMOTE CONTROL]
Sets the limitation on the control from the control panel.
Sets the limitation on the control from the remote control.
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [CONTROL PANEL] screen or the [REMOTE CONTROL] screen is displayed.
5)
Press as to select [CONTROL PANEL] or [REMOTE CONTROL].
6)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffYou can set the operation restriction from the control panel or the remote control.
[ENABLE]
Enables all button operations.
[DISABLE]
Disables all button operations.
[USER]
Operation of all buttons can be enabled/disabled separately.
Refer to “Enabling/disabling any button” (x page 162) for details.
7)
Press as to select [APPLY], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
8)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Enabling/disabling any button
1)
Press as to select [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [CONTROL PANEL] or [REMOTE CONTROL].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
5)
Press as to select [CONTROL PANEL] or [REMOTE CONTROL].
6)
Press qw to switch [USER].
7)
Press as to select the button item to set.
ffWhen [INPUT SELECT BUTTON] is selected in [REMOTE CONTROL], press the <ENTER> button, and
then press as to select the button to set.
Buttons that can be set
[CONTROL PANEL]
[POWER BUTTON]
[INPUT SELECT BUTTON]
<INPUT SELECT> button
[MENU BUTTON]
<MENU> button
[LENS BUTTON]
<LENS> button
[SHUTTER BUTTON]
8)
<HDMI 1> button, <HDMI 2> button,
<SDI> button, <DIGITAL LINK> button,
<INPUT MENU> button
Lens buttons (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>)
<SHUTTER> button
[ON SCREEN BUTTON]
[OTHER BUTTON]
[REMOTE CONTROL]
<STANDBY> button, <POWER ON> button
―
asqw, <ENTER> button
<ON SCREEN> button
Buttons not listed above
Press qw to switch the item.
[ENABLE]
Enables button operations.
[DISABLE]
Disables button operations.
ffWhen [INPUT SELECT BUTTON] is selected in Step 7), once the switching of the item is completed, press
the <MENU> button to return to the [CONTROL PANEL] screen or the [REMOTE CONTROL] screen.
162 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
9)
Settings — [SECURITY] menu
Press as to select [APPLY], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
10) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff When a button operation is performed on the device set to [DISABLE], the [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
Enter the control device password.
ff The [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD] screen will disappear when there is no operation for approx. 10 seconds.
ff If the operations of both [CONTROL PANEL] and [REMOTE CONTROL] are set to [DISABLE], the projector cannot be turned off (cannot
enter standby).
ff When the setting has completed, the menu screen will disappear. To operate continuously, press the <MENU> button to display the main
menu.
ff Even when button operations on the remote control are disabled, the operation of the <ID SET> button on the remote control is enabled.
[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE]
The control device password can be changed.
1)
Press as to select [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE] screen is displayed.
3)
Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
4)
Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffTo cancel, select [CANCEL].
Attention
ff The initial password is “AAAA” by the factory default setting, or after initialized by one of the following methods.
gg When initialized by selecting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET]
gg When initialized by setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [USER SETTINGS] → [OTHER USER SETTING] to
[INITIALIZE]
ff Change the password periodically that is hard to guess.
ff To initialize your password, consult your distributor.
ENGLISH - 163
Chapter 4
Settings — [NETWORK] menu
[NETWORK] menu
On the menu screen, select [NETWORK] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-menu.
Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 79) for the operation of the menu screen.
[ETHERNET TYPE]
Set the transmission path of the Ethernet signal.
1)
Press as to select [ETHERNET TYPE].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [ETHERNET TYPE] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select an item.
[LAN]
Select this item when using only the <LAN> terminal to transmit the Ethernet signal.
[DIGITAL LINK]
Select this item when using only the <DIGITAL LINK> terminal to transmit the Ethernet signal.
Select this item when using the <DIGITAL LINK> terminal and the <LAN> terminal to transmit the
Ethernet signal.
[LAN & DIGITAL LINK]
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff When [ETHERNET TYPE] is set to [LAN], the Ethernet and serial control signals cannot be transmitted via the optional DIGITAL LINK output
supported device (Model No.: ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G) connected to the <DIGITAL LINK> terminal.
ff The <DIGITAL LINK> terminal and the <LAN> terminal are connected inside of the projector when [ETHERNET TYPE] is set to [LAN &
DIGITAL LINK]. Do not directly connect the <DIGITAL LINK> terminal and the <LAN> terminal using a LAN cable.Construct the system so
that it is not connected to the same network via the peripherals such as the switching hub or the twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
[DIGITAL LINK]
Perform the setting and operation regarding the DIGITAL LINK.
[DIGITAL LINK MODE]
Switch the communication method of the <DIGITAL LINK> terminal.
1)
Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [DIGITAL LINK] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK MODE].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[AUTO]
Switches the communication method automatically to DIGITAL LINK, long reach, or Ethernet.
[DIGITAL LINK]
Fixes the communication method to DIGITAL LINK.
[LONG REACH]
Fixes the communication method to long reach.
[ETHERNET]
Fixes the communication method to Ethernet.
rrPossible communication modes
l: Communication possible
―: Communication not possible
Communication possible
Setting
For DIGITAL LINK
[AUTO]
164 - ENGLISH
Video transfer
(100 m (328'1"))
Video transfer
(150 m (492'2"))
Ethernet
RS‑232C
l
―
l
l
For long reach
―
l
l
l
For Ethernet
―
―
l*1
―
Chapter 4
Settings — [NETWORK] menu
Communication possible
Setting
Video transfer
(100 m (328'1"))
Video transfer
(150 m (492'2"))
Ethernet
RS‑232C
[DIGITAL LINK]
l
―
l
l
[LONG REACH]
―
l
l
l
[ETHERNET]
―
―
l*1
―
*1 Communication via a twisted-pair-cable transmitter is not available. Connect the projector to the network directly.
Note
ff For the signal with resolution of 1 920 x 1 200 dots or less, the maximum transmission distance is 100 m (328'1") when connected with the
DIGITAL LINK communication method. For the signal with the resolution exceeding 1 920 x 1 200 dots, the maximum transmission distance
is 50 m (164'1").
ff The maximum transmission distance when connected with the long-reach communication method is 150 m (492'2"). In this case, the signal
that the projector can receive is only up to 1080/60p (1 920 x 1 080 dots, dot clock frequency 148.5 MHz).
ff When the communication method of the twist-pair-cable transmitter is set to long reach, the projector will connect with long-reach
communication method when [DIGITAL LINK MODE] is set to [AUTO]. To connect with the optional DIGITAL LINK Switcher (Model No.:
ET‑YFB200G) with the long-reach communication method, set [DIGITAL LINK MODE] to [LONG REACH]..
ff Connection will not be made correctly if the twist-pair-cable transmitter is not supporting the long-reach communication method even if
[DIGITAL LINK MODE] is set to [LONG REACH].
[DIGITAL LINK STATUS]
Display the DIGITAL LINK connection environment.
1)
Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [DIGITAL LINK] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK STATUS].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [DIGITAL LINK STATUS] screen is displayed.
[LINK STATUS]
The content of display is as follows.
[DIGITAL LINK]: Communicating in the DIGITAL LINK method.
[LONG REACH]: Communicating in the long reach method.
[ETHERNET]: Communicating in the Ethernet method.
[NO LINK]: Communication is not established.
[HDCP STATUS]
The content of display is as follows.
[HDCP2.X]: When protected with HDCP 2.2 or HDCP 2.3
[HDCP1.X]: When protected with HDCP 1.X
[NONE]: When not protected with HDCP
[---]: When there is no signal
[SIGNAL QUALITY]
[SIGNAL QUALITY] is a numerical value of the amount of error, and the display color changes to
green, yellow, or red depending on that value.
Check the signal quality level while receiving a signal from the twisted-pair-cable transmitter.
ff [MAX]/[MIN]: Maximum/minimum value of the amount of error.
ff Green (-12 dB or lower) → normal signal quality level.
ff Yellow (-11 to -8 dB) → caution level that noise may appear on the screen.
ff Red (-7 dB or higher) → abnormal level with interrupted synchronization and receiving not possible.
[DIGITAL LINK MENU]
When the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) is connected
to the <DIGITAL LINK> terminal, the main menu of the connected DIGITAL LINK output supported device is
displayed. Refer to the Operating Instructions of the DIGITAL LINK output supported device for details.
Note
ff [DIGITAL LINK MENU] cannot be selected when [EXTRON XTP] is set to [ON].
ff The operation guidance for the “RETURN” button is in the menu screen of the Digital Interface Box and DIGITAL LINK Switcher. The
projector does not have the “RETURN” button, but the same operation is available with the <MENU> button.
[EXTRON XTP]
Perform the connection setting for the “XTP transmitter” of Extron Electronics.
1)
Press as to select [DIGITAL LINK].
ENGLISH - 165
Chapter 4
Settings — [NETWORK] menu
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [DIGITAL LINK] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [EXTRON XTP].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
Select this item when connecting the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.:
ET‑YFB100G, ET‑YFB200G) to the <DIGITAL LINK> terminal.
[ON]
Select this item when connecting the “XTP transmitter” of Extron Electronics to the <DIGITAL LINK>
terminal.
Note
ff For details of the “XTP transmitter”, visit the following website of Extron Electronics.
https://www.extron.com/
[WIRED LAN]
Perform the connection settings to use wired LAN.
1)
Press as to select [WIRED LAN].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [WIRED LAN] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [IP VERSION].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [IP VERSION] screen is displayed.
5)
Press as to select an item, and press the <ENTER> button.
[IPv4]
Uses only the “IPv4” protocol.
[IPv6]
Uses only the “IPv6” protocol.
[IPv4 & IPv6]
Both the “IPv4” and the “IPv6” protocols can be used.
6)
Press the <MENU> button.
ffThe [WIRED LAN] screen is displayed.
ffProceed to Step 12) when [IPv6] is selected.
7)
Press as to select [IPv4 SETTINGS], and and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [IPv4 SETTINGS] screen is displayed.
8)
Press as to select an item, and change the setting according to the operation instructions of the
menu.
[DHCP]
[IP ADDRESS]
[SUBNET MASK]
[DEFAULT GATEWAY]
9)
[ON]
Select this item when using the DHCP server that exists in the
network to which the projector is to be connected. IPv4 address is
automatically acquired.
[OFF]
Select this item when setting the IPv4 address manually.
Set [IP ADDRESS], [SUBNET MASK], and [DEFAULT GATEWAY].
Enter the IP address.
Enter the subnet mask.
Enter the default gateway address.
Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
10) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffSetting for the IPv4 address is saved.
11) Press the <MENU> button.
ffThe [WIRED LAN] screen is displayed.
166 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — [NETWORK] menu
12) Press as to select [IPv6 SETTINGS], and and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [IPv6 SETTINGS] screen is displayed.
13) Press as to select an item, and change the setting according to the operation instructions of the
menu.
[AUTO CONFIGURATION]
[TEMPORARY ADDRESS]
[IP ADDRESS]
Select this item when assigning the IPv6 address automatically.
Set [TEMPORARY ADDRESS].
[OFF]
Select this item when setting the IPv6 address manually.
Set [IP ADDRESS], [PREFIX LENGTH], and [DEFAULT GATEWAY].
[ON]
Select this item when the temporary IPv6 address is used.
[OFF]
Select this item when the temporary IPv6 address is not used.
Enter the IP address.
[PREFIX LENGTH]
[DEFAULT GATEWAY]
[ON]
[1] - [128]
Select the prefix length.
(factory default setting: [64])
Enter the default gateway address.
14) Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
15) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffSetting for the IPv6 address is saved.
Note
ff When using a DHCP server, confirm that the DHCP server is running.
ff Consult your network administrator regarding the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and prefix length.
ff [IPv6] in [IP VERSION] cannot be set in following cases.
gg When the [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [Crestron Connected(TM)] is set to [ON]
gg When the [NETWORK] menu → [Art-Net] → [Art-Net SETUP] is set to anything other than [OFF]
ff [IPv4 SETTINGS] cannot be set when the [NETWORK] menu → [Art-Net] → [Art-Net SETUP] is set to [ON(2.X.X.X)] or [ON(10.X.X.X)].
ff The network setting is common for the <LAN> terminal and the <DIGITAL LINK> terminal.
ff Wired LAN and wireless LAN cannot be used in the same segment.
[WIRELESS LAN]
Set the connection method of wireless LAN and its details.
ffTo use the wireless LAN function with the projector, it is necessary to attach the optional Wireless Module
(Model No.: AJ‑WM50 Series) to the <USB> terminal.
1)
Press as to select [WIRELESS LAN].
2)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[ENABLE]
Select this item when the wireless LAN is to be used.
A device such as a smartphone can be directly connected to the projector even if a wireless LAN
access point is not set up separately because the projector is used as a simplified access point.
For setting procedure of the connection key, refer to “Setting the connection key” (x page 167).
[DISABLE]
Select this item when the wireless LAN is not to be used.
Note
ff [WIRELESS LAN] cannot be set if the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: AJ‑WM50 Series) is not attached to the <USB> terminal.
ff Maximum number of devices that can be connected simultaneously to the projector via wireless LAN is four devices.
Setting the connection key
1)
Press as to select [WIRELESS LAN].
2)
Press qw to select [ENABLE].
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [WIRELESS LAN] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [KEY].
ENGLISH - 167
Chapter 4
Settings — [NETWORK] menu
5)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [KEY] screen is displayed.
6)
Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
ffThe character string that can be registered as the connection key is as follows.
gg8 to 15 single-byte alphanumeric characters
7)
After entering the connection key, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
8)
Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
9)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff The factory default setting of the connection key is “spjcxxxx”. xxxx is the four digit number assigned for each product.
[PROJECTOR NAME]
Change the projector name. Enter the host name if it is required to use a DHCP server.
1)
Press as to select [PROJECTOR NAME].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PROJECTOR NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.
3)
Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
ffUp to 12 characters can be entered.
4)
After entering the projector name, press asqw to select [OK] and press the <ENTER> button.
ffTo cancel, select [CANCEL].
Note
ff The factory default setting of the projector name is “NAMExxxx”. xxxx is the four digit number assigned for each product.
[NETWORK STATUS]
Display the network information of the projector.
1)
Press as to select [NETWORK STATUS].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [NETWORK STATUS] screen is displayed.
3)
Press qw to switch the the display screen.
ffThe page will change each time you press the button.
[WIRED LAN (IPv4)] (page 1/5), [WIRED LAN (IPv6)] (page 2/5 and 3/5), [WIRELESS LAN] (page 4/5 and
5/5)
[DHCP]
Displays the [DHCP] setting.
[IP ADDRESS]
Displays the [IP ADDRESS].
[SUBNET MASK]
[WIRED LAN (IPv4)]
[DEFAULT GATEWAY]
Displays the address of the preferred DNS server.
[DNS2]
Displays the address of the alternate DNS server.
Displays the [MAC ADDRESS] of wired LAN.
[AUTO CONFIGURATION]
Displays the [AUTO CONFIGURATION] setting.
[LINK LOCAL ADDRESS]
Displays [LINK LOCAL ADDRESS] and [PREFIX LENGTH].
[STATEFUL ADDRESS]
Displays [STATEFUL ADDRESS] and [PREFIX LENGTH].
[STATELESS ADDRESS]
Displays [STATELESS ADDRESS] and [PREFIX LENGTH].
[TEMPORARY ADDRESS]
Displays [TEMPORARY ADDRESS] and [PREFIX LENGTH].
[IP ADDRESS]
[DEFAULT GATEWAY]
Displays [IP ADDRESS] and [PREFIX LENGTH].
Displays the [DEFAULT GATEWAY].
[DNS1]
Displays the address of the preferred DNS server.
[DNS2]
Displays the address of the alternate DNS server
[MAC ADDRESS]
168 - ENGLISH
Displays the [DEFAULT GATEWAY].
[DNS1]
[MAC ADDRESS]
[WIRED LAN (IPv6)]
Displays the [SUBNET MASK].
Displays the [MAC ADDRESS] of wired LAN.
[WIRELESS LAN]
Chapter 4
Settings — [NETWORK] menu
[SSID]
Displays the string of SSID.
[KEY]
Displays the connection key.
Displays/hides the connection key by pressing the <ENTER> button.
[AUTHENTICATION]
Displays the user authentication method.
[ENCRYPTION]
Displays the encryption method.
[IP ADDRESS]
Displays the [IP ADDRESS].
[SUBNET MASK]
Displays the [SUBNET MASK].
[MAC ADDRESS]
Displays the [MAC ADDRESS] of wireless LAN.
Note
ff There are items that are displayed or not displayed in the [WIRED LAN(IPv6)] page, depending on the setting in the [NETWORK] menu →
[WIRED LAN] → [IPv6 SETTINGS] → [AUTO CONFIGURATION].
ff The [STATELESS ADDRESS] screen is displayed by pressing the <ENTER> button while [WIRED LAN(IPv6)] (page 2/5) is displayed, and
details of the stateless address can be confirmed. Furthermore, the screen will be switched to the [TEMPORARY ADDRESS] screen by
pressing qw, and details of the temporary address can be confirmed.
ff The [WIRED LAN(IPv4)] page in the [NETWORK STATUS] screen is not displayed when the [NETWORK] menu → [WIRED LAN] → [IP
VERSION] is set to [IPv6].
ff The [WIRED LAN(IPv6)] page in the [NETWORK STATUS] screen is not displayed when the [NETWORK] menu → [WIRED LAN] → [IP
VERSION] is set to [IPv4].
ff The [WIRELESS LAN] page in [NETWORK STATUS] screen is not displayed in following cases.
gg When the optional wireless module (Model No.: AJ‑WM50 Series) is not attached to the <USB> terminal
gg When the [NETWORK] menu → [WIRELESS LAN] is set to [DISABLE]
ff A QR code, which makes connection setting with a smartphone easier, is displayed in [WIRELESS LAN] (page 4/5). To directly connect a
smartphone to the projector using the QR code, refer to “Using the QR code” (x page 181).
[NFC SETTING]
Set the operation of the NFC function when the application software “Smart Projector Control” which performs the
setting and adjustment of the projector is used.
1)
Press as to select [NFC SETTING].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [NFC SETTING] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select an item, and press the <ENTER> button.
[READ/WRITE]
Select this item when allowing to read and write the projector setting information.
[READ ONLY]
Select this item when allowing only to read the projector setting information.
[OFF]
Select this item when not allowing to read and write the projector setting information.
Note
ff [NFC SETTING] cannot be set when the NFC function of the projector is disabled.
The optional NFC Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET‑NUK10) can be used to enable the NFC function of the projector. Note that there are some
models that have the NFC function enabled from the time of factory shipment, and there are some countries or regions where the NFC
Upgrade Kit cannot be applied.
For the availability of the NFC function in the country or region where you purchased the product, visit the following website or consult your
dealer.
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/
ff The [NFC SETTING] setting is valid for the “Smart Projector Control” version 2.2.0 or later.
ff For details of the “Smart Projector Control”, visit the following website.
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/
[ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT]
Set the user name and password of the administrator account.
[PASSWORD POLICY]
Display a policy about the password of the administrator account.
1)
Press as to select [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.
ENGLISH - 169
Chapter 4
3)
Settings — [NETWORK] menu
Press as to select [PASSWORD POLICY], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PASSWORD POLICY] screen is displayed.
PASSWORD POLICY
Reusing passwords is not recommended.
Password cannot be blank.
A password consisting of at least eight
half-width characters and contaning
characters of at least three of the
following four types is recommended.
Uppercase letters
Lowercase letters
Digits
Symbols (~!@#$%^&*()_+\|}{][<>.,/?`)
MENU
RETURN
Setting the administrator account for the first time
Set the user name and password of the account with administrator rights.
1)
Press as to select [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [USER NAME], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [USER NAME] screen is displayed.
ffThe factory default setting of the user name for the administrator account is set to “dispadmin”.
4)
Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
ffUp to 16 characters can be entered.
5)
After the user name is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.
6)
Press as to select [PASSWORD], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
7)
Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
ffUp to 16 characters can be entered.
ffA password cannot be blank.
8)
After the password is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.
9)
Press as to select [PASSWORD CONFIRM], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
10) Enter the password entered in Step 7).
11) After the password is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.
12) Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
13) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff For limitation of the character string that can be set as a password, refer to “[PASSWORD POLICY]” (x page 169)
ff When a password is not set for the administrator account (when blank), the network function of the projector cannot be used. When using
the web control function or the communication control via LAN (including operation by application software), set a password.
ff The user name and password of the standard user account without administrator rights can be set in “[Set up password] page (when
accessed by administrator account)” (x page 210) of the web control screen.
170 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — [NETWORK] menu
Changing the setting of the administrator account
Change the user name and password of the account with administrator rights.
1)
Press as to select [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [USER NAME] in [CURRENT], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [USER NAME] screen is displayed.
4)
Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
ffEnter the current user name.
5)
After the user name is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.
6)
Press as to select [PASSWORD] in [CURRENT], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
7)
Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
ffEnter the current password.
8)
After the password is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.
9)
Press as to select [USER NAME] in [NEW], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [USER NAME] screen is displayed.
10) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
ffEnter the new user name.
ffWhen not changing the user name, enter the current user name.
11) After the user name is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.
12) Press as to select [PASSWORD] in [NEW], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
13) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
ffEnter the new password.
ffUp to 16 characters can be entered.
ffWhen not changing the password, enter the current password.
14) After the password is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.
15) Press as to select [PASSWORD CONFIRM] in [NEW], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
16) Enter the password entered in Step 13).
17) After the password is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen is displayed.
18) Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
19) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff For limitation of the character string that can be set as a password, refer to “[PASSWORD POLICY]” (x page 169).
ff The user name and password of the administrator account can also be changed in “[Set up password] page (when accessed by
administrator account)” (x page 210) of the web control screen.
ff The user name and password of the standard user account without administrator rights can be set in “[Set up password] page (when
accessed by administrator account)” (x page 210) of the web control screen.
ENGLISH - 171
Chapter 4
Settings — [NETWORK] menu
[NETWORK SECURITY]
Perform the setting to protect the projector from an external attack or abuse via LAN.
[COMMAND PROTECT]
Perform the setting regarding connection authentication when using the command control function.
1)
Press as to select [NETWORK SECURITY].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [NETWORK SECURITY] screen is displayed.
3)
Press qw to switch the [COMMAND PROTECT] setting.
[ENABLE]
Connects to the projector in protect mode.
Connection authentication is performed using the user name and password of the administrator
account.
[DISABLE]
Connects to the projector in non-protect mode.
Connection authentication is not performed.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed when the setting is switched.
4)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [COMMAND PROTECT] screen is displayed.
5)
Press as to select [USER NAME], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [USER NAME] screen is displayed.
6)
Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
ffEnter the user name of the administrator account.
7)
After the user name is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [COMMAND PROTECT] screen is displayed.
8)
Press as to select [PASSWORD], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
9)
Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
ffEnter the password of the administrator account.
10) After the password is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [COMMAND PROTECT] screen is displayed.
11) Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff When [COMMAND PROTECT] is set to [DISABLE], the projector becomes vulnerable against a threat on the network because connection
authentication will not be performed. Use this function by understanding the risk.
ff When a password is not set for the administrator account (when blank), [COMMAND PROTECT] cannot be set.
ff For details on how to use the command control function, refer to “Control commands via LAN”. (x page 256)
[NETWORK CONTROL]
Set the controls of the projector via the network.
ffTo use the network function with the projector, it is necessary to set the password of the administrator account.
(x page 169)
1)
Press as to select [NETWORK CONTROL].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [NETWORK CONTROL] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select an item, and press qw to change the setting.
[WEB CONTROL]
[COMMAND CONTROL]
172 - ENGLISH
Set to [ON] to control with the web browser.
Set to [ON] to control with the <SERIAL/MULTI SYNC IN>/<SERIAL/MULTI SYNC OUT> terminal
control command format (x page 259). Refer to “Control commands via LAN” (x page 256).
Chapter 4
[COMMAND PORT]
[Crestron Connected(TM)]
[AMX D. D.]
Settings — [NETWORK] menu
Set the port number used for command control.
Set to [ON] to control with Crestron Connected of Crestron Electronics, Inc.
Set to [ON] to control with the controller of AMX Corporation.
Setting this function to [ON] enables detection through “AMX Device Discovery”. For details, visit the
following website of AMX Corporation.
https://www.amx.com/
4)
Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
5)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff When a password is not set for the administrator account (when blank), the network function of the projector cannot be used. When using
the web control function or the communication control via LAN (including operation by application software), set a password.
ff [Crestron Connected(TM)] cannot be set when the [NETWORK] menu → [WIRED LAN] → [IP VERSION] is set to [IPv6].
[PJLink]
Set the PJLink function which controls and monitors the projector using the PJLink protocol.
ffTo use the PJLink function with the projector, it is necessary to set the password of the administrator account.
(x page 169)
Note
ff When a password is not set for the administrator account (when blank), the network function of the projector cannot be used. When using
the web control function or the communication control via LAN (including operation by application software), set a password.
[PJLink PASSWORD]
Set the security authentication password required to connect to the projector.
1)
Press as to select [PJLink].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PJLink] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [PJLink PASSWORD], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PJLink PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [PASSWORD] in [CURRENT], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
5)
Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
ffEnter the current PJLink password.
ffThe factory default setting of password is blank.
6)
After the password is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PJLink PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
7)
Press as to select [PASSWORD] in [NEW], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
8)
Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.
ffEnter the new password.
ffUp to 32 alphanumeric symbols can be entered.
9)
After the password is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PJLink PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
10) Press as to select [PASSWORD CONFIRM], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
11) Enter the password entered in Step 8).
12) After the password is entered, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PJLink PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
ENGLISH - 173
Chapter 4
Settings — [NETWORK] menu
13) Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
14) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff The PJLink password can also be changed in “[Set up password] page (when accessed by administrator account)” (x page 210) of the
web control screen.
[PJLink CONTROL]
Enable/disable the control function using PJLink protocol.
1)
Press as to select [PJLink].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PJLink] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [PJLink CONTROL].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[ON]
Select this item when controlling projectors with the PJLink protocol.
[OFF]
Select this item when not controlling projectors with the PJLink protocol.
[PJLink NOTIFICATION]
Enable/disable the notification function of the PJLink.
1)
Press as to select [PJLink].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PJLink] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [PJLink NOTIFICATION].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
Select this item when not using the notification function of the PJLink.
[ON]
Select this item when using the notification function of the PJLink.
ffProceed to Step 5) when [ON] is selected.
5)
Press as to select [NOTIFIED IP ADDRESS 1], [NOTIFIED IP ADDRESS 2], [NOTIFIED IP ADDRESS
1(IPv6)], or [NOTIFIED IP ADDRESS 2(IPv6)].
ffEnter the IP address of the computer to be notified of the status of the projector.
[Art-Net]
Set the Art-Net function.
ffTo use the Art-Net function with the projector, it is necessary to set the password of the administrator account.
(x page 169)
Note
ff When a password is not set for the administrator account (when blank), the network function of the projector cannot be used. When using
the web control function or the communication control via LAN (including operation by application software), set a password.
ff The Art-Net function cannot be used using the “IPv6” protocol. Set the [NETWORK] menu → [WIRED LAN] → [IP VERSION] to either [IPv4]
or [IPv4 & IPv6] and assign the IP address for “IPv4”.
174 - ENGLISH
Chapter 4
Settings — [NETWORK] menu
[Art-Net SETUP]
Make settings to use the Art-Net function.
1)
Press as to select [Art-Net].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [Art-Net] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [Art-Net SETUP].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
Disables the Art-Net function.
[ON(2.X.X.X)]
Enables the Art-Net function and sets the IP address to 2.X.X.X.
[ON(10.X.X.X)]
Enables the Art-Net function and sets the IP address to 10.X.X.X.
[ON(MANUAL)]
Enables the Art-Net function and uses the IP address set in [WIRED LAN].
ffProceed to Step 5) when anything other than [OFF] is selected.
5)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [Art-Net SETUP] screen is displayed.
6)
Press as to select an item, and press qw to switch the setting.
[NET]
[SUB NET]
[UNIVERSE]
[START ADDRESS]
Enter [NET] to be used when the projector processes Art-Net.
Enter [SUB NET] to be used when the projector processes Art-Net.
Enter [UNIVERSE] to be used when the projector processes Art-Net.
Enter [START ADDRESS] to be used when the projector processes Art-Net.
7)
Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
8)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
Note
ff If [ON(2.X.X.X)] or [ON(10.X.X.X)] is selected, IP address is calculated and set automatically.
[Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING]
Set the assignment of the channel. Make settings to use the Art-Net function.
For the channel definitions used for controlling the projector with the Art-Net function, refer to “Using Art-Net
function” (x page 251).
1)
Press as to select [Art-Net].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [Art-Net] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING].
4)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[2]
[USER]
[1]
Uses the channel assignment in standard setting.
Changes the channel assignment.
Uses the channel assignment with DZ21K series compatible.
DZ21K series: DZ21K series, DS20K series, DW17K series, DZ16K series
ffWhen anything other than [USER] is selected, the function assigned to the channel is displayed by pressing
the <ENTER> button. For the details of the functions, refer to the item list in Step 6).
ffProceed to Step 5) when [USER] is selected.
5)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING] screen is displayed.
ENGLISH - 175
Chapter 4
6)
Settings — [NETWORK] menu
Press as to select the channel to set, and press qw to switch the item.
[LIGHT OUTPUT]
Adjusts the brightness of light source.
[INPUT SELECT]
Switches the input.
[LENS POSITION]
Moves the lens position.
[LENS H SHIFT]
Adjusts the lens shift in the horizontal direction.
[LENS V SHIFT]
Adjusts the lens shift in the vertical direction.
[LENS FOCUS]
Adjusts the focus.
[LENS ZOOM]
Adjusts the zoom.
[POWER]
Controls the power status.
[SHUTTER]
Controls the shutter.
[FADE-IN]
Sets the fade-in time.
[FADE-OUT]
Sets the fade-out time.
[GEOMETRY]
Performs geometric adjustment.
[CUSTOM MASKING]
Performs geometric adjustment using a computer.
[FREEZE]
Freezes the projected image.
[COLOR]
Adjusts the color saturation.
[TINT]
Adjusts the tint.
[RASTER PATTERN]
Displays the raster pattern.
[ENABLE / DISABLE]
Enables/disables the control of the projector with the Art-Net function.
[NONE]
No definition
ffThe setting can be also made by pressing as to select the channel, pressing the <ENTER> button to
display the item list, pressing asqw to select the item, and pressing the <ENTER> button.
ffSame item cannot be set for multiple channels, except for [NONE].
[Art-Net STATUS]
Display the content of control assigned to each channel and the received data of that channel.
1)
Press as to select [Art-Net].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [Art-Net] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [Art-Net STATUS].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [Art-Net STATUS] screen is displayed.
176 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5
Operations
This chapter describes how to use each function.
ENGLISH - 177
Chapter 5
Operations — Network connection
Network connection
The projector is equipped with the network function, and following is possible by connecting to a computer.
ffWeb control
Setting, adjustment, and displaying status of the projector are possible by accessing the projector from a
computer.
Refer to “Web control function” (x page 183) for details.
ffSmart Projector Control
The application software “Smart Projector Control” can be used, which enables to set and adjust the projector
connected via LAN using a smartphone or tablet device.
For details, visit the following website.
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/
ffMulti Monitoring & Control Software
“Multi Monitoring & Control Software”, a software application to monitor and control multiple display devices
(projector or flat panel display) connected to intranet, can be used.
Plug-in software “Early Warning Software”, which monitors the status of the display devices and their peripherals
within an intranet, and notifies of abnormality of such equipment and detects the signs of possible abnormality,
can also be used.
For details, visit the following website.
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/
ffPJLink
Operation or status query of the projector can be performed from a computer using the PJLink protocol.
Refer to “Using PJLink function” (x page 250) for details.
ffArt-Net
Setting of the projector can be operated by the DMX controller or application software using the Art-Net protocol.
Refer to “Using Art-Net function” (x page 251) for details.
ffCommand control
Operation or status query of the projector can be performed from a computer using the control command.
Refer to “Control commands via LAN” (x page 256) for details.
Note
ff To use the network function with the projector, it is necessary to set the password of the administrator account. (x page 169)
When a password is not set for the administrator account (when blank), the network function of the projector cannot be used. When using
the web control function or the communication control via LAN (including operation by application software), set a password.
Connecting via wired LAN
This projector can receive the Ethernet signal from the twisted-pair-cable transmitter via the LAN cable.
Example of general network connection
Computer
Projector
LAN cable (straight)
LAN cable (straight)
Switching hub
Attention
ff When a LAN cable is directly connected to the projector, the network connection must be made indoors.
178 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5
Operations — Network connection
Note
ff A LAN cable is required to use the network function.
ff Use a straight or crossover LAN cable that is compatible with CAT5 or higher. Either the straight or the crossover cable, or both cables
can be used depending on the system configuration. Consult your network administrator. The projector will determine the type of the cable
(straight or crossover) automatically.
ff Use a LAN cable of 100 m (328'1") or shorter.
Example of network connections via a twisted-pair-cable transmitter
Computer
Projector
LAN cable (straight)
Switching hub
LAN cable (straight)
LAN cable (straight)
Twisted-pair-cable transmitter
Attention
ff When a LAN cable is directly connected to the projector, the network connection must be made indoors.
Note
ff For the LAN cable between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector, use a cable that meets the following criteria:
gg Conforming to CAT5e or higher standards
gg Shielded type (including connectors)
gg Straight-through
gg Single wire
gg Diameter of the cable core is same or larger than AWG24 (AWG24, AWG23, etc.)
ff The maximum transmission distance between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector is 100 m (328'1") for the signal with
resolution of 1 920 x 1 200 dots or less. For the signal with the resolution exceeding 1 920 x 1 200 dots, the maximum transmission distance
is 50 m (164'1"). It is possible to transmit up to 150 m (492'2") if the twisted-pair-cable transmitter supports the long-reach communication
method. However, the signal that the projector can receive is only up to 1080/60p (1 920 x 1 080 dots, dot clock frequency 148.5 MHz)
for the long-reach communication method. If these distances are exceeded, image may be disrupted or a malfunction may occur in LAN
communication.
ff When laying cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector, confirm that cable characteristics are compatible with
CAT5e or higher using tools such as a cable tester or cable analyzer.
When a relay connector is used, include it in the measurement.
ff Do not use a switching hub between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector.
ff To transmit the Ethernet and serial control signals using the <DIGITAL LINK> terminal, set the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET TYPE] to
[DIGITAL LINK] or [LAN & DIGITAL LINK].
ff To transmit the Ethernet signal using the <LAN> terminal, set the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET TYPE] to [LAN] or [LAN & DIGITAL
LINK].
ff The <DIGITAL LINK> terminal and the <LAN> terminal are connected inside of the projector when the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET
TYPE] is set to [LAN & DIGITAL LINK]. Do not directly connect the <DIGITAL LINK> terminal and the <LAN> terminal using a LAN cable.
Construct the system so that it is not connected to the same network via the peripherals such as the switching hub or the twisted-pair-cable
transmitter.
ff Do not pull cables forcefully. Also, do not bend or fold cables unnecessarily.
ff To reduce the effects of noise as much as possible, stretch out the cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector
without any loops.
ff Lay the cables between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector away from other cables, particularly power cables.
ff When laying multiple cables, run them side by side along the shortest distance possible without bundling them together.
ff After laying the cables, go to the [NETWORK] menu → [DIGITAL LINK] → [DIGITAL LINK STATUS] and confirm that the value of [SIGNAL
QUALITY] is displayed in green which indicates normal quality.
ff For twisted-pair-cable transmitters of other manufacturers of which the operation has been verified with the projector, visit the following
website.
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/
Note that the verification for devices of other manufacturers has been made for the items set by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd., and not all the
operations have been verified. For operation or performance problems caused by the devices of other manufacturers, contact the respective
manufacturers.
ENGLISH - 179
Chapter 5
Operations — Network connection
Setting the projector
1)
Connect the projector to a computer using a LAN cable.
2)
Turn on the power of the projector.
3)
Press the <MENU> button to open the [NETWORK] menu from the main menu.
ffThe [NETWORK] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [WIRED LAN], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [WIRED LAN] screen is displayed.
5)
Perform the [WIRED LAN] setting.
ffRefer to [WIRED LAN] (x page 166) for details.
Note
ff To connect to an existing network, perform after consulting your network administrator.
rrFactory default setting
ffFollowing setting has been made as a factory default.
[DHCP]
[IP ADDRESS]
[SUBNET MASK]
[DEFAULT GATEWAY]
[DNS1]/[DNS2]
OFF
192.168.0.8
255.255.255.0
192.168.0.1
None
Operating the computer
1)
Turn on the power of the computer.
2)
Perform the network setting following the instruction of your network administrator.
ffOperation from the computer is possible by configuring the network setting of the computer as follows if the
projector is in the factory default setting.
[IP ADDRESS]
192.168.0.10
[SUBNET MASK]
255.255.255.0
[DEFAULT GATEWAY]
192.168.0.1
Connecting with wireless LAN
To use the wireless LAN function with the projector, it is necessary to attach the optional Wireless Module (Model
No.: AJ‑WM50 Series) to the <USB> terminal.
Connection example
IEEE802.11b/g/n
Optional Wireless Module
(Model No.: AJ‑WM50 Series)
Preparing and confirming the projector
1)
Insert the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: AJ-WM50 Series) all the way into the <USB> terminal.
2)
Turn on the projector.
180 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5
Operations — Network connection
3)
Press the <MENU> button to open the [NETWORK] menu from the main menu.
ffThe [NETWORK] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [WIRELESS LAN].
5)
Press qw to set [ENABLE].
ffFor details, refer to [WIRELESS LAN] (x page 167).
6)
Press as to select [NETWORK STATUS], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [NETWORK STATUS] screen is displayed.
7)
Press qw to display [WIRELESS LAN] (page 4/5).
ffConfirm [SSID] and [KEY].
Note
ff [WIRELESS LAN] cannot be set if the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: AJ‑WM50 Series) is not attached to the <USB> terminal.
ff Attach the Wireless Module to the <USB> terminal directly without using a USB extension cable or USB hub.
ff The indicator on the Wireless Module blinks in blue while the main power of the projector is turned on.
ff If the indicator on the Wireless Module does not blink even when the projector is turned on, re-insert the Wireless Module into the <USB>
terminal.
Operating the computer
1)
Turn on the computer.
2)
Perform the network setting.
ffPerform the network setting on the computer following the instruction of the network administrator so that it
can be connected to the projector.
3)
Connect the Wireless Module to the projector via wireless LAN.
ffWhen connecting, confirm the [WIRELESS LAN] setting displayed in the [NETWORK STATUS] screen of
the projector.
Using the QR code
A smartphone can be connected to the projector via wireless LAN just by reading the QR code that the projector
displays with the camera on a smartphone.
rrCompatible devices
iPhone: iOS 12 or later
Android devices: Android 8.0 or later
Note
ff A device supporting reading of a QR code and application software of the camera supporting reading of a QR code are required.
ff For the devices that the operation has been verified with this projector, visit the following website.
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/
Confirmation of operation for the devices of other manufacturers has been performed with the items set independently by Panasonic
Connect Co., Ltd., and not all the operations are warranted. For operation or performance problems caused by the devices of other
manufacturers, contact the respective manufacturers.
rrDisplaying the QR code in OSD
The following is the operation of the projector when reading the QR code displayed in the on-screen menu (OSD).
1)
Press the <MENU> button to open the [NETWORK] menu from the main menu.
ffThe [NETWORK] screen is displayed.
2)
Press as to select [NETWORK STATUS], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [NETWORK STATUS] screen is displayed.
ENGLISH - 181
Chapter 5
3)
Operations — Network connection
Press qw to switch the displayed screen and display [WIRELESS LAN] (page 4/5).
ffThe QR code is displayed.
4/5
NETWORK STATUS
WIRELESS LAN
SSID
Proj1234_xxxxxxxxxxxxx
KEY
********
AUTHENTICATION
WPA2-PSK
ENCRYPTION
CHANGE
MENU
AES
ENTER
DISPLAY KEY
RETURN
Note
ff To use the wireless LAN function with the projector, it is necessary to attach the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: AJ‑WM50 Series) to
the <USB> terminal.
rrDisplaying the QR code in the information monitor
The following is the operation of the projector when reading the QR code displayed in the information monitor of
the control panel.
1)
Press the <INFO> button on the control panel.
ffThe top menu screen is displayed.
2)
Press as to select [STATUS].
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe sub-menu item is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [NETWORK].
5)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe network selection item is displayed.
6)
Press as to select [WIRELESS LAN].
7)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe detailed item is displayed.
8)
Press as to switch the item to display the QR code.
Note
ff Item of the [STATUS] menu → [NETWORK] → [WIRELESS LAN] is not displayed in following cases.
gg When the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: AJ‑WM50 Series) is not attached to the <USB> terminal.
gg When the [SETUP] menu → [NETWORK] → [WIRELESS LAN] is set to [DISABLE]
rrOperation of a smartphone
1)
Start application software of the camera supporting reading of a QR code.
2)
Read the QR code displayed in the OSD or the information monitor with the camera.
3)
Tap the notification displayed on the smartphone screen.
ffTap “Join” or “Connect” if a message to confirm the connection is displayed.
ffThe smartphone will be connected to the projector via wireless LAN.
182 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5
Operations — Web control function
Web control function
Following operation is possible from a computer using the web control function.
ffSetting and adjustment of the projector
ffDisplay of the projector status
ffSending E-mail messages when there is a problem with the projector
The projector supports “Crestron Connected”, and the following application software of Crestron Electronics, Inc.
can be used.
ffCrestron Fusion
Note
ff Communication with an E-mail server is required to use the E-mail function. Confirm that the E-mail can be used beforehand.
ff “Crestron Connected” is a system of Crestron Electronics, Inc. that collectively manages and controls devices on multiple systems
connected to a network using a computer.
ff For details of the “Crestron Connected”, visit the following website of Crestron Electronics, Inc. (English only.)
https://www.crestron.com/
Computer that can be used for setting
To use the web control function, a web browser is required. Confirm that the web browser can be used in
advance.
OS
Compatible browser
Windows
Microsoft Edge
Mac OS
Safari 12.0/13.0/14.0/15.0/16.0
iOS
Safari (equipped with version iOS 12, iOS 13, iOS 14, iOS 15 or iOS16)
Android
Google Chrome (equipped with version Android 8.0/9.0/10.0/11.0/12.0/13.0)
Accessing from the web browser
1)
Start up the web browser on the computer.
2)
Enter the IP address set on the projector into the URL entry field of the web browser.
ffWhen a user name and password are already set for the administrator account in the initial setting screen
(x page 63) or in the [NETWORK] menu → [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] (x page 169) proceed to
Step 7).
ffWhen the administrator account is not set, the [Set up password] page is displayed.
3)
In [User name], enter the user name to be used as the administrator account.
ffThe factory default setting of the user name for the administrator account is set to “dispadmin”.
4)
In [Password], enter the password to be set for the administrator account.
ffA password cannot be blank.
ffA password consisting of at least eight half-width characters is recommended.
ffA password containing characters of at least three of the following four character types is recommended.
ggUppercase letters
ggLowercase letters
ggDigits
ggSymbols (~!@#$%^&*()_+\|}{][<>.,/?`)
ENGLISH - 183
Chapter 5
Operations — Web control function
5)
In [Password(Retype)], enter the password entered in Step 4).
6)
Click [Change].
ffThe setting of the administrator account will be completed.
7)
Enter the user name and password in the displayed login screen.
ffEnter the user name and password of an account with administrator rights or the user name and password
of a standard user account without administrator rights.
ffAfter logging in with the administrator account, set the user name and password of the standard user
account using the [Set up password] page. For details, refer to “[Set up password] page (when accessed by
administrator account)” (x page 210).
8)
Click [Sign in] or [OK].
Attention
ff The entry screen for the user name and password may be hidden by other window that is already opened. In such case, minimize the
window in front to display the entry screen.
Note
ff If you use a web browser to control the projector, set the [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [WEB CONTROL] to [ON].
ff Do not perform setting or control simultaneously by starting up multiple web browsers. Do not set or control the projector from multiple
computers.
ff Access will be locked for few minutes when an incorrect password is entered three times consecutively.
ff Some items on the projector setting page use the JavaScript function of the web browser. Correct control may not be possible when the web
browser is set not to use this function.
ff If the screen for the web control is not displayed, consult your network administrator.
ff While updating the screen for the web control, the screen may appear white for a moment, but it is not a malfunction.
ff Click [License] at the top right of the [Set up password] page to display the download page of the open source software license.
ff Screenshot of a computer
The size or the display of the screen may be different from this manual depending on the OS or the Web browser, or the type of computer in
use.
184 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5
Operations — Web control function
Rights for each account
The administrator account can use all functions. The standard user account has limits on the functions it can use.
Select the account to use depending on the purpose.
The function that has l in the administrator/standard user column indicates that it can be operated with that
account.
Item
[Status]
[Projector control]
Function
Administrator
Standard user
Page
[Remote preview lite]
l
l*1
186
[Projector status]
l
l
188
Error information page
l
l
189
[Network status]
l
l
189
[Access error log]
l
―
190
[Mail error log]
l
―
190
[Basic control]
l
l
191
[Detail control]
l
―
191
[Network config]
l
―
195
[Adjust clock]
l
―
197
[Ping test]
l
―
198
l
―
198
[Certificate]
[Detailed set up]
[Set up password]
[License]*2
[HTTPS set up]
l
―
203
[Crestron Connected]
l
―
204
[E-mail set up]
l
―
207
[Authentication set up]
l
―
208
[User function set up]
l
―
209
[Status notification]
l
―
209
[Network security]
l
―
210
User name of [Administrator]
l
―
211
User name of [User]
l
―
211
Password of [Administrator]
l
―
211
Password of [User]
l
l
211
212
Password of [PJLink]
l
―
212
License download page
l
l
212
*1 Available only when [Detailed set up] → [User function set up] → [Remote preview lite] is set to [Enable]. When [Disable] is set, the [Remote
preview lite] page cannot be displayed or operated with the standard user account.
*2 Even if an administrator account is not set, the license can be downloaded from the [Set up password] page that is displayed when accessing the
projector.
Descriptions of items
1
6
2
3
4
5
No errors
1
Page tab
Switches pages by clicking this item.
4
[Detailed set up]
The [Detailed set up] page is displayed by clicking this item.
2
[Status]
The status of the projector is displayed by clicking this item.
5
[Set up password]
The [Set up password] page is displayed by clicking this item.
3
[Projector control]
The [Projector control] page is displayed by clicking this item.
6
[License]
The download page of the open source software license is
displayed by clicking this item.
ENGLISH - 185
Chapter 5
Operations — Web control function
[Status]
[Remote preview lite] page
The input image to the projector can be simply viewed on the web control screen.
Click [Status] → [Remote preview lite].
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
Preview window
Simply displays the image corresponding to the input image to
the projector.
Color of the outside border of the preview window indicates the
projection status from the projector.
Red: Image from the projector is not projected.
Green: Image from the projector is being projected.
2
[INPUT SELECT]
Displays the operation menu for switching input.
For details, refer to “Switching the input”(x page 188).
3
[STATUS]
Displays the status of the projector.
4
[SHUTTER]
Displays the status of the shutter.
5
[POWER]
Displays the status of the power.
6
[OSD]
Displays the status of the on-screen display function.
7
[PROJECTOR TYPE]
Displays the type of the projector.
8
[SERIAL NUMBER]
Displays the serial number of the projector.
16
10
11
12
13
14
15
9
[AC VOLTAGE]
Displays the input supply voltage.
10 Signal information
Displays the signal information of the selected input.
11 [INTAKE AIR]
Displays the intake air temperature status.
12 [GEOMETRY]
Displays the setting of the [POSITION] menu → [GEOMETRY].
13 [LIGHT SOURCE]
Displays the illumination status (icon) and the runtime of the
light source 1/2.
14 [ERROR]
Displays the occurrence status of error/warning in icon.
This will be blank if there is no occurrence of error/warning.
15 [Detail]
A button is displayed when there is an occurrence of error/
warning.
Click “Error information page” (x page 189) to display.
16 [Pre-Show Mode]
Switches the Pre-Show mode.
In the Pre-Show mode, the input image to the projector can be
viewed without projecting even if the projector is in the standby
status.
[Pre-Show Mode] is not displayed in the projection mode.
Note
ff The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> blinks in red in frequency of 2.95 seconds illuminating → 0.25 seconds off during the
Pre-Show mode.
ff The runtime in [PROJECTOR RUNTIME] continues to add up even if the projector is in the standby status while in the Pre-Show mode.
ff In case of this projector, the input image to the projector can be displayed in the preview window in simplified manner even if [Detailed set
up] → [HTTPS set up] → [Connection] is set to [HTTPS]. However, it may not be displayed depending on the web browser in use when the
self-signed certificate is used as the security certificate to be used for the HTTPS communication.
ff There are following restrictions on the image to be displayed in the preview window.
gg The adjustment results for each item in the [PICTURE] menu, [POSITION] menu, and [ADVANCED MENU] menu are not reflected.
However, some of the items such as [CONTRAST], [BRIGHTNESS], or [SHIFT] are reflected.
gg When an image is projected with a different aspect ratio from the input image using [ASPECT] or [ZOOM], the image may be displayed
with a different aspect ratio from the actual projected image.
gg The effects set in [BACK COLOR] or [STARTUP LOGO] are not reflected.
gg When the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [IMAGE ROTATION] is set to anything other than [OFF], the projected image will not be displayed
in the preview window.
ff While the test pattern is displayed, it is also displayed in the preview window.
186 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5
Operations — Web control function
rrStatus display icon
The power is switched off. (Standby status)
[POWER]
In the projection mode
The shutter function is enabled (shutter: closed).
[SHUTTER]
The shutter function is disabled (shutter: opened).
The on-screen display is set to on (display).
[OSD]
The on-screen display is set to off (hide).
The [POSITION] menu → [GEOMETRY] is set to [OFF].
The [POSITION] menu → [GEOMETRY] is set to [KEYSTONE].
The [POSITION] menu → [GEOMETRY] is set to [CORNER CORRECTION].
[GEOMETRY]
The [POSITION] menu → [GEOMETRY] is set to [CURVED CORRECTION].
The [POSITION] menu → [GEOMETRY] is set to [PC-1].
The [POSITION] menu → [GEOMETRY] is set to [PC-2].
The [POSITION] menu → [GEOMETRY] is set to [PC-3].
The corresponding light source is turned on.
[LIGHT SOURCE]
The corresponding light source is is turned off.
The light source is in warning status.
The light source is in error status.
The temperature is in warning status.
The temperature is in error status.
[ERROR]
The filter is in warning status.
The filter is in error status.
A warning other than light source or temperature has occurred.
An error other than light source or temperature has occurred.
ENGLISH - 187
Chapter 5
Operations — Web control function
Switching the input
Click [INPUT SELECT] in the [Remote preview lite] page.
HDMI1 --- (---kHz/---Hz)
1
-----kHz/---Hz
2
3
4
1
[INPUT SELECT]
Switches to the input to view the image.
3
[SIGNAL NAME]
Displays the input signal name.
2
[INPUT]
Displays the currently selected input.
4
[SIGNAL FREQUENCY]
Displays the frequency of the input signal.
Note
ff View the input image in the Pre-Show mode, and turn on the power in [Projector control] → [Basic control] page / [Detail control] page if
there is no problem to project.
[Projector status] page
Click [Status] → [Projector status].
Display the status of the projector for the following items.
1
2
3
4
5
6
No errors
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1
[PROJECTOR TYPE]
Displays the type of the projector.
10 [AC VOLTAGE]
Displays the input voltage.
2
[FIRMWARE VERSION]
Displays the firmware version of the projector.
11 [INPUT]
Displays the status of the selected input.
3
[POWER]
Displays the status of the power.
12 [INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]
Displays the status of the intake air temperature of the projector.
4
[SHUTTER]
Displays the status of the shutter function. ([CLOSE]: Shutter
function enabled; [OPEN]: Shutter function disabled)
13 [EXHAUST AIR TEMPERATURE]
Displays the status of the exhaust air temperature of the
projector.
5
[OPERATING MODE]
Displays the setting status of [OPERATING MODE].
14 [LIGHT1 TEMPERATURE]
Displays the temperature status of light source 1.
6
[LIGHT OUTPUT]
Displays the setting status of [LIGHT OUTPUT].
15 [LIGHT2 TEMPERATURE]
Displays the temperature status of light source 2.
7
[SERIAL NUMBER]
Displays the serial number of the projector.
16 [LIGHT1]
Displays the lighting status and runtime of light source 1.
8
[REMOTE1 STATUS]
Displays the control status of the <REMOTE 1 IN> terminal.
17 [LIGHT2]
Displays the lighting status and runtime of light source 2.
9
[OSD]
Displays the status of on-screen display function.
([ON]: Display; [OFF]: Hide)
18 [SELF TEST]
Displays the self-diagnosis information.
188 - ENGLISH
19 [PROJECTOR RUNTIME]
Displays the runtime of the projector.
Chapter 5
Operations — Web control function
Error information page
When [Error (Detail)] or [Warning (Detail)] is displayed in the [SELF TEST] display field of the [Projector status]
screen, click it to display the content of the error/warning.
ffThe projector may go into the standby status to protect the projector depending on the contents of the error.
1
2
1
Display of error information
Displays the alphanumeric symbols and content of errors/
warnings that occur.
Refer to “[SELF TEST] indications” (x page 247) for the
display details.
2
Error code
[Network status] page
Click [Status] → [Network status].
The current network setting status is displayed.
1
4
1
2
2
3
3
1
[WIRED LAN (IPv4)]
Displays the settings of wired LAN (IPv4).
2
[WIRED LAN (IPv6)]
Displays the settings of wired LAN (IPv6).
3
[WIRED LAN COMMON INFORMATION]
Displays the common information of wired LAN (IPv4) and wired
LAN (IPv6).
4
[WIRELESS LAN]
Displays the settings of wireless LAN when the optional
Wireless Module (Model No.: AJ‑WM50 Series) is attached.
ENGLISH - 189
Chapter 5
Operations — Web control function
[Access error log] page
Click [Status] → [Access error log].
The error log on the web server is displayed such as access to the pages that do not exist or access with
unauthorized user names or passwords.
[Mail error log] page
Click [Status] → [Mail error log].
E-mail error log is displayed if periodic E-mail sending has failed.
Note
ff [Access error log] and [Mail error log] display the recent few thousand accesses/requests. All information may not be displayed when many
accesses/requests are made at once.
ff Logs in [Access error log] and [Mail error log] are deleted from the oldest when exceeding a certain amount.
ff Check [Access error log] and [Mail error log] periodically.
190 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5
Operations — Web control function
[Projector control]
[Basic control] page
Click [Projector control] → [Basic control].
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
[POWER]
Turns off/on the power.
2
[SHUTTER]
Switches the status of the shutter. ([CLOSE]: Shutter function
enabled; [OPEN]: Shutter function disabled)
3
[OSD]
Switches the status of the on-screen display function.
([OFF]: Hide; [ON]: Display)
4
5
On-screen display of the projector
Displays the same items as shown on the on-screen display
of the projector. You can check or change the settings of the
menus. It is displayed even if the on-screen display function is
set to off (hide).
However, the contents of the on-screen display is not updated if
accessed with the standard user account.
6
[INPUT SELECT]
Switches the input signal.
[SYSTEM]
Switches the system method.
[Detail control] page
Click [Projector control] → [Detail control].
1
2
3
4
7
8
9
10
11
5
6
1
Control of the projector
The projector is controlled by clicking the buttons in the same
way as the buttons on the remote control. After control, the onscreen display of the projector at the right of the control page is
updated.
2
[SUB MEMORY]
Switches the sub memory.
3
[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]
Switches the system daylight view settings.
4
[FREEZE]
Temporarily pauses the image.
5
[WAVEFORM MONITOR]
Displays the waveform of the input signal.
6
[PROJECTION METHOD]
Switches the setting of the projection method.
7
[OSD POSITION]
Switches the OSD position setting.
8
[GEOMETRY]
Switches the geometric adjustment setting.
9
[LENS]
Displays the [LENS] page.(x page 194)
10 [TEST PATTERN]
Displays the test pattern.
Click the test pattern to display in the projected image from the
patters displayed on the right side of the control page.
The display of the test pattern disappears if [Exit] is clicked.
11 [GET OSD]
Updates the on-screen display of the projector at the right of the
control page.
ENGLISH - 191
Chapter 5
Operations — Web control function
Registering the user test pattern
1)
Click [Projector control] → [Detail control] → [TEST PATTERN].
ffThe test pattern selection buttons are displayed at the right side of the control page and [USER TEST
PATTERN LIST] is displayed on the bottom right.
2)
Click the [ADD] button of the user test pattern number to be registered.
ffUp to three user test patterns can be registered.
ffNumber that user test pattern is not registered is displayed as [No such file.], and the [ADD] button is
displayed.
ffNumber that user test pattern is already registered is displayed as the user test pattern name, and the
[EDIT] button is displayed.
ffClick the [ADD] button of the register destination to display the file selection screen.
3)
Select the file of a test pattern to register, and click [Open].
ffThe user test pattern name is displayed, and the registration is completed.
Note
ff To register a new test pattern to the number with the user test pattern already registered, delete the registered test pattern first, and then
perform the registration again. Registration by overwriting is not possible. For the procedure to delete, refer to “Deleting the registered user
test pattern” (x page 192).
Deleting the registered user test pattern
1)
Click [Projector control] → [Detail control] → [TEST PATTERN].
ffThe test pattern selection buttons are displayed at the right side of the control page and [USER TEST
PATTERN LIST] is displayed on the bottom right.
ffNumber that user test pattern is registered is displayed as the user test pattern name, and the [EDIT] button
is displayed.
2)
Click the [EDIT] button of the user test pattern number to be deleted.
ffThe edit screen is displayed at the lower part of the [USER TEST PATTERN LIST].
3)
Click the [DELETE] button in the edit screen.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
4)
Click [OK].
ffDeleting of the user test pattern is completed.
192 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5
Operations — Web control function
Note
ff The edit screen can be displayed by clicking [USER1], [USER2], or [USER3] registered with test pattern in the test pattern selection buttons
displayed on the right side of the control page.
Changing the name of the user test pattern
1)
Click [Projector control] → [Detail control] → [TEST PATTERN].
ffThe test pattern selection buttons are displayed at the right side of the control page and [USER TEST
PATTERN LIST] is displayed on the bottom right.
ffNumber that user test pattern is registered is displayed as the user test pattern name, and the [EDIT] button
is displayed.
2)
Click the [EDIT] button of the user test pattern number to change the name.
ffThe edit screen is displayed at the lower part of the [USER TEST PATTERN LIST].
3)
Enter the new name in the text box of the edit screen.
ffUp to 16 single-byte alphanumeric characters can be entered.
4)
After entering of the name is completed, click [RENAME].
ffChanging of the name is completed, and the name will be reflected in [USER TEST PATTERN LIST].
Note
ff The edit screen can be displayed by clicking [USER1], [USER2], or [USER3] registered with test pattern in the test pattern selection buttons
displayed on the right side of the control page.
ENGLISH - 193
Chapter 5
Operations — Web control function
[LENS] page
Click [Projector control] → [Detail control] → [LENS].
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
[CALIBRATION]
The calibration execution page (x page 195) is displayed.
2
[SET POSITION]
The lens position setting page(x page 195) is displayed.
3
[HOME POSITION]
Moves the projection lens to the home position.
4
Slider bar
Adjusts the lens shift, zoom, focus and periphery focus by
dragging the slide button in the center over the slide rail. The
operation speed will become faster when the drag position is
further away from the center.
5
Adjustment buttons
Click asqw to adjust the lens shift, zoom, focus and
periphery focus.
6
[PERIPHERY FOCUS]
Use the slider bar or as to adjust the periphery focus.
The adjustment can be performed in two operating speeds by
the position which the slide button is dragged to.
Click as to make fine adjustments. The adjustment can be
performed faster by holding down.
This is displayed only when following projection lens is
attached.
ff Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET‑EMW200, ET‑EMW300,
ET‑EMW400, ET‑EMW500, ET‑EMU100)
7
[FOCUS]
Use the slider bar or as to adjust the focus.
The adjustment can be performed in two operating speeds by
the position which the slide button is dragged to.
Click as to make fine adjustments. The adjustment can be
performed faster by holding down.
194 - ENGLISH
8
[ZOOM]
Use the slider bar or as to adjust the zoom.
The adjustment can be performed in two operating speeds by
the position which the slide button is dragged to.
Click as to make fine adjustments. The adjustment can be
performed faster by holding down.
9
[SHIFT]
Use the slider bar or asqw to adjust the lens shift (vertical
position and horizontal position).
The adjustment can be performed in three operating speeds by
the position which the slide button is dragged to.
Click asqw to make fine adjustments. The adjustment can
be performed faster by holding the button for three seconds or
longer.
10 [SAVE]
Saves the current lens position (vertical position, horizontal
position, focus position, periphery focus position and zoom
position) by selecting the number of the lens memory. Operate
following the instruction displayed in the screen.
11 [LOAD]
Loads the lens position (vertical position, horizontal position,
focus position, periphery focus position and zoom position)
saved in the specified lens memory, and automatically moves to
that position. Operate following the instruction displayed in the
screen.
12 [Back]
Returns to the [Detail control] page.
Chapter 5
Operations — Web control function
Calibration execution page
1)
Click [Projector control] → [Detail control] → [LENS] → [CALIBRATION].
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
2)
Click [OK].
ffThe calibrations for the lens shift and focus are started.
Lens position setting page
Click [Projector control] → [Detail control] → [LENS] → [SET POSITION].
1
2
3
4
1
[Get]
Acquires the current lens position and displays the acquired
values in the lens position information field.
2
Lens position information field
Enters the lens position (vertical position/horizontal position).
3
[Back]
Returns to the [LENS] page.
4
[Apply]
Moves to the lens position displayed in the lens position
information field.
[Detailed set up]
[Network config] page
Click [Detailed set up] → [Network config].
1)
Click [Network config].
ffClick [Network config] to display the [CAUTION!] screen.
2)
Select the item to change the setting.
ffThe [WIRELESS LAN] setting can be selected only when the optional Wireless Module (Model No.:
AJ‑WM50 Series) is attached.
ENGLISH - 195
Chapter 5
Operations — Web control function
3)
Click [Next].
ffThe current settings are displayed.
4)
Click [Change].
ffThe setting change screen is displayed.
For wired LAN connection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
[PROJECTOR NAME]
Enter the name of the projector. Enter the host name if it is
required when using a DHCP server etc.
2
[IP VERSION]
[IPv4]: Use only the IPv4 protocol.
[IPv6]: Use only the IPv6 protocol.
[IPv4 & IPv6]: Both the “IPv4” and the “IPv6” protocols can be
used.
3
[DHCP ON], [DHCP OFF]
To enable the DHCP client function, set to [DHCP ON].
4
[IP ADDRESS]
Enter the IPv4 address if a DHCP server is not used.
5
[SUBNET MASK]
Enter the subnet mask if a DHCP server is not used.
6
[DEFAULT GATEWAY]
Enter the default gateway address for IPv4 if a DHCP server is
not used.
7
[DNS1]
Enter the DNS1 server address (primary) for IPv4.
Allowed characters:
Numbers (0 - 9), period (.)
8
[DNS2]
Enter the DNS2 server address (secondary) for IPv4.
Allowed characters:
Numbers (0 - 9), period (.)
9
[AUTO CONFIGURATION ON], [AUTO CONFIGURATION
OFF]
Select [AUTO CONFIGURATION ON] to automatically assign
IPv6 address.
10 [TEMPORARY ADDRESS]
Select [ON] to use the temporary IPv6 address.
11 [IP ADDRESS]
Enter the IPv6 address when the IPv6 address is not
automatically assigned.
12 [PREFIX LENGTH]
Enter the prefix length when the IPv6 address is not
automatically assigned.
13 [DEFAULT GATEWAY]
Enter the default gateway address for IPv6 when the IPv6
address is not automatically assigned.
14 [DNS1]
Enter the DNS1 server address (primary) for IPv6.
Allowed characters: hexadecimal numbers (0 - f), colon (:)
15 [DNS2]
Enter the DNS2 server address (secondary) for IPv6.
Allowed characters: hexadecimal numbers (0 - f), colon (:)
16 [Back], [Next]
Click [Back] to return to the original screen. Click [Next] to
display the setting confirmation screen. Click [Submit] to update
the setting.
Note
ff When you use the “Forward” and “Back” functions of your browser, a warning message “Page has Expired” may appear. In that case, click
[Network config] again since the following operation will not be guaranteed.
ff The connection may be disconnected when the LAN setting is changed while connected with LAN.
196 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5
Operations — Web control function
For wireless LAN connection
(Available only when the Wireless Module is attached to the projector)
1
2
1
[KEY]
Sets the connection key.
Enter 8 to 15 characters of single-byte alphanumeric.
2
[Back], [Next]
Click [Back] to return to the original screen. Click [Next] to
display the setting confirmation screen. Click [Submit] to update
the setting.
[Adjust clock] page
Click [Detailed set up] → [Adjust clock].
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
[Time Zone]
Select the time zone.
2
[Set time zone]
Updates the time zone setting.
3
[NTP SYNCHRONIZATION]
Set to [ON] when setting the date and time automatically.
4
[NTP SERVER NAME]
Enter the IP address or server name of the NTP server when
you set to adjust the date and time manually.
(To enter the server name, the DNS server needs to be set up.)
5
[Date]
Enter the date to change when [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] is
set to [OFF].
6
[Time]
Enter the time to change when [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] is
set to [OFF].
7
[Set date and time]
Updates the date and time settings.
Note
ff The replacement of the battery inside the projector is required when the time goes out of alignment right after correcting the time. Consult
your dealer.
ENGLISH - 197
Chapter 5
Operations — Web control function
[Ping test] page
Check whether the network is connected to the E-mail server, POP server, DNS server, etc.
Click [Detailed set up] → [Ping test].
1
2
3
4
1
2
[Input IP address]
Enter the IP address of the server to be tested.
[Submit]
Executes the connection test.
3
Example of display when the connection has succeeded
4
Example of display when the connection has failed
[Certificate] page
To perform the HTTPS communication or use the control system or application software of Crestron Electronics,
Inc., it is necessary to install the certificate for authentication into the projector.
Click [Detailed set up] → [Certificate].
1
2
Choose File No file chosen
Choose File No file chosen
1
[CRT Key generate]
Generates the CRT (Certificate) key.
The page to generate the CRT key is displayed by clicking
[Execute].
For details, refer to “Generating the CRT key” (x page 199).
2
[Self-signed Certificate]
[Generate]:
Generates the self-signed certificate by the projector.
The page to generate the self-signed certificate is displayed by
clicking [Execute].
For details, refer to “Generating the self-signed certificate”
(x page 203).
[Information]:
Displays the status of the self-signed certificate.
ff [Not generated]: Self-signed certificate is not generated.
ff [(host name)]: Self-signed certificate is generated and valid.
The host name registered in the self-signed certificate is
displayed.
ff [Invalid (Reason: Server Certificate installed)]: The server
certificate is valid, so the generated self-signed certificate is
invalid.
Information of the generated self-signed certificate is displayed
by clicking [Confirm].
The generated self-signed certificate can be deleted by clicking
[Delete].
For details, refer to “Confirming the information of the selfsigned certificate” (x page 203).
3
3
[Server Certificate]
[Generate Certificate Signing Request]:
Generates signing request (Certificate Signing Request).
The page to generate the signing request is displayed by
clicking [Execute].
For details, refer to “Generating the signing request”
(x page 200).
[Server Certificate install]/[Intermediate Certificate install]:
Installs the server certificate and the intermediate certificate.
The certificate is installed into the projector by specifying the
certificate file and clicking [Execute].
For details, refer to “Installing the certificate” (x page 201).
[Information]:
Displays the status of the server certificate.
ff [Invalid]: The server certificate is not installed. Or, the
current CRT key is different from the CRT key used for
requesting the installed server certificate.
ff [(host name)]: The server certificate is installed and
valid. The host name registered in the server certificate is
displayed.
ff [Expired]: Valid period of the server certificate has expired.
The host name registered in the server certificate is displayed
when the server certificate is installed and valid.
Information of the installed server certificate is displayed by
clicking [Confirm].
The installed server certificate and the intermediate certificate
can be deleted by clicking [Delete].
For details, refer to “Confirming the information of the server
certificate” (x page 202)
Note
ff Installation operation of the certificate may not be possible depending on the computer or web browser in use.
198 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5
Operations — Web control function
rrFlow for setting
The flow for setting differs depending on which certificate is to be used as the security certificate, either the server
certificate or the self-signed certificate.
Generate the CRT key.
When using the server certificate
When using the self-signed certificate
Generate the signing request.
Acquire the server certificate.
Generate the self-signed certificate.
Install the certificate.
Select the connection method.
Set the HTTPS port number.
Click [Set].
Note
ff When using the server certificate, the procedure from application to the certification organization to issuing of the server certificate is
required to be performed between the customer and the certification organization. For the application method, etc., contact the certification
organization.
Generating the CRT key
Generate the CRT key used for encryption with the RSA (Rivest-Shamir-Adleman cryptosystem) public key
encryption method. CRT key is a type of the private key.
1)
Click [Certificate] → [CRT Key generate] → [Execute].
ffThe page to generate the CRT key is displayed.
2)
Click [Execute].
ffWhen generating the CRT key for the first time, the following message is displayed after the CRT is
generated. Proceed to Step 4).
“CRT key - Generated”
ffWhen generating the CRT key for the second time or later, the following message is displayed.
“The CRT key will be generated. In updating the CRT key, the Server Certificate corresponds to the current
CRT key will become unavailable. Continue?”
3)
Click [OK].
ffCRT key will be generated and the following message will be displayed.
“CRT key - Generated”
ENGLISH - 199
Chapter 5
4)
Operations — Web control function
Click [OK].
ffClicking [Certificate] → [CRT Key generate] → [Execute] again can confirm the key length and generation
date and time of the current CRT key with the [RSA key size] and [Last modified] of [Current CRT key] at
the upper row of the CRT key generation page.
Note
ff [Not generated] displayed in [Last modified] indicates that the CRT has not been generated.
ff [RSA key size] is fixed to [2048bit]. The server certificate may not be issued depending on the certification organization to apply if the key
length is 2048-bit.
ff Generation of the CRT key may take up to approximately two minutes.
ff When the CRT key is updated, apply for the server certificate or generate the self-signed certificate again using that CRT key. A certificate
linked to the CRT key is required.
ff Previously generated CRT key information is saved even if the CRT key is updated. To return to the previous CRT key, refer to “Cancelling
the update of the CRT key” (x page 200).
Cancelling the update of the CRT key
It is possible to return to the previously generated CRT key only once even if the CRT key is updated.
1)
Click [Certificate] → [CRT Key generate] → [Execute].
ffThe page to generate the CRT key is displayed.
2)
Click [History].
ffFollowing contents are displayed.
3)
Confirm [RSA key size] and [Last modified] of the CRT key to restore.
4)
Click [Apply].
ffFollowing confirmation message is displayed.
“The previous CRT key will be loaded. Please generate Self-signed Certificate or install the Server
Certificate corresponds to the CRT key. Continue?”
5)
Click [OK].
ffPreviously generated CRT key is reflected as the current CRT key.
Note
ff When returned to the previously generated CRT key, a certificate linked to that CRT key is required.
Generating the signing request
When using the server certificate issued by the certification organization as a security certificate, generate a
signing request necessary for application of issuing to the certification organization. Generate the signing request
after generating the CRT key.
1)
Click [Certificate] → [Generate Certificate Signing Request] → [Execute].
ffThe page to generate the signing request is displayed.
200 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5
2)
Operations — Web control function
Enter the information required for application.
ffThe details of each item are as follows. Enter the information following the requirement of the certification
organization to apply.
Item
[Common Name]
[Country]
[State]
[Locality]
[Organization]
[Organization Unit]
[CRT key]
Character length
limit
Details
Enter the projector name or the IP address set in the projector.
64 characters
Enter the country code defined in ISO 3166-1 alpha-2 (two upper case alphabets).
―
Enter the State, etc.
128 characters
Enter the locality.
128 characters
Enter the organization name.
64 characters
Enter the organization unit name.
64 characters
[RSA key size]
The key length of the current CRT key is displayed.
―
[Last modified]
The generation date and time of the current CRT key is displayed.
―
3)
Click [OK].
ffThe signing request file is generated. Enter a file name and save the file in the desired folder.
4)
Enter a file name and click [Save].
ffThe file for signing request is saved in the specified folder.
Note
ff The characters that can be input are as follows.
gg Single-byte numbers: 0 to 9
gg Single-byte alphabets: A to Z, a to z
gg Single-byte symbols: - . _ , + / ( )
ff The signing request generated by the projector is PEM format (file extension: pem).
ff Apply issuing of the server certificate to the certification organization using the saved signing request file (PEM format).
Installing the certificate
Install the server certificate and the intermediate certificate issued by the certification organization into the
projector.
1)
Click [Certificate] → [Server Certificate install] → [Choose File].
ffA dialog to select the file is displayed.
2)
Select the server certificate file and click [Open].
ffIf the intermediate certificate is issued from the certification organization together with the server certificate,
proceed to Step 3).
ffIf only the server certificate is issued from the certification organization, proceed to Step 5).
3)
Click [Choose File] in [Intermediate Certificate install].
ffA dialog to select the file is displayed.
4)
Select the intermediate certificate file and click [Open].
5)
Click [Execute].
ffThe server certificate and the intermediate certificate are installed into the projector.
6)
Click [OK].
Note
ff To confirm the information of the installed server certificate, refer to “Confirming the information of the server certificate” (x page 202).
ENGLISH - 201
Chapter 5
Operations — Web control function
Confirming the information of the server certificate
Confirm the information of the server certificate installed in the projector.
1)
Click [Certificate] → [Server Certificate] → [Information] → [Confirm].
ffThe information of the installed server certificate is displayed. The details of each item are as follows.
Item
[Common Name]
[Country]
[State]
[Locality]
[Organization]
[Organization Unit]
Details
The projector name or the IP address is displayed.
The country code defined in ISO 3166-1 alpha-2 (two upper case alphabets) is displayed.
The State, etc. is displayed.
The locality is displayed.
The organization name is displayed.
The organization unit name is not displayed. It is displayed as an asterisk.
[Not Before]
Displays the date and time that the self-signed certificate was issued.
[Not After]
Displays the date and time that the self-signed certificate will expire.
[CRT key]
[RSA key size]
The key length of the CRT key is displayed.
[Last modified]
The generation date and time of the CRT key is displayed.
Note
ff The installed server certificate and the intermediate certificate can be deleted by clicking [Certificate] → [Server Certificate] → [Delete].
However, it cannot be deleted when [HTTPS set up] → [Connection] is set to [HTTPS]. Delete it after changing the setting to perform the
HTTP communication.
To delete the server certificate within the valid period, confirm that the certificate file used for installing is available on hand. It will be
necessary when installing the server certificate again.
Generating the self-signed certificate
When the server certificate issued by the certification organization is not to be used as the security certificate, it
is possible to use the self-signed certificate generated in the projector. Generate the self-signed certificate after
generating the CRT key.
1)
Click [Certificate] → [Self-signed Certificate] → [Generate] → [Execute].
ffThe page to generate the self-signed certificate is displayed.
2)
Enter the information required for generation.
ffThe details of each item are as follows.
Item
[Common Name]
[Country]
[State]
[Locality]
[Organization]
[Organization Unit]
[CRT key]
3)
Details
Enter the projector name or the IP address set in the projector.
Enter the country code defined in ISO 3166-1 alpha-2 (two upper case alphabets).
64 characters
―
Enter the State, etc.
128 characters
Enter the locality.
128 characters
Enter the organization name.
64 characters
Enter the organization unit name.
64 characters
[RSA key size]
The key length of the current CRT key is displayed.
―
[Last modified]
The generation date and time of the current CRT key is displayed.
―
Click [OK].
ffSelf-signed certificate is generated.
Note
ff The characters that can be input are as follows.
gg Single-byte numbers: 0 to 9
gg Single-byte alphabets: A to Z, a to z
gg Single-byte symbols: - . _ , + / ( )
202 - ENGLISH
Character length
limit
Chapter 5
Operations — Web control function
Confirming the information of the self-signed certificate
Confirm the information of the self-signed certificate generated by the projector.
1)
Click [Certificate] → [Self-signed Certificate] → [Information] → [Confirm].
ffThe information of the generated self-signed certificate is displayed. The details of each item are as follows.
Item
[Common Name]
[Country]
[State]
[Locality]
[Organization]
[Organization Unit]
[Not Before]
[Not After]
[CRT key]
Details
The projector name or the IP address is displayed.
The country code defined in ISO 3166-1 alpha-2 (two upper case alphabets) is displayed.
The State, etc. is displayed.
The locality is displayed.
The organization name is displayed.
The organization unit name is displayed.
Displays the date and time that the self-signed certificate was issued.
Displays the date and time that the self-signed certificate will expire (local time corresponding to 23:59,
December 31, 2035 in Greenwich Mean Time).
[RSA key size]
The key length of the CRT key is displayed.
[Last modified]
The generation date and time of the CRT key is displayed.
Note
ff The generated self-signed certificate can be deleted by clicking [Certificate] → [Self-signed Certificate] → [Delete].
However, it cannot be deleted when [HTTPS set up] → [Connection] is set to [HTTPS]. Delete it after changing the setting to perform the
HTTP communication.
[HTTPS set up] page
Set this page when HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure) communication encrypted with the SSL/TLS
protocol is to be performed between the computer and the projector while the web control function is used.
Click [Detailed set up] → [HTTPS set up].
To perform the HTTPS communication, it is necessary to install the certificate for authentication into the projector
in advance. For details of installing the certificate, refer to “[Certificate] page” (x page 198).
1
2
3
1
[Connection]
Sets the connection method to the projector.
ff [HTTP]: Uses the HTTP communication. (Factory default
setting)
ff [HTTPS]: Uses the HTTPS communication.
2
[HTTPS port]
Sets the port number to be used with the HTTPS
communication.
Allowed port number: 1 to 65535
Factory default setting: 443
3
[Set]
Enables the setting.
Note
ff When the [Connection] setting is changed from [HTTPS] to [HTTP], the screen may not be displayed when the operation or update of the
web control screen is performed. In such case, delete the cache of the web browser.
ENGLISH - 203
Chapter 5
Operations — Web control function
[Crestron Connected] page
Set the information required for connecting the control system of Crestron Electronics, Inc. to the projector, and
the information to monitor/control the projector using the control system of Crestron Electronics, Inc.
When the [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [Crestron Connected(TM)] is set to [OFF], the
[Crestron Connected] page cannot be set.
Click [Detailed set up] → [Crestron Connected].
rr[Control System]
Configure the setting required for connecting the control system to the projector as a client.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
[Use TLS]
Sets the secure communication.
[Disable]:
Performs the unsecured communication.
[Enable]:
Performs the secure communication using TLS (Transport
Layer Security).
6
[Secure Port]
Sets the port number to be used with the secure
communication.
Default value: 41796
7
[Authentication]
Select the authentication with the connection destination used
with the secure communication.
[Disable]:
Does not perform the connection authentication.
[Enable]:
Performs the connection authentication.
8
[User Name]
Enter the user name used for the connection authentication.
(Up to 20 half-width characters)
[Password]
Enter the password used for the connection authentication. (Up
to 20 half-width characters)
2
[IP Address / Hostname]
Enter the IP address or the host name of the connection
destination.
3
[IP ID]
Sets the IP ID used to determine the projector on the network.
(A number up to four digits)
Default value: 3
4
[Room ID]
Sets the Room ID used to determine the projector on the
network. (Up to 32 half-width characters)
9
5
[Non Secure Port]
Sets the port number to be used with the unsecured
communication.
Default value: 41794
10 [Submit]
Updates the [Control System] setting.
Note
ff When [Use TLS] is set to [Disable], [Authentication] is fixed to [Disable], and [Secure Port] cannot be set.
204 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5
Operations — Web control function
rr[Server]
Configure the setting required to access the projector assigned to a server using the control system.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
[Use TLS]
Sets the secure communication.
[Disable]:
Performs the unsecured communication.
[Enable]:
Performs the secure communication using TLS (Transport
Layer Security).
5
[Authentication]
Select the authentication with the connection destination used
with the secure communication.
[Disable]:
Does not perform the connection authentication.
[Enable]:
Performs the connection authentication.
2
[IP ID]
Sets the IP ID used to determine the projector on the network.
(A number up to four digits)
6
[User Name]
Enter the user name used for the connection authentication.
(Up to 20 half-width characters)
3
[Non Secure Port]
Sets the port number to be used with the unsecured
communication.
Default value: 41794
7
[Password]
Enter the password used for the connection authentication. (Up
to 20 half-width characters)
4
[Secure Port]
Sets the port number to be used with the secure
communication.
Default value: 41796
8
[Crestron Fusion in the Cloud (FITC)]
Sets whether to use the Fusion server in the Cloud.
[Disable]:
Does not use the Fusion server in the Cloud.
[Enable]:
Uses the Fusion server in the Cloud.
9
[FITC URL]
Enter the URL of the Fusion server in the Cloud.
10 [Submit]
Updates the [Server] setting.
Note
ff [Use TLS] will be fixed to [Disable] if neither the server certificate nor the self-signed certificate is installed.
ff When [Use TLS] is set to [Disable], [Authentication] is fixed to [Disable], and [Secure Port] cannot be set.
ff When [Crestron Fusion in the Cloud (FITC)] is set to [Disable], [FITC URL] cannot be entered.
rr[Auto Discovery]
Set the standby process against the search protocol of the control system and the application software.
1
2
1
[Auto Discovery]
[Disable]:
Disables the standby process.
[Enable]:
Enables the standby process and enables the automatic
detection of the projector.
2
[Submit]
Updates the [Auto Discovery] setting
ENGLISH - 205
Chapter 5
Operations — Web control function
rr[XiO Cloud]
Configure the setting to manage the devices using the XiO Cloud.
1
2
1
[XiO Cloud]
[Disable]:
Disables the XiO Cloud function.
[Enable]:
Enables the XiO Cloud function.
2
[Submit]
Updates the [XiO Cloud] setting.
2
[Proxy Server Name]
Enter the proxy server name or the IPv4 address.
3
[Proxy Server Port No.]
Enter the port number of the proxy server.
4
[Submit]
Updates the [Proxy] setting.
rr[Proxy]
Configure the proxy server setting.
1
2
3
4
1
[Proxy]
[Disable]:
Does not use the proxy server.
[Enable]:
Uses a proxy server.
Note
ff [Proxy Server Name] does not support the IPv6 addresses.
206 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5
Operations — Web control function
[E-mail set up] page
Send an E-mail to preset E-mail addresses (up to two addresses) when a problem has occurred.
Click [Detailed set up] → [E-mail set up].
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
[ENABLE]
Select [Enable] to use the E-mail function.
2
[SMTP SERVER NAME]
Enter the IP address or the server name of the E-mail server
(SMTP). To enter the server name, the DNS server needs to be
set up.
3
[MAIL FROM]
Enter the E-mail address of the projector. (Up to 63 characters
in single byte)
4
[MEMO]
Enter information such as the location of the projector that
notifies the sender of the E-mail. (Up to 63 characters in single
byte)
5
[MINIMUM TIME]
Change the minimum interval for the temperature warning
E-mail. The default value is 60 minutes. In this case, another
E-mail will not be sent for 60 minutes after sending the
temperature warning E-mail even if it reaches the warning
temperature.
6
[INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]
Change the temperature setting for the temperature warning
mail. A temperature warning E-mail is sent when the
temperature exceeds this value.
7
8
7
8
9
7
[E-MAIL ADDRESS 1], [E-MAIL ADDRESS 2]
Enter the E-mail address to be sent. Leave [E-MAIL ADDRESS
2] blank when two E-mail addresses are not to be used.
8
Settings of the conditions to send E-mail
Select the conditions to send E-mail.
[MAIL CONTENTS]:
Select either [NORMAL] or [SIMPLE].
ff [NORMAL]: Select this item when sending detailed
information including the status of the projector.
ff [SIMPLE]: Select this item when sending minimal information
such as error information.
[ERROR]:
Send an E-mail when an error occurred in the self-diagnosis.
[INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]:
Send an E-mail when the intake air temperature has reached
the value set at the above field.
[PERIODIC REPORT]:
Place a check mark on this to send an E-mail periodically.
A mail will be sent on the day and time with the check mark.
9
[Submit]
Updates the settings and sends the details by E-mail.
ENGLISH - 207
Chapter 5
Operations — Web control function
[Authentication set up] page
Set the authentication items when POP authentication or SMTP authentication is necessary to send an E-mail.
Click [Detailed set up] → [Authentication set up].
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
[Auth]
Select the authentication method specified by your Internet
service provider.
2
[SMTP Auth]
Set when the SMTP authentication is selected.
3
[POP server name]
Enter the POP server name.
Allowed characters:
Alphanumerics (A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9)
Minus sign (-) period (.) colon (:)
4
5
[Password]
Enter the password for the POP server or the SMTP server.
6
[SMTP server port]
Enter the port number of the SMTP server.
(Normally 25)
7
[POP server port]
Enter the port number of the POP server.
(Normally 110)
8
[Submit]
Update the settings.
[User name]
Enter the user name for the POP server or the SMTP server.
Contents of E-mail sent
Example of the E-mail sent when E-mail is set
The following E-mail is sent when the E-mail settings have been established.
ffExample: When [MAIL CONTENTS] is set to [SIMPLE] in the [E-mail set up] page
=== Panasonic projector report(CONFIGURE) ===
Projector Type
: PT-MZ20K
Serial No
: 123456789012
----- E-mail setup data ----TEMPERATURE WARNING SETUP
MINIMUM TIME
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
at [ 60 ] minutes interval
Over [ 46 degC / 114 degF ]
ERROR
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
[ ON ]
[ ON ]
PERIODIC REPORT
Sunday
[ OFF ] Monday [ OFF ] Tuesday [ OFF ] Wednesday [ OFF ]
Thursday [ OFF ] Friday
[ OFF ] Saturday [ OFF ]
00:00
04:00
08:00
12:00
16:00
20:00
[
[
[
[
[
[
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
]
]
]
]
]
]
01:00
05:00
09:00
13:00
17:00
21:00
[
[
[
[
[
[
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
]
]
]
]
]
]
02:00
06:00
10:00
14:00
18:00
22:00
[
[
[
[
[
[
----- Wired network configuration (IPv4) ----DHCP Client
OFF
IP address
192.168.0.8
MAC address
12:34:56:78:90:12
----- Wired network configuration (IPv6) ----Auto Configuration
ON
Link Local Address
fe80::20b:97ff:fe41:e7e5
MAC address
00:0B:97:41:E7:E5
----- Error information ----SELF TEST
: NO ERRORS
Mon Jan 01 12:34:56 20XX
----- Memo -----
208 - ENGLISH
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
]
]
]
]
]
]
03:00
07:00
11:00
15:00
19:00
23:00
[
[
[
[
[
[
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
]
]
]
]
]
]
Chapter 5
Operations — Web control function
Example of the E-mail sent for an error
The following E-mail is sent when an error has occurred.
ffExample: When [MAIL CONTENTS] is set to [SIMPLE] in the [E-mail set up] page
=== Panasonic projector report(ERROR) ===
Projector Type
: PT-MZ20K
Serial No
: 123456789012
----- Wired network configuration (IPv4) ----DHCP Client
OFF
IP address
192.168.0.8
MAC address
12:34:56:78:90:12
----- Wired network configuration (IPv6) ----Auto Configuration
ON
Link Local Address
fe80::20b:97ff:fe41:e7e5
MAC address
00:0B:97:41:E7:E5
----- Error information ----SELF TEST
: WARNING
U081 Low AC voltage warning (below 90V)
Mon Jan 01 12:34:56 20XX
----- Memo -----
[User function set up] page
Set the function limitation for the standard user account.
Click [Detailed set up] → [User function set up].
1
2
1
[Remote preview lite]
To disable the remote preview lite function for the standard user
account, set [Disable].
2
[Submit]
Updates the setting.
[Status notification] page
Set the push notification function. A push notification of updated information is sent to the application software
linked to the projector, such as the “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”, when there is a change in status, such
as occurrence of an error in the projector.
Click [Detailed set up] → [Status notification].
1
2
3
4
1
[Error alert notification]
Set to [Enable] to use the push notification function.
3
[Notification port]
Enter the port number of the notification destination.
2
[Notification IP address]
Enter the IPv4 address of the notification destination.
4
[Submit]
Updates the setting.
ENGLISH - 209
Chapter 5
Operations — Web control function
[Network security] page
Perform the setting to protect the projector from an external attack or abuse via LAN.
Click [Detailed set up] → [Network security].
1
2
1
[COMMAND PROTECT]
Performs the setting regarding connection authentication when
using the command control function.
[DISABLE]:
Connects to the projector in non-protect mode.
Connection authentication is not performed.
[ENABLE]:
Connects to the projector in protect mode.
Connection authentication is performed using the user name
and password of the administrator account.
2
[Submit]
Updates the setting.
The confirmation screen is displayed when [Submit] is clicked
with [DISABLE] selected for [COMMAND PROTECT]. Update
of the setting is performed by clicking [OK] in the confirmation
screen.
Note
ff When [COMMAND PROTECT] is set to [DISABLE], the projector becomes vulnerable against a threat on the network because connection
authentication will not be performed. Use this function by understanding the risk.
ff For details on how to use the command control function, refer to "Control commands via LAN". (x page 256)
[Set up password]
[Set up password] page (when accessed by administrator account)
Click [Set up password].
1
2
3
4
1
[Administrator]
Select this item when changing the setting of the administrator
account.
3
[PJLink]
Select this item when changing the setting of the PJLink
account.
2
[User]
Select this item when changing the setting of the standard user
account.
4
[Next]
Displays the screen to change the setting of the password.
210 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5
Operations — Web control function
[Administrator]
Set the user name and password of the administrator account.
1
2
3
4
1
[Account]
Displays the account to change.
2
[Current]
[User name]:
Enter the current user name.
[Password]:
Enter the current password.
3
[New]
[User name]:
Enter the desired new user name. (Up to 16 characters in single
byte)
[Password]:
Enter the desired new password. (Up to 16 characters in single
byte)
[Password(Retype)]:
Enter the desired new password again.
4
[Change]
Determines the change of password.
Note
ff To change the setting of the administrator account, entry of [User name] and [Password] in [Current] is required.
ff When the projector is already registered in application software (such as “Multi Monitoring & Control Software” and "Smart Projector
Control") which uses the communication control via LAN, communication with the projector will become impossible if the user name or
password for [Administrator] is changed. If the user name or password for [Administrator] is changed, update the registration information of
the application software in use.
[User]
1
2
3
1
[Account]
Displays the account to change.
2
[New]
[User name]:
Enter the desired new user name. (Up to 16 characters in single
byte)
[Password]:
Enter the desired new password. (Up to 16 characters in single
byte)
[Password(Retype)]:
Enter the desired new password again.
3
[Change]
Determines the change of password.
ENGLISH - 211
Chapter 5
Operations — Web control function
[PJLink]
Change the user name and password of the PJLink account.
1
2
3
1
[Account]
Displays the account to change.
2
[New]
[Password]:
Enter the desired new password. (Up to 32 half-width
characters)
3
[Change]
Determines the change of password.
[Set up password] page (when accessed by standard user account)
Change the user name and password of the standard user account.
1
2
3
4
1
[Old Password]
Enter the current password.
3
[Retype]
Enter the desired new password again.
2
[New Password]
Enter the desired new password. (Up to 16 characters in single
byte)
4
[Change]
Determines the change of password.
License download page
1
1
[Download]
The license for the open source software used in the projector
is downloaded by clicking this item. Specify the destination to
save and download the license.
Note
ff Provided license is a text file, and it is saved in the firmware of the projector in zip format compressed file.
File name: License.zip
212 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5
Operations — Using the information monitor function
Using the information monitor function
Status of the projector can be checked in the information monitor on the control panel.
Screen mode
Information monitor is categorized into following four modes.
Hide mode
This is one of the screen modes in normal status, and is a mode to be selected when not displaying
information on the screen during no operation.
Set the menu operation mode → [SETUP] menu → [INFO MONITOR] → [DEFAULT] to [OFF].
USER VIEW mode
This is one of the screen modes in normal status, and the mode to constantly display the basic information
of the projector during no operation.
Set the menu operation mode → [SETUP] menu → [INFO MONITOR] → [DEFAULT] to [USER VIEW].
ff The information to display can be set in the menu operation mode → [SETUP] menu → [INFO
MONITOR].
ff Up to four information can be displayed at once. The screen will switch approximately every two seconds
if five or more information is selected to display.
Menu operation mode
This is the screen mode to perform the operation of the information monitor. Status of the projector can also
be checked.
By pressing the <INFO> button on the control panel during the hide mode/USER VIEW mode, the
information monitor will transfer to the menu operation mode and the top menu is displayed.
Error notification mode
The error/warning symbol is automatically displayed when an error or warning has occurred in the
projector. (x page 224)
Note
ff If there is no error or warning in the projector, the information monitor will go into either the hide mode/USER VIEW mode when the main
power of the projector is turned on and the projector goes into the standby status.
Top menu
By pressing the <INFO> button on the control panel while the information monitor is in the hide mode/USER VIEW
mode, the information monitor will transfer to the menu operation mode and the top menu is displayed.
There are following three items in the top menu.
Top menu item
[USER VIEW]
Overview
Page
Displays the basic information of the projector.
214
[SETUP]
Sets the projector ID, the information monitor setting, and the network setting in the
sub-menu.
215
[STATUS]
Displays the status of the projector.
221
Note
ff Information can be displayed or the settings can be configured even if the projector is in the standby status.
Sub-menu
Press as to select [SETUP] in the top menu, and press the <ENTER> button to display the sub-menu.
Sub-menu item
[PROJECTOR]
[INFO MONITOR]
[NETWORK]
Overview
Factory default
Page
Performs the setting and operation regarding the projector.
―
215
Sets the information monitor.
―
216
Configures the settings to use the network function.
―
218
Note
ff Except for some of the input operation in the standby status, operation with the remote control is not possible.
ENGLISH - 213
Chapter 5
Operations — Using the information monitor function
Basic operation procedure in the menu operation mode
1)
Press the <INFO> button on the control panel.
ffThe top menu screen is displayed.
USER VIEW
SETUP
STATUS
2)
Press as to select a top menu item.
ffThe selected item is displayed inverted.
USER VIEW
SETUP
STATUS
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe sub-menu for the selected top menu is displayed.
PROJECTOR
INFO MONITOR
NETWORK
4)
Press as to select a sub-menu item, and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe setting screen is displayed.
5)
Press qw to change the setting.
Note
ff Pressing the <INFO> button during the menu operation mode returns to the previous menu screen.
ff Information monitor will transfer to the hide mode/USER VIEW mode automatically if there is no operation for approximately 60 seconds
during the menu operation mode. Pressing the <INFO> button on the control panel returns to the original menu operation mode display.
[USER VIEW] menu
Set the information monitor to the menu operation mode by pressing the <INFO> button on the control panel.
For the operation of the menu, refer to “Basic operation procedure in the menu operation mode” (x page 214).
[USER VIEW]
Display the basic information of the projector.
1)
Press as to select [USER VIEW].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe information is displayed.
3)
Press as to switch the pages.
ffThe page will change each time you press the button.
[INPUT]
Currently selected input
[SIGNAL NAME]
Input signal name
[AC VOLTAGE]
Input supply voltage
[INTAKE AIR TEMP.]
[EXHAUST AIR TEMP.]
214 - ENGLISH
Intake air temperature of the projector
Exhaust air temperature of the projector
Chapter 5
[SHUTTER]
[FREEZE]
[OSD]
[IP ADDRESS(WIRED)]
Operations — Using the information monitor function
Status of the shutter ([CLOSE]: Shutter function enabled; [OPEN]: Shutter function disabled)
Status of the freeze function ([ON]: Paused; [OFF]: Cleared)
Status of the on-screen display function ([ON]: Display; [OFF]: Hide)
IP address of the wired LAN*1
*1 For IPv6 address, “(IPv6)” is displayed instead of the IP address.
[SETUP] menu
Set the information monitor to the menu operation mode by pressing the <INFO> button on the control panel.
For the operation of the menu, refer to “Basic operation procedure in the menu operation mode” (x page 214).
[PROJECTOR]
Perform the setting and operation regarding the projector.
rr[PROJECTOR ID]
The projector has an ID number setting function that can be used when multiple projectors are used side by side
to enable simultaneous control or individual control via a single remote control.
1)
Press as to select [SETUP].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe sub-menu item is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [PROJECTOR].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe detailed item is displayed.
5)
Press as to select [PROJECTOR ID].
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffSetting in [PROJECTOR ID] is displayed.
7)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffSetting can be changed.
8)
Press qw to switch the setting item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[ALL]
Select this item when controlling projectors without specifying an ID number.
[1] - [64]
Select this item when specifying an ID number to control individual projector.
Note
ff This setting item is common with the following menu item in the on-screen menu.
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTOR ID]
ff To specify an ID number for individual control, the ID number of a remote control must match the ID number of the projector.
ff When the ID number is set to [ALL], the projector will operate regardless of the ID number specified during remote control or computer
control.
ff If multiple projectors are set up side by side with IDs set to [ALL], they cannot be controlled separately from the projectors with other ID
numbers.
ff Refer to “Setting ID number of the remote control” (x page 76) for how to set the ID number on the remote control.
rr[FIRMWARE UPDATE]
Rewriting of the firmware is possible by using the USB memory.
For details of operation, refer to “Updating the firmware using the USB memory” (x page 236).
rr[SAVE LOG]
This function is used by a service person.
ENGLISH - 215
Chapter 5
Operations — Using the information monitor function
[INFO MONITOR]
Set the information monitor.
rrSetting the display during normal status
Display/hide the information monitor during no operation.
1)
Press as to select [SETUP].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe sub-menu item is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [INFO MONITOR].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe detailed setting item is displayed.
5)
Press as to select [DEFAULT].
ffThe current setting is displayed.
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffSetting can be changed.
7)
Press qw to switch the setting item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[USER VIEW]
[OFF]
Sets the screen mode during no operation to the USER VIEW mode.
Displays the items set in the menu operation mode → [SETUP] menu → [INFO MONITOR]. For
details, refer to “Setting the information to display” (x page 216).
Sets the screen mode during no operation to the hide mode.
Does not display the information.
Note
ff This setting item is common with the following menu item in the on-screen menu.
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INFO MONITOR SETTING] → [DEFAULT]
ff Even if [DEFAULT] is set to [OFF], the content of an error or a warning is automatically displayed when it occurs.
rrSetting the information to display
Set the items to display during the USER VIEW mode.
1)
Press as to select [SETUP].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe sub-menu item is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [INFO MONITOR].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe detailed setting item is displayed.
5)
Press as to select an item to change setting.
ffThe current setting is displayed.
Item
[INPUT]
Details
Factory default
Currently selected input
[ON]
[SIGNAL NAME]
Input signal name
[ON]
[AC VOLTAGE]
Input supply voltage
[ON]
Intake air temperature of the projector
[ON]
Exhaust air temperature of the projector
[OFF]
Status of the shutter ([CLOSE]: Shutter function enabled; [OPEN]: Shutter
function disabled)
[OFF]
Status of the freeze function ([ON]: Paused; [OFF]: Cleared)
[OFF]
[INTAKE AIR TEMP.]
[EXHAUST AIR TEMP.]
[SHUTTER]
[FREEZE]
[OSD]
[IP ADDRESS(WIRED)]
216 - ENGLISH
Status of the on-screen display function ([ON]: Display; [OFF]: Hide)
[OFF]
IP address of the wired LAN
[OFF]
Chapter 5
Operations — Using the information monitor function
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffSetting can be changed.
7)
Press qw to switch the setting.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[ON]
Displays the items during the USER VIEW mode.
[OFF]
Does not display the items during the USER VIEW mode.
ffRepeat Steps 5) to 7) until the desired display items are set.
Note
ff This setting item is common with the following menu item in the on-screen menu.
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INFO MONITOR SETTING] → [USER VIEW]
rrSetting the direction to display
Set the direction of the text to display in the information monitor.
1)
Press as to select [SETUP].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe sub-menu item is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [INFO MONITOR].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe detailed setting item is displayed.
5)
Press as to select [DIRECTION].
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffSetting can be changed.
7)
Press qw to switch the setting.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[AUTO]
Detects the orientation of the projector by the built-in angle sensor, and automatically sets the
direction of the text displayed in the information monitor. Set [AUTO] normally.
[NORMAL]
Select this item when installing the projector on a desk, etc.
[FLIPPED]
Select this item when installing the projector with the top surface of the projector facing down such as
ceiling attachment.
Displays the text inverted upside down from when [NORMAL] is set.
Note
ff This setting item is common with the following menu item in the on-screen menu.
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INFO MONITOR SETTING] → [DIRECTION]
rrSetting the brightness of the information monitor
Set the brightness of the information monitor.
1)
Press as to select [SETUP].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe sub-menu item is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [INFO MONITOR].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe detailed setting item is displayed.
5)
Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS].
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffSetting can be changed.
7)
Press qw to adjust the level.
ENGLISH - 217
Chapter 5
Operations — Using the information monitor function
Operation
Adjustment
Press w.
The information monitor becomes bright.
Press q.
The information monitor becomes dark.
Note
ff [BRIGHTNESS] is adjusted in increments of 10.
ff This setting item is common with the following menu item in the on-screen menu.
gg The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INFO MONITOR SETTING] → [BRIGHTNESS]
[NETWORK]
Configure the settings to use the network function.
rrSetting the wired LAN IP version
1)
Press as to select [SETUP].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe sub-menu item is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [NETWORK].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe network selection item is displayed.
5)
Press as to select [WIRED LAN].
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe IP setting item is displayed.
7)
Press as to select [IP VERSION].
8)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe current setting is displayed.
9)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffSetting can be changed.
10) Press qw to switch the setting.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[IPv4]
Uses only the “IPv4” protocol.
[IPv6]
Uses only the “IPv6” protocol.
[IPv4 & IPv6]
Both the “IPv4” and the “IPv6” protocols can be used.
Note
ff This setting item is common with the following menu item in the on-screen menu.
gg The [NETWORK] menu → [WIRED LAN] → [IP VERSION]
rrSetting the acquisition method of the wired LAN IPv4 address
1)
Press as to select [SETUP].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe sub-menu item is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [NETWORK].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe network selection item is displayed.
5)
Press as to select [WIRED LAN].
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe IP setting item is displayed.
218 - ENGLISH
Range of adjustment
30 % - 100 %
(Factory default setting: 100 %)
Chapter 5
Operations — Using the information monitor function
7)
Press as to select [IPv4].
8)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe detailed setting item is displayed.
9)
Press as to select [DHCP].
ffThe current setting is displayed.
10) Press the <ENTER> button.
ffSetting can be changed.
11) Press qw to switch the setting item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[ON]
Select this item when using the DHCP server that exists in the network to which the projector is to be
connected.
IPv4 address is automatically acquired.
[OFF]
Select this item when setting the IPv4 address manually.
Set [IP ADDRESS], [SUBNET MASK], and [DEFAULT GATEWAY].
Note
ff This setting item is common with the following menu item in the on-screen menu.
gg The [NETWORK] menu → [WIRED LAN] → [IPv4 SETTINGS] → [DHCP]
rrSetting the wired LAN IPv4 address
Set the IP address, the subnet mask, and the default gateway if a DHCP is not used.
1)
Press as to select [SETUP].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe sub-menu item is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [NETWORK].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe network selection item is displayed.
5)
Press as to select [WIRED LAN].
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe IP setting item is displayed.
7)
Press as to select [IPv4].
8)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe detailed setting item is displayed.
9)
Press as to select [IP ADDRESS], [SUBNET MASK], or [DEFAULT GATEWAY].
ffThe current setting is displayed.
10) Press the <ENTER> button.
ffSetting can be changed.
11) Press asqw to enter the address.
ffPress qw to select the number to change, and press as to change the number.
12) Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe setting is reflected.
Note
ff This setting item is common with the following menu item in the on-screen menu.
gg The [NETWORK] menu → [WIRED LAN] → [IPv4 SETTINGS] → [IP ADDRESS] / [SUBNET MASK] / [DEFAULT GATEWAY]
ff The number can be entered with the number (<0> - <9>) buttons on the remote control when the projector is in the standby status.
ENGLISH - 219
Chapter 5
Operations — Using the information monitor function
rrSetting the acquisition method of the wired LAN IPv6 address
1)
Press as to select [SETUP].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe sub-menu item is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [NETWORK].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe network selection item is displayed.
5)
Press as to select [WIRED LAN].
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe IP setting item is displayed.
7)
Press as to select [IPv6].
8)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe detailed setting item is displayed.
9)
Press as to select [AUTO CONFIGURATION].
ffThe current setting is displayed.
10) Press the <ENTER> button.
ffSetting can be changed.
11) Press qw to switch the setting.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[ON]
Select this item when assigning the IPv6 address automatically.
Set [TEMPORARY ADDRESS].
[OFF]
Select this item when setting the IPv6 address manually.
Note
ff When setting [AUTO CONFIGURATION] to [OFF], set [IP ADDRESS], [PREFIX LENGTH], and [DEFAULT GATEWAY] for IPv6 in the
on-screen menu. Or, set [IP ADDRESS], [PREFIX LENGTH], and [DEFAULT GATEWAY] for IPv6 in the web control screen.
ff This setting item is common with the following menu item in the on-screen menu.
gg The [NETWORK] menu → [WIRED LAN] → [IPv6 SETTINGS] → [AUTO CONFIGURATION]
rrSetting the temporary IPv6 address of wired LAN
1)
Press as to select [SETUP].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe sub-menu item is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [NETWORK].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe network selection item is displayed.
5)
Press as to select [WIRED LAN].
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe IP setting item is displayed.
7)
Press as to select [IPv6].
8)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe detailed setting item is displayed.
9)
Press as to select [TEMPORARY ADDRESS].
ffThe current setting is displayed.
220 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5
Operations — Using the information monitor function
10) Press the <ENTER> button.
ffSetting can be changed.
11) Press qw to switch the setting.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[ON]
Select this item when the temporary IPv6 address is used.
[OFF]
Select this item when the temporary IPv6 address is not used.
Note
ff This setting item is common with the following menu item in the on-screen menu.
gg The [NETWORK] menu → [WIRED LAN] → [IPv6 SETTINGS] → [TEMPORARY ADDRESS]
rrConnecting via wireless LAN
Set the wireless LAN function.
ffTo use the wireless LAN function with the projector, it is necessary to attach the optional Wireless Module
(Model No.: AJ‑WM50 Series) to the <USB> terminal.
1)
Press as to select [SETUP].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe sub-menu item is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [NETWORK].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe network selection item is displayed.
5)
Press as to select [WIRELESS LAN].
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe current setting is displayed.
7)
Press the <ENTER> button again.
ffSetting can be changed.
8)
Press qw to switch to [ENABLE].
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[DISABLE]
Select this item when the wireless LAN is not to be used.
[ENABLE]
Select this item when the wireless LAN is to be used.
Note
ff [WIRELESS LAN] cannot be set if the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: AJ‑WM50 Series) is not installed in the <USB> terminal.
ff This setting item is common with the following menu item in the on-screen menu.
gg The [NETWORK] menu → [WIRELESS LAN]
[STATUS] menu
Display the status of the projector.
1)
Press as to select [STATUS].
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe sub-menu item is displayed.
3)
Press as to select an item.
Sub-menu item
[PROJECTOR]
[INFO MONITOR]
[NETWORK]
[VERSION]
Overview
Displays the information of the projector.
Displays the setting information of the information monitor.
Displays the setting information of network.
Displays the firmware version of the projector.
ENGLISH - 221
Chapter 5
Operations — Using the information monitor function
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe detailed item is displayed.
ffThe network selection item is displayed when [NETWORK] is selected in Step 3). Proceed to Step 6).
5)
Press as to switch the item.
ffThe display items will switch each time you press the button.
Sub-menu item
Detailed item
[PROJECTOR ID]
[PROJECTOR TYPE]
[SERIAL NUMBER]
[PROJECTOR RUNTIME]
[LIGHT RUNTIME]
[INTAKE AIR TEMP.]
[EXHAUST AIR TEMP.]
Displays the type of the projector.
Displays the serial number of the projector.
Displays the runtime of the projector.
Displays the runtime of the light source 1 and the light source 2.
Displays the intake air temperature status.
Displays the exhaust air temperature status.
[LIGHT1 TEMP.]
Displays the status of the light source 1 temperature of the
projector.
[LIGHT2 TEMP.]
Displays the status of the light source 2 temperature of the
projector.
[SELF TEST]
[PROJECTOR]
Details
Displays the ID number set to the projector.
[INPUT]
[SIGNAL NAME]
[ON SCREEN DISPLAY]
[SHUTTER]
[FREEZE]
[REMOTE1 STATUS]
[AC VOLTAGE]
Displays the self-diagnosis information.
Displays the detailed information when the <ENTER> button is
pressed while error/warning has occurred.
Displays the currently selected input.
Displays the input signal name.
Displays the status of on-screen display function. ([ON]: Display;
[OFF]: Hide)
Displays the status of the shutter. ([CLOSE]: Shutter function
enabled; [OPEN]: Shutter function disabled)
Displays the status of the freeze function. ([ON]: Paused;
[OFF]: Cleared)
Displays the control status of the REMOTE1.
Displays the input supply voltage.
[OPERATING MODE]
Displays the setting value of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →
[OPERATION SETTING] → [OPERATING MODE].
[LIGHT OUTPUT]
Displays the setting value of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →
[LIGHT OUTPUT].
[DEFAULT]
Displays the display setting of the information monitor during normal
status. ([USER VIEW]: Display; [OFF]: Hide)
[INPUT]
[SIGNAL NAME]
[AC VOLTAGE]
[INTAKE AIR TEMP.]
[EXHAUST AIR TEMP.]
[INFO MONITOR]
[SHUTTER]
Displays the display status of each item during the USER VIEW
mode. ([ON]: Display; [OFF]: Hide)
[FREEZE]
[OSD]
[IP ADDRESS(WIRED)]
[VERSION]
6)
[DIRECTION]
Displays the direction of the text to display in the information
monitor. ([AUTO]: Automatic detection; [NORMAL]: Floor mount;
[FLIPPED]: Inverted upside down)
[BRIGHTNESS]
Displays the setting value of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →
[INFO MONITOR SETTING] → [BRIGHTNESS].
[FIRMWARE VERSION]
Displays the firmware version of the projector.
Press as to switch the item.
ffThe display items will switch each time you press the button.
[PJ NAME]
[WIRED LAN]
[WIRELESS LAN]
222 - ENGLISH
Select this item when [PROJECTOR NAME] is to be displayed.
Select this item when the information of the wired LAN is to be displayed.
Select this item when the information of the wireless LAN is to be displayed.
Chapter 5
Operations — Using the information monitor function
7)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe detailed item is displayed when [PJ NAME] or [WIRELESS LAN] is selected in Step 6).
ffThe IP selection screen is displayed when [WIRED LAN] is selected in Step 6). Proceed to Step 9).
8)
Press as to switch the item.
ffThe display items will switch each time you press the button.
Network selection item
Detailed item
[PJ NAME]
[PROJECTOR NAME]
[SSID]
Displays the string of SSID.
[KEY]
Displays the connection key.
Displays/hides the connection key by pressing the <ENTER>
button.
[AUTHENTICATION]
[ENCRYPTION]
[WIRELESS LAN]
QR Code
[IP ADDRESS]
9)
Details
Displays the [PROJECTOR NAME].
Displays the user authentication method.
Displays the encryption method.
A QR code, which makes connection setting with a smartphone
easier, is displayed. To directly connect a smartphone to the
projector using the QR code, refer to “Using the QR code”
(x page 181).
Displays the [IP ADDRESS].
[SUBNET MASK]
Displays the [SUBNET MASK].
[MAC ADDRESS]
Displays the [MAC ADDRESS] of wireless LAN.
Press as to switch the item.
ffThe display items will switch each time you press the button.
[IP VERSION]
Select this item when [IP VERSION] is to be displayed.
[IPv4]
Select this item when the information of wired LAN (IPv4) is to be displayed.
[IPv6]
Select this item when the information of wired LAN (IPv6) is to be displayed.
10) Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe detailed item is displayed.
11) Press as to switch the item.
ffThe display items will switch each time you press the button.
IP selection item
Detailed item
[IP VERSION]
[IP VERSION]
Displays the [IP VERSION].
[DHCP]
Displays the [DHCP] setting.
[IP ADDRESS]
Displays the [IP ADDRESS].
[IPv4]
[SUBNET MASK]
[DEFAULT GATEWAY]
[MAC ADDRESS]
[IPv6]
Details
Displays the [SUBNET MASK].
Displays the [DEFAULT GATEWAY].
Displays the [MAC ADDRESS] of wired LAN.
[AUTO CONFIGURATION]
Displays the [AUTO CONFIGURATION] setting.
[LINK LOCAL ADDRESS]
Displays [LINK LOCAL ADDRESS] and [PREFIX LENGTH].
Press qw to switch display.
[STATEFULL ADDRESS]
Displays [STATEFUL ADDRESS] and [PREFIX LENGTH].
Press qw to switch display.
[STATELESS ADDRESS]
Displays [STATELESS ADDRESS] and [PREFIX LENGTH].
Press qw to switch display.
[TEMPORARY ADDRESS]
[IP ADDRESS]
[DEFAULT GATEWAY]
[MAC ADDRESS]
Displays [TEMPORARY ADDRESS] and [PREFIX LENGTH].
Press qw to switch display.
Displays the [IP ADDRESS].
Press qw to switch display.
Displays the [DEFAULT GATEWAY].
Press qw to switch display.
Displays the [MAC ADDRESS] of wired LAN.
ENGLISH - 223
Chapter 5
Operations — Using the information monitor function
Error notification mode
The error/warning symbol is displayed in the information monitor as a self-diagnosis information when an error or
warning has occurred in the projector.
For details on content of the error/warning symbols, refer to “[SELF TEST] indications” (x page 247).
Operation procedure when an error/warning has occurred
This section explains using the case when the intake air temperature warning is detected in the self-diagnosis as
an example.
U200
[TEMP.]
1)
Press the <INFO> button on the control panel.
ffThe screen of the menu operation mode → [STATUS] menu → [PROJECTOR] → [SELF TEST] is
displayed.
SELF TEST
WARNING
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe self-diagnosis information is displayed as the error/warning symbol.
U200
[TEMP.]
3)
Press w.
ffThe detailed information is displayed.
Intake air temp.
warning
ffPress the <INFO> button on the control panel to return to the [SELF TEST] screen in Step 2).
224 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5
Operations — Using the data cloning function
Using the data cloning function
Perform the operation of the data cloning function. Data such as the settings and adjustment values of the
projector can be copied to multiple projectors via LAN or using the USB memory.
rrData that cannot be copied
The following settings cannot be copied. Set these in each projector.
ffThe [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [UNIFORMITY]
ffThe [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTOR ID]
ffThe [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATE AND TIME] → [ADJUST CLOCK]
ffThe [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATA CLONING] → [LAN] → [WRITE PROTECT]
ffThe [SECURITY] menu → [SECURITY PASSWORD]
ffThe [SECURITY] menu → [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP]
ffThe [NETWORK] menu → [WIRED LAN]
ffThe [NETWORK] menu → [WIRELESS LAN]
ffThe [NETWORK] menu → [PROJECTOR NAME]
ffThe [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK SECURITY]
ffSecurity password
ffControl device password
ffPassword set in “[Set up password] page (when accessed by administrator account)” (x page 210) of the web
control screen
ffInformation of the CRT key and the self-signed certificate generated in “[Certificate] page” (x page 198) of the
web control screen, information of the installed server certificate
ff“[Network security] page” (x page 210) in the web control screen
ff“[E-mail set up] page” (x page 207) in the web control screen
ff“[Authentication set up] page” (x page 208) in the web control screen
ff“[Crestron Connected] page” (x page 204) in the web control screen
rrSupported device
ffCommercially available USB memory is supported.
The USB memory with a security function is not supported.
ffOnly the cards formatted in FAT16 or FAT32 can be used.
ffOnly the single partition structure is supported.
Note
ff The data cloning function will not operate when the models of the projectors are different. For example, data of PT‑MZ20K can be copied to
other PT‑MZ20K projectors, but it cannot be copied to PT‑MZ17K projectors. Data cloning is limited to the same model.
Copying the data to another projector via LAN
Make the following settings on the projector of the copy destination in advance. For details, refer to “Setting
[WRITE PROTECT]” (x page 226).
ffThe [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATA CLONING] → [LAN] → [WRITE PROTECT] → [OFF]
Note
ff To use the network function with the projector, it is necessary to set the password of the administrator account. (x page 169)
When a password is not set for the administrator account (when blank), the network function of the projector cannot be used. To copy the
data via LAN, set the passwords for the copy source projector and the copy destination projector.
1)
Connect all projectors to a switching hub using LAN cables. (x page 178)
2)
Turn on all the projectors.
3)
Press as to select [DATA CLONING] on the copy source projector.
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
5)
Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [DATA CLONING] screen is displayed.
6)
Press as to select [LAN].
ENGLISH - 225
Chapter 5
Operations — Using the data cloning function
7)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [LAN DATA CLONING] screen is displayed.
8)
Press as to select [SELECT PROJECTOR].
9)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe projectors in the same network are displayed as a list.
10) Press as to select the copy destination projector.
11) Press the <ENTER> button.
ffTo select multiple projectors, repeat Steps 10) to 11).
12) Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
13) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffCopy of the data between the projectors is started.
Once the copy is completed, results are displayed as a list in the [DATA CLONING] screen.
Meanings of the marks displayed in the list are as follows.
ggGreen: Data copy has succeeded.
ggRed: Data copy has failed. Confirm the connection of the LAN cable and power status of the copy
destination projector.
ffData is copied to the copy destination projector in the standby mode.
If the copy destination projector is in the projection mode, the data cloning request message is displayed,
and then the copy destination projector automatically shifts to the standby mode to start copy of data.
14) Turn on the copy destination projector.
ffThe copied content is reflected to the projector.
Note
ff The security password is the password set in the [SECURITY] menu → [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE].
Initial password of the factory default setting: awsqawsq
ff The light source indicator <LIGHT>, the temperature indicator <TEMP>, and the filter indicator <FILTER> of the destination projector blink
while copying the data. Confirm the blinking of the indicators stops, and then turn on the power supply.
Setting [WRITE PROTECT]
Set if the copy of data via LAN is permitted or not.
1)
Press as to select [DATA CLONING] on the copy destination projector.
2)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
3)
Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [DATA CLONING] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [LAN].
5)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [LAN DATA CLONING] screen is displayed.
6)
Press as to select [WRITE PROTECT].
7)
Press qw to switch the item.
ffThe items will switch each time you press the button.
[OFF]
Permits operations of [DATA CLONING] from another projector via LAN.
[ON]
Does not permit the operations of [DATA CLONING] from another projector via LAN.
ff Data copy will not be possible when [ON] is set. When it is not necessary to copy data, set [ON] so
that the data is not changed by mistake.
226 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5
Operations — Using the data cloning function
Note
ff The security password is the password set in the [SECURITY] menu → [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE].
Initial password of the factory default setting: awsqawsq
Copying the data to another projector using USB
Copying projector data to USB memory
1)
Insert the USB memory into the <USB> terminal.
2)
Press as to select [DATA CLONING].
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
4)
Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [DATA CLONING] screen is displayed.
5)
Press as to select [USB MEMORY].
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SELECT COPY TYPE] screen is displayed.
7)
Press as to select [PROJECTOR -> USB MEMORY].
8)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
9)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffCopying of the data to the USB memory is started.
Once the copying of data is completed, [Data copy finished.] is displayed.
10) Once the copying of the data is completed, disconnect the USB memory from the <USB> terminal.
Note
ff The security password is the password set in the [SECURITY] menu → [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE].
Initial password of the factory default setting: awsqawsq
ff For the USB memory that can be used with the projector and handling of the memory, refer to “Using the USB memory” (x page 73).
ff An error message is displayed when saving or reading data to/from the USB memory has failed.
Copying data in the USB memory to the projector
1)
Insert the USB memory into the <USB> terminal.
2)
Press as to select [DATA CLONING].
3)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
4)
Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [DATA CLONING] screen is displayed.
5)
Press as to select [USB MEMORY].
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SELECT COPY TYPE] screen is displayed.
7)
Press as to select [USB MEMORY -> PROJECTOR].
8)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
9)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe projector automatically enters standby state and starts copying data from the USB memory to the
projector.
ENGLISH - 227
Chapter 5
Operations — Using the data cloning function
10) Once the copying of the data is completed, disconnect the USB memory from the <USB> terminal.
11) Turn on the power of the projector.
ffThe copied content is reflected to the projector.
Note
ff The security password is the password set in the [SECURITY] menu → [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE].
Initial password of the factory default setting: awsqawsq
ff The light source indicator <LIGHT>, the temperature indicator <TEMP> and the filter indicator <FILTER> of the copy destination projector
blink while copying the data. Confirm that the blinking of the indicators stops, and then turn on the projector.
228 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5
Operations — Using HDMI-CEC function
Using HDMI-CEC function
HDMI-CEC function allows the basic operation of CEC-compatible device with the projector remote control or the
link control between the projector and CEC-compatible device.
Connecting a CEC-compatible device
Connect a CEC-compatible device to the <HDMI IN 1> terminal or <HDMI IN 2> terminal.
CEC-compatible device
Blu-ray disc player (example)
HDMI cable
(commercially available)
CEC-compatible device
Blu-ray disc player (example)
Repeater
Connection example with CEC-compatible device
Setting the projector and CEC-compatible device
Before using the HDMI-CEC function, you need to configure the settings on the projector and the CEC-compatible
device.
ffCEC-compatible device: enable the HDMI-CEC function.
ffProjector: Set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [HDMI CEC] to [ON]. (x page 151)
Note
ff After switching on the CEC-compatible device, switch on the projector and select HDMI1 input or HDMI2 input, then check that the image
from the CEC-compatible device is projected correctly.
Operating the CEC-compatible device with the projector remote control
You can operate the device using the projector remote control by calling up the operation menu of the CECcompatible device from the HDMI-CEC operation screen. Use the number buttons (<2>, <4>, <6>, <8>) on the
remote control to select the operation item on the HDMI-CEC operation screen.
About the HDMI-CEC operation screen, refer to “Operating a CEC-compatible device” (x page 151).
(Device name)
2 MENU
4 POWER ON
6 POWER OFF
8 RETURN
1
2
3
4
5
HDMI-CEC operation screen
1
Displays the device name to be operated.
4
2
[MENU]
Call up the operation menu of the CEC-compatible device.
[POWER OFF]
Switch off the device.
5
3
[POWER ON]
Switch on the device.
[RETURN]
Returns the operation menu of the CEC-compatible device to
the previous screen.
Note
ff If the operation menu of the CEC-compatible device cannot be called up from the HDMI-CEC operation screen, change the menu code
setting. For the operation details, refer to “Changing the menu code” (x page 151).
ff If you cannot operate the operation menu of a CEC-compatible device, try setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [HDMI CEC] to [OFF]
and [ON] again. It may be improved.
ENGLISH - 229
Chapter 5
Operations — Using HDMI-CEC function
Menu operation of CEC-compatible device
When the setting menu of the CEC-compatible device is displayed, you can use the ▲▼◀▶buttons and
<ENTER> button of the remote control to operate the menu.
About the link control
By setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [HDMI CEC] → [PROJECTOR -> DEVICE] / [DEVICE ->
PROJECTOR] to a setting other than [DISABLE], the following link operations can be achieved.
The link control setting of [PROJECTOR -> DEVICE]
rrWhen the setting is [POWER OFF] or [POWER ON / OFF]
ffIf the projector is switched off, all connected CEC-compatible devices are switched off.
rrWhen the setting is [POWER ON / OFF]
ffWhen the projector is switched on and starts projection, the CEC-compatible devices connected to the <HDMI
IN 1> terminal or <HDMI IN 2> terminal are switched on upon startup of the projector.
The link control setting of [DEVICE -> PROJECTOR]
rrWhen the setting is [POWER ON] or [POWER ON / OFF]
ffWhile the projector is in standby, if the CEC-compatible device is turned on, the projector turns on and switches
to the input that the CEC-compatible device is connected.
ffWhile the projector is in standby, if the CEC-compatible device starts playing, the projector turns on and
switches to the input that the CEC-compatible device is connected.
ffWhile the projector is turned on, if the CEC-compatible device starts playing, the projector switches to the input
that the CEC-compatible device is connected.
rrWhen the setting is [POWER ON / OFF]
ffWhen the CEC-compatible device connected to the <HDMI IN 1> terminal or <HDMI IN 2> terminal is switched
off, the projector enters standby mode.
Note
ff When [DEVICE -> PROJECTOR] menu is set to [POWER ON / OFF], power-on link control and power-off link control work only if it is
supported by the connected CEC-compatible device.
ff Depending on the status of the device, such as when the projector or the CEC-compatible device is starting up, the link control may not
operate normally.
ff If the CEC-compatible device does not support CEC 1.4, it may not support the link control described in the manual.
ff Depending on the connected CEC-compatible device, the link control may not operate normally.
230 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5
Operations — Updating the firmware
Updating the firmware
The firmware of the projector can be updated via LAN or using a USB memory.
Firmware that can be updated can be downloaded from the following website (“Panasonic Professional Display
and Projector Technical Support Website”). Customer can update the firmware if a newer version than the current
firmware version is published.
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/pass/
It is necessary to register and log in to PASS*1 to confirm the availability of the firmware that can be updated or to
download the firmware.
*1 PASS: Panasonic Professional Display and Projector Technical Support Website
rrHow to confirm the firmware version
Current firmware version can be confirmed by pressing the <STATUS> button on the remote control and
displaying the [STATUS] screen.
The firmware version can also be confirmed in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STATUS].
1/5
STATUS
PROJECTOR TYPE
PT-MZ20K
SERIAL NUMBER
123456789012
PROJECTOR RUNTIME
10000h
LIGHT RUNTIME
10000h / 10000h
CONTINUOUS LIGHTING TIME
1h 23m
FIRMWARE VERSION
1.00
INTAKE AIR TEMP.
31°C/87°F
EXHAUST AIR TEMP.
31°C/87°F
LIGHT1 TEMP.
31°C/87°F
LIGHT2 TEMP.
31°C/87°F
SELF TEST
ENTER
NO ERRORS
SEND E-MAIL
CHANGE
MENU
EXIT
Note
ff A LAN cable is required to connect to the network via wired LAN.
Updating the firmware via LAN
Example of network connection
Computer
Projector
LAN cable (straight)
LAN cable (straight)
Switching hub
Attention
ff When a LAN cable is directly connected to the projector, the network connection must be made indoors.
Note
ff A LAN cable is required to connect to the network via wired LAN.
ff Connect a LAN cable to the <LAN> terminal or the <DIGITAL LINK> terminal of the projector.
ff To connect to the network using the <LAN> terminal, set the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET TYPE] to [LAN] or [LAN & DIGITAL LINK].
ff To connect to the network using the <DIGITAL LINK> terminal, set the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET TYPE] to [DIGITAL LINK] or [LAN
& DIGITAL LINK].
ff Update cannot be performed using the “IPv6” protocol. Set the [NETWORK] menu → [WIRED LAN] → [IP VERSION] to either [IPv4] or
[IPv4 & IPv6] and assign the IP address for “IPv4”.
ENGLISH - 231
Chapter 5
Operations — Updating the firmware
ff The <DIGITAL LINK> terminal and the <LAN> terminal are connected inside of the projector when the [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET
TYPE] is set to [LAN & DIGITAL LINK]. Do not directly connect the <DIGITAL LINK> terminal and the <LAN> terminal using a LAN
cable. Construct the system so that it is not connected to the same network via the peripherals such as the hub or the twisted-pair-cable
transmitter.
ff Use a straight or crossover LAN cable that is compatible with CAT5 or higher for the LAN cable to connect to the <LAN> terminal. Either the
straight or the crossover cable, or both cables can be used depending on the system configuration. Consult your network administrator. The
projector will determine the type of the cable (straight or crossover) automatically.
ff Use a LAN cable of 100 m (328'1") or shorter as the LAN cable to connect to the <LAN> terminal.
ff For the LAN cable between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector, use a cable that meets the following criteria:
gg Conforming to CAT5e or higher standards
gg Shielded type (including connectors)
gg Straight-through
gg Single wire
gg Diameter of the cable core is same or larger than AWG24 (AWG24, AWG23, etc.)
ff The maximum transmission distance between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector is normally 100 m (328'1"). It is possible to
transmit up to 150 m (492'2") if the twisted-pair-cable transmitter supports the long-reach communication method.
ff Do not use a hub between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector.
Computer used for updating the firmware
Prepare a computer compatible with the following OS equipped with a LAN terminal.
ffMicrosoft Windows 11
Windows 11 Pro 64 bit, Windows 11 Home 64 bit
ffMicrosoft Windows 10
Windows 10 Pro 32 bit/64 bit, Windows 10 Home 32 bit/64 bit
ffMicrosoft Windows 8.1
Windows 8.1 Pro 32 bit/64 bit, Windows 8.1 32 bit/64 bit
Note
ff The operation is not guaranteed when used in an environment outside the conditions described in this section, or when a home-made
computer is used.
ff This does not guarantee the operation on all computers even if it is used in the environment fulfilling the conditions described in this section.
ff Connection with the projector or the data transfer of the firmware may fail in following cases. If it has failed, change the software setting or
change the [Power Options] setting in Windows OS, and try the update again.
gg When security software such as firewall or the utility software for the LAN adapter is installed
gg When other software has started up or operating
gg When the computer has gone into sleep/pause status
Acquiring the firmware
Download the firmware update tool for this projector (compressed file in zip format) from the following website.
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/pass/
ffFile name (example): MZ20K_USER_101.zip
(Update tool for the PT‑MZ20K/PT‑MZ17K/PT‑MZ14K/PT‑MZ11K series with version 1.01)
Confirming the setting of the projector
Confirm the setting of the projector to be updated in advance.
ffThe [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [COMMAND PORT]
ffThe [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK STATUS] → [WIRED LAN (IPv4)]
gg[DHCP]
gg[IP ADDRESS]
gg[SUBNET MASK]
gg[DEFAULT GATEWAY]
ff[User name] and [Password] of the administrator account
Confirming the computer setting
Confirm the network setting of the computer to be used for update, and make it possible to connect with the
projector to be updated via network.
232 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5
Operations — Updating the firmware
Updating the firmware
1)
Extract the compressed file downloaded from the website.
ffThe firmware update tool (executable file in exe format) is generated.
File name (example): FirmUpdateTool_MZ20K_101.exe
(Update tool for the PT‑MZ20K/PT‑MZ17K/PT‑MZ14K/PT‑MZ11K with version 1.01)
2)
Double-click the executable file generated by extracting.
ffThe update tool is started up, and the confirmation screen is displayed.
3)
Confirm the status of the projector.
ffConfirm that the projector to be updated is in the standby mode.
4)
Confirm the connection status.
ffConfirm that the projector to be updated and the computer to be used for update are correctly connected to
LAN.
5)
Click [Next].
ffThe license agreement screen is displayed.
ffConfirm the content of the license agreement.
ffThe update tool will end by clicking [Close].
ENGLISH - 233
Chapter 5
Operations — Updating the firmware
6)
Select [I accept].
7)
Click [Next].
ffThe connection setting screen is displayed.
8)
Enter the setting details of the projector.
ffEnter the details set in the projector to be updated.
Item
[IP Address]
[Command Port]
Details
The [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK STATUS] → [WIRED LAN (IPv4)] → [IP ADDRESS]
The [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [COMMAND PORT]
[User Name]
[User name] of the administrator account
[Password]
[Password] of the administrator account
234 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5
9)
Operations — Updating the firmware
Click [Next].
ffThe update confirmation screen is displayed.
10) Click [Start].
ffUpdate is started.
ffThe light source indicator <LIGHT> and the temperature indicator <TEMP> on the projector blink red
alternately while updating.
ffElapsed time and rough progress can be confirmed in the update status display screen. The required time
is approximately 10 minutes.
11) Confirm the completion of the update.
ffOnce the update is completed, the completion confirmation screen is displayed.
ffTo continue to update the firmware of another projector, click [Yes]. The connection setting screen in Step
7) is displayed.
ffTo end the update tool, click [No].
12) Confirm the firmware version.
ffTurn on the power of the projector and confirm the firmware version in the [STATUS] screen.
Attention
ff Do not disconnect the main power of the projector or disconnect the LAN cable while updating.
ENGLISH - 235
Chapter 5
Operations — Updating the firmware
Note
ff If the update does not complete after 60 minutes or more have elapsed, turn the power of the projector off and on and perform the update
from the beginning.
ff If the power of the projector is turned off by a power outage or other reason during the update, the update is automatically restarted after the
power outage is restored or right after the power of the projector is turned on again.
Updating the firmware using the USB memory
Supported device
ffCommercially available USB memory is supported.
The USB memory with a security function is not supported.
ffOnly the cards formatted in FAT16 or FAT32 can be used.
ffOnly the single partition structure is supported.
Acquiring the firmware
Download the firmware data for this projector (compressed file in zip format) from the following website.
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/pass/
ffFile name (example): MZ20K_USER_101.zip
(Firmware data for PT‑MZ20K/PT‑MZ17K/PT‑MZ14K/PT‑MZ11K with version 1.01)
Preparing the USB memory
Prepare the USB memory to be used for update.
1)
Extract the compressed file downloaded from the website.
ffThe firmware data (file in rom format) is generated.
File name (example): MZ20K_USER_101.rom
(Firmware data for PT‑MZ20K/PT‑MZ17K/PT‑MZ14K/PT‑MZ11K with version 1.01)
2)
Save the firmware data generated by extracting into the USB memory.
ffSave in the root directory of the formatted USB memory.
Note
ff Delete everything other than the firmware data to be used for update from the USB memory.
ff For the handling of the USB memory, refer to “Using the USB memory” (x page 73).
Operating the OSD to update the firmware
1)
Insert the USB memory with the firmware data saved into the <USB> terminal of the projector.
2)
Turn on the power of the projector.
3)
Press the <MENU> button on the remote control or control panel.
ffThe [MAIN MENU] screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [PROJECTOR SETUP].
5)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PROJECTOR SETUP] screen is displayed.
6)
Press as to select [FIRMWARE UPDATE].
7)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed.
8)
Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [FIRMWARE UPDATE] screen is displayed.
9)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffUpdate is started.
ffThe projector goes into the standby mode once the update is started, and the light source indicator
<LIGHT> and the temperature indicator <TEMP> blink red alternately.
236 - ENGLISH
Chapter 5
Operations — Updating the firmware
10) Confirm the firmware version.
ffUpdate is completed when the light source indicator <LIGHT> and the temperature indicator <TEMP> stop
blinking and turn off.
ffTurn on the power of the projector and confirm the firmware version in the [STATUS] screen.
Attention
ff Do not disconnect the main power supply of the projector while updating.
Note
ff If the update does not complete after 60 minutes or more have elapsed, turn the power of the projector off and on and perform the update
from the beginning.
ff If the power of the projector is turned off by a power outage or other reason during the update, the update is automatically restarted after the
power outage is restored or right after the power of the projector is turned on again.
Operating the information monitor to update the firmware
Rewriting of the firmware can be performed by operating the information monitor even if the projector is in the
standby mode.
1)
Insert the USB memory with the firmware data saved into the <USB> terminal of the projector.
2)
Confirm that the projector is in the standby mode.
3)
Press the <INFO> button on the control panel.
ffThe top menu screen is displayed.
4)
Press as to select [SETUP].
5)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe sub-menu item is displayed.
6)
Press as to select [PROJECTOR].
7)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe detailed item is displayed.
8)
Press as to select [FIRMWARE UPDATE].
9)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe security password entry screen is displayed.
10) Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe firmware update execution confirmation screen is displayed.
ffThe firmware version after the update can be confirmed by pressing w while the execution confirmation
screen is displayed.
ggPress q while the firmware version is displayed to return to the execution confirmation screen.
11) Press the <ENTER> button.
ffUpdate is started.
ffRough progress can be confirmed in the information monitor once the update is started.
ffThe light source indicator <LIGHT> and the temperature indicator <TEMP> blink red alternately while
updating.
ffUpdate is completed once [FIRMWARE UPDATE COMPLETE] is displayed in the information monitor.
Attention
ff Do not disconnect the main power supply of the projector while updating.
Note
ff If the update does not complete after 60 minutes or more have elapsed, turn the power of the projector off and on and perform the update
from the beginning.
ff If the power of the projector is turned off by a power outage or other reason during the update, the update is automatically restarted after the
power outage is restored or right after the power of the projector is turned on again.
ENGLISH - 237
Chapter 6
Maintenance
This chapter describes inspection methods when there are problems, and maintenance methods.
238 - ENGLISH
Chapter 6
Maintenance — Light source/temperature/filter indicators
Light source/temperature/filter indicators
When an indicator lights up
If a problem occurs inside the projector, the slight source indicator <LIGHT>/temperature indicator <TEMP>/filter
indicator <FILTER> will inform you by lighting or blinking. Check the status of the indicators and take following
measures.
Attention
ff When switching off the projector to deal with problems, make sure to follow the procedure in “Switching off the projector” (x page 66).
Light source indicator <LIGHT>
Temperature indicator <TEMP>
Filter indicator <FILTER>
Light source indicator <LIGHT>
Indicator status
Status
Solution
Lighting red
Some of the elements of the light
source are defective and the light
output has decreased.
ff Turn the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF> (x page 66), and turn on the
power again.
Blinking red
(1 time)
The light source is turned off since the
projection lens cannot be detected.
ff Turn off the power and mount the projection lens again. (x page 45)
ff Turn the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF> (x page 66), and turn on the
power again.
The light source does not light up,
or the light source turns off while the
projector is in use.
ff Turn the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF> (x page 66), and turn on the
power again.
Blinking red
(2 times)
Blinking red
(3 times)
Note
ff If the light source indicator <LIGHT> is still lit or blinking after taking the measures, set the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF>, and ask your
dealer for repairs.
ENGLISH - 239
Chapter 6
Maintenance — Light source/temperature/filter indicators
Temperature indicator <TEMP>
Indicator status
Blinking red
(2 times)
Lighting red
Blinking red
(3 times)
Internal temperature is high
or low (standby status).
Status
Internal temperature is high or low (warning).
Cause
ff Are the intake/exhaust vents blocked?
ff Is the temperature of surrounding environment high or low?
Solution
ff Remove any objects that are blocking the intake/exhaust vents.
ff Use the projector in an appropriate operating environment temperature*1.
ff Do not use the projector at an altitude of 2 700 m (8 858') or higher above sea level.
The cooling fan has
stopped.
―
ff Turn the <MAIN POWER>
switch to <OFF>
(x page 66), and
consult your dealer.
*1 For details of operating environment temperature of the projector, refer to “Operating temperature” (x page 266).
Note
ff If the temperature indicator <TEMP> is still lit or blinking after taking the measures, ask your dealer for repair.
Filter indicator <FILTER>
Indicator status
Lighting red
Blinking red
Status
The filter is clogged.
The ambient or internal temperature is abnormally high.
Cause
ff Is the air filter unit dirty?
ff Are the intake/exhaust vents
blocked?
ff Is the air filter unit attached?
Solution
ff Clean or replace the air filter unit.
(x page 241)
ff Remove any objects that are
blocking the intake/exhaust vents.
ff Attach the air filter unit.
Air filter unit is not attached.
Note
ff If the filter indicator <FILTER> is still lit or blinking after taking the measures, ask your dealer for repair.
ff If the air filter unit is not attached when the projector is turned on, the filter indicator <FILTER> will blink red.
240 - ENGLISH
Chapter 6
Maintenance — Maintenance/replacement
Maintenance/replacement
Before performing maintenance/replacement
ffMake sure to turn off the projector and disconnect the power plug from the outlet before maintaining or replacing
the unit. (x pages 54, 66)
ffWhen switching off the projector, make sure to follow the procedures in “Switching off the projector”
(x page 66).
Maintenance
Outer case
Wipe off dirt and dust with a soft, dry cloth.
ffIf the dirt is persistent, soak the cloth with water and wring it thoroughly before wiping. Dry off the projector with
a dry cloth.
ffDo not use benzene, thinner, or rubbing alcohol, other solvents, or household cleaners. Doing so may
deteriorate the outer case.
ffWhen using chemically treated dust cloths, follow the instructions written on its packaging.
Lens front surface
Wipe off dirt and dust from the front surface of the lens with a soft clean cloth.
ffDo not use a cloth that is fluffy, dusty, or soaked with oil/water.
ffSince the lens is fragile, do not use excessive force when wiping the lens.
Attention
ff The lens may become damaged by hitting with a hard object or by wiping the front surface of the lens with excessive force. Handle with
care.
Note
ff Dust may accumulate around the intake/exhaust vents depending on the environment and operating condition when used in an environment
with excessive dust. This may adversely affect the ventilation, cooling, and heat dissipation inside the projector, thus causing reduced
brightness.
Air filter unit
Perform maintenance of the air filter unit in the following case.
ffThe air filter is clogged with dust, causing the filter replacement message to appear on the screen and the filter
indicator <FILTER> to light red.
Attention
ff Make sure to secure the stability of the projector, and perform the maintenance in a safe location even if the air filter cover or the air filter
unit falls accidentally.
ff When the air filter unit is replaced, reset the filter counter.
If the filter counter is not reset after replacing the air filter unit, [FILTER COUNTER has reached the set time.] is displayed.
For details of resetting the filter counter, refer to “Resetting the filter counter” (x page 243).
ENGLISH - 241
Chapter 6
Maintenance — Maintenance/replacement
Removing the air filter unit
Air filter cover fixing screw
Tabs on the projector body
Grip
Air filter cover
Fig. 1
Air filter unit compartment and the
projector’s intake vent
Air filter unit
Fig. 2
1)
Turn off the power of the projector.
ffAlways follow the procedure of “Switching off the projector” (x page 66) when turning off the power.
2)
Remove the air filter cover. (Fig. 1)
ffTurn the air filter cover fixing screw (x 1) counterclockwise with a Phillips screwdriver until it turns freely, and
remove the air filter cover by placing a finger in the depressed section and pull it out slowly in the direction
of the arrow.
ffWhen pulling out the air filter cover, make sure to place a hand on the air filter cover. Pulling it out too
rapidly may cause the air filter cover to fall.
3)
Pull out the air filter unit. (Fig. 2)
ffSlightly push the grip of the air filter unit inward in the direction of the arrow, remove from the tabs on the
projector body, and pull out the air filter unit.
ffAfter pulling out the air filter unit, remove any foreign object and dust from the air filter unit compartment
and the projector’s intake vent.
Performing maintenance of the air filter unit
Remove the air filter unit in advance with the procedure for “Removing the air filter unit” (x page 242) described
previously.
Fig. 1
1)
Fig. 2
Wash the air filter unit. (Fig. 1)
i) Soak the air filter unit in cold or warm water and then lightly rinse it.
ffDo not use cleaning tools such as brushes.
ffWhen rinsing, hold the frame of the air filter unit without putting strong pressure on the filter unit.
ii) Rinse the air filter unit two to three times using fresh water each time.
ffInsufficient rinsing may result in odors.
2)
Dry the air filter unit. (Fig. 2)
ffLet the air filter unit naturally dry off in a well-ventilated place where there is little dust and is not exposed to
direct sunlight.
ffDo not dry using drying devices such as dryers.
ffAfter the air filter is dried, proceed to “Attaching the air filter unit” (x page 243) next.
242 - ENGLISH
Chapter 6
Maintenance — Maintenance/replacement
Attaching the air filter unit
1)
Attach the air filter unit to the projector.
ffAttach the air filter unit in the reverse procedure of Step 3) in “Removing the air filter unit” (x page 242).
ffPush in the air filter unit all the way in until it clicks.
2)
Attach the air filter cover.
ffClose the air filter cover in the reverse procedure of Step 2) in “Removing the air filter unit” (x page 242),
and press it in all the way until it clicks.
ffSecurely tighten the air filter cover fixing screw (x 1) using a Phillips screwdriver.
Resetting the filter counter
1)
Turn on the power of the projector.
2)
Press the <MENU> button on the remote control or control panel.
ffThe [MAIN MENU] screen is displayed.
3)
Press as to select [PROJECTOR SETUP].
4)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [PROJECTOR SETUP] screen is displayed.
5)
Press as to select [FILTER COUNTER].
6)
Press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe [FILTER COUNTER] screen is displayed.
7)
Press as to select [FILTER COUNTER RESET], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed.
8)
Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.
ffDisplay of [FILTER COUNTER] will change to [0 H].
Attention
ff After washing the air filter unit, dry it thoroughly before attaching it back to the projector. Attaching a wet unit will cause an electric shock or
malfunction.
ff Do not disassemble the air filter unit.
ff Make sure that the air filter unit is properly attached before using the projector. If it is not attached, the projector will suck in dirt and dust
causing a malfunction.
ff Do not insert object from the hole of the intake vent. Doing so may cause damage.
Note
ff When the projector is used without resetting the filter counter, the actual filter runtime (counter numeric value) will not be able to be
confirmed.
ff When the projector is used without attaching the air filter unit, the filter indicator <FILTER> will blink red, and a message is displayed on the
projected image for approximately 30 seconds.
ff When the air filter unit is damaged or dirt does not come off even if it is washed, replace with the new optional Replacement Filter Unit
(Model No.: ET‑RFM100).
ff Replacement to a new air filter unit is recommended after washing it twice.
ff The dust-proof properties may be reduced after each cleaning.
ff The replacement cycle of the air filter unit varies greatly depending on the usage environment.
ENGLISH - 243
Chapter 6
Maintenance — Maintenance/replacement
Replacing the unit
Air filter unit
Air filter unit should be replaced if the dirt does not come off after cleaning.
The Replacement Filter Unit (Model No.: ET‑RFM100) is an optional accessory. To purchase the product, consult
your dealer.
Air filter unit replacement procedure
Attention
ff Make sure to turn off the projector before replacing the filter.
ff When attaching the air filter unit, make sure to secure the stability of the projector, and execute in a safe location even if the air filter unit
falls accidentally.
1)
Remove the air filter unit.
ffRefer to “Removing the air filter unit” (x page 242).
2)
Attach the optional Replacement Filter Unit (Model No.: ET‑RFM100) to the projector.
ffThe air filter unit has no difference between top and bottom, but is two-sided. Match the protrusion position
of the air filter unit with the grooves on the projector body.
ffRefer to “Attaching the air filter unit” (x page 243).
Attention
ff When switching on the projector, make sure that the air filter unit is attached. If it is not attached, the projector will suck in dirt and dust
causing a malfunction.
ff When the projector is used without attaching the air filter unit, the filter indicator <FILTER> will blink red, and a message is displayed on the
projected image for approximately 30 seconds.
Note
ff The replacement cycle of the air filter unit varies greatly depending on the usage environment.
244 - ENGLISH
Chapter 6
Maintenance — Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Review the following points. For details, see the corresponding pages.
Problems
Power does not turn on.
No image appears.
Points to be checked
Page
ff Is the power plug firmly inserted into the outlet?
―
ff Is the <MAIN POWER> switch set to <OFF>?
66
ff Is the wall outlet supplying electricity?
―
ff Have the circuit breakers tripped?
―
ff Is the light source indicator <LIGHT> blinking?
239
ff Is the temperature indicator <TEMP> lit or blinking?
240
ff Are connections to external devices correctly performed?
48
ff Is the input selection setting correct?
67
ff Is the [BRIGHTNESS] adjustment setting at a minimum?
85
ff Is the external device that is connected to the projector working properly?
―
ff Is the shutter function in use?
Image is fuzzy.
Color is pale or grayish.
Remote control does not
respond.
Menu screen does not
appear.
Buttons on the control
panel do not operate.
Image does not display
correctly.
74, 121
ff Is the projection lens attached correctly?
45
ff Is the lens cover still attached to the lens?
56
ff Is the lens focus set correctly?
68
ff Is the projection distance appropriate?
38
ff Is the lens dirty?
25
ff Is the projector installed perpendicular to the screen?
―
ff Are [COLOR] and [TINT] adjusted correctly?
86
ff Is the external device connected to the projector adjusted correctly?
―
ff Are the batteries depleted?
―
ff Is the polarity of the batteries set correctly?
34
ff Are there any obstructions between the remote control and the remote control
signal receiver of the projector?
30
ff Is the remote control being used beyond its effective operation range?
30
ff Are other forms of light, such as fluorescent light, affecting the projection?
30
ff Is the [REMOTE CONTROL] setting in [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] set to
[DISABLE]?
161
ff Is the <REMOTE 1 IN> terminal used for contact control?
263
ff Is the ID number setting operation correct?
76
ff Is the on-screen display function turned off (hidden)?
74
ff Is the [CONTROL PANEL] setting in [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] set to
[DISABLE]?
161
ff Is the <REMOTE 1 IN> terminal used for contact control?
263
ff Is [SYSTEM SELECTOR] set properly?
92
ff Is there a problem with the external device to output images?
―
ff Is a signal which is not compatible with the projector being input?
268
ff Are the settings for [HDMI IN], [DIGITAL LINK IN], and [SDI IN] made correctly?
―
ff Is the cable too long?
―
Image from a computer
does not appear.
ff Is the external video output on the laptop computer set correctly? (Ex.: The external
output settings may be switched by pressing the “Fn” + “F3” keys or the “Fn” + “F10”
keys simultaneously. This will differ depending on the model of the computer. Refer
to the user manual provided with your computer.)
―
Image from HDMI
compatible device does
not appear or is disrupted.
ff Is the HDMI cable connected securely?
48
Lens shift cannot be
adjusted.
Cannot control the
projector with Art-Net.
ff Turn the power of the projector and the external device off and on.
―
ff Is a signal which is not compatible with the projector being input?
268
ff Perform [LENS CALIBRATION].
130
ff Are the connections between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and an external
device, and between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and projector correctly done?
―
ff Is [Art-Net SETUP] set to other than [OFF]?
175
ff Are [NET], [SUB NET], [UNIVERSE], and [START ADDRESS] set correctly?
175
ENGLISH - 245
Chapter 6
Maintenance — Troubleshooting
Problems
The DIGITAL LINK input
image is not displayed.
Operation noise became
loud.
Points to be checked
50
ff Are the connections between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and an external
device, and between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and projector correctly done?
―
ff Is [DIGITAL LINK MODE] set to [AUTO], [DIGITAL LINK], or [LONG REACH]? Is it
set to [ETHERNET]?
164
ff Is a signal which is not compatible with a twisted-pair-cable transmitter being input?
―
If the temperature inside the projector becomes high, the speed of the internal cooling
fan increases automatically and the operation noise becomes loud. If the internal
temperature reaches the abnormal value, the indicators will light up or blink.
239
ff Is the ambient temperature high?
21
ff Is the air filter unit dirty?
241
ff Are the intake/exhaust vents blocked?
22
Attention
ff If problems persist even after checking the preceding points, consult your dealer.
246 - ENGLISH
Page
ff Is the cable compatible to the condition of the projector used?
Chapter 6
Maintenance — [SELF TEST] indications
[SELF TEST] indications
[SELF TEST] can be checked in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STATUS] → [SELF TEST].
The following list shows the alphanumeric symbol that is displayed when an error or a warning has occurred and
its details. Confirm “Action number”, and follow the measure in “Measure for error and warning” (x page 248).
The input supply voltage is displayed only with the numeric value.
Error/warning display
Details
Action number
F015
Luminance sensor error
5
F016
Angle sensor error
5
F018
Air pressure sensor error
5
F061
Light source 1 driver communication error
6
F062
Light source 2 driver communication error
6
F090
Wave plate error
5
F096
Lens mounter operation error
5
F111
Phosphor wheel error
5
F200
LCD panel red fan warning
5
F201
LCD panel green fan warning
5
F202
LCD panel blue fan warning
5
F203
PBS fan warning
5
F204
Radiator fan 1 warning
5
F205
Radiator fan 2 warning
5
F206
Phosphor fan warning
5
F207
Power source intake fan warning
5
F208
Exhaust fan 1 warning
5
F209
Exhaust fan 2 warning
5
F250
Liquid cooling pump warning
5
F300
LCD panel red fan error
5
F301
LCD panel green fan error
5
F302
LCD panel blue fan error
5
F303
PBS fan error
5
F304
Radiator fan 1 error
5
F305
Radiator fan 2 error
5
F306
Phosphor fan error
5
F307
Power supply intake fan error
5
F308
Exhaust fan 1 error
5
F309
Exhaust fan 2 error
5
F350
Liquid cooling pump error
5
F400
Light source 1 unit error
6
F401
Light source 2 unit error
6
F450
Light source 1 unit error
6
F451
Light source 2 unit error
6
F500
Light source 1 error
6
F501
Light source 2 error
6
H001
Battery replacement for the internal clock
4
H011
Intake air temperature sensor error
5
H012
Exhaust air temperature sensor error
5
H014
Light source temperature sensor 1 error
5
H015
Light source temperature sensor 2 error
5
H030
Lens temperature sensor error
5
H040
Clog sensor error
5
U081
Low AC power supply voltage warning (below 90 V)
3
U084
<DC OUT> terminal power supply error
5
U090
Lens not attached error
8
U200
Intake temperature warning
1
U201
Exhaust air temperature warning
2
U203
Light source 1 temperature warning
1
U204
Light source 2 temperature warning
1
U253
Power supply temperature warning
1
ENGLISH - 247
Chapter 6
Maintenance — [SELF TEST] indications
Error/warning display
Details
Action number
U290
Filter clogging warning
7
U291
Exhaust filter not installed
7
U300
Intake temperature error
1
U301
Exhaust air temperature error
2
U303
Light source temperature 1 error
1
U304
Light source temperature 2 error
1
U353
Power supply temperature error
1
U390
Filter clogging error
7
Note
ff The self-diagnosis display and the details of the malfunction may be different.
ff For errors and warnings that are not described in the table, consult your dealer.
rrMeasure for error and warning
Action
number
Measure
1
The operating environment temperature is either too high or too low. Use the projector in an appropriate operating
environment temperature*1.
2
The operating environment temperature is too high, or the exhaust vent may be blocked. Use the projector in an appropriate
operating environment temperature*1. Or remove any objects that are blocking the exhaust vent.
3
The input supply voltage is low. Use electric wiring that can sufficiently withstand the power consumption of the projector.
4
Battery replacement is required. Consult your dealer.
5
If the display does not clear after switching the main power off and on, consult your dealer.
6
The light source has failed to turn on. If the light source does not light up after turning the power off and on, consult your
dealer.
7
Perform maintenance or replacement of the filter. (x page 241)
8
The projection lens cannot be detected. Turn off the power and attach the projection lens again. If the display does not clear
after switching the power off and on, consult your dealer.
*1 For details of operating environment temperature of the projector, refer to “Operating temperature” (x page 266).
248 - ENGLISH
Chapter 7
Appendix
This chapter describes specifications and after-sales service for the projector.
ENGLISH - 249
Chapter 7
Appendix — Technical information
Technical information
Using PJLink function
The network function of this projector supports the PJLink class 1 and class 2, and setting of the projector or
querying of the projector status can be performed from the computer using the PJLink protocol.
Note
ff To use the PJLink function with the projector, it is necessary to set the password of the administrator account. (x page 169)
Control commands
The following table lists the PJLink protocol commands that can be used to control the projector.
ffx characters in tables are non-specific characters.
Class
1
1
1, 2
1
1
Command
POWR
POWR ?
Control details
Power supply control
Power supply status
query
Parameter/response
string
Remark
0
Standby
1
Power on
0
Standby
1
Power on
2
Preparing for switching off the projector
INPT
Input selection
31
HDMI1
INPT ?
Input selection query
32
HDMI2
33
DIGITAL LINK
34
SDI
AVMT
Shutter control
30
Shutter function disabled (shutter: opened)
AVMT ?
Shutter status query
31
Shutter function enabled (shutter: closed)
ERST ?
Error status query
xxxxxx
1st byte
Indicates fan errors, and
returns 0 - 2.
2nd byte
Indicates light source errors,
and returns 0 or 2.
3rd byte
Indicates temperature errors,
and returns 0 - 2.
4th byte
Returns 0.
5th byte
Indicates filter errors, and
returns 0 - 2.
6th byte
Indicates other errors, and
returns 0 - 2.
AAAA X BBBB Y
AAAA: Light source 1 runtime
X: 0 = Light source 1 off, 1 = Light source 1 on
BBBB: Light source 2 runtime
Y: 0 = Light source 2 off, 1 = Light source 2 on
ff 0 = No error is
detected
ff 1 = Warning
ff 2 = Error
1
LAMP ?
Light source status
query
1, 2
INST ?
Input selection list
query
31 32 33 34
―
1
NAME ?
Projector name query
xxxxx
Returns the name set in the [NETWORK] menu →
[PROJECTOR NAME].
1
INF1 ?
Manufacturer name
query
Panasonic
Returns manufacturer name.
Returns model name.
1
INF2 ?
Model name query
PT‑MZ20K
PT‑MZ17K
PT‑MZ14K
PT‑MZ11K
1
INF0 ?
Other information
queries
xxxxx
Returns information such as version number.
1
CLSS ?
Class information
query
2
Returns class for PJLink.
2
SNUM ?
Serial number query
xxxxxxxxx
Returns serial number.
2
SVER ?
Software version query xxxxxxxxx
2
INNM ?
Input terminal name
query
250 - ENGLISH
31 / HDMI1
32 / HDMI2
33 / DIGITAL LINK
34 / SDI
Returns version number.
Returns input terminal name.
Chapter 7
Class
Command
Appendix — Technical information
Parameter/response
string
Control details
Remark
2
IRES ?
Input signal resolution
query
AAAAxBBBB
AAAA: Horizontal resolution
BBBB: Vertical resolution
2
RRES ?
Recommended
resolution query
1920 x 1200
Returns display resolution.
2
FILT ?
Filter runtime inquiry
xxxxx
Returns the runtime of the filter.
RFIL ?
Filter replacement
model number inquiry
ET‑RFM100
Returns the filter replacement model number.
FREZ
Freeze control
0
Freeze clear
FREZ ?
Freeze status query
1
Freeze (stop)
Cooling notification
0
Notifies when the power is turned off.
Warmup notification
1
Notifies when the power is turned on.
2
2
2
POWR
2
ERST
Error notification
xxxxxx
Notifies when an error occurs.
2
LKUP
Link up notification
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
Notifies the MAC address when the PJLink communication
becomes possible.
31
HDMI1
INPT
Input switch
completion notification
32
HDMI2
33
DIGITAL LINK
34
SDI
2
2
SRCH
The projector connected to the same network that can
ACKN=xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
communicate with PJLink will respond with its MAC address.
Projector search
PJLink security authentication
A PJLink password for security authentication procedure is required for communication of the PJLink command.
The PJLink password can be set in the [NETWORK] menu → [PJLink] → [PJLink PASSWORD] (x page 173), or
in “[Set up password] page (when accessed by administrator account)” (x page 210) of the web control screen.
When communicating the PJLink command without authentication procedure, set the PJLink password as blank.
The factory default setting of the PJLink password is blank.
ffFor specifications related to PJLink, visit the website of Japan Business Machine and Information System
Industries Association.
URL http://pjlink.jbmia.or.jp/english/
Using Art-Net function
Since the network function of the projector supports the Art-Net function, you can control the projector settings
with the DMX controller and application software using the Art-Net protocol.
Note
ff To use the Art-Net function with the projector, it is necessary to set the password of the administrator account. (x page 169)
ff The Art-Net function cannot be used using the “IPv6” protocol. Set the [NETWORK] menu → [WIRED LAN] → [IP VERSION] to either [IPv4]
or [IPv4 & IPv6] and assign the IP address for “IPv4”.
Channel definition
The following table lists the channel definitions used for controlling the projector with the Art-Net function.
Channel settings can be switched using the [NETWORK] menu → [Art-Net] → [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING]
(x page 175).
The control details assigned to each channel are listed in the following table.
ffChannel assignment for [USER] is in factory default setting. Assignment can be changed.
Channel
CHANNEL1
Control details
[2]
[USER]
[1]
LIGHT OUTPUT
LIGHT OUTPUT
SHUTTER
CHANNEL2
INPUT SELECT
INPUT SELECT
INPUT SELECT
CHANNEL3
LENS POSITION
LENS POSITION
LENS FUNCTION SELECT
CHANNEL4
LENS H SHIFT
LENS H SHIFT
LENS CONTROL
CHANNEL5
LENS V SHIFT
LENS V SHIFT
POWER
CHANNEL6
LENS FOCUS
LENS FOCUS
LIGHT OUTPUT
CHANNEL7
LENS ZOOM
LENS ZOOM
ENABLE/DISABLE
CHANNEL8
POWER
POWER
FADE-IN
ENGLISH - 251
Chapter 7
Appendix — Technical information
Control details
Channel
[2]
[USER]
[1]
CHANNEL9
GEOMETRY
GEOMETRY
FADE-OUT
CHANNEL10
CUSTOM MASKING
CUSTOM MASKING
CUSTOM MASKING
CHANNEL11
ENABLE/DISABLE
ENABLE/DISABLE
GEOMETRY
CHANNEL12
NONE
NONE
NONE
Control details
rrLIGHT OUTPUT
This can be set in 256 steps between 100 % and 0 %.
Performance
Parameter
100 %
0
…
…
0%
255
Default value
0
rrINPUT SELECT (when [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING] is set to [1])
Performance
Parameter
No operation
0‑39
HDMI1
40‑47
DIGITAL LINK
48‑55
SDI
56‑63
No operation
64‑255
Default value
0
rrINPUT SELECT (when [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING] is set to [2] or [USER])
Performance
Parameter
No operation
0‑31
HDMI1
32‑39
DIGITAL LINK
40‑47
SDI
48‑55
No operation
56-71
HDMI2
72-79
No operation
80‑255
Default value
0
rrLENS POSITION
Performance
Parameter
No operation
0‑31
Move to the home position
32‑63
Load LENS MEMORY1
64‑79
Load LENS MEMORY2
80‑95
Load LENS MEMORY3
96‑111
Load LENS MEMORY4
112‑127
Load LENS MEMORY5
128‑143
Load LENS MEMORY6
144‑159
Load LENS MEMORY7
160‑175
Load LENS MEMORY8
176‑191
Load LENS MEMORY9
192‑207
Load LENS MEMORY10
208‑223
No operation
224‑255
252 - ENGLISH
Default value
0
Chapter 7
Appendix — Technical information
rrLENS H SHIFT, LENS V SHIFT, LENS FOCUS, LENS ZOOM
Performance
Lens adjustment
0‑31
(-) Low speed
32‑63
(-) Fine adjustment
64‑95
Operation stop
Lens adjustment
Parameter
(-) High speed
Default value
128
96‑159
(+) Fine adjustment
160‑191
(+) Low speed
192‑223
(+) High speed
224‑255
rrLENS FUNCTION SELECT (when [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING] is set to [1])
Operate together with LENS CONTROL.
Performance
Parameter
No operation
0‑15
LENS H SHIFT
16‑31
LENS V SHIFT
32‑47
LENS FOCUS
48‑63
LENS ZOOM
64‑79
Move to the home position
80‑95
Load LENS MEMORY1
96‑111
Load LENS MEMORY2
112‑127
Load LENS MEMORY3
128‑143
No operation
144‑255
Default value
0
rrLENS CONTROL (when [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING] is set to [1])
Operate together with LENS FUNCTION SELECT.
Performance
Lens adjustment
0‑31
(-) Low speed
32‑63
(-) Fine adjustment
64‑95
Operation stop
Lens adjustment
Parameter
(-) High speed
96‑127
(+) Fine adjustment
128‑159
(+) Low speed
160‑191
(+) High speed
192‑223
Execute command action
Default value
127
224‑255
rrPOWER
Performance
Parameter
Standby
0‑63
No operation
64‑191
Power on
192‑255
Default value
0
rrSHUTTER
Performance
Parameter
SHUTTER: Opened
0‑63
No operation
64‑191
SHUTTER: Closed
192‑255
Default value
128
ENGLISH - 253
Chapter 7
Appendix — Technical information
rrFADE-IN, FADE-OUT (when [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING] is set to [1] or [USER])
Operate together with SHUTTER.
Performance
Parameter
OFF
0‑15
0.5s
16‑31
1.0s
32‑47
1.5s
48‑63
2.0s
64‑79
2.5s
80‑95
3.0s
96‑111
3.5s
112‑127
4.0s
128‑143
4.5s
144‑159
7.0s
160‑175
10.0s
176‑191
No operation
192‑255
Default value
255
rrGEOMETRY
Performance
Parameter
OFF
0‑15
KEYSTONE
16‑31
CURVED CORRECTION
32‑47
PC-1
48‑63
PC-2
64‑79
PC-3
80‑95
CORNER CORRECTION
96‑111
No operation
112‑255
Default value
128
rrCUSTOM MASKING
Performance
Parameter
OFF
0‑31
PC-1
32‑63
PC-2
64‑95
PC-3
96‑127
No operation
128‑255
Default value
255
rrFREEZE
Performance
Parameter
No operation
0‑31
OFF
32‑95
No operation
96‑159
ON
160‑223
No operation
224‑255
254 - ENGLISH
Default value
128
Chapter 7
Appendix — Technical information
rrCOLOR, TINT
Performance
Parameter
No operation
0‑31
Factory default setting
32‑63
-31
64
…
…
+31
191
No operation
192‑255
Default value
0
rrRASTER PATTERN
Performance
Parameter
No operation
0‑15
OFF
16‑31
WHITE
32‑47
YELLOW
48‑63
CYAN
64‑79
GREEN
80‑95
MAGENTA
96‑111
RED
112‑127
BLUE
128‑143
BLACK
144‑159
USER LOGO
160‑175
No operation
176‑255
Default value
0
rrENABLE/DISABLE
Operation for all channels is not accepted when set to “Disable”.
Performance
Parameter
Disable
0‑127
Enable
128‑255
Default value
0
Note
ff If the projector is operated using the remote control or the control panel, or by the control command while controlling the projector using the
Art-Net function, the setting of the DMX controller or computer application may be different from the projector status. To reflect the controls
of all channels to the projector, set “ENABLE/DISABLE” of channel 11 to “Disable” and then back to “Enable”.
ff To create and register the USER LOGO image, use “Logo Transfer Software”. The software can be downloaded from the following website.
https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/
ENGLISH - 255
Chapter 7
Appendix — Technical information
Control commands via LAN
The projector can be controlled via the <DIGITAL LINK> terminal or the <LAN> terminal by using the control
command format via the <SERIAL/MULTI SYNC IN> terminal.
For examples of the available commands, refer to “Control command” (x page 262).
Note
ff To send/receive the command via LAN, it is necessary to set the password of the administrator account. (x page 169)
When connecting in protect mode
Connecting
Following is the connection method when the [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK SECURITY] → [COMMAND
PROTECT] is set to [ENABLE].
1)
Obtain the IP address and port number (Initial set value = 1024) of the projector and request a
connection to the projector.
ffYou can obtain both the IP address and the port number from the menu screen of the projector.
IP address
Obtain from the [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK STATUS].
Port number
2)
Obtain from the [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [COMMAND PORT].
Check the response from the projector.
Data section
Blank
Mode
Blank
Random number section
Termination
symbol
Command
example
“NTCONTROL”
(ASCII string)
‘’
0x20
‘1’
0x31
‘’
0x20
“zzzzzzzz”
(ASCII code hex number)
(CR)
0x0d
Data length
9 bytes
1 byte
1 byte
1 byte
8 bytes
1 byte
ffMode: 1 = Protect mode
ffExample: Response during protect mode (random number section is undefined value)
“NTCONTROL 1 23181e1e” (CR)
3)
Generate a 32-byte hash value from the following data using MD5 algorithm.
ff“xxxxxx:yyyyy:zzzzzzzz”
xxxxxx
The user name for the administrator account
yyyyy
The password for the administrator account
zzzzzzzz
8-byte random number obtained in Step 2)
Command transmission method
Transmit using the following command formats.
rrTransmitted data
Header
Data section
Termination
symbol
Command
example
Hash value
“Connecting” (x page 256)
‘0’
0x30
‘0’
0x30
Control command
(ASCII string)
(CR)
0x0d
Data length
32 bytes
1 byte
1 byte
Undefined length
1 byte
ffExample: Transmission of power supply status acquisition command (hash value is calculated from the user
name and password of the administrator account, and acquired random number)
“dbdd2dabd3d4d68c5dd970ec0c29fa6400QPW” (CR)
256 - ENGLISH
Chapter 7
Appendix — Technical information
rrReceived data
Header
Data section
Termination
symbol
Command
example
‘0’
0x30
‘0’
0x30
Control command
(ASCII string)
(CR)
0x0d
Data length
1 byte
1 byte
Undefined length
1 byte
ffExample: The projector is powered on
“00001” (CR)
rrError response
String
Message
Data length
Termination
symbol
Details
“ERR1”
Undefined control command
“ERR2”
Out of parameter range
“ERR3”
Busy state or no-acceptable period
“ERR4”
Timeout or no-acceptable period
“ERR5”
Wrong data length
“ERRA”
Password mismatch
4 bytes
(CR)
0x0d
―
1 byte
Note
ff The projector will automatically disconnect the connection with the network right after sending the command. This is the specification based
on the security view point to prevent unauthorized operation of this product by a malicious third party. To send commands continuously,
execute the network connection request every time the command is to be sent. For details, refer to “Communication flow between server
and client” (x page 258).
When connecting in non-protect mode
Connecting
Following is the connection method when the [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK SECURITY] → [COMMAND
PROTECT] is set to [DISABLE].
1)
Obtain the IP address and port number (Initial set value = 1024) of the projector and request a
connection to the projector.
ffYou can obtain both the IP address and the port number from the menu screen of the projector.
IP address
Port number
2)
Obtain from the [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK STATUS].
Obtain from the [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [COMMAND PORT].
Check the response from the projector.
Data section
Blank
Mode
Termination
symbol
Command
example
“NTCONTROL”
(ASCII string)
‘’
0x20
‘0’
0x30
(CR)
0x0d
Data length
9 bytes
1 byte
1 byte
1 byte
ffMode: 0 = Non-protect mode
ffExample: Response during non-protect mode
“NTCONTROL 0” (CR)
ENGLISH - 257
Chapter 7
Appendix — Technical information
Command transmission method
Transmit using the following command formats.
rrTransmitted data
Header
Data section
Termination
symbol
Command
example
‘0’
0x30
‘0’
0x30
Control command
(ASCII string)
(CR)
0x0d
Data length
1 byte
1 byte
Undefined length
1 byte
Data section
Termination
symbol
ffExample: Transmission of power supply status acquisition command
“00QPW” (CR)
rrReceived data
Header
Command
example
‘0’
0x30
‘0’
0x30
Control command
(ASCII string)
(CR)
0x0d
Data length
1 byte
1 byte
Undefined length
1 byte
ffExample: The projector is in standby status
“00000” (CR)
rrError response
String
Message
Data length
Termination
symbol
Details
“ERR1”
Undefined control command
“ERR2”
Out of parameter range
“ERR3”
Busy state or no-acceptable period
“ERR4”
Timeout or no-acceptable period
“ERR5”
Wrong data length
4 bytes
(CR)
0x0d
―
1 byte
Note
ff The projector will automatically disconnect the connection with the network right after sending the command. This is the specification based
on the security view point to prevent unauthorized operation of this product by a malicious third party. To send commands continuously,
execute the network connection request every time the command is to be sent. For details, refer to “Communication flow between server
and client” (x page 258).
Communication flow between server and client
To send/receive a command via LAN, refer to the communication flow indicated below.
Server: Projector
Client: Control device such as a computer
Server
Client
Connection request
Sending of key
Session 1
Sending of command 1
Responding to command 1
Disconnection
Connection request
Sending of key
Session 2
Sending of command 2
Responding to command 2
Disconnection
258 - ENGLISH
Chapter 7
Appendix — Technical information
<SERIAL/MULTI SYNC IN>/<SERIAL/MULTI SYNC OUT> terminals
The <SERIAL/MULTI SYNC IN>/<SERIAL/MULTI SYNC OUT> terminals of the projector conform with RS‑232C
so that the projector can be connected to and controlled from a computer.
A combined screen with a balanced contrast can be displayed by linking multiple projectors using the <SERIAL/
MULTI SYNC IN> terminal and the <SERIAL/MULTI SYNC OUT> terminal, and sharing the brightness level of the
image signal input to each projector when structuring a multi-display screen by combining the projected images
from multiple projectors. It is also possible to synchronize the shutter operation of the specified projector to other
projectors.
For the connection method of the projectors when using the contrast synchronization function or the shutter
synchronization function, refer to “Connecting example when using the contrast synchronization function/shutter
synchronization function” (x page 51).
Connection for RS‑232C communication
Single projector
Projector connecting terminals
D-Sub 9p (female)
Computer
D-Sub 9p (male)
D-Sub 9p (male)
Communication cable (straight)
Multiple projectors
Connecting terminals on projector 1
D-Sub 9p (female)
Connecting terminals on projector 2
D-Sub 9p (male)
D-Sub 9p (female)
D-Sub 9p (male)
Computer
D-Sub 9p (male)
D-Sub 9p (male)
D-Sub 9p (female)
Communication cable (straight)
Communication cable (straight)
When connecting using DIGITAL LINK compatible device
Projector connecting terminals
DIGITAL LINK
DIGITAL LINK compatible device
DIGITAL LINK
D-Sub 9p (female)
Computer
D-Sub 9p (male)
LAN cable (straight)
Communication cable (straight)
Note
ff The destination of [RS-232C] (x page 143) must be set according to the connection method.
ff To control the projector with standby mode when connecting utilizing the DIGITAL LINK compatible device, set the [PROJECTOR SETUP]
menu → [STANDBY MODE] to [NORMAL].
When [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO], the projector cannot be control during standby.
ENGLISH - 259
Chapter 7
Appendix — Technical information
Pin assignments and signal names
D‑Sub 9-pin (female)
Outside view
(6)
Pin No.
―
(2)
TXD
Transmitted data
(3)
RXD
Received data
(4)
MULTI PROJECTOR
SYNC
(5)
GND
(6)
―
(7)
CTS
(8)
RTS
(9)
―
Pin No.
Signal name
(5)
D‑Sub 9-pin (male)
Outside view
(9)
(6)
(5)
Details
(1)
(9)
(1)
Signal name
(1)
NC
For contrast synchronization function/for
shutter synchronization function
Earth
NC
Connected internally
NC
Details
(1)
―
(2)
RXD
Received data
(3)
TXD
Transmitted data
(4)
MULTI PROJECTOR
SYNC
(5)
GND
(6)
―
(7)
RTS
(8)
CTS
(9)
―
NC
For contrast synchronization function/for
shutter synchronization function
Earth
NC
Connected internally
NC
RS‑232C communication conditions (factory default)
Signal level
RS‑232C-compliant
Sync. method
Asynchronous
Baud rate
9 600 bps
Parity
None
Character length
8 bits
Stop bit
1 bit
X parameter
None
S parameter
None
Basic format
Transmission from the computer starts with STX, then the ID, command, parameter, and ETX are sent in this
order. Add parameters according to the details of control.
ID designate
ZZ, 01 to 64 and 0A to 0Z
(2 bytes)
Start (1 byte)
260 - ENGLISH
End (1 byte)
Parameter (undefined length)
Colon (1 byte)
3 command characters (3 bytes)
Semi-colon (1 byte)
2 ID characters (2 bytes)
Chapter 7
Appendix — Technical information
Basic format (has subcommands)
Same as the basic format
Sub command (5 bytes)
Parameter (6 bytes)*1
Symbol “+” or “–” (1 byte) and setting or adjustment value (5
bytes)
Operation (1 byte)*1
“=” (Set the value specified using parameter)
*1 When transmitting a command which does not need a parameter, an operation (E) and parameter are not necessary.
Attention
ff If a command is sent after the light source starts lighting, there may be a delay in response or the command may not be executed. Try
sending or receiving any command after 60 seconds.
ff When transmitting multiple commands, be sure to wait until 0.5 seconds has elapsed after receiving the response from the projector before
sending the next command. When transmitting a command which does not need a parameter, a colon (:) is not necessary.
Note
ff If a command cannot be executed, the “ER401” response is sent from the projector to the computer.
ff If an invalid parameter is sent, the “ER402” response is sent from the projector to the computer.
ff ID transmission in RS‑232C supports ZZ (ALL) and 01 to 64, as well as 0A to 0Z groups.
ff If a command is sent with an ID designated, a response will be sent to the computer only in the following cases.
gg It matches the projector ID
gg ID is designated as ALL and [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] is set to [ON]
gg ID is designated as GROUP and [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] is set to [ON]
ff STX and ETX are character codes. STX shown in hexadecimal is 02, and ETX shown in hexadecimal is 03.
When multiple projectors are controlled
When multiple projectors are all controlled
When controlling multiple projectors together using RS‑232C, perform the following settings.
1)
Set a different ID for each projector.
2)
Set [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] to [ON] in only one projector.
3)
Set [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] to [OFF] for all other projectors set in Step 2).
When multiple projectors are all controlled by group unit
When controlling multiple projectors by group unit using RS‑232C, perform the following settings.
1)
Set a different ID for each projector.
2)
Set the same setting for [GROUP] in each group.
3)
Set [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] to [ON] in only one projector.
4)
Set [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] to [OFF] for all other projectors set in Step 3).
Note
ff Response is not made correctly if [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] is set to [ON] in two or more projectors.
ff When setting multiple groups, set [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] to [ON] in only one projector in each group.
Response is not made correctly if [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] is set to [ON] in two or more projectors of the same group.
ff When using the contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function, control by RS‑232C is not possible since multiple
projectors are daisy chain connected in a loop.
ENGLISH - 261
Chapter 7
Appendix — Technical information
Cable specification
When connected to a computer
1
NC NC
2
Projector
(<SERIAL/MULTI
SYNC IN> terminal)
When multiple projectors are connected
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
6
5
NC NC
7
8
9
Computer
(DTE specifications)
NC NC
Projector 1
(<SERIAL/MULTI
SYNC OUT> terminal)
NC NC
1
2
3
3
4
4
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
5
NC NC
Projector 2
(<SERIAL/MULTI
SYNC IN> terminal)
6
7
8
NC NC
9
Note
ff A cable with pin (4) connected to each other such as full wired straight cable is required as the cable when using the contrast
synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function. Also, set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC]
when using the contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function.
Control command
The following table lists the commands that can be used to control the projector using a computer.
rrProjector control command
Command
PON
Power on
POF
Power standby
QPW
Power query
IIS
Parameter/response
string
Details
Switching the input
signal
―
Remark (parameter)
To check if the power is on, use the “Power query” command.
000
001
STANDBY
Power on
HD1
HDMI1
HD2
HDMI2
DL1
DIGITAL LINK
SD1
SDI
OSH
Shutter control
0
OPEN
QSH
Shutter status query
1
CLOSE
0
DEFAULT
1
4:3
2
16:9
5
THROUGH
6
HV FIT
9
H FIT
10
V FIT
01 - 96
Sub memory number
VSE
QSE
Aspect ratio switch
Aspect ratio settings
query
OCS
Sub memory switch
QSB
Sub memory status
query
rrLens control command
Command
Sub command
Details
VXX
LNSI2
Lens H shift
VXX
LNSI3
Lens V shift
VXX
LNSI4
Lens focus
VXX
LNSI5
Lens zoom
262 - ENGLISH
Remark
+00000 = Fine adjustment 1+, +00001 = Fine adjustment 1-, +00100
= Fine adjustment 2+, +00101 = Fine adjustment 2-, +00200 = Coarse
adjustment+, +00201 = Coarse adjustment-
Chapter 7
Appendix — Technical information
<REMOTE 1 IN> terminal
It is possible to control the projector remotely (by contact control) from a control board located away from the
projector where remote control signals cannot reach.
Use the <REMOTE 1 IN> terminal on the connecting terminals of the projector to connect to the control board.
Remote control
Contact control
Remote control/contact control
Standby
Lit
Light source
Installation locations in meeting rooms, etc.
HDMI 1
HDMI 2
SDI
DIGITAL LINK
Remote control board in another location
Pin assignments and signal names
D‑Sub 9-pin
Outside view
(6)
(1)
(9)
(5)
Pin No.
Signal name
(1)
GND
(2)
POWER
Open (H)
Short (L)
―
GND
OFF
ON
(3)
HDMI1
Other
HDMI1
(4)
HDMI2
Other
HDMI2
(5)
SDI
Other
SDI
(6)
DIGITAL LINK
Other
DIGITAL LINK
(7)
None
―
―
(8)
SHUTTER
OFF
ON
RST/SET
Controlled by remote
control
Controlled by external
contact
(9)
Attention
ff When controlling, make sure to short-circuit pins (1) and (9).
ff When pins (1) and (9) are short-circuited, the following buttons on the control panel and the remote control are disabled. Commands for
RS‑232C and network functions corresponding to these functions are also disabled.
gg <POWER ON> button, <STANDBY> button, <SHUTTER> button
ff When pins (1) and (9) are short-circuited, and then any pins from (3) to (7) and the pin (1) are short-circuited, the following buttons on the
control panel and the remote control are disabled. Commands for RS‑232C and network functions corresponding to these functions are also
disabled.
gg <POWER ON> button, <STANDBY> button, <HDMI 1> button, <HDMI 2> button, <DIGITAL LINK> button, <SDI> button,
<SHUTTER> button
Note
ff To change the settings of pins (2) to (8), set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [REMOTE1 MODE] to [USER]. (x page 145)
ENGLISH - 263
Chapter 7
Appendix — Specifications
Specifications
The specifications of the projector are as follows.
Display system
Display
device
Projection
lens
Translucent screen LCD panel x 3, 3 primary colors system
Size of effective display
area
25.4 mm (1.0") x 3 (aspect ratio 16:10)
Number of pixels
2 304 000 pixels (1 920 x 1 200 dots)
Supplied projection lens
Optional
Zoom
Powered
Focus
Powered
Lens shift
Powered (Horizontal/Vertical)
Changeable lens
Yes
Light source
Laser diode
2.03 m (80") to 15.24 m (600")
Screen size
2.03 m (80") to 12.70 m
(500")
with ET‑EMT800
2.54 m (100") to 10.16 m
(400")
with ET‑EMU100
PT‑MZ20K
PT‑MZ17K
Light output*1*2
PT‑MZ14K
PT‑MZ11K
Contrast ratio*1
3 000 000:1
Center to corner zone ratio*1
85%
Displayable
scanning
frequency
Horizontal
27 kHz to 135 kHz
Vertical
24 Hz to 60 Hz
20 000 lm
When [OPERATING MODE] is set to [NORMAL]
14 000 lm
When [OPERATING MODE] is set to [QUIET]
16 500 lm
When [OPERATING MODE] is set to [NORMAL]
11 500 lm
When [OPERATING MODE] is set to [QUIET]
14 000 lm
When [OPERATING MODE] is set to [NORMAL]
9 800 lm
When [OPERATING MODE] is set to [QUIET]
11 000 lm
When [OPERATING MODE] is set to [NORMAL]
7 700 lm
When [OPERATING MODE] is set to [QUIET]
When [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] is set to [3]
*1 Measurement, measuring conditions, and method of notation all comply with ISO/IEC 21118:2020 international standards.
*2 This is the value when the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET‑EMS650) is used. The value varies depending on the lens.
264 - ENGLISH
Chapter 7
HDMI signal input
Input
compatibility
Appendix — Specifications
Video signal resolution:
480/60p, 576/50p to 4 096 x 2 160/60p
Computer signal resolution:
640 x 480 to 1 920 x 1 200 (non-interlace)
Dot clock frequency:
25 MHz to 594 MHz
Video signal resolution:
480/60p, 576/50p to 4 096 x 2 160/60p
Computer signal resolution:
DIGITAL LINK signal input
640 x 480 to 1 920 x 1 200 (non-interlace)
Dot clock frequency:
25 MHz to 297 MHz
SDI signal input
HD‑SDI signal, 3G‑SDI signal
<HDMI IN 1> terminal
<HDMI IN 2> terminal
HDMI x 2, HDCP 2.3 compatible, Deep Color compatible
BNC x 1
<SDI IN> terminal
Connecting
terminals
HD‑SDI signal
SMPTE ST 292 compliant
3G‑SDI signal
SMPTE ST 424, 425-2 compliant
<SERIAL/MULTI SYNC
IN> terminal
D‑Sub 9 p x 1, RS‑232C compliant, for computer control
<SERIAL/MULTI SYNC
OUT> terminal
D‑Sub 9 p x 1, RS‑232C compliant, for computer control
<REMOTE 1 IN> terminal
D‑Sub 9 p x 1, for contact control
<REMOTE 2 IN> terminal
M3 stereo mini jack x 1, for remote control (wired)/for projector connection control
<REMOTE 2 OUT>
terminal
M3 stereo mini jack x 1, for remote control (wired)/for projector connection control
<DIGITAL LINK> terminal
RJ‑45 x 1, for network and DIGITAL LINK connections (HDBaseTTM compliant), PJLink (class
2) compatible, 100Base‑TX, Art-Net compatible, HDCP 2.3 compatible, Deep Color compatible
<LAN> terminal
RJ‑45 x 1, for network connection, PJLink (class 2) compatible, 10Base‑T/100Base‑TX,
Art‑Net compatible
<USB> terminal
USB connector (type A) x 1, for connecting the optional Wireless Module (Model No.:
AJ‑WM50 Series), for connecting USB memory
<DC OUT> terminal
USB connector (type A) x 1, for power supply (DC 5 V, maximum 2 A)
ENGLISH - 265
Chapter 7
Appendix — Specifications
PT‑MZ20K
Acoustic noise*1
PT‑MZ17K
PT‑MZ14K,
PT‑MZ11K
Operating
environment
42 dB
when [OPERATING MODE] is set to [NORMAL]
36 dB
when [OPERATING MODE] is set to [QUIET]
38 dB
when [OPERATING MODE] is set to [NORMAL]
32 dB
when [OPERATING MODE] is set to [QUIET]
35 dB
when [OPERATING MODE] is set to [NORMAL]
30 dB
when [OPERATING MODE] is set to [QUIET]
Operating temperature
0 °C (32 °F) to 45 °C (113 °F) *2*3
Operating humidity
10 % to 80 % (no condensation)
Operation position
[FRONT]/[FLOOR], [FRONT]/[CEILING], [REAR]/[FLOOR], [REAR]/[CEILING]
Power requirements
100 V - 240 V ~ (100 V - 240 V alternating current), 50 Hz/60 Hz
Maximum power consumption
Standby mode power consumption
Standard
outside
dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
Weight*4
Materials
Outer case
Color
Power cord length
Wireless
LAN *5
Remote
control
PT‑MZ20K
1 100 W
PT‑MZ17K
950 W
PT‑MZ14K
800 W
PT‑MZ11K
615 W
10 W
when [STANDBY MODE] is set to [NORMAL]
0.5 W
when [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO]
650 mm (25-19/32")
211 mm (8-5/16") (with the feet at shortest position)
185 mm (7-9/32") (excluding the feet and protrusions)
440 mm (17-5/16") (excluding protrusions)
PT‑MZ20K
Approx. 23.0 k] (50.7 lbs.)
PT‑MZ17K,
PT‑MZ14K,
PT‑MZ11K
Approx. 22.5 k] (49.6 lbs.)
Molded plastic
Black model
Black
White model
White
3.0 m (118-1/8")
Compliance standards
IEEE802.11b/g/n
Transmission method
DSSS, OFDM
Frequency range
(Channel)
2 412 MHz to 2 462 MHz (1 to 11ch)
Data transfer speed
(Standard value)
IEEE802.11n
Maximum 144 Mbps
IEEE802.11g
Maximum 54 Mbps
IEEE802.11b
Maximum 11 Mbps
Encryption method
WPA2-PSK (AES)
Power requirements
DC 3 V (AAA/R03/LR03 battery x 2)
Operating range
Within approx. 30 m (98'5") (when operated directly in front of signal receiver)
Weight
102 ] (3.6 ozs.) (including batteries)
Outside dimensions
Width: 48 mm (1-7/8"), Height: 145 mm (5-23/32"), Depth: 27 mm (1-1/16")
*1 Measurement, measuring conditions, and method of notation all comply with ISO/IEC 21118:2020 international standards.
*2 The operating environment temperature should be between 0 °C (32 °F) and 40 °C (104 °F) when the optional Wireless Module
(Model No.: AJ‑WM50 Series) is attached.
*3 When the operating environment temperature exceeds the following value, the light output may be reduced to protect the projector.
ffWhen using the projector at an altitude lower than 1 400 m (4 593') above sea level: 35 °C (95 °F)
ffWhen using the projector at an altitude between 1 400 m (4 593') and 2 700 m (8 858') above sea level: 30 °C (86 °F)
*4 Average value. Weight varies for each product.
*5 To use the wireless LAN function with the projector, it is necessary to attach the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: AJ‑WM50 Series).
Note
ff The model numbers of accessories and optional accessories are subject to change without prior notice.
266 - ENGLISH
Chapter 7
Laser Class
Appendix — Specifications
Class 1 (IEC/EN 60825‑1:2014)
PT‑MZ20K
Laser
Classification Risk Group
PT‑MZ17K
PT‑MZ14K,
PT‑MZ11K
ET‑EMS650, ET‑EMW200,
ET‑EMW300, ET‑EMW400,
ET‑EMW500, ET‑EMU100
Risk group 2 (IEC/EN 62471-5:2015)
ET‑EMT750, ET‑EMT850
Risk group 3 (IEC/EN 62471-5:2015)
ET‑EMS650, ET‑EMS600,
ET‑EMW200, ET‑EMW300,
ET‑EMW400, ET‑EMW500,
ET‑EMU100
Risk group 2 (IEC/EN 62471-5:2015)
ET‑EMT750, ET‑EMT700
ET‑EMT850, ET‑EMT800
Risk group 3 (IEC/EN 62471-5:2015)
ET‑EMS650, ET‑EMS600,
ET‑EMW200, ET‑EMW300,
ET‑EMW400, ET‑EMW500,
ET‑EMU100, ET‑EMT750,
ET‑EMT700
Risk group 2 (IEC/EN 62471-5:2015)
ET‑EMT850, ET‑EMT800
Risk group 3 (IEC/EN 62471-5:2015)
Dimensions
294 (11-9/16")
113 (4-7/16")
26 (1-1/32")
325 (12-25/32")
211 (8-5/16")
3 (1/8")
440 (17-5/16")
Unit: mm (inch)
316 (12-7/16")
588 (23-5/32")
650 (25-19/32")
* Actual dimensions may differ depending on the product.
ENGLISH - 267
Chapter 7
Appendix — Specifications
List of compatible signals
The following table specifies the image signals compatible with the projector.
For details of SDI signal, refer to “List of single link SDI compatible signals” (x page 271).
This projector supports the signal with l in the compatible signal column.
ffThe content of the signal type column is as follows.
ggV: Video signal
ggC: Computer signal
Signal type
Signal name
(SIGNAL FORMAT)
Resolution
(Dots)
V
480/60p
576/50p
Scanning freq.
Compatible signal
Dot clock freq.
(MHz)
HDMI
DIGITAL
LINK
59.9
27.0
l
l
50.0
27.0
l
l
Horizontal
(kHz)
Vertical
(Hz)
720 x 480
31.5
720 x 576
31.3
720/60p
1 280 x 720
45.0
60.0*1
74.3
l
l
720/50p
1 280 x 720
37.5
50.0
74.3
l
l
1080/60i
1 920 x 1 080i
33.8
60.0*1
74.3
l
l
1080/50i
1 920 x 1 080i
28.1
50.0
74.3
l
l
1080/24p
1 920 x 1 080
27.0
24.0*1
74.3
l
l
1080/24sF
1 920 x 1 080i
27.0
48.0*1
74.3
l
l
1080/25p
1 920 x 1 080
28.1
25.0
74.3
l
l
1080/30p
1 920 x 1 080
33.8
30.0*1
74.3
l
l
1080/60p
1 920 x 1 080
67.5
60.0*1
148.5
l
l
1080/50p
1 920 x 1 080
56.3
50.0
148.5
l
l
3840 x 2160/24p
3 840 x 2 160
54.0
24.0*1
297.0
l
l
3840 x 2160/25p
3 840 x 2 160
56.3
25.0
297.0
l
l
3840 x 2160/30p
3 840 x 2 160
67.5
30.0*1
297.0
l
l
3 840 x 2 160
135.0
60.0*1
297.0
l*2
l*2
3 840 x 2 160
135.0
60.0*1
594.0
l
―
3 840 x 2 160
112.5
50.0
297.0
l*2
l*2
3 840 x 2 160
112.5
50.0
594.0
l
―
3840 x 2160/60p
3840 x 2160/50p
4096 x 2160/24p
4 096 x 2 160
54.0
24.0*1
297.0
l
l
4096 x 2160/25p
4 096 x 2 160
56.3
25.0
297.0
l
l
4096 x 2160/30p
4 096 x 2 160
67.5
30.0*1
297.0
l
l
4 096 x 2 160
135.0
60.0*1
297.0
l*2
l*2
4 096 x 2 160
135.0
60.0*1
594.0
l
―
4 096 x 2 160
112.5
50.0
297.0
l*2
l*2
4 096 x 2 160
112.5
50.0
594.0
l
―
4096 x 2160/60p
4096 x 2160/50p
268 - ENGLISH
Chapter 7
Signal type
C
Signal name
(SIGNAL FORMAT)
Appendix — Specifications
Resolution
(Dots)
Scanning freq.
Horizontal
(kHz)
Vertical
(Hz)
Compatible signal
Dot clock freq.
(MHz)
HDMI
DIGITAL
LINK
640 x 480/60
640 x 480
31.5
59.9
25.2
l
l
1024 x 768/50
1 024 x 768
39.6
50.0
51.9
l
l
1024 x 768/60
1 024 x 768
48.4
60.0
65.0
l
l
1280 x 800/50
1 280 x 800
41.3
50.0
68.0
l
l
1280 x 800/60
1 280 x 800
49.7
59.8
83.5
l
l
1280 x 1024/50
1 280 x 1 024
52.4
50.0
88.0
l
l
1280 x 1024/60
1 280 x 1 024
64.0
60.0
108.0
l
l
1366 x 768/50
1 366 x 768
39.6
49.9
69.0
l
l
1366 x 768/60
1 366 x 768
47.7
59.8
85.5
l
l
1400 x 1050/50
1 400 x 1 050
54.1
50.0
99.9
l
l
1400 x 1050/60
1 400 x 1 050
65.2
60.0
122.6
l
l
1440 x 900/50
1 440 x 900
46.3
49.9
86.8
l
l
1440 x 900/60
1 440 x 900
55.9
59.9
106.5
l
l
1600 x 900/50
1 600 x 900
46.4
49.9
96.5
l
l
l
1600 x 900/60
1 600 x 900
55.9
60.0
119.0
l
1600 x 1200/50
1 600 x 1 200
61.8
49.9
131.5
l
l
1600 x 1200/60
1 600 x 1 200
75.0
60.0
162.0
l
l
1680 x 1050/50
1 680 x 1 050
54.1
50.0
119.5
l
l
1680 x 1050/60
1 680 x 1 050
65.3
60.0
146.3
l
l
1920 x 1200/50
1 920 x 1 200
61.8
49.9
158.3
l
l
1920 x 1200/60RB
1 920 x 1 200*3
74.0
60.0
154.0
l
l
*1 The signal with 1/1.001x vertical scanning frequency is also supported.
*2 YPBPR 4:2:0 format only
*3 VESA CVT-RB (Reduced Blanking)-compliant
Note
ff A signal with a different resolution is converted to the number of display dots. The number of display dots is 1 920 x 1 200.
ff The “i” at the end of the resolution indicates an interlaced signal.
ff When interlaced signals are connected, flickering may occur on the projected image.
ff When the DIGITAL LINK connection is made with the long-reach communication method, the signal that the projector can receive is up to
1080/60p (1 920 x 1 080 dots, dot clock frequency 148.5 MHz).
ff Even if it is the signal listed in the list of compatible signals, it may not be displayed by the projector if the image signal is recorded in a
special format.
ENGLISH - 269
Chapter 7
Appendix — Specifications
List of plug and play compatible signals
The following table specifies the image signals compatible with plug and play.
Signal with l in the plug and play compatible signal column is the signal described in the EDID (extended display
identification data) of the projector. For the signal without l in the plug and play compatible signal column, the
resolution may not be selected on the computer even if the projector is supporting it.
Signal name
(SIGNAL FORMAT)
Resolution
(Dots)
480/60p
Scanning freq.
Dot clock freq.
(MHz)
Plug and play compatible signal
HDMI
DIGITAL LINK
Horizontal
(kHz)
Vertical
(Hz)
720 x 480
31.5
59.9
27.0
l
l
l
l
l
l
576/50p
720 x 576
31.3
50.0
27.0
l
l
l
l
l
l
720/60p
1 280 x 720
45.0
60.0*1
74.3
l
l
l
l
l
l
720/50p
1 280 x 720
37.5
50.0
74.3
l
l
l
l
l
l
1080/60i
1 920 x 1 080i
33.8
60.0*1
74.3
l
l
l
l
l
l
1080/50i
1 920 x 1 080i
28.1
50.0
74.3
l
l
l
l
l
l
1080/24p
1 920 x 1 080
27.0
24.0*1
74.3
l
l
l
l
l
l
1080/24sF
1 920 x 1 080i
27.0
48.0*1
74.3
―
―
―
―
―
―
l
4K/60p 4K/30p
2K
4K/60p 4K/30p
2K
1080/25p
1 920 x 1 080
28.1
25.0
74.3
l
l
l
l
l
1080/30p
1 920 x 1 080
33.8
30.0*1
74.3
l
l
l
l
l
l
1080/60p
1 920 x 1 080
67.5
60.0*1
148.5
l
l
l
l
l
l
1080/50p
1 920 x 1 080
56.3
50.0
148.5
l
l
l
l
l
l
54.0
24.0*1
297.0
l
l
―
l
l
―
3840 x 2160/24p
3 840 x 2 160
3840 x 2160/25p
3 840 x 2 160
56.3
25.0
297.0
l
l
―
l
l
―
3840 x 2160/30p
3 840 x 2 160
67.5
30.0*1
297.0
l
l
―
l
l
―
3 840 x 2 160
135.0
60.0*1
297.0
l*2
―
―
l*2
―
―
3 840 x 2 160
135.0
60.0*1
594.0
l
―
―
―
―
―
3 840 x 2 160
112.5
50.0
297.0
l*2
―
―
l*2
―
―
―
3840 x 2160/60p
3840 x 2160/50p
3 840 x 2 160
112.5
50.0
594.0
l
―
―
―
―
4096 x 2160/24p
4 096 x 2 160
54.0
24.0*1
297.0
l
l
―
l
l
―
4096 x 2160/25p
4 096 x 2 160
56.3
25.0
297.0
l
l
―
l
l
―
4096 x 2160/30p
4 096 x 2 160
67.5
30.0*1
297.0
l
l
―
l
l
―
4 096 x 2 160
135.0
60.0*1
297.0
l*2
―
―
l*2
―
―
4 096 x 2 160
135.0
60.0*1
594.0
l
―
―
―
―
―
4 096 x 2 160
112.5
50.0
297.0
l*2
―
―
l*2
―
―
―
4096 x 2160/60p
4096 x 2160/50p
4 096 x 2 160
112.5
50.0
594.0
l
―
―
―
―
640 x 480/60
640 x 480
31.5
59.9
25.2
l
l
l
l
l
l
1024 x 768/50
1 024 x 768
39.6
50.0
51.9
―
―
―
―
―
―
1024 x 768/60
1 024 x 768
48.4
60.0
65.0
l
l
l
l
l
l
1280 x 800/50
1 280 x 800
41.3
50.0
68.0
―
―
―
―
―
―
1280 x 800/60
1 280 x 800
49.7
59.8
83.5
―
―
―
―
―
―
1280 x 1024/50
1 280 x 1 024
52.4
50.0
88.0
―
―
―
―
―
―
1280 x 1024/60
1 280 x 1 024
64.0
60.0
108.0
―
―
―
―
―
―
1366 x 768/50
1 366 x 768
39.6
49.9
69.0
―
―
―
―
―
―
1366 x 768/60
1 366 x 768
47.7
59.8
85.5
―
―
―
―
―
―
1400 x 1050/50
1 400 x 1 050
54.1
50.0
99.9
―
―
―
―
―
―
1400 x 1050/60
1 400 x 1 050
65.2
60.0
122.6
l
l
l
l
l
l
1440 x 900/50
1 440 x 900
46.3
49.9
86.8
―
―
―
―
―
―
1440 x 900/60
1 440 x 900
55.9
59.9
106.5
―
―
―
―
―
―
1600 x 900/50
1 600 x 900
46.4
49.9
96.5
―
―
―
―
―
―
1600 x 900/60
1 600 x 900
55.9
60.0
119.0
l
l
l
l
l
l
1600 x 1200/50
1 600 x 1 200
61.8
49.9
131.5
―
―
―
―
―
―
1600 x 1200/60
1 600 x 1 200
75.0
60.0
162.0
l
l
l
l
l
l
1680 x 1050/50
1 680 x 1 050
54.1
50.0
119.5
―
―
―
―
―
―
1680 x 1050/60
1 680 x 1 050
65.3
60.0
146.3
―
―
―
―
―
―
1920 x 1200/50
1 920 x 1 200
61.8
49.9
158.3
―
―
―
―
―
―
1920 x 1200/60RB
1 920 x 1 200*3
74.0
60.0
154.0
l
l
l
l
l
l
*1 The signal with 1/1.001x vertical scanning frequency is also supported.
*2 YPBPR 4:2:0 format only
*3 VESA CVT-RB (Reduced Blanking)-compliant
270 - ENGLISH
Chapter 7
Appendix — Specifications
List of single link SDI compatible signals
The following table specifies the single link SDI signals that the projector can project.
ffThe content of the signal type column is as follows.
ggV: Video signal
Signal
type
V
Signal name
(SIGNAL FORMAT)
Resolution
(Dots)
Scanning freq.
Horizontal
(kHz)
Vertical
(Hz)
Dot clock
freq.
(MHz)
Format
Color format
Sampling
720/60p
1 280 x 720
45.0
60.0*1
74.3
HD‑SDI
YPBPR
4:2:2 10bit
720/50p
1 280 x 720
37.5
50.0
74.3
HD‑SDI
YPBPR
4:2:2 10bit
1 920 x 1 080i
33.8
60.0*1
74.3
HD‑SDI
YPBPR
4:2:2 10bit
1080/60i
1080/50i
1080/24p
1080/24sF
1080/25p
1080/30p
1080/60p
1080/50p
2K/24p
2K/25p
2K/30p
2K/48p
1 920 x 1 080i
33.8
60.0*1
74.3
3G-SDI Level-A
RGB
4:4:4 10bit
1 920 x 1 080i
33.8
60.0*1
74.3
3G-SDI Level-B
RGB
4:4:4 10bit
1 920 x 1 080i
33.8
60.0*1
74.3
3G-SDI Level-A
RGB
4:4:4 12bit
1 920 x 1 080i
33.8
60.0*1
74.3
3G-SDI Level-B
RGB
4:4:4 12bit
1 920 x 1 080i
28.1
50.0
74.3
HD‑SDI
YPBPR
4:2:2 10bit
1 920 x 1 080i
28.1
50.0
74.3
3G-SDI Level-A
RGB
4:4:4 10bit
1 920 x 1 080i
28.1
50.0
74.3
3G-SDI Level-B
RGB
4:4:4 10bit
1 920 x 1 080i
28.1
50.0
74.3
3G-SDI Level-A
RGB
4:4:4 12bit
1 920 x 1 080i
28.1
50.0
74.3
3G-SDI Level-B
RGB
4:4:4 12bit
1 920 x 1 080
27.0
24.0*1
74.3
HD‑SDI
YPBPR
4:2:2 10bit
1 920 x 1 080
27.0
24.0*1
74.3
3G-SDI Level-A
RGB
4:4:4 10bit
1 920 x 1 080
27.0
24.0*1
74.3
3G-SDI Level-B
RGB
4:4:4 10bit
1 920 x 1 080
27.0
24.0*1
74.3
3G-SDI Level-A
RGB
4:4:4 12bit
1 920 x 1 080
27.0
24.0*1
74.3
3G-SDI Level-B
RGB
4:4:4 12bit
1 920 x 1 080i
27.0
48.0*1
74.3
HD‑SDI
YPBPR
4:2:2 10bit
1 920 x 1 080i
27.0
48.0*1
74.3
3G-SDI Level-A
RGB
4:4:4 10bit
1 920 x 1 080i
27.0
48.0*1
74.3
3G-SDI Level-B
RGB
4:4:4 10bit
1 920 x 1 080i
27.0
48.0*1
74.3
3G-SDI Level-A
RGB
4:4:4 12bit
1 920 x 1 080i
27.0
48.0*1
74.3
3G-SDI Level-B
RGB
4:4:4 12bit
1 920 x 1 080
28.1
25.0
74.3
HD‑SDI
YPBPR
4:2:2 10bit
1 920 x 1 080
28.1
25.0
74.3
3G-SDI Level-A
RGB
4:4:4 10bit
1 920 x 1 080
28.1
25.0
74.3
3G-SDI Level-B
RGB
4:4:4 10bit
1 920 x 1 080
28.1
25.0
74.3
3G-SDI Level-A
RGB
4:4:4 12bit
1 920 x 1 080
28.1
25.0
74.3
3G-SDI Level-B
RGB
4:4:4 12bit
1 920 x 1 080
33.8
30.0*1
74.3
HD‑SDI
YPBPR
4:2:2 10bit
1 920 x 1 080
33.8
30.0*1
74.3
3G-SDI Level-A
RGB
4:4:4 10bit
1 920 x 1 080
33.8
30.0*1
74.3
3G-SDI Level-B
RGB
4:4:4 10bit
1 920 x 1 080
33.8
30.0*1
74.3
3G-SDI Level-A
RGB
4:4:4 12bit
1 920 x 1 080
33.8
30.0*1
74.3
3G-SDI Level-B
RGB
4:4:4 12bit
1 920 x 1 080
67.5
60.0*1
148.5
3G-SDI Level-A
YPBPR
4:2:2 10bit
1 920 x 1 080
67.5
60.0*1
148.5
3G-SDI Level-B
YPBPR
4:2:2 10bit
1 920 x 1 080
56.3
50.0
148.5
3G-SDI Level-A
YPBPR
4:2:2 10bit
1 920 x 1 080
56.3
50.0
148.5
3G-SDI Level-B
YPBPR
4:2:2 10bit
2 048 x 1 080
27.0
24.0*1
74.3
3G-SDI Level-A
RGB
4:4:4 10bit
2 048 x 1 080
27.0
24.0*1
74.3
3G-SDI Level-B
RGB
4:4:4 10bit
2 048 x 1 080
27.0
24.0*1
74.3
3G-SDI Level-A
RGB
4:4:4 12bit
2 048 x 1 080
27.0
24.0*1
74.3
3G-SDI Level-B
RGB
4:4:4 12bit
4:4:4 10bit
2 048 x 1 080
28.1
25.0
74.3
3G-SDI Level-A
RGB
2 048 x 1 080
28.1
25.0
74.3
3G-SDI Level-B
RGB
4:4:4 10bit
2 048 x 1 080
28.1
25.0
74.3
3G-SDI Level-A
RGB
4:4:4 12bit
2 048 x 1 080
28.1
25.0
74.3
3G-SDI Level-B
RGB
4:4:4 12bit
2 048 x 1 080
33.8
30.0*1
74.3
3G-SDI Level-A
RGB
4:4:4 10bit
2 048 x 1 080
33.8
30.0*1
74.3
3G-SDI Level-B
RGB
4:4:4 10bit
2 048 x 1 080
33.8
30.0*1
74.3
3G-SDI Level-A
RGB
4:4:4 12bit
2 048 x 1 080
33.8
30.0*1
74.3
3G-SDI Level-B
RGB
4:4:4 12bit
2 048 x 1 080
54.0
48.0*1
148.5
3G-SDI Level-A
YPBPR
4:2:2 10bit
2 048 x 1 080
54.0
48.0*1
148.5
3G-SDI Level-B
YPBPR
4:2:2 10bit
ENGLISH - 271
Chapter 7
Signal
type
V
Signal name
(SIGNAL FORMAT)
2K/60p
2K/50p
Appendix — Specifications
Scanning freq.
Horizontal
(kHz)
Vertical
(Hz)
Dot clock
freq.
(MHz)
2 048 x 1 080
67.5
60.0*1
2 048 x 1 080
67.5
60.0*1
2 048 x 1 080
56.3
2 048 x 1 080
56.3
Resolution
(Dots)
Format
Color format
Sampling
148.5
3G-SDI Level-A
YPBPR
4:2:2 10bit
148.5
3G-SDI Level-B
YPBPR
4:2:2 10bit
50.0
148.5
3G-SDI Level-A
YPBPR
4:2:2 10bit
50.0
148.5
3G-SDI Level-B
YPBPR
4:2:2 10bit
*1 The signal with 1/1.001x vertical scanning frequency is also supported.
272 - ENGLISH
Chapter 7
Appendix — Precautions for attaching the Ceiling Mount Bracket
Precautions for attaching the Ceiling Mount Bracket
ffWhen installing the projector to a ceiling, use the Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model No.: ET‑PKD120H (for High
Ceilings), ET‑PKD120S (for Low Ceilings), ET‑PKD130H (for High Ceilings, 6-axis Adjustment)) together with
Ceiling Mount Bracket (Model No.: ET‑PKE301B (Projector Mount Bracket)).
Model No.: ET‑PKD120H (for High Ceilings), ET‑PKD120S (for Low Ceilings), ET‑PKD130H (for High
Ceilings, 6-axis Adjustment), ET‑PKE301B (Projector Mount Bracket)
ffAttach the drop-prevention set that comes with the Ceiling Mount Bracket to the projector. If you need the dropprevention set (Service Model No.: DPPW1004ZA/X1) separately, consult your dealer.
ffWhen the projector is mounted to the existing Ceiling Mount Bracket (in combination with the Model No.:
ET‑PKD120H (for High Ceilings) or ET‑PKD120S (for Low Ceilings), and the Model No.: ET‑PKE300B (Projector
Mount Bracket)), it is necessary to replace the drop-prevention wire rope with the one corresponding to this
projector. Consult your dealer.
Drop-prevention set (service model no.: DPPW1004ZA/X1)
ffAsk a qualified technician to do the installation work such as mounting the projector on the ceiling.
ffPanasonic Connect Co., Ltd. takes no responsibility for any damage to the projector resulting from use of the
Ceiling Mount Bracket not manufactured by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. or the inappropriate choice of location
for installing the Ceiling Mount Bracket, even if the warranty period of the projector has not expired.
ffUnused products must be removed promptly by a qualified technician.
ffUse a torque screwdriver or Allen torque wrench to tighten bolts to their specified tightening torques. Do not use
electric screwdrivers or impact screwdrivers.
(Screw tightening torque: 4 ± 0.5 N·m)
ffRead the Installation Instructions of the Ceiling Mount Bracket for details.
ffThe model numbers of accessories and optional accessories are subject to change without prior notice.
rrSpecification for the screw holes to fix the projector (projector bottom view)
Unit: mm (inch)
M6
12 (15/32")
ENGLISH - 273
Chapter 7
Appendix — Precautions for attaching the Ceiling Mount Bracket
rrDimensions for the screw holes to fix the projector (projector bottom view)
Unit: mm (inch)
223 (8-25/32")
190 (7-15/32")
274 - ENGLISH
371 (14-19/32")
129 (5-3/32")
69 (2-23/32")
272 (10-23/32")
354 (13-15/16")
180 (7-3/32")
100 (3-15/16")
45 (1-25/32")
Index
Index
A
125
[PROJECTION METHOD] H
31
Projector body <AC IN> terminal 31, 54
<HDMI 1> button
125
[PROJECTOR ID] 27
29, 67
Accessories Remote control 168
[PROJECTOR NAME] 129
[ACTIVE FOCUS OPTIMIZER] <HDMI 2> button
82, 125
[PROJECTOR SETUP] 44
29, 67
Adjusting adjustable feet Remote control 159
Protecting the registered signal 63, 169
151
[ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] [HDMI CEC] 81, 102
112
[ADVANCED MENU] [HDMI IN] Q
241
Air filter unit [QUICK STARTUP] 134
I
244
Air filter unit replacement <ID ALL> button 29
24
Application software R
<ID SET> button
174
[Art-Net] [RASTER POSITION] 107
29, 76
Remote control 24, 251
Art-Net 5
Read this first! 119
[IMAGE ROTATION] 94
[ASPECT] 158
Registering new signals <INFO> button
45
Attaching/removing the projection lens 263
<REMOTE 1 IN> terminal 32
Projector body 34
<REMOTE 2 IN> terminal B
148
[INFO MONITOR SETTING] 34
<REMOTE 2 OUT> terminal [BACK COLOR] 119, 137
32, 213
Information monitor 29
Remote control 111, 135
57
[BACKUP INPUT SETTING] Initial setting 74
Remote control operations 102
138
[BLANKING] [INITIAL STARTUP] 145
[REMOTE1 MODE] 85
153
[BRIGHTNESS] [INITIALIZE] 158
Renaming the registered signal <INPUT MENU> button
244
Replacing the unit C
29
Remote control 80
Resetting to the factory default Cautions on use 25
<INPUT SELECT> button
143, 259
[RS-232C] 20
Cautions when installing 32, 68
Projector body 20
Cautions when transporting 36
Installation mode S
29
<CEC> button [SAVE ALL USER DATA] 150
L
273
Ceiling Mount Bracket 154
[SAVE LOG] 86
[LENS] 126
[COLOR] 139
[SCHEDULE] 109
[COLOR ADJUSTMENT] <LENS> button
110
[SCREEN SETTING] 110
32, 68
[COLOR CORRECTION] Projector body <SDI> button
86
130
[COLOR TEMPERATURE] [LENS CALIBRATION] 29, 67
Remote control 54
129
Connecting the power cord [LENS HOME POSITION] 114
[SDI IN] 126
Connecting the remote control to the projector
[LENS MEMORY] 136
[SECONDARY INPUT] 34
126
[LENS TYPE] with a cable 23
Security 180
133
Connecting with wireless LAN [LIGHT OUTPUT] 83, 161
[SECURITY] 48
239
Connection Light source indicator 161
[SECURITY PASSWORD] 85
268
[CONTRAST] List of compatible signals 161
[SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE] 150
[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE] 163
[LOAD ALL USER DATA] 67
Selecting the input signal 161
[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] 247
[SELF TEST] indications M
124
[CUT OFF] 259
<SERIAL/MULTI SYNC IN> terminal Main menu 80
259
<SERIAL/MULTI SYNC OUT> terminal D
31, 56
Main power switch 154
[SERVICE PASSWORD] Data cloning 225
241
Maintenance 76
Setting ID number of the remote control 150
[DATA CLONING] <MENU> button
36
Setting up 138
32, 79
[DATE AND TIME] Projector body 88
[SHARPNESS] 29, 79
<DEFAULT> button
Remote control 94
[SHIFT] 29, 80
81
Menu item Remote control <SHIFT> button
92
118
[DEFAULT PICTURE MODE] [MENU MODE] 29, 68
Remote control 158
141
Deleting the registered signal [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] <SHUTTER> button
102
[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY] 32
Projector body N
164
[DIGITAL LINK] 29, 74
Remote control Navigating through the menu 79
24
DIGITAL LINK 121
[SHUTTER SETTING] 83, 164
[NETWORK] <DIGITAL LINK> button
83, 158
[SIGNAL LIST] 178
Network connection 29, 67
Remote control 264
Specifications 172
[NETWORK CONTROL] 115
[DIGITAL LINK IN] 133
[STANDBY MODE] 172
[NETWORK SECURITY] 267
Dimensions 138
[STARTUP INPUT SELECT] 168
[NETWORK STATUS] 82, 108
Display language 119
[STARTUP LOGO] 169
[NFC SETTING] 82, 109
[DISPLAY OPTION] 146
[STATUS] 32
NFC touch point 25
Disposal <STATUS> button
134, 137
[NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT] 90
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST] 29, 76
Remote control 135
[NO SIGNAL SETTING] 88
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST NX] 25
Storing 135, 138
[NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF] 160
Sub memory E
88
[NOISE REDUCTION] 66
Switching off the projector [EDGE BLENDING] 103
56
Switching on the projector O
<ENTER> button
67
Switching the input signal <ON SCREEN> button
32
Projector body 88
[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] 29, 74
Remote control 29, 79
Remote control 92
[SYSTEM SELECTOR] 116
[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] 164
[ETHERNET TYPE] 79
On-screen menu 159
Expanding signal lock-in range T
130
[OPERATION SETTING] Temperature indicator 239
F
28
Optional accessories 83, 155
[TEST PATTERN] [FILTER COUNTER] 146
<TEST PATTERN> button
P
239
Filter indicator 29, 75
Remote control [PICTURE] 81, 84
231
Firmware update 86
[TINT] 84
[PICTURE MODE] 154
[FIRMWARE UPDATE] 245
Troubleshooting 173
[PJLink] <FOCUS> button
81, 94
[POSITION] 29, 68
Remote control U
54
Power cord 107
[FRAME RESPONSE] [UNIFORMITY] 120
55
Power indicator 123
[FREEZE] 134
[POWER MANAGEMENT] 75
Function button W
Power on button
<FUNCTION> button
[WAVEFORM MONITOR] 123
29, 32
Projector body 29, 75
Remote control 183
Web control 29
Remote control 145
[FUNCTION BUTTON] 166
[WIRED LAN] Power standby button
167
[WIRELESS LAN] G
32
Projector body [GAMMA] 87
29
Remote control Z
96
[GEOMETRY] Precautions for attaching the Ceiling Mount
[ZOOM] 95
273
Bracket <ZOOM> button
20
Precautions for use 29, 68
Remote control 67
Projecting ENGLISH - 275

EU Declaration of Conformity for RE Directive
English
Declaration of Conformity
This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive
2014/53/EU.
Декларация за съответствие
Български Това устройство отговаря на съществените изисквания и останалите приложими разпоредби на Директива
2014/53/EC.
Prohlášení o shodě
Čeština
Toto zařízení je v souladu se základními požadavky a ostatními odpovídajícími ustanoveními Směrnice 2014/53/EU.
Overensstemmelseserklæring
Dansk
Dette udstyr er i overensstemmelse med de væsentlige krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i Direktiv 2014/53/EU.
Konformitätserklärung
Deutsch Dieses Gerät entspricht den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den weiteren entsprechenden Vorgaben der
Richtlinie 2014/53/EU.
Vastavusdeklaratsioon
See seade vastab direktiivi 2014/53/EL olulistele nõuetele ja teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
Δήλωση συμμόρφωσης
Ελληνικά Αυτός ο εξοπλισμός είναι σε συμμόρφωση με τις ουσιώδεις απαιτήσεις και άλλες σχετικές διατάξεις της Οδηγίας
2014/53/EE.
Declaración de conformidad
Español
Este equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales asi como con otras disposiciones de la Directiva 2014/53/UE.
Eesti
Déclaration de Conformité
Français Cet appareil est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la Directive
2014/53/UE.
Hrvatski
Italiano
Latviešu
Lietuvių
Magyar
Nederlands
Norsk
Polski
Português
Română
Slovenčina
Slovenščina
Suomi
Svenska
Deklaracija o sukladnosti
Ovaj proizvod odgovara bitnim zahtjevima i drugim relevantnim uredbama Direktive 2014/53/EU.
Dichiarazione di conformità
Questo apparato é conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed agli altri principi sanciti dalla Direttiva 2014/53/UE.
Atbilstības deklarācija
Ši iekārtā atbilst Direktīvas 2014/53/ES būtiskajam prasībām un citiem arto saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Atitikties deklaracija
Šis įrenginys tenkina 2014/53/ES Direktyvos esminius reikalavimus ir kitas šios direktyvos nuostatas.
Megfelelőségi nyilatkozat
Ez a készülék teljesíti az alapvető követelményeket és más 2014/53/EU irányelvben meghatározott vonatkozó
rendelkezéseket.
Verklaring van conformiteit
Dit apparaat voldoet aan de essentiele eisen en andere van toepassing zijnde bepalingen van de Richtlijn
2014/53/EU.
Samsvarserklæring
Dette utstyret er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i EU-direktiv 2014/53/EU.
Deklaracja zgodności
Urządzenie jest zgodne z ogólnymi wymaganiami oraz szczególnymi warunkami określonymi Dyrektyvą UE:
2014/53/UE.
Declaração de Conformidade
Este equipamento está em conformidade com os requisitos essenciais e outras provisões relevantes da
Directiva 2014/53/UE.
Declarație de conformitate
Acest echipament este conform cu cerinţele de bază şi celelalte prevederi relevante ale Directivei 2014/53/UE.
Vyhlásenie o zhode
Toto zariadenie je v zhode so základnými poiadavkami a inými príslušnými nariadeniami direktív: 2014/53/EÚ.
Izjava o skladnosti
Ta naprava je skladna z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi pogoji Direktive 2014/53/EU.
Vaatimustenmukaisuusvakuutus
Tämä laite täyttää direktiivin 2014/53/EU olennaiset vaatimukset ja on siinä asetettujen muiden laitetta koskevien
määräysten mukainen.
Försäkran om överensstämmelse
Denna utrustning ăr i overensstămmelse med de văsentliga kraven och andra relevanta bestammelser i Direktiv
2014/53/EU.
276 - ENGLISH

Indication of the manufacturer and the importer with EU Directive requirements
English
Manufactured by: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan
Importer: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Authorized Representative in EU: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
Производител: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Япония
Български Вносител: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Упълномощен представител в ЕС: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Германия
Vyrobil: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japonsko
Čeština Dovozce: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Oprávněný zástupce v EU: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburk, Německo
Fremstillet af: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan
Dansk Importør: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Autoriseret repræsentant i EU: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Tyskland
Hergestellt von: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan
Deutsch Importeur: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Vertretungsberechtigter in der EU: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Deutschland
Tootja: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Jaapan
Eesti
Maaletooja: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Volitatud esindaja ELis: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Saksamaa
Κατασκευάστηκε από: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Ιαπωνία
Ελληνικά Εισαγωγέας: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Εξουσιοδοτημένος αντιπρόσωπος στην ΕΕ: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Γερμανία
Fabricado por: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japón
Español Importador: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Representante Autorizado para la UE: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburgo, Alemania
Fabriqué par : Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japon
Français Importateur : Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Représentant autorisé dans l’UE : Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hambourg, Allemagne
Hrvatski
Italiano
Proizvodi: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan
Uvoznik: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Ovlašteni zastupnik u EU-u: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Njemačka
Fabbricato da: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Giappone
Importatore: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Rappresentante autorizzato nell’UE: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Amburgo, Germania
Ražotājs: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japāna
Latviešu Importētājs: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Oficiālais pārstāvis ES: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Vācija
ENGLISH - 277

Lietuvių
Magyar
Nederlands
Norsk
Polski
Português
Română
Slovenčina
Slovenščina
Suomi
Svenska
Türkçe
Gamintojas: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japonija
Importuotojas: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Įgaliotasis atstovas ES: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburgas, Vokietija
Gyártotta: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japán
Importőr: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Hivatalos képviselő az EU-ban: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Németország
Geproduceerd door: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan
Importeur: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Bevoegde vertegenwoordiger in de EU: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Duitsland
Produsert av: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan
Importør: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Autorisert representant i EU: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Tyskland
Wyprodukowano przez: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japonia
Importer: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Upoważniony przedstawiciel w UE: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Niemcy
Fabricado por: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japão
Importador: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Representante Autorizado na UE: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburgo, Alemanha
Fabricat de: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japonia
Importator: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Reprezentant autorizat în UE: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germania
Výrobca: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japonsko
Dovozca: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Autorizovaný zástupca v EÚ: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Nemecko
Proizvaja: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japonska
Uvoznik: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Pooblaščeni zastopnik v EU: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Nemčija
Valmistaja: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japani
Maahantuoja: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Valtuutettu edustaja EU:ssa: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hampuri, Saksa
Tillverkad av: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan
Importör: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Auktoriserad representant i EU: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Tyskland
Tarafından Üretilmiştir: Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japonya
İthalatçı: Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
AB Yetkili Temsilcisi: Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Almanya
278 - ENGLISH
Manufactured by:
Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
4-1-62 Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan
Importer:
Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH
Authorized Representative in EU:
Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
Importer for UK:
Panasonic Connect UK,
a branch of Panasonic Connect Europe GmbH,
Maxis 2, Western Road, Bracknell, Berkshire, RG12 1RT
Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries
Only for European Union and countries with recycling systems
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used
electrical and electronic products and batteries must not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take
them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national legislation.
By disposing of them correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any
potential negative effects on human health and the environment.
For more information about collection and recycling, please contact your local authority.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national
legislation.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom symbol):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with
the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.
Product Information (for Turkey only)
AEEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur
Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.
Web Site : https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/
© Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. 2022
Panasonic Connect North America
Two Riverfront Plaza, Newark, NJ 07102
TEL: (877) 803 - 8492
Panasonic Canada Inc.
5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 2T3
TEL: (905) 624 - 5010
W1222JZ0 -PT

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement